Home

SigmaPlot® 8.0 User's Guide

1. Figure 10 14 ne E A Graph Before and After the Addition of a Y 100 4 100 Axis Break 7 60 a Creating an To create an axis break Axis Break 1 Double click the axis where you want to add the break The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 10 15 Graph Properties Graph Properties Dialog Box Axes Tab Plots Axes Graph Breaks Settings Avis Apply to x Data Rename Settings for tE Major ticks Break range W Show break Break properties Symbol r Diagonal ka mit to jo jo Color Position Black 27 0 Length A lee el et Pel E S el ree Gap width fo 100in I Thickness Post break interval Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Axes tab 3 From the Settings for list select Breaks 4 From the Break Range group box select Show Break 5 Inthe Omit boxes enter the Break to omit 374 Setting Axis Breaks ee Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids 6 To specify the break position move the Position slider The location of the break is determined as a percent of the total axis length from the origin 7 To set the width of the space between break lines move the Gap Width slider 8 To set a post break interval type a value in the Post Break Interval box The default value is the interva
2. Notebook Basics using all the default settings To set printing options before printing a report graph page or worksheet 1 Open each item 2 Press Ctrl P The Print dialog box appears 3 Click Properties For information on printing worksheets see Printing Worksheets on page 49 For information on printing graph pages see Printing Graph Pages on page 50 For information on printing reports see Printing Reports on page 51 92 Printing Notebook Items 3 Worksheet Basics Worksheets are the containers for the data you analyze and graph They are spreadsheet like in appearance but are much more limited in function and are column rather than cell oriented Type in paste or import data from other sources You can also automatically generate and place data in worksheet columns by data transforms and statistical procedures This chapter covers VVVVVVVVVVVVY Setting worksheet options see page 54 Moving around the worksheet see page 55 Entering data into a SigmaPlot worksheet see page 57 Importing data into a SigmaPlot worksheet see page 58 Descriptive statistics for worksheets see page 63 Changing data display see page 66 Selecting data see page 75 Sorting data see page 77 Cutting and pasting data see page 78 Inserting and deleting columns and rows see page 78 Switching data rows to columns see page 81 Entering column and row titles see page 85 Using Excel inside SigmaPlot
3. 6 Selecting Both directions draws ticks both clockwise and counterclockwise and selecting None hides the tick marks 7 Click OK Ternary Graphs Ternary graphs plot data on an XYZ coordinate system in the form of three variables that add up to 100 or 1 These variables are typically the normalized proportions of three substances and are plotted on three axes generally arranged as an equilateral triangle These graphs are also commonly referred to as triangle plots Figure 8 21 Spassite Examples of 0 100 a Ternary Line Plot Scatter Plot and Scatter and Line Plot f T T T T T T T T T Y Jandesite 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Systalite KNO Ternary Plot Styles You can create ternary scatter line and scatter and line plots These graph data as symbols as lines only with no symbols or as symbols and lines respectively Line shapes can be straight segments or spline Arranging Data fora Data for ternary plots can be XYZ data in three separate columns or SigmaPlot Ternary Graph can extrapolate a third column from data pairs in two columns Ternary graphs 334 Ternary Graphs Data for a single Curve Plot Ternary Triplets Data for a Multiple Curve Plot Ternary Triplets Figure 8 22 Multiple Columns of Triplet Percentage Data for a Ternary Plot Data for a Single or Multiple Curve Plot Ternary XY YZ or XZ Pairs 2 Normalizing Ternary Data Working with Pie Polar a
4. Population Pyramid A population pyramid created by using a stacked bar chart and tick labels from a column Population Pyramid 85 4 75 85 4 65 75 55 65 45 55 Age 35 45 4 25 35 4 5 10 4 0 5 T T T T i T T T T 25 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 X Data B Male P Female 438 ke Sample Graphs Bar and Line Chart This graph plots a line and bar chart on the same graph with different Y axes The with Two Y Axes _ bar chart has a width of 100 and the same color for both fill and edge Line and Bar Chart 50 22 40 30 X Y Axis 2 20 Mam Y Vala Box Plot This is a Tukey box plot with varying box widths taken from a worksheet column The X axis is a category axis Box Plots with Variable Widths 30 25 5 20 Y Data on T T Group A Group B Group C Group D X Data 439 SS Sample Graphs Bubble Plot This is a bubble chart of two sets of xy data Each bubble plot is a separate plot since symbol sizes apply to entire plots as opposed to individual curves Bubble Plot 7 16 14 e 12 4 a a O gt 84 O CHO E TO 24 O 0 T T T T T 1 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 X Data O 1000 5000 10000 C 20000 The legend is created using legend symbols for a dummy plot that graphs area data transformed to reasona
5. Export Tagged Info File Dialog Box DPT Resolution fiso Color Resolution 24 bit M Export selected only ote High DPT values can result in ery large graphic Files 6 Enter the desired DPI and Color Resolutions for EPS files these setting only affect the resolutions of the TIFF header not the actual PostScript resolution For metafiles this setting affects only 3D graphs Help The higher the DPI and Color resolutions the better quality the image but also the larger the file Limit the DPI and Color resolutions to the capability of the intended output device For example if you are going to create 600 dpi slide output set the DPI resolution no larger than 600 7 If you want to export only the selected graph s or objects select the Export Selected Only option 8 Click OK to create the exported file using the specified file name and graphic resolutions if applicable Exporting Reports You can only export the entire report If you want to export a portion of the report delete the portion you don t want to export then export the remainder as the file To export a report 1 Select and view the report window you want to export 2 On the File menu click Export The Export File dialog box appears 3 From the Files of type drop down list select a file format 4 Enter the file name directory and drive for the exported file 5 Click Export to create the file 48 Exporting Notebooks and Notebook
6. Logistic 3 Parameter Logistic 4 Parameter Edit Code Weibull ee are 94 Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot 4 Graph Page Basics Use Graph Pages to display and modify graphs that plot data from your worksheets You can create as many graph pages as you wish per worksheet New graph pages are associated with the current worksheet and are placed in the current notebook section This chapter describes how to work with graph pages including VVVVVY VVVVVVVVVVVV VY Setting page options see page 96 Selecting page objects see page 97 Adding another page to a graph see page 102 Zooming in and out see page 103 Using graph pages as templates see page 105 Cutting copying and pasting graphs and other page objects see page 111 Using OLE to paste link and embed objects see page 112 Dragging and dropping graphs see page 122 Hiding and deleting objects from pages see page 123 Drawing objects on the page see page 125 Modifying object colors and lines see page 127 Moving and sizing graphs and objects see page 131 Moving objects to the front or back see page 134 Grouping and ungrouping objects see page 135 Aligning page objects see page 135 Arranging graphs see page 137 Creating text labels see page 143 Editing automatic graph legends see page 148 Changing graph page format see page 154 Using custom colors see page 158 95 Graph Page Basics About Graph Pages Grap
7. Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify the plot or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick different data columns for your plot or to add another plot to your graph For more information on making general modifications to your plot see Creating and Modifying Graphs on page 163 Creating Multiple Curves Figure 6 12 Plot Styles that Include Multiple Curves You do not have to create multiple plots to obtain multiple curves To plot more than one curve choose any of the plot styles described as Multiple and add additional columns or column pairs to the list of curves in the Graph Wizard 9 14 14 8 4 12 4 12 74 4a 10 6 8 54 8 6 a 4 6 aA 3 4 p l a ae 14 24 0 a 0 T T T T T T T 0 T T T T T T T T T T T T T O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The order of the curves is determined by the order of the column pairs in the Graph Wizard To change the curve order repick columns by selecting them in the Graph Wizard or by clicking the column in the worksheet 244 Creating Multiple Curves Working with 2D Graphs Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars Figure 6 13 2D Plots with Error Bars py 5 In a Line and Scatter Plot with Error Bars plot the means of each column as the Y value and represent the standard deviations with error bars Use the Graph Wizard to create 2D plots with error bars Scatter plots line scatter plots
8. Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 2 The origin axes are not related to the axes marked with ticks and tick labels but act as the zero point for tick labels and data Figure 7 18 A 3D graph with a horizontal rotation of 0 a vertical rotation of 0 anda perspective of 20 Figure 7 19 A 3D graph with a horizontal rotation of 0 a vertical rotation of 45 anda perspective of 20 Figure 7 20 A 3D graph with a horizontal rotation of 45 a vertical rotation of 45 anda perspective of 20 J f N LL TEI Il a de ee Po pone r HH aur rma i a LEPETT E Te a L Pi jh i j ry ree re i 3 Tr ty este yatta a ara a qe se Se Aa EAEE ae ers Pre er ae Yy ET Tp nid ma AS 5 4 Pot sae i I A Sl a ra a otal EEN a i To change the perspective of the graph move the Perspective slider or type a new value into Perspective box Changing Graph Perspective Rotation and Shading 301 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs X The Perspective value is based on the depth of the graph A perspective of 0 means that the graph has no depth 100 means that the graph has maximum depth The recommended perspective is 20 Figure 7 21 A 3D graph with a perspective of 0 Figure 7 22 A 3D graph witha perspective of 50 Figure 7 23 A 3D graph with a perspective of 100 6 To enable the light source and
9. 164 Setting Graph Defaults ee Creating and Modifying Graphs 3 Change the graph defaults options as desired The available options are Size The default height of all new graphs is 3 5 inches and the width is 5 inches Position The default position of the first new graph created on each graph page Any subsequent graphs you create on the same graph page are positioned below the first graph using default offset distances The default initial location is 3 5 inches from the top and 1 75 inches from the left Font Select a font to be used to display all standard text labels graph and axis titles tick labels and legends Settings For Symbols The default symbol types and colors for single and multiple curves on a graph Single curves use Circle as the default symbol shape and Black as the fill color Multiple curves use Doubles as the default scheme and Black and White as the color scheme Settings For Lines Default line styles and color for single and multiple curves on a graph Single curves use Solid as the default line style and multiple curves use Monochrome as the default line style Both line colors default to black Settings For Fills The default bar color for both simple and grouped bar charts Simple bar charts use light gray and grouped bar charts use Grayscale as the default background color scheme You can specify the thickness of each bar with the Bar Thickness drop down list The default bar thi
10. 2 CCW out Right Scaling i fi Ty none T Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Axes tab 3 Select Ticks from the Settings for list 348 Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick Labels Modifying Tick Label Display 9 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots Select either Major Ticks or Minor Ticks from the Apply to drop down list To change tick length and thickness under Tick Line move the Length and Thickness sliders Drag the slider control with the mouse or set the tick length and thickness to specific values by typing directly in the Length and Thickness boxes To change tick color under Tick Line select a color from the Color drop down list Choose from any of the listed colors or select Custom to use a pre defined custom color or create your own color Select None to create transparent tick marks Click Apply Use the Axis drop down list to modify tick marks on a different axis or use the Apply To drop down list to switch to modifying major or minor tick marks Click OK Tick labels are drawn using directions clockwise counterclockwise and both clockwise and counterclockwise Tick label direction is controlled independently of the data direction Tick labels can also be turned off have a prefix or suffix added and be rotated along the angle of the axis line The tick label text can also be modified For more information see Formatting Numeric Tick Labels on pa
11. BE Rectangle Only Cancel Apply Help 6 To hide the automatic legend under Legend properties clear Show Legend Grid Lines Backplanes 7 To hide axis titles select the Axes tab under Settings for click Labels and clear the Show Axis Title option s 8 Click OK to apply the changes and to close the Graph Properties dialog box The titles and automatic legend no longer appear on the graph page Restore the title and legend by returning to the Graph Properties dialog box and checking the Show Title and Show Legend options 124 Hiding and Deleting Objects from the Page I ee Removing Graphs Plots Titles Legends and Other Page Objects Graph Page Basics Anything on the graph page can be removed from the page by selecting the object then pressing the Delete key or choosing the Edit menu Clear command Deleting removes curves plots and graphs entirely You can use undo Ctrl Z to retrieve these items When a graph or plot is removed worksheet data remains intact Delete also completely removes drawn and pasted objects Note that delete only hides titles and legends and does not remove them permanently Drawing Objects on the Page 2 The Page Toolbar Figure 4 28 Drawing Objects on a Page Use the Tools menu Draw Box Draw Ellipse Draw Line and Draw Arrow commands to draw rectangles ellipses lines and arrows or use the Page toolbar Any drawn object or text is not attached to
12. Changing Graph Page Format 157 The Page Setup dialog box appears Figure 4 54 Page 5 The Graph Layout Tab of the acetals Page Setup Dialog Box Margins Page Size Graph Layout Color L Blue Graphs on Page Shown Hidden Graph 1 Graph 2 Graph 4 Graph 3 Hide gt gt e lt lt Show Close ance Help 3 Click the Graph Layout tab 4 From the Color drop down list select the color to use for the page Select Custom to use or create a custom color To learn more see Using Custom Colors on page 158 5 Click OK py If you want no background color to show up for pasted graphs e g pasting a graph into PowerPoint set the page color to None To learn about changing graph backplane color see Modifying Grids and Planes on page 396 Page Color You can set the default color for a new page by opening the template file and Default Setting change the attributes for the Normal page using the Page Setup dialog box for that page If there is no template file or Normal page present page settings are derived from the settings stored in the SPW INI file see Troubleshooting on page 471 Templates You can overwrite the current page entirely by applying a template to it This is not recommended as a means of reformatting the page unless you intend to discard all changes made to the page up to this point For more information on the use of page templates see Using Graph Pages as Templates
13. Identify intersections Direction Cancel Apply Help 3 Click the Plots tab 4 From the Settings for list select Area Fills 5 From the Direction drop down list select Up Down Left or Right 6 Click OK Changing Area Use the Graph Properties dialog box to change area plot fill colors Plot Fill Colors 2 SigmaPlot only supports system patterns If you enter patterns into the worksheet you should only use system patterns To change the area plot fill color 1 Double click the area plot 278 Creating Area Plots Figure 6 56 Using the Graph Properties Dialog Box to change the area fill color and pattern Bubble Plots Arranging Data for Bubble Plots 5i 6 Working with 2D Graphs The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Grids and Planes Title and Legend Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph wizard Settings for I Rainbow rout Identify intersections Pattern Be Forward diag backward diag diagonal cross Cancel Apply Help Click the Plots tab From the Settings for list select Area Fills From the Color drop down list select None to create a transparent fill color Custom to create a custom color or a color incrementing scheme to use a color array or any one of many available colors From the Pattern drop down list select a pattern Click OK py To learn more about modifying fills see Changing P
14. Scatter 1 2 1 Error 2 Line 1 2 Click the Axes tab 3 From the Settings for list select Ticks 4 To change tick intervals select from the Ticks and Every drop down lists in the Tick Intervals group box 5 If you select Manual enter interval values by typing into the Every and From fields The value in the Every field specifies how often major tick marks appear and the From value specifies where on the axes major tick marks begin appearing 378 Changing Tick Mark Intervals Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids pz Custom Tick Intervals You can also choose major tick interval values from the worksheet from the Major Tick Intervals list Custom tick intervals are not available for minor ticks For more information on how to specify custom tick intervals see Customizing Tick Intervals on page 385 6 Click OK Tick Intervals for You an only specify log axis major tick marks automatically or from a column Log Axes However you can select specific intervals for log scale minor ticks Figure 10 19 z A View of a Graph with Log H Graph Page 2 Data 2 Y Axis Minor Ticks To change log scale minor tick intervals 1 Change the axis scale to a log axis For directions on changing axis scales see Changing Axis Scales on page 363 2 Double click the tick marks Changing Tick Mark Intervals 379 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Figure 10 20 The Axes Minor Tick Intervals Options
15. ShowPlace Axes W Left SE Major Ticks 7 Line Properties Color Black Thickness m 0 007in 5 settings i For W Aight aa Norma eters ee Cancel Apply Help Click the Axes tab From the Settings For list select Lines Under Show Place Axes move the sliders to change the percentage in the Top and Bottom boxes for X axes or Y axes or type the value in the fields Locations are described as the percentage of the graph dimension the axes lie from the original position To move an axis up or right enter a percent greater than 0 positive To move an axis down or left enter a percent less than 0 negative The defaults are 0 0 and Normal Click OK Changing Axis Line Color and Thickness Use the Axes tab of the Graph Properties dialog box to change axis color and thickness To change the color and thickness of an axis l Double click the axis The Graph Properties dialog box appears Click the Axes tab Select Lines from the Settings For list 372 Changing Axis Line Color and Thickness OT ee 2 Using the Object Properties Dialog Box Figure 10 13 The Line Tab of the Object Properties Dialog Box Note that the Type option is unavailable for axes Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids 4 Select the axis you want to modify from the Axis drop down list 5 To change the color of the axis under Line Pr
16. T a Column 13 Column 24 h Apply Help Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 2 Click the Plots tab 3 From the Settings For list select Scale 4 From the Apply to drop down list select the Major or Minor lines to modify 5 Under Line intervals from the Lines drop down list select one of the follow ing intervals gt Automatic SigmaPlot automatically determines the interval at which contour lines are drawn gt Manually Manually set the number of contour lines are drawn Enter the z interval in the Every field and the value at which the first interval is drawn in the From field gt Columns Select the column used to determine major contour line z values Note that when major contour lines are plotted from a column no minor lines are drawn 6 Click OK Use the Graph Properties dialog box Label settings to switch contour line labels on and off add prefixes or suffixes to labels and rotate labels relative to the contour line For information on modifying contour X and Y axis tick labels Changing Tick Labels on page 387 To add hide or modify contour line labels Modifying Contour Plots 313 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 1 Double click the contour plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 7 38 Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Labels Settings Plats Axes Graph Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph wizard Settings f m Contour labels D Majo
17. Black Type Short Dash Thickness 0 028in Close Eancel Help Click the Line tab Under Line select a color from the Color drop down list Choose None to create a transparent line Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box To change line type and thickness l 2 Select the object s to modify On the Format menu click Line The Object Properties dialog box appears Click the Line tab To set the line type under Line select a type from the Type drop down list To set the line thickness use the Thickness slider Clicking the slider causes the slider to move incrementally while dragging it moves it more precisely To change the range of control of the slider move the slider to one end of the selectable range select the text in the corresponding edit box and type a new numeric value Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box Modifying Object Colors and Lines 129 Changing Line Edit line ending attributes for existing lines and arrows or set the default line Ending Attributes endings for drawn arrows Line ending attributes affect only plain lines and arrows not graph lines To change line ending attributes 1 Select the line s to modify 2 On the Format menu click Line The Object Properties dialog box appears Figure 4 31 Object Properties The Line End tab of the Object Properties Line Line End Size and Position
18. Printing Reports Printing Selected Notebook Items Notebook Basics The Properties dialog box closes Note that the Properties dialog box options vary from printer to printer 4 Click OK to print the report For more information on printer settings and use of high resolution output devices Printing Tips on page 445 For more information on using Page Setup see Changing Graph Page Format on page 154 You can print any report in a SigmaPlot notebook To display a report as it will look when printed gt On the File menu click Print Preview A preview of the report appears To print a report 1 Select and view the report window 2 Click the Print button 4 to print the report using all the default settings To set printing options before printing the report 1 On the File menu click Print The Print dialog box appears 2 Click Properties The printer Properties dialog box appears 3 Click OK when you are satisfied with the printer properties settings The Properties dialog box closes Note that the Properties dialog box options vary from printer to printer 4 Click OK to print the report You can print individual or multiple items from the notebook including entire sections To print one or more items or sections from the notebook 1 Select one or more items or sections from the notebook 2 Click the Print button 8 on the Standard toolbar to print the worksheet Printing Notebook Items 51
19. To add or modify drop lines for a selected plot 1 Double click the plot to modify The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Plot Rename Graph Wizard 5 Flot 2 Settings for Py Type Thickness Color Solid 0 007in Black x Area Fills E ft T Type Thickness Color sold Jo 007in E Black 4 l I l I l Error Bars Cancel Apply Help 226 Adding and Modifying Drop Lines Drop Lines fora Single Point Figure 5 97 Drop Lines Used to Indicate the Values of Points on a Graph 9 Click the Plots tab From the Plot drop down list select the plot that contains the drop lines to modify From the Settings For list select Drop Lines Select the X or Y drop line check box Drop lines are added to any and all planes or axes that are selected From the Type drop down list specify the type of line to use for selected drop lines To adjust line thickness move the Thickness slider or type the new value in the Thickness box To set drop line color select a color from the Color drop down lists Select any of the listed colors or select Custom to select or define a custom color To learn more see Using Custom Colors on page 158 Click OK You can use drop lines to indicate the position of a single point To show a single drop line create a second plot which graphs only the desired data point then add drop
20. Factor out 1 gt 10 Use Scientific notation For large numbers Engineering notation Engineering notation For large numbers be Scientific notation Scientific notation For large numbers 2 Click the Axes tab 3 From the Settings for list select Tick Labels 4 From the Apply To drop down list select either Major Ticks or Minor Ticks 5 Under Label Notation from the Use drop down list select the type of label notation to use Scientific Notation or Engineering Notation for large numbers use scien tific or engineering notation only when numbers exceed a specified range Use the Below and Above drop down lists to specify the range beyond which scientific notation or engineering notation is used For log axes you can select to display number only the Exponent or both the Base and Exponent Figure 10 31 10000 4 104 Log Scale Y Axes Using Numbers Exponent Only 1000 3 103 and Base and Exponent 100 2 102 10 lt 1 101 1 ie a 0 a 100 ee a 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 For linear axes you can Always Use Scientific Notation or use it only When 390 Changing Tick Labels Formatting Series Tick Labels Figure 10 32 Selecting Series Tick Label Format 8 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Needed for large numbers To specify when scientific notation is needed enter the Lower and Upper ranges in the fields
21. Formatting Text 7 To type additional lines insert a line break by pressing Enter gt To change the attributes of text already typed in the Edit Text dialog box drag the cursor over the text you want to change to highlight it then click the appropriate button such as normal font bold italics underline sub or superscript or symbol gt To switch back to normal text from greek superscript or subscript text click the N normal button To add legend symbols to your text click Symbols The Symbol dialog box appears Symbol M Show Legend Graph Speeds Cancel Placement mg ABC Before Text Style e Symbol amp Lines Helo Symbol Click Show Legend to activate manually created legend options Select the Graph to apply the legend to from the Graph drop down list then choose to place the symbol before text or after text using the Placement drop down list Use the Style drop down list to control the appearance of the legend you are creating then choose the symbol to use for the legend from the Symbol win dow Symbols and Style options vary depending on the graphs you have cre ated Legend symbols added to text using the Edit Text dialog box do not appear in the Edit Text dialog box they appear with the text on the page Click OK to place the symbol in the text and to close the Symbol dialog box Click OK To edit existing text you can click the text if you are in text mode or if
22. Notebook Data 1 13 eS 14 _ amp Shift Cells Bight 15 ee ee Shift Cells Downy 16 inset Cotas C Insert Rows 3 Select the direction you want the existing data to shift when the cells are inserted or to insert an entire column or row select Insert Columns or Insert Rows The column row or block of cells appears on the worksheet Population 2 00 4 00 5 00 B00 6 00 8 00 4 00 5 00 OO 41 OO OT oo a You can insert columns by using the shortcut menu Inserting columns shifts existing columns to the right To insert data 1 Right click the column number or title Inserting Blocks of Cells Columns and Rows of Data 79 Worksheet Basics 2 On the shortcut menu click Insert Columns The Insert Columns dialog box appears Figure 3 22 Insert Columns Dialog Box Insert i columns before E i Cancel 3 Specify the number of columns you want to insert in the Insert Columns box 4 Select which column to place the new columns in front of in the Before drop down list 5 Click OK to insert the columns Deleting Blocks of Cells Columns and Rows of Data When you delete blocks of cells columns and rows you are also permanently erasing the data It will not be available on the Clipboard To delete columns rows and blocks of cells from the worksheet 1 Drag the mouse over the block of cells column or row you with to delete 2 On the Insert menu c
23. Settings for Scale type Axis units Linear Degrees Range Lower bound Upper bound lo 360 Scaling R oii re 360 0 a fon oa Start angle Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Axes tab 3 Select Scaling from the Settings For list 4 To change the axis scale used choose the desired axis scale type from the Scale Type list For descriptions of the different scale types available see Axis Scale Types on page 363 and Using a Custom Axis Scale on page 369 5 To change the measurement units of the angular axis select measure ment units from the Angular Axis Units drop down list If you don t see the axis units you want to use for your polar plot listed in the list select Other then type new axis range values in the Range Lower Bound and Range Upper Bound fields If using a predefined measurement unit the Range Lower Bound and Range Upper Bound box values are entered automatically The only effect of changing units is to change the pre defined axis range This range can be manually changed regardless of the current units 6 To change the size of the displayed arc of the polar plot move the Arc slider A setting of 360 displays the entire circle 270 displays three quar ters of the circle and 90 displays half of the circle 2 If you change the arc of the angular axis the axis range remains the same The current axis range appears along the new distance of the arc 328 Changing Ang
24. T 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Changing Bar and Box Widths and Spacing 225 Adding and Modifying Drop Lines Figure 5 55 Graphs with Drop Lines The graphs on the left are examples of 2D plots with drop lines to the Y and X axes The graph on the right is an example of a 3D graph with drop lines to all axes Figure 5 56 Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Drop Lines Setting for a 2D Scatter Plot Use drop lines to produce dot plots and other types of graphs which connect data points to their axis values You can add drop lines from plotted data points to either or both axes in a 2D scatter line or line scatter plot or to any or all back planes in a 3D scatter or trajectory plot Drop lines are drawn for every curve in a plot 7 Defense EED EENEN O E VESO EO IERI A E r Social 64 Interest 5 e e Medicine Welfare See ic cca oh NALE PEA r 4 i Widgets fee e wal Compensation asea e oa Stipends 4 e 25 Research 4 1 i Education 4 T T 0 a a cae r 1 10 100 1000 0 2 4 6 8 10 Drop lines always fall toward the minimum of a range for example if a Y axis range were reversed a drop line to the X axis would fall to the top of the graph rather than the bottom Use the Drop Lines settings in the Graph Properties dialog box Plots tab to create new drop lines and to modify existing drop line type thickness and color
25. You can only create new pairs of X or Y axes if you have more than one plot on a graph and you want to scale these plots differently To learn about adding a plot to a graph see Adding New Plots on page 196 More more information on working with grids and axes see Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids on page 361 If you have more than one plot on a graph and want to use multiple axes use the following steps to add additional axes To create an additional axis l 2 Right click the plot and on the shortcut menu click Add New Axis The Graph Wizard appears Graph Wizard Add Axis Add axis to which plot Select the plot to add an axis to Click Next to continue Hep Cancel Back Next Finish Select to create either a new X axis or Y axis for the specified plot Creating Multiple 2D Axes 283 Working with 2D Graphs 3 Figure 6 62 Selecting to Create a New Y Axis for the Selected Plot Figure 6 63 Specifying Where to Place the New Y Axis on the Graph 5 Figure 6 64 Example of a Second Y Axis Added to the Graph for a Line Plot Click Next Graph Wizard Add Axis Add or Y axis 1t Select to add a tab 2 E vertical y ar o horizontal axis then click Next to continue Select which side of the graph to add the new axis You can add the new axis to the left right top or bottom of the graph Selecting an Offset location moves the new axis slightly to the s
26. t T 184 Creating Graphs Using the Graph Style Gallery Creating and Modifying Graphs Creating Graph Style You can use the Graph Wizard in conjunction with the Graph Style Gallery to Gallery Graphs Using create graphs by selecting Graph Gallery as a graph type in the Graph Wizard the Graph Wizard To create a Graph Style Gallery graph from the Graph Wizard 1 On the Standard toolbar click the Graph Wizard EN button The Create Graph Type panel of the Graph Wizard appears owe5 13 Groot Type Create Graph Type x Using the Graph Wizard to Create a Graph Graph types You can choose Graph Select the type of graph vou want to create Gallery as a Graph Type Pick a graph from the gallery Finish 2 Under Graph Types select Graph Gallery and click Next The Create Graph Gallery panel of the Graph Wizard appears All graphs that appear in the Gallery graphs list are also in the Graph Styles Gallery Figure 5 14 Choosing a Graph Style Gallery Graph from the Create Graph Gallery Graph Wizard Pick a graph from the gallery All available Graph Style Uses a white grid in Gallery graphs appear r front of gray bars in the list gt Range Frame Scatter Plot Help Cancel Back 3 Under Gallery graphs select the graph type that you want to apply to your data and click Next Creating Graphs Using the Graph Style Gallery 185 Creating and Modifying Graphs The Create
27. viii Introduction Welcome to SigmaPlot 8 0 SPSS award winning scientific graphing software which makes it easier for you to present your findings accurately using precise publication quality graphs data analysis and presentation tools SigmaPlot offers numerous scientific options such as automatic error bars regression lines confidence intervals axis breaks technical axis scales non linear curve fitting and a data worksheet for powerful data handling This chapter introduces you to some of the basics of SigmaPlot including An overview of SigmaPlot features see page 10 Using SigmaPlot in Windows see page 14 Using the toolbars see page 15 Setting basic program options see page 18 Examples of SigmaPlot graphs see page 22 VVVVVY Getting help on using SigmaPlot see page 20 SigmaPlot 8 0 is a state of the art technical graphing program designed for the Windows platform It is certified for Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 Microsoft Office 95 98 and 2000 SigmaPlot 8 0 is specifically designed to aid in documenting and publishing research specializing in the graphical presentation of results Creating and editing graphs is easy Simply click a Graph toolbar button pick your data with the Graph Wizard and you have your graph You can also use templates to apply favorite graphs again and again SigmaPlot also includes a powerful nonlinear curve fitter a huge scientific data worksheet that ac
28. 3D graph mesh grids 3D bar fills and drawn objects Fill patterns affect the color of bar box and slice edges and mesh grid lines Fills and edges are specified using the Fills settings of the Plots panel in the Graph Properties dialog box Use the Format menu Fill command for drawn objects Film Recorder A hardcopy device used to print SigmaPlot graphs on a slide or photo for presentation Slidemakers are a type of film recorder Font A style or type of character TrueType fonts are available from the Windows system Other fonts such as PostScript and Hewlett Packard fonts are only available if the printer drivers are installed Frame Lines Lines which are drawn to complete the cube outlining a 3D Cartesian graph Frame lines can be drawn using either the viewer or the origin as the reference Use the Frame Lines settings in the 3D View panel of the Graph Properties dialog box to turn on off frame lines Gaussian 1 A continuous probability distribution defined by two parameters mean and variance Also called the normal distribution 2 A transform language function used to generate random normally distributed data 484 I ee Glossary Geometric Mean The mean obtained by taking the antilog of the mean of the logarithm of the original variable Error bars created using the logarithm of the variable are equidistant from the geometric mean when displayed on a logarithmic scale This option is only available when using logarith
29. Author a g SP55 Ine Aro FS lan u i Created E 07 29 99 10 28 18 eo y 2 25 lanc 220 y 225 Modified 225 y 225 lane 01425400 05 12 45 FM an m g PON l ee Description 6 x 4 landscape Use these pages to A Joe 28 and 3 apply as layouts for 6 75 2 275 and existing graph pages Sup 6 4 2 fou may add or remove pages fram this Bar Chart and Scatter F l 11 On the File menu click Save to save the notebook Creating a Custom You can create your own template file with a jnt extension in which you can Layout Template File create and save your own custom layouts To create your own layout template file 1 Create a graph page and position the graphs as desired 2 On the File menu click Save 140 Arranging Graphs The Save As dialog box appears Figure 4 40 Save As Dialog Box ashi ki Ed Savem sew a a _ Macro Transforms amp Northam Samples gt Template _ Transforms SS Internat Layout Se internat ge Layout R North m Layout File name ExampleLayouFle Save as type i tli ars c m all Type the name of the new layout template notebook in File name box Select SigmaPlot Template file from the Save as type drop down list 5 Click Save Now you can add future layouts to their own separate layout notebook Changing the Default Set the default layout template file using the Options dialog box General tab Layout Template File
30. Clear Bring ta Front Send to Back To show a hidden plot 1 Double click the graph Showing Hiding and Deleting Plots 199 Creating and Modifying Graphs The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 5 27 Graph P Graph Properties Dialog dl all Box Title and Legend Tab Plots Axes Graph Title Word Population Timeline Rename W Show title Settings far Grid Lines B E a Backplanes Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Graph tab 3 Under Settings for click Plots All plots associated with the current graph are listed under Show hide plots A check mark in the check box next to the name of a plot indicates that the plot is displayed 4 Clear a check box to hide a plot from view or select it to show the plot 5 Click OK Deleting Plots Use the Delete command to delete plots from graphs or select the plot and press Delete The Delete Plot command is only available when there are multiple plots in a graph To delete a plot 1 Select the graph 2 On the Graph menu click Delete Plot 3 Choose the plot you want to delete To delete the individual curves of a plot select a curve on a graph then press the Delete key If you delete a plot by mistake press Ctrl Z to restore the deleted plot 200 Showing Hiding and Deleting Plots Creating and Modifying Graphs sampling Fewer Data Points If you have a graph with a large number of data points you can plot only a portion
31. Default Worksheet Option You can choose to have the Date and Time worksheet options appear by default instead of the Number defaults Set SHOWNNUMERIC 1 if you want numbers to appear first or set it to 0 if you want Date and Time to appear first DWWPREFINIT SHOWNUMERTCS 1 465 The SPW INI File Recent Equation List of all Equation Libraries selected from the library panel of the Regression Libraries Wizard You can change this list by editing the files under this heading Recent Equation Library List Libraryl C PROGRA 1 SPW Standard jfl Library2 C MYDOCU 1 Custom Jil Macro Preferences These are the default options for macros as set in the Tools Options dialog box Macro Preferences FontS1ize 10 FontName Courier New HighlightBuiltin 0x00808000 HighlightComment 0x00008000 HighlightError 0x000000FF HighlightExtension 0x00800000 HighlightReserved 0x00FFO000O0 HighlightBreak 0x00000080 HighlightExec 0x0000FFFF MacroDefaultNotebook C Program Files SPW SigmaPlot Macro Library jnb Toolbar 1 RequireDefinitions 1 Last Saved Files List of the last four saved files You can change this list by editing the files under this heading Recent File List Filel C WIN95 Desktop samples jnb File2 C SPW SAMPLES JNB File3 C My Documents Example JNB 466 ee Graph Page Size Metafile Bitmap Use for 3D Files Grids Rulers Snap to and Crosshair Settings Default Zoom The SPW INI File F
32. E amp Ci lt o gt Introduction Polar Plot Example Use Polar plots to display modular data such as average monthly temperatures or satellite positioning in the sky over a period of time Average Monthly Temperatures April Up to four radial axes can be displayed and the angles and lengths modified February Major grid lines for the radial axis and minor grid lines for January the angular axis are shown June The outer and inner angular axis can be made larger or July smaller in diameter ___ November Monthly series labeling Tropics O Forest ape Plains October Desert September 26 Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs ke Introduction Contour Plot Example Use 2D Contour Plots to graph three dimensional data in two dimensions The following example includes gt Major and minor contour lines gt Contour labels i Major an ir contour labels ef w fo toy 0 TL ae a A wa A L and minor A contour plot Ra r r displaying major 0 a amp a p m cL a TT a 100 a g i 10 ao REN MS a 10 5 ke 100 D a Te A 20 Minor contour ines drawn ina different color Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs 27 a E Introduction 3D Cartesian 3D Cartesian Graphs include scatter 3D trajectory and waterfall plots mesh Graph Examples plots and bar charts The following figur
33. Err 6 6156 0 4115 0 4978 4 257663 95 Cont 15 6437 0 9740 1 1770 0 0219 99 Cont 23 1531 1 4415 1 7421 0 034 Size 8 0000 8 0000 8 0000 8 0000 Total a7 0000 42 0000 19 0000 0 6673 Min 1 0000 4 0000 1 0000 0 0564 Max 57 0000 7 0000 4 0000 0 1128 Min Pos 1 0000 4 0000 1 0000 0 0564 Missing 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Other 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Oooo S ee l ee Ei 2 Select the block of data in the statistics window that consists of the means and standard deviations of the first set of bars 3 Right click and on the shortcut menu click Copy 4 Select the first row of an empty column in the worksheet 5 On the Edit menu click Transpose Paste The first pasted column of data is the mean and the next column is the stan dard deviations For more information on using the transpose paste feature see Switching Rows to Columns on page 81 Figure 6 37 Example of Transposed Pasted Data The data in columns 13 and 14 of the worksheet Sa eo a nce Mean 3 sf Oo 69 066 17 3333 20 1010 838000 2188314 Std Dev l 718 8 314 192 1 307 7 aa ob e 49 6079 630667 1921307 StdEn O are transposed from the 95 Conf 15 5621 106 4007 selected data in rows 1 99 Cont 21 6007 147 6873 and 2 of the Column Size 15 0000 15 0000 Statistics window Total 260 0000 1036 0000 Column 13 contains Min 5 0000 2 0000 the means of the column Max 87 0000 756 0000 data and column 14 contains hiinas DU ae the standard deviations site anan 0 0000
34. Example Dialog Box Plain Angle J ae E 0 0 MM Style Arrow Ange H 200 3 Click the Line End tab 4 Add or edit line ends at both the start and end of a line The Start of Line options add or modify the beginning end of the line where you start drawing the line The End of Line options add or modify the line end at the end of the drawn line where you stop drawing the line by releasing the mouse button 5 To change the type of line used select a style from thee Style drop down list 6 To change the arrowhead length and angle move the Angle and Length slider The angle is the angle between the arrowhead line and the main line The Angle option is unavailable if the line Style is dotted or plain 2 Clicking the slider causes the slider to move incrementally while dragging it moves it more precisely To change the range of control of the slider move the slider to one end of the selectable range select the text in the corresponding edit box and type a new numeric value 7 Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box 130 Modifying Object Colors and Lines Changing Multiple Page Objects When making changes to multiple objects with different properties the Object Properties dialog box options are blank Only options that are changed are applied to selected objects To learn how to select multiple objects see Selecting Page Objects on page 98 Moving and Sizing Graphs and Ob
35. For a paired t test on data sets x 1 X2 X and LY 1 Yor Yn 402 Running Paired and Independent t Tests OT ee Statistics I II lt 5 O Oo Yl I XI l T jas 5 CQ 2 XD pp 22 a5 SS EEEL WeLe D x y n n 1 Unpaired Test For an independent t test on data sets x X2 Xp and yj yo Ynot D t 2 2 2 2 where on n 1 Lx nX Ly Nyy NM My Ni tny 2 ny ny yox X En z nN No Creating Histograms Histograms are step needle or bar charts that represent counts of the datapoints that fall within specified ranges The Histogram Wizard guides you through the steps in creating a histogram generating frequency data specifying the number of buckets or intervals and selecting a graph style The Histogram Wizard allows you to specify an even bucket size into which to partition the source data The range of each interval is identical the total range is the data minimum to the data maximum The number of bars steps or needles displayed is generally equal to the number of buckets Creating Histograms 403 Statistics Using the Histogram Wizard Figure 11 3 Histogram Wizard Pick Data Dialog Panel 404 Creating Histograms To create a histogram with an uneven bucket size see The Histogram Transform Function on page 406 For a more detailed explanation of the histogram transform function see the Programming Guide To use the Histogram Wizard l Ente
36. Graph Dialog Box to Pick Columns to Plot When you create a mesh plot you can choose between solid and transparent mesh with discrete or gradient shading Use a transparent mesh to highlight the relationship of one mesh plot to another on the same graph 3D mesh plots use an XYZ coordinate system the data points are graphed as intersections of a mesh grid If you select Many Z as the data format SigmaPlot uses column numbers as the X values and row numbers as the Y values If you are using XYZ triplet data you need to reformat the data For more information see Smoothing 2D and 3D Data on page 420 To create a 3D mesh plot 1 Select the columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data 2 On the 3D Graph Toolbar click 3D Mesh Plot The Graph Wizard appears Graph Wizard Create Graph Data Format How is your data organized z oY andZ Many colurnins at acy Many Z least one triplet T BZ 520 Help Finizh 3 From the Data Format list choose the appropriate data format and click Next Graph Wizard Create Graph Data forz Column J Select the Selected Columns column to plot by clicking the column in the worksheet Since you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in the dialog box Creating Mesh Plots 297 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 4 Click Finish Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify th
37. Index about 283 saved equations 231 233 adding new 198 Plotting data contour 317 338 2D graphs 240 242 custom incrementing schemes 220 222 3D graphs 293 defined 489 additional data 198 deleting 200 asymmetric error bar plots 242 displaying 200 bubble plots 279 dummy 285 column averaged error bar plots 242 hiding using shortcut menu 200 contour plots 293 hiding showing 200 multiple curves 241 244 layering lines in front behind symbols 214 multiple curves same X or Y 241 lines 216 polar plots 323 324 multiple 198 portion of 201 multiple axes for single 285 scatter graphs 3D 290 naming 192 193 using row numbers for X or Y values 242 needle plot 224 Plotting equations 228 236 offsetting radial axes 331 Point pattern line thickness 218 defined 489 picking different data 195 Point plot pie charts 317 338 horizontal data format 169 plotting portion of data 201 vertical data format 169 polar 317 338 Pointer polar axes 333 defined 489 same X or Y for multiple curves 240 Points scatter defined 491 page units 156 157 selecting 191 192 Polar axes single curve 240 modifying 333 symbols 204 213 radial tick labels 333 ternary 317 338 Polar plots types 11 angular axes 327 329 undo delete 200 arranging data 323 324 Plots 2D creating 325 box plots 268 data for multiple curves 324 creating with asymmetric error bars 249 data format 166 creating with bi directional asymmetric error bars 251 defined 489 creating with error bar
38. Select Excel data and create the graph using the Graph Wizard 2 For information on selecting ranges of data see Manually Entering Data Ranges into the Graph Wizard on page 180 Modifying Graphs Use the Graph Properties dialog box to make most graph modifications To display the Graph Properties dialog box double click the graph Modifying Plots To modify a plot or the axes of a selected graph click the Plots tab or the Axes and Axes tab Use the Plot or Axis list to specify which plot or axis in the current graph you Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using MicroSoft Excel 189 Creating and Modifying Graphs Figure 5 16 Using the Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab to modify a graph You can select a plot to modify from the Plot drop down list Modifying Grids and Planes Titles and Legends 190 Modifying Graphs are modifying Use the Settings For lists in the Plots and Axes tabs to gain access to many different plot and axis modification options Graph Properties Flots Axes Graph Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph wizard E E Line color J Type k Color sold Black Thickness Layering foie Ff eAtine bend gt Shape SS Straight il H Symbols Area Fills toh Cancel Apply Help To modify grids or planes open the Graph Properties dialog box click the Graphs tab and under Settings for click Grid Lines or Backplanes To hide
39. Transforming Area Data to Diameters 6 00 OAs 1 00 2 00 Edit Transform bi 3 14159265359 En col 4j sqrt col 3 01 fpil Close Save Ag EEE PEE Revert Trigonometric Unite Degrees Radians Grads D Watch I Single Step 3 Click Run 4 Your new data appears in the worksheet y If you change the symbol shape you must use a different equation to transform area data Creatinga To create a bubble plot Bubble Plot 1 Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer over your data 2 Click the Graph Wizard EN button The Graph Wizard appears Figure 6 60 Graph Wizard Create Graph Graph Wizard Dialog Box Graph Types Select the type of graph you want to create Bos Plat Plots bubbles of Fie Chart variable size on Contour Flot an sy plane 3D Scatter Plot 30 Line Flot 30 Mesh Plot 30 Bar Chart Temar Plat Help Cancel Back Hert Finish 3 From the Graph Types scroll down list select Bubble Plot and 282 Bubble Plots ee Working with 2D Graphs click Next From the Data Format list select the appropriate format and click Next When you have selected all the columns to plot including the Bubble Size column click Finish Creating Multiple 2D Axes About Axes and Plots Creating Additional Axes for Multiple Plots Figure 6 61 Using the Graph Wizard Add Axis Dialog Box to Select the Plot for the New Axis
40. Under Graph Styles select the desired plot style and click Next 5 Under Data Format select a data format and click Next 6 Pick data either by clicking the corresponding column directly in the work sheet or choosing the appropriate column from the data list Use this method to pick X Y or Z data R and theta data and error bar data 2 If you make a mistake while picking data click the wrong entry in the Graph Wizard then choose the correct column from the worksheet You can also clear a column assignment by double clicking it in the Selected Columns list 7 Repeat the process for every data column When you have chosen the data appropriate for your style of plot click Back to repick data columns or if applicable click Next to pick data for additional plots 8 Click Finish 198 Adding New Plots Creating and Modifying Graphs showing Hiding and Deleting Plots Hiding Plots Figure 5 26 You can use the shorcut menu to hide graphs Showing Hidden Plots Occasionally you may want to remove a plot from a graph without deleting it You can hide plots from view without deleting them by using the right click shortcut menu or the Graph Properties dialog box To hide a plot 1 Right click the plot 2 On the shortcut menu click Hide The plot is hidden but not removed FA Graph Page 1 Data 1 Iofs Graph Properties Object Properties Graph Wizard Add New Asis Fit Curve
41. WR1 W RK WKS Systat Impsystat impsystat ors Pilarn Text JsortAsGr hID IASCE T xls APRN DATs Ao Comma Delimited JS IASCF JD IASCF CSV SigmaScan SigmaScan Pro Worksheets JS IJXFF JD IJXFF SPW Mocha SigmaScan Image Worksheets JS IJXFF JD IJXFF MOC DIFSJSYIDIEFEF JD IDIEFF y ADIF Open Excel Filters EXCEL SigmaPlot Notebook JNB Template Notebook JNT Regression Library JFL Sigmar lot LO 205 1d Xe DeLIZEE OFW SitgmarPlov Curve Pat FIT lt F ET SigmaPlot Macintosh 4 JS ISPGF JD ISPGF lt Sigmastat 1 0 JS LUXEF JD LUXE 4 SPW 461 The SPW INI File SigmaP lot DOS J5 7LSPGEMHID IS PCF a9 P 97 7 a5PG Sigmastat DOS JSAISPOFE NJD LSPOGF SP5 MS ExC amp l EXCEL XL Lotus 1 2 3 EXCEL WK Quattro PRO DOS EXCEL WQ dBase EXCEL DBF Plain Text EXCEL VIATA PRN CGV SKE CH Ly So bak SLOMao Canny Sigmascan Pro Worksheet s JS IJXFF JD IJXFF SPW Mocha SigmaScan Image Worksheet S JS IJUXFF JD LJUXFF MOC DIP J S71 DLE wDeIDIF Fy DIF Import Filters SigmaPlot 1 0 2 0 Worksheet JS IJXFF JD IJXFF SPW SigmaPlot Macintosh 4 Worksheet JS ISPGF JD ISPGF SigmaPlot Macintosh 5 Worksheet JS IJUXFF JID IJUXFF SigmaStat 1 0 Worksheet JS IJUXFF JD IJXFF SPW SigmaPlot DOS Worksheet JS ISPGEF JD ISPGF SP5 SPG SigmaStat DOS Worksheet JS ISPGF JD ISPGF SP5 MS Excel JS WKW_F JD WKW_F XLS Lotus l 2 3 Imp0Open
42. and the fonts will print correctly However you can only install additional PostScript fonts using Adobe Type Manager Adobe Type Manager was included in earlier versions of Windows and can also be purchased independently or bundled with many other applications 446 Using PostScript Fonts Printing Tips Optimizing Printer Output Use Maximum Resolution Use TrueType Fonts py Thicken Lines Use Halftoning Some printers have a draft or lower resolution mode if you are printing to a printer with variable resolution settings make sure that the resolution is set to the highest level Windows comes with TrueType fonts automatically installed With TrueType fonts you can access a wide range of typefaces For more information about using TrueType fonts see page 445 Note that some printing and slidemaking services do not yet support TrueType fonts substituting printer fonts or using Adobe Type Manager generally solves this problem For full sized graphs the default line thicknesses may be too thin Thicker lines will be easier to read You can use set default line options by choosing Format Line to change line widths all at once For more details see Changing Multiple Page Objects on page 131 If you are printing colors to a black and white printer or are using different levels of gray you can often improve the dither pattern using halftoning settings available under the Advanced Options for most laser print
43. as lines on a bar centered about the mean and the 5th and 95th percentiles as error bars The mean line and data points beyond the 5th and 95th percentiles can also be displayed See also Plot Type Bubble Plots A special case of scatter plot where a third dimension is graphed using the areas of the symbols Cartesian A graph using a rectangular XY or XYZ coordinate system SigmaPlot can create both 2D and 3D Cartesian graphs See also Coordinate System Category Scale A scale which uses numerical values or text from a worksheet column used to generate a plot Each distinct entry in the column is a separate category against which the corresponding data values are plotted Cell 1 A location on the worksheet that holds a single data value or label described by its column and row number 2 A transform language function that specifies the coordinates and contents of a worksheet cell Clipboard The Windows data buffer where cut or copied data and graphics are stored Press Ctrl V or use the Edit menu Paste command to paste Clipboard contents to the worksheet or page Note that data and graphics are stored in the same Clipboard so cutting additional data or objects overwrites current Clipboard contents Cleared deleted data or graphics bypasses the Clipboard and leaves the current contents intact Codes graphic cell Graphic cell codes can be typed into a worksheet column to sequence different types for plot lines symbols and fill patt
44. automatically saves a backup file gt Other ease of use improvements Notebook windows retain size shape and position so there s no need to reconfigure your environment each time you work You can now set a default zoom level for a new graph page gt Easily insert equations on a graph page or report New Publication Features Support for vector EPS CMYK the preferred format for graphics publication This is a vector not bitmap format so files are smaller gt New Export dialog box You supply the size of the image you want and SigmaPlot calculates the optimal DPI SigmaPlot s selectable Graph Type determines the structure of your graph SigmaPlot provides many different types of two and three dimensional Cartesian XY and XYZ graphs as well as pie charts and polar plots Graph Style determines how data is plotted on a graph Available styles depend on the selected Graph Type SigmaPlot s Graph Wizard conveniently displays all available graph styles associated with each graph type The SigmaPlot template notebook contains a variety of page layouts Apply these predetermined template attributes to previously saved pages and graphs or create a user defined template Store your templates in a SigmaPlot Notebook Template file JNT You may want to create your own template notebook Preset graph attribute default settings such as size and position font and symbol line and bar settings Create multiple axes for 2D graphs
45. frame lines 304 modifying 129 reference lines 414 Line scatter graphs asymmetric error bars 249 bi directional asymmetric error bars 251 defined 487 491 error bars 245 lines 216 quartile plots 250 range plots 248 symbols 204 213 Linear axis scale 363 390 defined 487 Linear Regression dialog defined 487 Linear regressions calculating 410 412 confidence prediction intervals 409 410 defined 410 411 487 generating 407 410 multiple curves 408 polynomial order 408 results 408 Lines adding arrow heads 130 assigning to worksheet 220 attributes 372 373 axis 372 373 changing end attributes 130 changing thickness 214 changing type 213 codes for custom sequences 456 color 214 contour 309 310 custom incrementing schemes 220 222 drawing 125 drop 226 227 error bars 253 frame 304 grid 399 grid line types 398 increment customizing 220 225 incrementing 215 layering in front behind symbols 214 line scatter plots 216 linear regression 407 410 mesh plots 299 midpoint step plots 214 modifying 216 modifying properties 128 plot 216 radial axes 330 333 reference 268 490 setting intervals for contour plots 312 smoothed 214 spline curves 214 step plots 214 type 214 456 Linking defined 487 objects 113 122 Reports 113 Links breaking 121 changing source files 121 editing 121 manual automatic updating 120 viewing object links 120 122 Locking legends 153 Logarithmic axis scale 363 390 defined 487
46. or simple bar charts can be created with error bars To learn about creating grouped bar charts with error bars see Creating Grouped Bar Charts on page 261 For information on the available data formats for the graph you are making see the description of the graph style in see SigmaPlot Graph Style on page 167 H oO N oo F oa oO N oo fi fi fi fi fi fi fi H MN wo A aA DN DO O O fi fi fi fi fi fi fi fi En T T T T T T T 2 4 6 8 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 To add error bars to a pre existing plot you must change the plot type For more information see Changing Graph Type and Style on page 195 To create a scatter plot with error bars I 2 Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer over your data On the 2D Graph Toolbar click Scatter Plot and then click Simple Scatter Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars 245 Working with 2D Graphs Error Bars Figure 6 14 Selecting Simple Scatter Error Bars from the 2D Graph Toolbar The Graph Wizard appears 3 From the Symbol Value drop down list select the error bar source Figure 6 15 Create Graph Error Bars Graph Wizard Error Bars Symbol values E How are the error bars computed dT prami 24000 03300 The symbol value 16
47. prefixes 314 text attributes 315 turning on off 314 Contour lines color 310 line types 310 modifying 309 310 showing hiding 309 thickness 310 Contour plots adding fills 310 adding labels 313 316 creating 306 data format 166 defined 482 editing contour labels 315 example 27 frequency of contour labels 314 line types 310 modifying 308 316 modifying contour lines 309 310 modifying fills 311 modifying labels 313 316 modifying Z data range scale 311 312 plotting data 290 293 306 307 sample graph 27 setting line intervals 312 setting the direction of fills 310 X Y Z values 290 Conventions manual 33 Converting area data to diameters for bubble plots 280 numeric and date and time data Date and time data converting to numeric 73 Coordinate system defined 482 Copy and Paste 61 Copy shortcut 56 Copying data 78 defined 482 graphs 103 notebook items between notebooks 45 objects graphs 111 Correlation coefficient R defined 482 Creating additional axes for multiple plots 283 additional plots 197 198 axis breaks 374 375 category scale 366 contour plots 306 307 custom graph page layout 140 custom scale 369 embedded graphs 186 EPS files 449 equations to plot 228 Excel worksheets 41 files for figure submission 357 filled contour plots 307 Index graphs 163 194 graphs using Excel worksheets 92 graphs using SPSS 188 graphs using the Graph Style Gallery 182 184 graphs with Graph Toolbar 177
48. see page 88 93 Worksheet Basics The following figure provides some worksheet definitions Figure 3 1 ee z Example ofa ERSE SigmaPlot Worksheet Fa Row numbers and titles are listed along the left el side of the worksheet PAE am Soo Serana an am a a i O O Pi ee i Eo o ee vaie ee 12 i e meee 13 O E E aea 14 a eS es hiere Setting Worksheet Display Options The Options dialog box Worksheet tab sets the display for gt Numeric gt Date and Time gt Statistics Appearance Figure 3 2 Opti The Options Dialog cecal Box Worksheet Tab Worksheet Fage Generic Macro Graph Defaults settings For Date and Time Statistics Appearance Display As E Notation When Needed Decimal Places E Engineering Notation Cancel Apply Help 54 Setting Worksheet Display Options Figure 3 3 The Options Dialog Box Worksheet Tab Data and Time Options Worksheet Basics Click the Worksheet tab on the Options dialog box to select a numeric display type change column width and decimal places and turn on and off engineering notation Options worksheet Page Generic Macro Graph Defaults Settings For Numeric Statistics Appearance Sample 04 01 1996 3 42 13 Date hd dd Time rn Day Zero 17171900 he Regional Settings Cancel Apply Help Moving Around the Worksheet You can move around the worksheet using scr
49. 1 Column 3 Specify which worksheet columns correspond to the data for your plot Since you selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices auto matically appear in the dialog box and you can click Finish to create the graph To create a single plot graph choose data for every column you are using to make the graph To create a graph of multiple plots choose data for the first plot then click Next to pick data for the next plot Repeat this process for as many plots as necessary To make a graph with simple error bars or a graph with multiple error bars using worksheet columns as the Symbol Value for error bar data you are prompted to choose columns for error bar data Repeat the data pick ing process for every column you are using to create your plot Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars 241 Working with 2D Graphs 9 To make a graph using any of the other sources for error bar data i e Column Means Column Median Standard Error etc with multiple error bars you can create a graph using a single plot or a graph with multi ple plots Use multiple plots if you want to use different symbols to distin guish between data sets see Figure 6 13 on page 245 If you make a mistake while picking data click the wrong entry in the Graph Wizard then choose the correct column from the worksheet You can also clear a column assignment by double clicking it in the Selected Columns list Use the Back
50. 128 rgb 128 0 128 Incremented rgb 0 0 0 rgb 255 255 255 rgb 255 0 0 rgb 0 255 0 rgb 255 255 0 rgb 0 0 255 rgb 255 0 255 rgb 0 255 255 452 Schemes Symbol Schemes Incremented Color Symbol Line and Fill Schemes and Codes rgb 128 128 128 rgb 192 192 192 rgb 128 0 0 rgb 0 128 0 rgb 128 128 0 rgb 0 0 128 rgb 128 0 128 rgb 0 128 128 rgb 0 0 0 rgb 255 255 255 rgb 255 0 0 rgb 0 255 0 rgb 255 255 0 rgb 0 0 255 rgb 255 0 255 rgb 0 255 255 rgb 128 128 128 rgb 192 192 192 rgb 128 0 0 rgb 0 128 0 rgb 128 128 0 rgb 0 0 128 rgb 128 0 128 rgb 0 128 128 Doubles Circle Circle Down Triangle Down Triangle Square Square Diamond Diamond Up Triangle Up Triangle Hexagon Hexagon Monochrome Circle cross Down Triangle Square Up Triangle Dotted Doubles Circle Dotted Circle Down Triangle Dotted Down Triangle Square Dotted Square Diamond Dotted Diamond Up Triangle Dotted Up Triangle Hexagon Dotted Hexagon Schemes 453 oe Color Symbol Line and Fill Schemes and Codes Incrementing Circle Square Up Triangle Down Triangle Diamond Hexagon Line Schemes Monochrome Solid Dotted Short Dash Dot Dot Dash Long Dash Dot Dash Medium Dash Incrementing Solid Long Dash Medium Dash Short Dash Dotted Dot dash Dot dot dash Fill Pattern Schemes Monochrome Solid None Right rising Fine Cross Hatched Fine Left ris
51. 137 graph styles using the Graph Style Gallery 183 templates 42 Arc axis angular 327 329 Area plot creating vertical area plots 271 Area plot data formats multiple area plot 173 multiple vertical area plot 173 simple area plot 173 vertical area plot 173 Area plots 269 279 changing area fill direction 277 changing fill color 278 converting multiple into complex 276 creating multiple and multiple vertical area plots 273 creating simple straight line area plots 271 examples 238 identifying regions 276 Arithmetic mean see mean Arranging data for 2D graphs 240 242 data for 3D graphs 293 data for a single curve 240 data for bubble plots 279 data for contour plots 293 data for polar plots 323 324 graphs 137 142 radial and angular values for polar plots 323 XY data for polar plots 323 Arrhenius scale 369 Arrow keys moving graphs and objects using 134 Arrows drawing 125 modifying arrow heads 130 ASCII files defined 479 see text files Aspect ratio defined 479 Options 97 Asymmetric error bar plots 242 Asymmetric error bars creating 2D plots with 249 Asymmetrical error bars quartile plots 250 Attributes 108 changing line 372 373 text formatting 146 147 Author information Options 20 AUTOEXEC BAT defined 479 automatic legend updating 153 Automatic legends 11 displaying 151 153 editing 151 locking 153 Options 19 restoring to default settings 152 see also legends Available statistics 63 Averaging see mean Ax
52. 488 Logit axis scale 364 defined 487 LZW compression algorithm post processing TIFF files 358 M Magnifying page view 103 Major ticks Date and Time axis scale 382 Manual conventions 33 organization of 33 Maximum value max column statistics 64 Mean column statistics 63 error bar computation method 258 Mean computation method 258 Mean lines 267 Index box plots 267 Median lines 267 Menu bar defined 487 Menus using with embedded graphs 187 Mesh data converting 11 generating 11 306 interpolating 11 Mesh lines modifying 298 Mesh plots 3D data format 167 creating 298 defined 487 example 29 examples 288 fills color 299 light source 303 mesh data 11 mesh lines 299 modifying lines fills 299 plotting data 290 293 smoothing data 11 transparent 297 X Y Z values 290 MESH XFM file generating mesh data 306 Millimeters page units 156 157 Minimum positive value min pos column statistics 64 Minimum value min column statistics 64 Minor ticks Date and Time axes 382 modifying 382 Missing values column statistics 65 Mocha worksheets 60 Modifying 2D plots 407 414 3D graph view 299 3D plots 287 306 adding plots 197 198 angular axes 333 area plots 277 279 attributes for new pages 108 automatic legends 148 153 axes 303 370 axis range 363 axis range by dragging 340 axis scale 365 513 axis scale types 366 369 box fills color 267 box plots 268 box widths 267 category s
53. 800 1000 Divergence Time millions of years For more information on using symbols from worksheet columns see Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments on page 220 To specify characters as symbols l Enter the text you want to use as symbols in a worksheet column in the order you want the curve s to use them To use numeric values as sym 208 Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options Figure 5 35 Example of Worksheet with Plot Symbol Text Entered in Column 3 Figure 5 36 Using Text from a Worksheet Column as the Symbol Type for the Plot Change the font for text symbols by right clicking the Type option and choosing Symbol Font bols add a space after each value in the worksheet You can assign the numbers that appear aligned to the left as symbols iT 2 3 D 4 00 Mamrrials 240 00 300 00 14 00 500 00 19 00 550 00 21 00 640 00 28 00 950 00 42 00 O O D a on a ee al a e a l s 2 You can use all the non keyboard characters available for the default font To view and access these characters you can use the Windows Character Map utility The Windows User s Guide also lists these special characters along with the keystrokes required to enter them On the Standard toolbar click the View Page 6 button Double click the plot on which you want to use text symbols The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Flots Axes Graph
54. Area Plot The Graph Wizard appears Figure 6 45 Graph Wizard Data Format Create Graph Data Format Data format eer Pair Single r 75000 4000 One columan one Single EEWO SEM Y column How iz your data organized 5 PALL 7 Owe Help Cancel Back Finish 3 From the Data Format list choose the appropriate data format and click Creating Area Plots 271 Working with 2D Graphs Figure 6 46 Graph Wizard Select Data Figure 6 47 Example of a Vertical Area Plot 272 Creating Area Plots Y Data Next H Daten z 1 Time EAIRT Create Graph Select Data Data tor ee Select the column Selected columns to plot by clicki eS eae ates Pi Colum 1 the column in the worksheet Since you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in the Selected Columns list You can plot no more than 2500 data points per curve Click Finish to create the graph ertical Area Plot Data Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify the plot or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick different data columns for your plot or to add another plot to your graph I ee Working with 2D Graphs Creating Multiple Multiple Area Plots plot multiple line plots with downward fills Multiple Area and Multiple Vertical Area Plots plot single YX line plots with left downward fills Vertical Area Plots l To create a multiple
55. Arrange Graphs Layouts i Appl Centered 3 5 5 Centered 5 2 6 2 up 3 5 3 5 Cancel 2 up 4 3 2 up 3 5 3 5 landscape Sup 2 25 w 225 dup 2s 3 Help Sup 2 75 8 2 75 landscape 4 up x Preview Hi up 275 Fup 2 25 w 2 25 Fup 2 25 x 2 25 landscape E up 2 25 w 2 25 6 up 2 25 x 2 25 landscape i 2 up 2 6 2 up 6 4 landscape Sup 2 48 5 and 3 x 3 Sup 65 6 276 and 2 75 x 2 75 landscape Sup Bx 2 3 From the Layouts list select a layout for the page A preview of the layout appears in the Preview window You must apply a layout to a page that has the same or fewer number of graphs 4 Click Apply The graphs on the page match the layout you selected and the Layout dialog box remains open 5 To arrange the graphs again you can select another layout from the Layouts list then click Apply or click Close to close the dialog box You can add a previously created page to the Layout jnt notebook This is especially useful for saving layouts you create yourself For example you can add a layout created in one notebook and copy and paste it into the layout jnt notebook Jnt files are template files To add a page 1 On the File menu click Open The Open dialog box appears Figure 4 37 Open Dialog Box Look irr E opie El e L Maco Transforms S Northam I Samples amp Template __
56. Basics 5 Click Open 6 Select a template from the Templates list in the Templates dialog box 7 Click Apply Templates amp Store templates as pages in notebook files with the extension JNT You can open Notebooks and edit template notebooks like any other notebook file the different extension is only provided for organizational purposes A sample template notebook Template jnt is provided with SigmaPlot and is set as the initial template source notebook Figure 4 14 TEMPLATE JNT Notebook mitch a eis Ea ol Template Notebook Bip Blank Templates ni Normal Landscape Summary Ze Delete Legal i Blue Slide Help Author Beta User Created 11 0496 11 25 23 Modified 11 0496 11 25 23 Description Notebook TEMPLATE JNT is the default source for new pages It contains both pages with no graphs and pages with graphs You can modify existing pages or add your own graphs or graph pages to TEMPLATE JNT Open the file open the page you want to modify then save your changes You can add files by creating new pages or by copying pages from your notebooks to TEMPLATE JNT see Adding New Pages to Template jnt on page 110 You can also create your own template notebook containing your own customized graph pages Save template notebooks as SigmaPlot Template JNT files then specify that file to be your Template File see Changing the Template File Used for New Pages below
57. Colors You can modify and increment the background colors patterns and pattern colors used for plots You can only modify or add fill colors and patterns to plots that normally use fills l e bar charts box plots pie charts 3D bar charts and ternary plots 216 Changing Patterns and Fill Colors Changing Plot Modern laser printing and color slides have removed much of the need for Fill Patterns using hatch marks and other line patterns for bar and pie charts Use gray and Colors shades and colors whenever possible Figure 5 44 Example of a Bar Chart with a Gray Scale Fill Color Scheme To learn more about automatically incrementing fills see page 218 To learn about using custom increment schemes see Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments on page 220 For more information on using custom colors see Using Custom Colors on page 158 To change plots fill attributes 1 Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 5 45 The Fills Settings of bl aia the Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Dialog Box Plots Tab Plat Plot 5 Rename Graph wizard Settings for Pattern and edge Color Black Pattern Wh one Thickness Grayscale J Grayscale EE Earthtones Forest 111 Widths EJ Rainbow muted p incrementing E Spectrum HE Gray Intensity C None E Black C white E r Er
58. Draw Arrow Draw Box O 4 Draw Ellipse lt Fill Properties lt Line Ending lt Fill Color lt lt Axis Scale Line Properties p es Line Thickness Symbol gt Fill Pattern gt Send To Back lt Ungroup Show Hide Grids Bring To Front Group Align H A elo ms Viewing Toolbars To view a toolbar 1 Onthe View menu click Toolbars The Toolbars dialog box appears 2 Select a toolbar to view Figure 1 7 Toolbars Dialog Box placeholder Toolbars Options I Color buttons Jw Formatting M 2D Graph C Large buttons M 3D Graph wr Page I Show ToolTips Help Cancel 3 Click OK 16 Using Toolbars ee Hiding Toolbars Changing Toolbar Button Appearance Positioning Toolbars Figure 1 8 Toolbars are docked by dragging a toolbar by its edge onto any SigmaPlot window border Introduction There are two ways to hide toolbars gt Using a shortcut menu gt Using the Toolbars dialog box To hide toolbars using the shortcut menu 1 Right click the toolbar 2 On the shortcut menu click Hide To hide toolbars using the Toolbars dialog box 1 Onthe View menu click Toolbars The Toolbars dialog box appears 2 Clear the Toolbar you want to hide 3 Click OK The Large Buttons check box increases the size of Standard Drawing Properties and Arranging toolbar buttons The Color Butto
59. E Working with 3D and Contour Graphs Data for Arrange data for 3D bar charts scatter plots and line plots either as XYZ triplet 3D Bar Charts data multiple columns of Z data or as a single column for Y values a single 3D Scatter Plots column for X values and multiple columns for Z values For each of these graph and 3D Line Plots types the data in each row is graphed as a data point For bar charts each column of Z data is plotted as a row parallel to either the X axis with Y values as the constants If you are formatting X YZ triplet data you also can use one of the multiple Z column formats designed for 3D mesh plots For more information see Data for Contour and Mesh Plots on page 290 2 3D bar charts cannot use XYZ triplet data You can use the X Y and many Z format however you must have at least two columns of Z data Data for Contour Data for a contour or mesh plot requires XYZ coordinates for each intersection of and Mesh Plots a rectangular mesh The arrangement of this data for the three possible methods of picking columns to plot are described in the following sections X Y and Z Data in Three Columns To plot three columns as the X Y and Z values of a contour or mesh plot the data must be in long form mesh format This format assigns the proper Z value to each X and Y point in the mesh in the required order For example for the table of X Y and Z values shown above the three column mesh format mus
60. For example if you lock the legend you can change column titles and column data without resetting the legend label The legend will automatically update however if you remove or add a curve You can also lock a legend by simply editing it If you do not lock the legend either from the Graph Properties dialog box or by editing the legend the legend automatically updates itself when you change column titles and data Locking the legend affects the entire legend not just individual entries To lock legend text Working with Automatic Legends 153 1 Double click the graph to open the Graph Properties dialog box Figure 4 50 Graph P i Use the Graph tab on the ill ells Graph Properties dialog box Plots Axes Graph to lock legend text Title 20 Graph 1 Rename l Show title Settings for Legend properties M Show legend Eont I Framed inbox Box a T Size Width Legend appearance For legend symbol Cal 1 vs Col 2 Legend text col 1 vs Col z Edit Symbol placement EE ABC Before text Style symba amp lines Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Graph tab Grid Lines Saige Back planes 3 Under Settings for click Legends 4 Under Legend properties click Lock legend 5 Click OK to close the dialog box Changing Graph Page Format You can change graph page margins and size using the Page Setup dialog box
61. Graph Select Data panel of the Graph Wizard appears Figure 5 15 Selecting Data in the Graph Wizard Create Graph Select Data sY Pair data format S Data ae ue Pa Selected columns R G to plot by clicking 7 Ue a the column in the a esi worksheet Finish 4 Under Data for select the worksheet columns to plot gt If you make a mistake while selecting data select the correct column in the Selected Columns list 5 Click Finish to create the graph A graph appears on the page using the applied Gallery graph style Creating and Modifying Embedded SigmaPlot Graphs When you insert a SigmaPlot graph into a document as a SigmaPlot object some different menus and options are available than when viewing graphs inside SigmaPlot The following describes the behavior of SigmaPlot features while editing a SigmaPlot graph Note that you can also open embedded graphs inside SigmaPlot gaining full SigmaPlot functionality For learn more about modifying graphs see Modifying Graphs on page 189 Creating Embedded You can create embedded graphs in any number of ways including Graphs p Copying and pasting into an application that accepts embedded objects like Word Excel or PowerPoint gt Using the Insert File or Object menu from an application that accepts embedded objects gt Running any of the SigmaPlot integration routines e g SPSS integration For more information on SPSS integration and usin
62. Index modifying 219 object 127 pattern codes 456 457 pie chart 127 set pattern and edge line thickness 128 symbol 127 Film recorder defined 484 Fixed Decimal display 69 Fonts defined 484 Greek 145 PostScript 143 449 printing tips 445 449 screen and printer 445 symbols 145 TrueType 143 445 446 Format menu commands Align 135 136 line 128 Formats submitting graphs for publication 356 Formatting Date and Time tick labels 394 labels 12 text 146 147 Frame lines color 304 defined 484 line type 304 modifying 304 relative to origin 305 relative to viewer 305 Frequency contour labels 314 FrontPage inserting graphs 356 Functions one line 419 solving 233 236 G Gaussian transform defined 484 Generating error bars 258 linear regression lines 407 410 mesh data 11 random data 417 Geometric mean defined 485 Global 508 changing multiple page objects 131 Global text changes 147 Glossary 479 495 Go to worksheet cell 56 Graph defined 485 Graph Defaults Setting 164 Graph defaults 11 21 Options 165 setting 165 Graph dialogs Graph Properties 97 Graph Wizard 97 Graph page see page setting options 96 97 Graph page command creating files 448 449 printing to file 448 449 Graph pages creating 42 printing 50 selecting objects 98 Graph Properties dialog bar widths 224 customizing tick labels 395 data sampling 201 modifying graphs 189 190 modifying grids and planes 190 modifying ti
63. K Tab seta Tab Stop Right Indent The ruler indicates Usable page column width Default tabs User defined tabs Left and right paragraph indents VVVVY First line indent You also use the ruler to specify tabs and indents See Setting Tabs on page 432 and Setting Paragraph Indents on page 434 Setting Ruler Units Set ruler units using the Report Options dialog box see Setting Ruler Units on page 13 430 These settings apply to the current report as well as to subsequently created reports Showing and Hiding You can toggle ruler display by choosing View Report Ruler This command the Ruler hides or shows the rulers for individual reports Setting Tabs All tab stops appear on the report ruler The default tab stop is 0 25 regardless of the current units Tab stops made for individual and selected paragraphs and are saved with reports To set a tab 1 Select the paragraph s to change the tab stops 2 Click the ruler where you want to place a tab A tab marker appears at the clicked location 432 Using the Report Editor Ruler Figure 13 3 Setting a Tab Stop From the Ruler Figure 13 4 Set Tab Dialog Box Using the Report Editor 3 To move a tab drag the tab marker to another location on the ruler To delete nibh euismod ti fi cidunt ut laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volut enim ad minim weniam quis nostrud e nisl ut aliquip cersi tation ullamecoreper su Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adip
64. OK Changing Patterns and Fill Colors 219 Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments When using a Series of incremented symbols fills lines or colors you have defined the increment scheme is assigned to curves or points in the same order the columns plotted for the curves are listed in the Graph Wizard Figure 5 47 Bar Chart using Colors From a Worksheet Column To define and apply a series of incremented symbols fills lines or colors 1 View Worksheet 2 On the Insert menu click Graphic Cells The Insert Graphic Cells dialog box appears Figure 5 48 Using the Insert Graphic J Data 17 0f x E oia Custom Line Sequence 1 _ _ 2 ooo 3 4 26 B E E 305 1120 Insert Graphic Cells O Colors Lines Symbol Patterns B o q P Double click to 10 Insert into selected cell i i 12 et 13 ht 14 eh 3 Click the Colors Lines Symbols or Patterns tab 220 Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments Figure 5 49 Assigning Custom Symbol Colors in a Worksheet Column to a Plot Custom Solid and Hollow Symbols Using symbol types from a column specifies the symbol shape only If you want to change the symbol fills create another color column and use it as the symbol fill colors Typically white is used for hollow symbols and black for solid symbols Select the first cell in an empty column in the worksheet Double c
65. Position 329 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots center of the graph To move an axis out increase the percent To move an axis in decrease the percent 5 Click OK Modifying Radial Axes Lines and Position Control polar plot radial axes line settings using the Lines settings of the Graph Properties dialog box Axes tab Moving and To move a radial axis Positioning 1 Select the axis on the page Radial Axes 2 Use the mouse to drag it to a new location Radial axes rotate about the center of the graph like the spokes of a wheel To set radial axis positions to exact degree positions 1 Double click a radial axis The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 8 15 s Graph Properties x Graph Properties Dialog Box a a xl Axes Tab Lines Settings Plots Axes Graph Axis Apply to Radial Data Rename f Minor ticks EU i Showplace axes Line properties W Spoke 1 Color Black Thickness anes Axes start Pree Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Axes tab 3 Select Lines from the Settings For list 4 To move a radial axis under Show Place Axes move the sliders to set a new location The axis location is in degrees from 0 3 o clock The 330 Modifying Radial Axes Lines and Position Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots defaults are 0 90 180 and 270 5 To offset an axis from the center of the graph move the Axes Sta
66. Properties Font Paragraph Font NE z H Font Style eld Color mre S T Underline Preview AaBbYyZz Cancel Help To change the font style character size or color of text or to underline text click the Font tab If you have multiple text objects with different text properties selected the attributes that are not the same appear blank Do not select an attribute for these options unless you want it to be applied to all selected objects To change paragraph attributes including line spacing alignment or rota Working with Text on the Page 141 tion click the Paragraph tab Figure 4 45 Text Properties Dialog Box Text Properties Paragraph Tab Say Pesce Alignment Line Spacing fE 4 Rotation i Preview AaBbY ydr AaBbY ydr AaBbY yiz Cancel Help 5 Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box Working with Automatic Legends Legends work as a key for your graph They label what the different graph symbols lines or fills represent SigmaPlot automatically creates legends for all graphs always placing them below the graph on the left side Legend entries are labeled using the titles of the columns plotted if there are no column titles column numbers are used instead Move and modify legends as you would any other page object They also have a special set of controls and features This section describes how to modify and control these automatic legend f
67. Properties Plots tab Reference settings Reference lines can be used to draw lines at specific values to set quality control limits and specify other reference values y Bar and stacked bar charts automatically place a reference line at the zero value 412 Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines TTT ee Statistics Up to five reference lines can be added All lines can be drawn only horizontally or vertically as a set The Reference settings display the current calculation line type label and color for each line One set of five reference lines either horizontal or vertical can be drawn for each plot If you need more than five lines or need both horizontal and vertical lines you must create an additional plot For information on creating multiple plots see Adding New Plots on page 196 Figure 11 11 24 o Graphs Using 100 4 SD fp a ad ge is es a ete a seek cae atest esate Upper Specification Reference Lines 24 8 ai 18 S g 8 5 E Upper Control Line O O Q O 7 16 S o 60 S z z g g Mean a 8 g 5 Lower Control Line 40 9 12 20 oe EE E E Q eee ree errr Lower Specification ir ERTEN T T T 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Drawing To draw reference lines Reference Lines 1 Double click the plot to open the Graph Properties dialog box Figure 11 12 Graph Properties Graph Properties Dialog Plots Tab Plats Axes Graph Plot Plat 2 Rename Graph wizard
68. R values or X Y coordinates as you want to plot in worksheet columns SigmaPlot can also graph many curves using the same column as the 0 or R data or X or Y data There is no need to duplicate a column that is used for more than one plot for example enter the O data into only one column and enter the corresponding R or dependent data into as many columns as needed To create a polar plot l 2 Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data On the 2D Graph Toolbar click Polar Plot and then click the style of polar plot you want to create The Graph Wizard appears Graph Wizard Create Graph Angular Asis Units Select the units used for the angular anis i Range Lower Bound 0 Range Upper Bound a Hel Cancel Back Finish Choose a unit type from the Angular Axis Unit list The Range Lower Bound and Range Upper Bound options change depending on your selection from the list For more information on polar axes see Mod ifying Polar Axes on page 326 If you dont see the axis units you want to use for your polar plot listed in the list you can type the desired values in the Range Lower Bound and Range Upper Bound fields Click Next Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots 5 Select the appropriate data format from the Data Format list Figure 8 10 Enh ulead oe a Using the Graph Wizard to rap Zar reate brap Specify the Data Format How is your da
69. SPSS products Write to SPSS Inc Marketing Department Attn Director of Product Planning 233 South Wacker Drive Suite 1100 Chicago IL 60606 6307 Getting Technical Support 32 SigmaPlot Help The services of SPSS Technical Support are available to registered customers Customers may call Technical Support for assistance in using SPSS products or for installation help for one of the supported hardware environments To reach Technical Support see the SPSS home page on the World Wide Web at hitp www spss com or contact us In the U S Telephone 510 412 2900 8 00 A M to 5 00 PM Pacific Time Fax 510 412 2909 E mail scisupport spss com Mail 501 Canal Blvd Suite F Richmond CA 94804 2028 In Europe Telephone 49 2104 95480 Fax 49 2104 95410 Email scisupport spss com Mail Schimmelbuschstrasse 25 40699 Erkrath Germany Introduction Using This Manual The SigmaPlot User s Guide is designed to provide you with complete instructions on how to use SigmaPlot s advanced graphing features Referencing this manual along with SigmaPlot you can create a wide variety of publication quality scientific graphs on your IBM or compatible PC Conventions The following conventions are used in this manual gt New terms such as Graph Wizard are shown in bold italic the first time they are introduced gt Important notes or information in this manual are flagged with a 2 symbol The User s G
70. SigmaPlot by default automatically calculates axis ranges and enables each plot to contain separate X and Y axes Tick Marks Use both major and minor axis tick marks and grid lines Tick intervals length direction thickness and color are all adjustable grid line types are also adjustable Tick labels can be numeric time series or customized using labels in a worksheet column Axis Breaks You can specify an axis break with a different post break tick interval Generate legends automatically or ungroup legends and individually customize text labels Smooth sharp variations in independent values within 2D and 3D data sets using SigmaPlot smoothing algorithms New Features in SigmaPlot 8 0 11 Introduction sigmaPlot Worksheet Microsoft Excel Statistics Regression Wizard Transforms Drawing Tools Reports The SigmaPlot worksheet is capable of containing data up to 32 000 000 rows by 32 000 columns Enter data in columns or rows and perform calculations either row wise or column wise Worksheet cells within columns are adjustable and capable of calculating up to 21 significant digits Place labels customized fill colors and patterns and error bar direction codes into these cells in order to specify changes to graphs SigmaPlot uses automation communication standards to create and open Excel workbooks within SigmaPlot This functionality enables you to run transforms perform statistical tests and graph da
71. Solving Equations solving Equations Figure 5 66 Plot Equation Dialog Box Te Click Plot A graph page appears with the plotted equation and the equation values appear in the worksheet Click Close to close the Plot Equation dialog box Use the Equation Solver on the Plot Equations dialog box to evaluate mathematical expressions for functions and to solve equations The Equation Solver uses the expression entered in the Equation tab on the Plot Equations dialog box as the basis for its results This expression then appears on the Solve tab for evaluation To solve an equation l On the Graph menu click Plot Equation The Plot Equation dialog box appears Plot Equation Four Parameter Logistic Curve Equation Options Library Solve Equation Hame Four Parameter Logistic Curve f min max mir 1 E C50 Hillslope Vanables Mame Minimum M axinurn Intervals 2D p Jo 000000 5 000000 fioo ca M po po oo Click the Equation tab and enter an equation in the f box You can also select one of the last ten used functions from the Name drop down list or you can choose any of the built in parameterized equations used by the Regression Wizard Select these equations from the Library too To learn more about plotting saved equations see Plotting Saved Equations on page 231 To learn more about entering equations in the Plot Equation dia log box see Plotting and Solving Equat
72. T BA mrema TEA j il Parra z Te aem AI giui i er Cont 7 VEIM E ae Fat i g 5 Status Bar 9 M rT VT T T HA ES 14 Using SigmaPlot in Windows Introduction Using Toolbars Toolbars contain buttons for the most commonly used commands Figure 1 2 Standard Toolbar New Excel View View Graph Custom Stop Open Print Copy Redo Worksheet Data Statistics Wizard Zoom refresh i i i i i YY i t E E RO HME A Als Ol amp i 4 b 4 4 b 4 b 4 A 4 New Save Cut Paste Undo New New View Graph Zoom Help Refresh Notebook Worksheet Graph Page Properties Page Figure 1 3 Formatting Toolbar Increase Legend Font Italics Superscript Normal Align Left Align Right Rotation Space Symbol Y Y Y Alo ili gt es Y Y Y Y i Arial r3 7 BZU Ng t t t t t t A t y ill lt Style Bold Underline Subscript Greek Align Color Line Decrease Characters Center Spacing Space Figure 1 4 Ternary Horizontal 2D Graph Toolbar Line Plot Area Plot Plot Bar Chart Pie Chart i i f i 2D Graph x alll CED 2 la E i OD Scatter Plot Line Scatter Polar Plot Vertical Box Plot Plot Bar Chart Using Toolbars 15 Introduction Figure 1 5 3D Graph Toolbar 3D Scatter 3D Mesh Plot Plot A I Contour Plot 3D Line Plot 3D Bar Chart Figure 1 6 Page Toolbar The Page Toolbar parallels Select Object gt e T Text Graph Properties l functionality Draw Line gt s lt 4
73. To change the source template file 1 On the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears Arranging Graphs 141 Figure 4 41 Options Dialog Box General Tab 142 Arranging Graphs 2 Click the General tab Options worksheet Page General Macro Graph Defaults M Novice prompting IV Fast page open M Automatic legends IY Retain notebook settings IY Retain window states Percentile method O Fast 30 printing Standard E Backup files with extension NB Save AutoRecover info every f T minutes l New notebooks use Excel workbook Excel format Template file C Program Files SigmaPlot SPw8 Template int Browse Layout file C Program Files SigmaPlot SPw Lapout int Browse Gallery file C Program Files SigmaPlotSPw 8 Galler jgg Browse Author SigmaPlot 6 0 User Cancel Apply Help 3 Type the path and file name of the desired layout file in the Layout File field 4 Click OK The notebook becomes the default layout source Working with Text on the Page Editing Text Creating Text Labels Figure 4 42 Examples of Text Use the Page toolbar to add and edit text labels and legends to the graph page in addition to editing automatically created graph and axis titles SigmaPlot automatically creates legends for every plot You can modify the existing automatic legend by clicking the Text button on the Page toolbar and then edit the text using the Formatting
74. Use the Graph Properties dialog box to change error bar color cap width line thickness mean computation method and direction Note that you cannot select error bar values from this dialog box the Graph Properties dialog box only affects the appearance of error bars Determine error bar values when you pick data to plot To change error bar appearance 1 Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears Modifying Error Bars 253 Working with 2D Graphs 2 From the Settings For list select Error Bars Figure 6 23 Graph Properties Graph Properties Dialog Plots Tab Error Bar Setting Plots Aves Grids and Planes Title and Legend Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph Wizard Settings for Error bars Direction E ir both Black v Area Fills AF Positive no Error Bars aay 1 i Data point Cap width 21From columns o 067in l p T Negative Mean computation Cancel Apply Help 3 To change the color of the error bars from the Line Color list select a line color 4 To change line thickness and error bar cap width move the Thickness and Cap Width sliders 5 Click OK Changing Error Specify error bar direction using two different methods absolute and relative Bar Directions You can specify absolute error bars to point in either a positive or negative direction specify relative error bars to point either towards or
75. User s Guide Copyright 2002 by SPSS Inc All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of the publisher 1234567890 05 04 03 02 01 00 ISBN 1 56827 232 4 Contents PN TFO CU GHON corens a 9 New F aturesin SigmaPlot 8O saisan A 10 PES TAM SIGN PO raaa a a A 12 USING SIGMA OL MMV VIG OWS arire inn EE 14 USMO OOD ANS sseiciressiniasei did aaa ie oudiatuonetadaencadesnianeagnaeadanahiads 15 SEEING Program ODL OMS wari iteccnsseaatencanthinaitnudeiculvelcet wins lout i A 18 Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs ccc cccccccseceesseecesseeeesseeeecsseeeesseesessneeesneseenneeeens 22 IGM OL PIG D en mean atetecsaces cana eric ET 32 Getting Technical Sippo Msas a 32 USINO TA MADURAN wtar a E A a at 33 OFAC UNV cc Eo LiC aia a Stl abt en dte AA Oadacabb inet i 33 FCT ONO U COS ASIE EEEN EAE EEE E E ENEE eayseriuerdtecel Geadtonreatenres 34 NOtEDOOK BASICS srsrssreeisderanankui enne EEEIEE 37 SigmaPlot Notebook ol MUCTUNG scinsioni aa A 37 Managing Notebook Sections secssseesieeserssnrrssrnsnsnuuenrussnunennnunnnsrnnnrrnnsrnnnrrnnnsrnnnens 40 Creating New Notebook Files and Items ooo ccc cccesccccesseccsseeeeeseeeeeeeeserseeserseneeesaes 41 Renaming Notebook Files and Items 00 0 0 cccesccccsseec
76. Using a Enter labels into a row then use that row for worksheet column titles This is Worksheet Row _ useful for data imported or copied from spreadsheets for Column Titles All the cells of the selected row are promoted not just those cells which contain column titles This may effect other data sets in the worksheet To use a row for column titles 1 If necessary enter the column titles you want to use in a single worksheet row 2 Select the cells in the row you want to use as column titles 3 On the Format menu click Column and Row Titles The Column and Row Titles dialog box appears Figure 3 28 Using Row Contents as Column Titles a Variable A Variable B Variable C Variable C 1 00 3400 00 aooo a 100 Column and Row Titles x 5 00 Column Row 5 00 column 1 10 500 400 Title e Prev s Next gt 13 EO Promote row i to titles Promote I Delete promoted row Cancel Apply Help 4 Click the Column tab The row you wish to promote appears in the Promote row to titles box 5 To delete the original row once it has been promoted select Delete Promoted Row 6 Click Promote The selected row contents appear as column titles and the Column and Row Titles dialog box closes Using a Worksheet Enter labels into a column then use that column for worksheet row titles This is Column for Row particularly useful for data imported or copied from spreadsheets T
77. Word is not designed to handle HTML containing ActiveX references including graphs saved using HTML Do not edit HTML files in Microsoft Word You can secure your data for a graph you export to an HTML file by setting a password for viewers to enter when viewing this graph on the Internet Setting a password also prevents the opening and downloading of this file To set a password 1 On the Export Web Graph dialog box click Set Password The Set Password dialog box appears gld Password New Password ree Cancel Recontirn Jere When you export a graph to a web page you not only export the data for the graph but the entire worksheet as well This can be useful if you want to associate or display additional data for the graph However it can also increase the size of the JNB file which can slow viewing To export just the data associated with the graph 1 Select the graph on the page and copy it 2 On the Standard Toolbar click the New Page button The Graph Page dialog box appears asking if you would like to create a graph Graph Page E Do pou want to create a graph 3 Click No Publishing Graphs on the World Wide Web 355 Publishing Graphs 4 Paste the graph to the new page Now when you export this graph you will also only export the data associ ated with the graph Inserting a Graph After you ve exported a graph into HTML format you can import the graph into into FrontPage most HTML e
78. Z 4000PS1 2 columns in the Destination 2 6 00 worksheet 2 Select the column with the original X data from the worksheet or the Data Source list The selected column is assigned as the X Source in the Selected Columns list 3 Select the Y data source 4 Select the columns from the worksheet data 5 Select the X Y and Z data destination columns in the worksheet 6 Click Next 7 Select the type of scale from the Scale Type drop down list Normalize Ternary Data Column Picker Scale Type Percentage Scale 0 1 EDE G Select the scale For which you would like to normalize the data Unitary Scale 0 0 1 0 Percentage Scale 0 eae EB 1 Time 2 01 55 7200 Finish 8 Click Finish Ternary plot data set triplet or pair must be based on a percentage or unitary scale with the sum of all values being 100 or 1 If your data does not add up to 100 or 1 use the Normalize Ternary Data transform For more information see Normalizing Ternary Data on page 335 ee Figure 8 25 Selecting a Ternary Graph Data Format from the Graph Wizard Figure 8 26 Selecting Columns to Plot Using the Graph Wizard Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots To create a ternary plot l 2 2 Drag the pointer over your data to select the worksheet columns to plot On the 2D Graph Toolbar click Ternary Plot and then click the style of ter nary plot you want to create The
79. a olumns display the grid of Select the columns for your graph smoothed data agag gt Clicking ona worksheet Suface Data Column column selects that column column First Empty column First Empt 2 column First Empty n Plot to current ate Help Cancel 7 Back e Finish 2 Select Create a new graph to create a mesh plot using the grid of data which appears on the worksheet If you are creating a contour plot clear Create new graph and create the con tour plot manually For information on creating contour plots see Creating 426 Smoothing 2D and 3D Data 3 Figure 12 14 Selecting Smoothers from the Smooth 3D Data drop down list 4 Transform Basics Contour Plots on page 306 Select a smoother type from the Smoother drop down list Smooth 30 Data Smoothers OF lal Preview Cancel Sampling Proportion jo 5 4 Hel Polynomial Degree 1 Help Reject Outliers Description Local smoothing technique using polynomial regression and weights computed from the Gaussian density function Options PERE Set the Sampling Proportion a fraction of a total number of data points used to compute each smoothed value The Sampling Proportion depends on the Bandwidth Method To learn more about choosing a Bandwidth Method see page 427 Set the Polynomial Degree from the Polynomial Degree list if applicable Select Reject Outliers to reduce the effects of ou
80. a value to use for the error bars Symbol Value Choose either Column Means to use the column means as the error bar source Replicate Row Means to use the row means as the error bar source Worksheet Columns to use values you ve entered in the work sheet or 2 Worksheet Columns to read error bar end values from sets of two adjacent columns You are prompted during data picking to specify the col 178 Creating Graphs ee Creating and Modifying Graphs umn to use as error bar source data Figure 5 5 Specifying Error Bar Information Create Graph Error Bars Symbol Values How are the error bars computed Column Kedian m 7 4000 The symbol value is 7 6000 the median value of spit aN the column Error Calculation Upper 11an lees Standard Deviation n500 Majina 5 ADi 11 70 1 tier Standard Deviation 2 Standard Deviations 3 Standard Deviations Standard Eruh i 2 Standard Ertors Help Cancel 35 Confidence Error Calculation If you choose any option besides Worksheet Columns as the symbol value specify the error calculation method to use for upper and lower error bars 2 To learn more about creating plots with error bars see Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars on page 245 7 Click Next 8 Under Data format select how your data is formatted and click Next Figure 0 6 Create Graph Data Format Specifying the Data Format Data Format How iz
81. ae Color O Cyan W Snap to Cancel Apply Help Units Sets the unit of measurement for rulers on the graph page inches millimeters or points These units appear in the Graph Properties and Object Properties dialog boxes See Working with Page Objects on page 97 NT EE aaa Graph Page Basics Page Undo Select to make available the Undo and Redo commands for changes you make to the graph page Disabling Undo and Redo can speed graph page operations significantly however you cannot undo page editing Stretch Maintains Aspect Ratio Select to maintain the vertical to horizontal ratio of resized objects when dragging a selected graph with corner handles Clear to resize objects disproportionately Graph Object Resize with Graph Select to automatically resize objects axis labels tick labels the graph title and the automatic legend associated with the graph when resizing it Clear to size objects individually Show Rulers Select to display horizontal and vertical rulers at the page window borders on the top and left hand side of the page Clear to keep the rulers hidden Show Grid Select to display grids on the graph page as either dots or lines in units as specified in the Units scroll down list Clear Show Grid to keep the grids hidden Grid Density Sets the interval and spacing for both x and y grid directions You can choose a density value from the drop down list or enter any legitimate value Color Set
82. and OT TET Many Z Columns y z ze z3 Dee 1 00 2 00 3 00 1 00 2 00 1 0 2 00 1 a yo or Be te es a L l The X and Y data must be strictly ascending or descending Note that in this case you can use columns of uneven length Extra X Y or Z values created by uneven columns are not plotted as mesh plots cannot graph missing values Z Data vs Row and Column Numbers You can also plot columns as Z values versus the cell columns and row numbers as the X and Y values This is the appropriate column assignment option to use for mesh plots and 3D Bar Charts where X and Y values are evenly and equally spaced for example when graphing pixel intensity data for an image All data is assigned as a Z value and the Z columns must be contiguous To use this format for a mesh plot no special data arrangement is required other than 292 Arranging Data for Contour Plots and 3D Graphs Working with 3D and Contour Graphs equal column length The rows and columns of the cells can be used as either the X or Y values Figure 7 7 Mesh Plot Data Arranged as Z Data Versus Row z and Column Numbers A Sore 2 00 3 00 32 00 15 00 00 4 00 2300 o O 00 J Oo O71 Fe Oo Pa Creating 3D Scatter Plots and 3D Bar Charts 3D scatter plots can use any data format however 3D bar charts are limited to XY Many Z or Many Z only For more information on the available data formats for the graph you
83. and Time format 57 Date and Time formats 73 Date Time axis scale 365 Decimal places setting in worksheets 67 Defaults setting graph 165 Degrees of freedom 402 Delete Cells command shortcut 56 Delete shortcut 56 Deleting columns and rows 80 81 data 78 graph titles 125 legends 125 objects 125 plots 200 undoing delete 200 see also clearing Delimiter defined 483 Density changing pattern of plot fills 218 Index Design graphing references 34 principles of graphing 34 suggested reading 34 Digital pre press preparing graphs 356 Direction customized error bars 257 error bars 254 reference lines 414 Display formats Date and Time format 70 74 numbers 68 69 Displaying automatic legends 152 153 axes 370 contour fills 310 contour labels 313 316 contour lines 309 grid lines 399 outlying data 83 page margins 155 plots 200 reference lines 413 toolbars 15 17 Docking Graph Style Gallery 183 DOS shell defined 483 Dot plot horizontal data format 170 vertical data format 170 Double clicking opening Graph Properties dialog 192 dpi 359 Dragging 2D axes 371 defined 483 objects 131 radial axes 330 ternary axes 340 Drawing arrows 125 ellipses 125 lines 125 objects 12 125 Page toolbar 125 Drop lines adding to plots 226 227 attributes 227 defined 483 for single point 227 modifying 226 905 Index E E Notation Always display 68 E Notation When Needed disp
84. and enable the light source 1 Double click the plot Changing Graph Perspective Rotation and Shading 299 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 7 17 Graph P Graph Properties Dialog Box e a oil 3D View Tab Plots Aves Graph Rotation Settings Title E Graph 1 Rename W Show title Settings for Rotation Horizontal view Perspective 20 0 Ww ee 2 Click the Graph tab 3 From the Settings For list select Rotation This tab displays a Preview that shows how the current settings affect the selected graph 4 To rotate the graph move the Horizontal View and Vertical View sliders or type horizontal or vertical values into the boxes gt Horizontal and vertical values are in degrees Rotate the graph horizontally from 0 to 360 or vertically from 90 to 90 The recommended Horizontal View is 205 and the Vertical View is 25 The three solid red axes displayed in the Preview box of the 3D View tab are the origin axes for the rotation and are used as reference when determining the angles of rotation The rotation is displayed in the axes degrees from 0 The origin used to determine the degree from the horizontal or vertical is the intersection of the three axes When both rotation angles are set to 0 the origin as you see the graph is the left bottom rear corner 300 Changing Graph Perspective Rotation and Shading
85. and enables you to edit the object by activating the object s source application when you double click it but does not change the original file from which the object was pasted Encapsulated Postscript File EPS Encapsulated PostScript files are scalable line art graphic files Use this file format to export SigmaPlot graphs to other word processor and graphic applications To create an EPS file you must have a correctly installed Postscript printer driver supported by Windows Error Bar A graphical display of the data variability Error bar values can be automatically calculated through column averaging or they can be entered in the worksheet columns Error Bar Column A data column containing error bar values Error Bar Direction The error bar direction can be specified for each curve or for each data point within a curve These directions can be absolute always up or down relative toward or away from zero or both Excel Workbook The file format for Microsoft Excel which can be opened and used in its native format by SigmaPlot Exploding Pie Slice A slice in a pie chart that is separated from the rest of the chart for emphasis Exponent The power to which the base is raised See Base Export Save worksheet data or a graph page from SigmaPlot to a file for use with other programs Choose the File menu Export command to export files Fills Fills include pattern of lines and colors that fill bar chart bars pie chart slices
86. are making see the description of the graph type in SigmaPlot Graph Types on page 165 To create a 3D scatter plot or 3D bar chart 1 Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data 2 On the 3D Graph Toolbar click 3D Scatter Plot or 3D Bar Chart The Graph Wizard appears Figure 7 8 Specifying the Data Format Graph Wizard Create Graph How iz your data organized rr ne E z1 z2 z3 At least one Z column for scatter twa 2 columns required for mesh and contour 3 From the Data Format list specify how your data is formatted The data for mats available depend on the graph type you are making Creating 3D Scatter Plots and 3D Bar Charts 293 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 4 Click Next Figure 7 9 i Graph Wizard Create Graph Selecting Columns to Plot Data for First 2 Column 1 o plot Selected Columns by clicking the First 1 Column 1 column in the Last 1 Column 3 worksheet Since you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in the dialog box 5 Click Finish Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify the plot or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick different data columns for your plot or to add another plot to your graph For more information on making general modifications to your plot see Creating and Modifying Graphs on page 163 Creating Trajectory Plots Trajectory
87. area plot 1 Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data 2 On the 2D Graph Toolbar click Area Plot and then click Multiple Area plot The Graph Wizard appears Figure 6 48 C ROAT Graph Wizard Data Format ice A How iz your data organized i 3 ang 7 44000 75000 72000 One column and 3 96000 GEO 6 6000 at least one J samo 1mo 5 2000 column 4 34000 124000 10 a 5 1140 10S Bo 6 asmo 11 500 12000 7 SE S400 12 0000 BT gawu 390 a ran 8 Bt A 1 3 Ee Help Cancel Back Finish 3 From the Data Format list choose the appropriate data format and click Next Since you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in the Selected Columns list To change the selected data select the wrong entry in the Graph Wizard then choose the correct column from the worksheet You can also clear a column assignment by double clicking it in the Selected Columns list Figure 6 49 C n CEU Graph Wizard Select Data eee Data fore 4 Selected columns Select the column to plot by clicking Y Column 1 the column in the sde Column 2 worksheet a s Column 3 aa Column 4 Ree 76 00 PES 73 00 You can plot no more than 2500 data points per curve Creating Area Plots 273 Working with 2D Graphs 4 Click Finish to create the graph Figure 6 50 l l Example of a Multiple Area Multiple Vertical 4r
88. as a linked file object Percentage Scale A scale ranging from 0 100 as the absolute minimum and maximum used for ternary graphs Perspective A 3D graph view option controlling the apparent depth of the graph Use the Rotation settings of the 3D View panel in the Graph Properties dialog box to change a 3D graph s perspective Pie Chart A graph where each data point in a column is represented as a pie slice equivalent to its percentage of the total Plane See Backplane Plot The graphed results of paired sets of data columns 2D and 3D Cartesian plots can contain multiple curves and 2D and 3D Cartesian graphs can contain multiple plots Plots are created when you create a graph using the Graph menu Create Graph command or added to an existing graph using the Graph menu Add Plot command Each plot is also associated with a set axes All curves in a plot must use the same plot type See also Axis Curve Graph and Plot Type Note that 2D Cartesian 3D Cartesian polar ternary and pie charts are considered different coordinate systems See also Cartesian Polar Plot Ternary Plot Pie Chart and Coordinate System Point pt A unit of measure used in typesetting Seventy two points equal one inch Pointer The tool controlled by the mouse used to choose commands select dialog box options select data on the worksheet and select and modify page objects Sometimes called the cursor The pointer is usually arrow shaped On t
89. away from zero To change error bar direction 1 Double click the plot 254 Modifying Error Bars Figure 6 24 Graph Properties Dialog Plots Tab Error Bar Setting You can change the direction of the error bars by selecting a direction from the Error Bar Direction drop down list Figure 6 25 The bar chart on the left uses Y error bars with an absolute positive direction The bar chart on the right uses a relative direction away from zero S Working with 2D Graphs The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Grids and Planes Title and Legend Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph wizard Settings for v Area Fills Error bars Line on Color of ty ivon Black Thickness Cap width 0 067in ie a Mean computation Cancel Apply Help Click the Plots tab RH od ty both Error Bars oY From zero BEY Eo 3 me Reference bY posite a ss Drop Lines a From the Plot drop down list select the plot with error bars to modify From the Settings For drop down list select Error Bars Under Error Bars from the Direction drop down list select the direction of Y Select either X or Y Positive or Negative An X positive absolute direction always points right a Y positive direction always point up An X negative absolute direction always points left a Y negative absolute direc
90. box plot Turning on off axes 370 contour labels 314 contour lines 309 grids 399 insertion mode 58 plots 200 radial axes 330 333 radial labels 332 reference lines 413 tick marks 384 toolbars 15 17 Two dimensional see 2D at beginning of index Types graph 165 lines 214 U Ungrouping legends 153 objects text 135 Units of measurement page 156 157 Unpaired test 403 Unprotecting Excel workbooks 89 Updating object links 120 User defined command with bubble plots 280 Using templates 42 the equation solver 233 236 V Values angular 323 axis range 312 Index axis scale 312 362 bucket 405 minimum 64 minimum and maximum 64 minimum positive 64 missing 65 radial 323 Z data for contour plots 311 312 Values axis factors 391 labels 392 numeric labels 315 range 312 362 time and date 316 391 Variable bar widths 224 Vertical bar chart data format 166 Vertical dot plot data format 170 Vertical point plot data format 169 Video card requirements transparent mesh 495 View 3D graphs 299 View menu commands 103 drawing toolbar 125 full screen 103 zoom 103 Viewing axes 370 axis titles 376 377 column statistics 12 63 column statistics in Excel worksheets 91 contour lines 309 data for embedded graphs 188 full page 103 graphs 103 104 123 graphs on page 123 124 inserted objects as icons 119 linear regression results 408 notebook files 44 notebook items 44 object links 120 122 past
91. by typing the column title or column number in the Key Column box If you sort more than one column of data the key column is used as the sorting index for all other selected data The selected rows in any other columns are sorted according to the rows in the key column Select either Ascending or Descending to sort your data in order of increas ing or decreasing values Click OK to sort the data in place and close the Sort Selection dialog box Sorting Data 11 Worksheet Basics Cutting Copying Pasting Moving and Deleting Data Use the Edit menu commands to Cut Copy Paste and Delete a selected cell or block You can also use the Ctrl X Ctrl C and Ctrl V shortcut keys or the dh Ee toolbar buttons The Windows The Clipboard retains the last cut or copied objects Subsequent cuts or copies Clipboard overwrite the current Clipboard contents For information about the Clipboard see see Cutting Copying and Pasting Graphs and other Page Objects on page 111 Cutting and Copying Cut removes a selected cell or block from the worksheet and copies it to the Data Clipboard Copy copies data to the Clipboard without deleting it from the worksheet Pasting Data To paste data click or move the worksheet cursor to the cell where you want to paste the data or to the upper left corner of the block On the Edit menu click Paste click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar or press Ctrl V Any data in the Clipboard is placed in the
92. cally Incrementing Symbols on page 206 To learn about using custom incre Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options 205 ment schemes see Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments on page 220 Select Custom to open the Color dialog box to create or choose a custom color For more information see Using Custom Colors on page 158 S Hollow Symbols are symbols that use None as the fill color They are hollow that is they are composed of the edge lines only Lines error bars and graph background colors all show through unfilled symbols This is useful if you have many overlapping data points 8 To change the edge color of symbols from the Edge Color drop down list select a color or select to increment edge colors using the one of the incre menting schemes To turn off symbol edge color select None To learn more about automatically incrementing edge color see Automati cally Incrementing Symbols on page 206 To learn about using custom incre ment schemes see Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments on page 220 Use the Custom option to open the Color dialog box from which you can create or choose a custom color For more information on using custom col ors see Using Custom Colors on page 158 9 To control the color of symbol dots and crosshairs or of text used as sym bols see page 208 use the Edge Color option If a symbol is filled with black and has a black edge then dots and cros
93. compression formats available in Photoshop This means that SigmaPlot files will always be much larger than Photoshop files saved with the LZW compression 398 Submitting Graphs for Publication I ee About dpi Publishing Graphs algorithm Also SigmaPlot does not support Monochrome or Grayscale TIFF which are also proprietary export formats Opening and re saving a SigmaPlot file using LZW compression and the correct color mode can create dramatic differences in file size A 100 fold reduction in size is typical gt For color figures leave the figure as a CMYK TIFF but save it using LZW compression gt For grayscale figures change the Image Mode to Grayscale gt For black and white figures change the Image Mode to Duotone dpi dots per inch is a printer term and is often misleading dpi determines how many pixels are used to create the figure A more accurate term would be resolution You can increase the final dpi of a raster figure by shrinking it This creates more pixels within a smaller space increasing the dpi Most printed figures do not require a dpi higher than 600 for grayscale figures and 300 dpi for color figures The 1200 dpi number is for black and white figures only that have no half toning If you must produce a 1200 dpi figure you will have to do some post processing on your file in order make it palatable to the printer This can be beneficial if you must use TIFF file and have Photoshop Publicat
94. contour lines move the Thickness slider or type a new value in the Thickness box Click OK Adding Fills to To fill intervals between contour lines with colors Contour Plots 1 Figure 7 34 Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Contours Settings Plots AMES Grids and Planes Title and Legend Plot Plot 1 Rename Graph Wizard Settings For 310 Modifying Contour Plots Graph Properties Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears Contours Major Line Style Type none Color E Black Thickness 0 007in Cancel Apply Help Click the Plots tab Rainbow ruited yee Start Bottom From the Settings For list select Contours From the Contours drop down list select Major From the Color drop down list select from several predefined color schemes From the Fill Start drop down list set the direction of the contour fills The Working with 3D and Contour Graphs default direction is bottom That is the fill starts from the lowest z value You can also create filled contour plots automatically when you first create the graph You can either select the Filled Contour Plot style from the graph toolbar or choose Filled Contours from the Graph Wizard Modifying When you create a filled contour plot from the toolbar its fill colors are Interpolated Filled automatically interpolated and stretched to fi
95. create shading on your graph select Enable Light Source If the check box is cleared the light source is not applied to the graph 302 Changing Graph Perspective Rotation and Shading Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 2 Set your display to High Color 16 bit or True Color 24 bit for this feature to work properly You may check your system s color capabilities under the Windows Display Properties Settings Figure 1 24 Graph Page 1 Data 1 Of x The graph on the right has the light source option selected Dd 3D line and scatter plots are not affected by the light source option 7 To return to the 3D View settings you had before applying any changes click Revert to original settings 8 Click OK 3D Graph Axis Placement 3D axes are always at the following positions gt X bottom right front gt Y bottom left front gt Z left front Axis Placement When you rotate the view of a 3D graph SigmaPlot automatically repositions the During Graph visible axes to the front of the graph so that the axes do not become positioned Rotation behind the graph For more information on rotating 3D graphs see Changing Graph Perspective Rotation and Shading on page 299 3D Graph Axis Placement 303 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs Frame Lines for a 3D Graph Drawing Modifying Drawing a 3D graph frame completes the cube surrounding the plotted data and Hiding Normally these lines are hidden You c
96. down list of the Plot Equation dialog box Equations tab To plot an equation using the Library tab 1 With the worksheet in view on the Graph menu click Plot Equation Plotting and Solving Equations 231 Figure 5 64 Plot Equation Dialog Box Library Tab Figure 5 65 Plot Equation Dialog Box Equation Tab The Plot Equation dialog box appears Plot Equation Sigmoid 5 Parameter Equation Options Library Solve Equation category Select the equation to plot Exponential Decay Equation name Click the Library Tab Select an equation category from the Equation Category drop down list The items that appear in the Equation Category drop down list are sections in the Standard jfl library Below in the Equation Name list are items that appear under that section name in the notebook Select an equation from the Equation Name list Click Select The Equation tab appears with the selected equation displayed in the Name drop down list Plot Equation Triple 6 Parameter Equation Options Library Solve Equation iple amp Parameter f aexp b s c exp d q exp h s Varnables Name Minimum MM axinurn Intervals fe 2D p Jo 000000 fig o00000 fioo co M po po o 2 Some of the settings for SigmaPlot s built in equations in the Standard jfl library are read only To modify a built in equation click Add As to create an equation based on the built in equation 232 Plotting and
97. drop down lists To use values or text from a worksheet column enter the values or text in a worksheet column then from the Series list select the column containing tick labels To change the font size style or color of text labels click Font to open the Text Properties dialog box To learn about using the Text Properties dialog box to format text see Formatting Text on page 146 Click OK Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots This chapter describes procedures specific to pie charts polar plots and ternary plots To learn about making general graph modifications like changing symbols lines or fills see Creating and Modifying Graphs on page 163 This chapter covers VVVVVVVVVVVYV Creating pie charts see page 318 Changing pie chart slice settings see page 319 Creating polar plots see page 323 Basic polar plot attributes see page 325 Changing polar plot angular axis see page 327 Changing plot radial axes see page 330 Modifying polar plot radial axis tick marks and tick labels see page 332 Creating ternary graphs see page 334 Basic ternary graphs attributes see page 338 Moving ternary plot axis titles see page 339 Changing ternary plot axes ranges and scaling see page 340 Modifying ternary plot tick marks and tick labels see page 345 317 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots Pie Charts Figure 8 1 Pie Charts Arranging Data for a Pie Chart Figure 8 2 Arrangi
98. e e d e1 10 4 T T T T T T 7 P T T 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 X Data X Data Probability scale axes have no minor ticks but have three different settings for major tick intervals coarse medium and fine as well as the option to set tick intervals from a worksheet column To specify the tick mark density for probability scales l Double click the tick marks Changing Tick Mark Intervals 381 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Figure 10 23 Axes Tick Intervals Options for a Probability Axis Tick Intervals for Date Time Axes The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots kes Graph Axis Apply to Iv Data Rename t Major ticks Seth f Ei Direction Left F Outward Right none Tick lines Length 0 0500 Thickness ere Color Black Tick intervals Major tick density SS Scatter 2 co dau PIE Data Y Scatter 1 Y 1 Error 2 Click the Axes tab 3 From the Settings for list select Ticks 4 Under Tick Intervals from the Density drop down list select a tick mark density 5 Click OK SigmaPlot automatically sets both major and minor tick intervals that are computed from the data range You can also manually set Major Ticks and Minor Ticks To set tick intervals for a date time axis 1 Double click the tick marks The Graph Properties
99. enter extended characters like degrees symbols Alt 0176 6 Click OK Changing Date and To change the format of date time tick labels use the Graph Properties dialog Time Tick Labels box Entering values in these boxes is similar to entering date time values in the worksheet 392 Changing Tick Labels Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids To change date and time tick label format 1 Double click the tick labels of the axis you want to change The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 10 33 Graph Properties Changing Date Time Tick Labels Plats Axes Graph Axis Apply to Year Rename PE Major ticks Settings for Type Tall Tick label Font Lines Date and time label Fformat Sample 1996 4 0 Scaling Date Format 2 From the Settings For list select Tick Label 3 From the Apply To drop down list select either Major Ticks or Minor Ticks 4 Tochange the display Date format select a format from the list or use the following table to enter a new label using any additional characters as delim iters 1 e slashes commas spaces etc As you enter a different format the Sample window shows an example of the label Typing Displays M d yy No leading 0 for single digit month day or year MM dd yy Leading 0 for single digit month day or year MMMM Complete month dddd Complete day yyy or yyyy Complete year MMM Three letter month ddd Three letter day
100. for a Log Axis T The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Axis Apply to Iv Data Rename PF Miror ticks Settings f ee Tick lines Length Labele 0 030in F SESA a tnone 4 i Thickness eee a 007in K ele a L d 0 007 Tick Label aa ae ee none Black Tick intervals Minor tick intervals per major tick interval ys a a Breaks Cancel Apply Help Click the Axes tab From the Settings for list select Ticks From the Apply to drop down list select Minor Ticks Select all minor tick intervals you want to appear and clear those you want hidden Click OK Natural Log and Natural log and logit scales have only Automatic and from column Tick Intervals Logit Scales 380 Changing Tick Mark Intervals Figure 10 21 Tick Intervals for Natural Log and Logit Scales Tick Intervals for Probability Scales Figure 10 22 Coarse Medium and Fine Tick Intervals for Probability Scales Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Natural log intervals occur at every factor of e Logit ticks occur at 7 10 then every ten until 90 then 95 and 97 97 e10 95 4 o od op ee ie ong te W ss got w g 80 e8 e e S 9 g 704 ef o T a P e O i Q e e gt 504 Ce 09a P e3 o e 40 5 oo ALS C b e e 30 4 J e el 20 4 e e e e
101. graph see page 177 Creating graphs using the Graph Style Gallery see page 182 Creating and modifying embedded SigmaPlot graphs see page 186 Creating SigmaPlot Graphs as Embedded Objects in SPSS see page 188 Creating Graphs Using Excel see page 189 Naming a plot see page 192 and graphs see page 194 Modifying an existing graph s properties see page 190 Hiding and showing graphs and plots on the page see page 199 Plotting a restricted data range see page 201 Handling missing and out of range data see page 203 Changing scatter plot symbols see page 204 Changing line plot lines see page 213 Changing bar box and pie chart fill colors and hatching see page 216 Creating custom color symbol and line schemes see page 220 Changing bar and box plot widths and spacing see page 222 Adding and changing drop lines see page 226 Plotting and solving equations see page 228 A graph is a representation of selected worksheet columns on a graph page You select the representation or graph type for example 3D scatter plot vertical bar chart and so on when you create a plot or graph but you can change it at any time Most plot types can graph many worksheet columns column pairs or column triplets Depending on the plot type a separate curve or set of bars represents each column A graph must have at least one plot but most graphs can hold many more plots each with a different type and style 163 Cre
102. graph page select Add to current graph 230 Plotting and Solving Equations Setting Equation Parameters Figure 5 63 Plot Equation Dialog Box Options Tab Plotting Saved Equations and clear Create new graph 6 Click Plot The plot appears on the current graph 7 Click Close to close the Plot Equations dialog box All equations that you create or use from the Standard jfl library have editable parameters You can either enter the parameters or modify them using the Graph Equation dialog box Options tab To set equation parameters 1 With the worksheet in view on the Graph menu click Plot Equation The Plot Equation dialog box appears Plot Equation Sigmoid 5 Parameter Equation Options Library Solve Plot Results Add to current graph Columna V Create new graph Graph data column column First Empty y column First Empty Trigonometric units Degrees Click the Options tab In the Parameters box enter or edit the parameters 2 3 gt Enter parameters with the name of the parameter first followed by an sign and then the value i e a 3 or b 7 231 4 To assign a value to the next parameter press Enter 5 Click Plot to plot the equation Each equation you create is saved in the Standard jfl library Select the equation to plot from the Library tab of the Plot Equation dialog box You can also select one of the last ten equations plotted from the Name drop
103. in toward the center of the graph or both out ward and inward Select a clockwise counterclockwise both or 90 option to select the tick mark direction along the axis Select none to hide tick marks i L e 6 To change major tick intervals move the Major Tick Intervals slider To change minor tick intervals under Tick Intervals select a new Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick Labels 341 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots value from the Minor Tick Intervals drop down list Figure 8 39 0 0 Ternary Graphs with Tick Intervals NS E i of 15 and 30 i N Z Data z i j Y Data Z Data a Y Data 8 Click Apply 9 Use the Axis drop down list to modify tick marks on a different axis or use the Apply To drop down list to switch to modifying major or minor tick marks 10 Click OK Modifying Ternary To change tick mark display length color and interval Tick Mark Line 1 Double click the tick marks you want to change Appearance The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 8 40 Graph Properties Dialog Box eli eal Axes Tab Ticks Settings Plats Axes Graph Axis Apply to sos O o Beam 8 Minor ticks Settings for Tick lines Length O 0 048in ie Pee A ase Nake Meee pee tre eee eee eee pom Color Black Tick intervals Minor tick intervals per major tick interwal
104. le S L Corpi 4 Bier red Lira active items iz FT caa his sj Line hee i z Li ga j arg D ike Fiki a f Evengi t Pih ad Ce a i E bu ari Le Lhi mih er T Aes Del A lz L id Oe WSS lHoos x Erg Ett at mom k ka Fis STEL k E o m a 38 SigmaPlot Notebook Structure OT ee Notebook Item Names Notebook Basics The default startup notebook is named Notebook 1 It contains one notebook section Section 1 and one worksheet Data 1 When you save your notebook file the name of the file appears at the top of the notebook window Notebook files use a JNB extension The default names given to notebook sections and items are Section number Data number or Excel number and Report number Regression equations are named when they are created New items are numbered sequentially Worksheets Worksheets contain data you analyze and graph You can enter data paste it or import it from other sources You can also automatically generate data and place it in worksheet columns A worksheet automatically appears each time you start SigmaPlot You can also open or create additional worksheets any time from within SigmaPlot You can modify and manipulate worksheet data and appearance by using the functions described in see Using Transforms on Data in Excel Workbooks on page 93 SigmaPlot automatically calculates some basic statistical values for all worksheet colu
105. lines to the single point plot If you don t want the symbol to show for the point set the symbol type to None Spline Graph with Drop Lines Adding and Modifying Drop Lines 227 Plotting and Solving Equations Use the Plot Equation dialog box to create and plot equations defined using the Transform language You can use one of over 100 built in equations or create an equation of your own and save it to a notebook To create and plot an equation and save it to a notebook 1 With the worksheet in view on the Graph menu click Plot Equation The Plot Equations dialog box Equation tab appears either with Untitled or the name of the last used equation in the Name field Figure 5 58 RTT EE Plot Equation Dialog Box ot Equation Untitle x Equation Tab and Equation Options Library Solve Functions Palette l Equation Name i f jy Variables Mame Minimum M axinnumn Intervals CoD fs Jo coonoo fiooooooo fioo cap ooo feo sino 2 To manually enter the equation from the Name drop down list select Untitled 3 If necessary delete the existing equation in the f field and then either type the equation or click the Functions Palette button to open the Functions Palette The Functions Palette provides immediate access to some of the most frequently used functions You can also select one of the last ten used functions from the Name drop down list To learn more about
106. lists 5 To apply the row and column formats to the whole worksheet select Apply to Enter Worksheet 74 Displaying Worksheet Data Worksheet Basics Figure 3 17 Format Cells The Format Menu Cells dialog box Rows and Data Rows and Columns Columns tab Size Column width E Characters Row height i 4 Points Worksheet Selected region feo J rowy 7 colit row 1 T Apply to all cells with data Cancel Apply Help 6 Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box The worksheet appears with new column and row sizes for the selected cells Changing Graph Setting row height and column width from the Format Cells dialog box only Appearance changes the selected block of data Set row and column defaults on the Appearance tab in the Tools menu Options dialog box For more information see Sizing Columns and Rows on page 66 selecting a Block of Data There are several ways to select a block of worksheet cells You can Drag the mouse over the desired worksheet cells while pressing and holding down the left mouse button Selecting a Block of Data 75 Worksheet Basics gt Hold down the Shift key and press the arrow PgUp PgDn Home or End keys Use the Go To command see page 56 Figure 3 18 Selecting a Block of Data in the Worksheet E Population Sa B de on lille 4 00 5 00 6 00 OO 41 m n i e To select an entire column 1 Mo
107. many X replicates or single Y many X replicates SigmaPlot Graph Style 169 Line Plots 170 SigmaPlot Graph Style ew BY RY eS Vertical Dot Plot Hori zontal Dot Plot Simple Straight Line Multi ple Straight Lines Simple Spline Curve Multi ple Spline Curves Simple Vertical Step Plot Multiple Vertical Step Plot N O Creating and Modifying Graphs Plots a column of data as Y values Format data columns as many Y single X many Y or XY pairs Plots a column of data as X values Format data columns as many X single Y many X or YX pairs Plots a single set of XY pairs connect ing the data points with straight lines Format data columns as XY pair single X or single Y Plots multiple sets of XY pairs con necting the data points with straight lines Format data columns as XY pairs many X many Y single X many Y or single Y many X Plots a single set of XY pairs connect ing the data points with a spline curve Format data columns as XY pair single X or single Y Plots multiple sets of XY pairs con necting the data points with spline curves Format data columns as XY pairs many X many Y single X many Y or single Y many X Plots a single set of XY pairs connect ing the data points with vertical and horizontal lines starting with vertical Format data columns as XY pair single X or single Y Plots multiple sets of XY pairs co
108. mesh plot 167 3D scatter plot 166 box plots 166 contour plot 166 horizontal bar chart 166 line and scatter plot 166 pie chart 166 polar plot 166 ternary 166 vertical bar chart 166 Graph types defined 485 Graph Wizard 177 additional axes 283 Index area plots 266 271 bubble plots 282 changing graph type style 195 196 creating 3D graphs 293 296 creating mesh plots 297 multiple plots 283 selecting graph styles 11 Graphic file formats see file formats Graphs 2D example 23 27 3D example 28 30 adding drop lines 226 227 adding plots 197 198 adding to page 102 103 aligning 135 136 anatomy of 22 28 arranging 137 142 asymmetric error bar plots 242 automatic legends 148 153 axes 303 box plots 268 centering 135 136 column averaged error bar plots 242 contour plots 27 317 338 copying 111 creating 163 194 cutting 111 data format for graph styles 167 177 data format for graph types 165 defaults setting 165 displaying automatic legends 151 153 editing in other applications using OLE2 112 121 grid lines 399 grouped bar charts 261 262 grouping ungrouping objects text 135 hiding 123 hiding automatic legend 151 153 hiding graph titles 124 hiding on page 123 124 hiding using shortcut menu 123 hiding displaying plots 200 legends 143 line scatter 487 491 modifying 163 194 modifying 2D plots 407 414 modifying 3D plots 287 306 modifying type style 195
109. new worksheets 41 defined 488 naming 43 opening 44 saving 46 template notebook files 108 123 viewing 44 Notebook items 43 cutting copying between notebooks 45 exporting as non notebook files 46 48 naming 43 opening 44 Index printing 49 printing selected notebook items 51 saving 46 viewing 44 Novice prompting defined 488 Options 18 Nudging graphs and objects 134 Numbers display formats 68 69 Options 18 Numeric axis values factoring out 391 Numeric data converting to date and time data 73 Numeric values changing contour labels 315 316 tick labels 315 0 Object Properties dialog 96 axis attributes 373 specifying location 133 specifying size 133 Object Properties dialog box modifying line 128 Objects aligning 12 135 136 breaking links 121 Change background color 127 change color of fill pattern lines and edge lines 128 Change fill patterns 127 changing source files for links 121 copying 111 cutting 111 displaying as icons 118 119 Dragging 131 drawing 12 125 editing linked 113 122 editing links 121 embedding 113 122 fills 127 erouping ungrouping 135 inserting from file 119 inserting linked objects 120 inserting new 119 linking 113 122 modifying 127 131 modifying object links 120 122 mouse using to size 132 moving 131 133 moving front back 134 515 multiple selection 131 pasting as linked embedded 118 pasting as specified file type 118 pasting to a page 112 122 posit
110. number of degrees the origin axes are from the absolute 0 0 0 origin Use the Rotation settings in the 3D View panel of the Graph Properties dialog box to change the rotation of a 3D graph See also Origin Axes Rotation Text See Orientation Text Scatter Plots A plot type where a symbol represents each data point Scatter plots are 2D or 3D Cartesian graphs using a scatter plot type Select the plot then use the Graph Wizard Modify Plot dialog box to change a plot to a scatter plot See also Line Graph and Plot Type Scheme Symbols lines colors and fill patterns can be sequenced by using schemes Schemes can be customized by right clicking the property options list then selecting First from the popdown menu to specify the order of the sequence Schemes can also be created by entering graphic cell codes into a worksheet column Scientific Notation A form for expressing numbers using the letter e to represent the power of 10 For example the scientific notation for 10 0is 1X10 491 Glossary Scroll Box A dialog box option containing a list of items You can scroll up or down to reveal more selections Selected scroll boxes have a scroll bar appearing along the right side You can use the mouse to drag the scroll bar up or down or click the up and down arrow buttons Section Sections are a subdivision of the notebook file which is a compound file used to save all data and graphs in SigmaPlot Notebook sections ar
111. ofthe data Other 0 0000 0 0000 SS a ofl Repeat the copy and transpose paste procedure for the remaining sets of bars Each pair of mean and standard deviation columns you create adds an addi tional bar to each group 264 Grouped Bar Charts Working with 2D Graphs 7 To plot the results on the 2D Graph Toolbar select a vertical or horizontal bar chart graph type with grouped error bars then select the desired data for mat If you already have a graph repick the plotted data by selecting the plot to modify then clicking the toolbar EN button 8 If you select X Many Y as the data format pick your constant value column either a row number or a single column then pick the first column of means as your data column and the first column of standard deviations as the asso ciated error bar column 9 Continue picking the mean columns and error bars for each set 10 Click Finish when done Figure 6 38 Picking Data to Plot fora Grouped Bar Chart with Error Bars OO gt m OT A dl Pa Creating Box Plots 13 14 17 3333 20 1010 17 5 21 6007 Sn bom eee 23 2000 218 8314 56 5020 121 1873 165 2117 Reel 69 0667 192 1307 49 6079 106 4007 147 6075 5 0000 Graph Wizard Create Graph column to plot by clicking the column in the O Hep Cancel Back Next Data for Error 3 Column 18 Selected Columns Error 1 Column 14 Sete Column 15 Error 2
112. or show graph titles and automatic legends to hide or show plots and to make modifications to automatic legends click the Graph tab and under Settings for click Legends To apply your changes click Apply or click OK to apply your changes and close the Graph Properties dialog box Creating and Modifying Graphs Selecting a Graph or a Plot To select a graph or plot 1 View the page window 2 On the Tools menu click Select Object A check mark appears next to the menu command Figure 5 17 Tools Graph Statistics T On the Tools menu click Select Object to select Text Ctrl T objects on the graph page Draw Box Draw Ellipse Draw Line Draw Arom Macro Options 3 Place the pointer over the desired graph or plot and click Figure 5 18 zl Graph Page 2 Data 17 OF x Small square handles Surround selected graphs Selecting a Graph or a Plot 191 Se E Creating and Modifying Graphs A selected graph is surrounded by small square handles A selected plot is indicated with handles at each deadpanning or in the case of meshes four handles surrounding the mesh Alternative Method As an alternative method to select a graph on the Graph menu click Select graph and then click the name of the graph Figure 5 19 To select a graph on a page Graph Statistics Transforms Toolbox Pharmacology Window Help Create Graph Fa on the Graph menu click Graph Style Gallery Selec
113. page 253 To learn about repicking data for an existing plot see Picking Different Data for the Current Plot on page 194 Creating A quartile plot is an asymmetrical error bar plot that divides the total sample of a Quartile Plots frequency distribution into four quarters The median of the data is the data point while the 75th and 25th percentiles of the data represent the upper and lower error bars Figure 6 20 Example of a Quartile Plot oo Cuartile Plot i 4g a T Eh a a0 i amp 20 f 3 amp 7 1 w e r To create a quartile plot 1 Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer over your data 2 On the graph toolbar click Scatter Plot and then Multiple Scatter Error Bars The Graph Wizard Create Graph dialog box appears 250 Creating 2D Plots with Asymmetric Error Bars Le Creating Plots with Bi Directional Asymmetrical Error Bars 2 Figure 6 21 Select Bidirectional Asymmetric from the Graph Styles list to make a bi directional asymmetric error bar plot Working with 2D Graphs 3 Select Column Median from the Symbol Value drop down list 4 Select 75th Percentile from the Error Calculation Upper drop down list 5 Select 25th Percentile from the Error Calculation Lower drop down list 6 Click Next The Graph Wizard prompts you to select a data format 7 Select X Many Y from th
114. path and file name of the template file for SigmaPlot to use when creating new graph pages Available templates are displayed in the Templates dialog box For more information on applying and using templates see Using Graph Pages as Templates on page 105 Layout File Type the path and file name of the layout template file for SigmaPlot to use when arranging graphs on a page Available layout templates are displayed in the Arrange Graphs dialog box For more information on arranging graphs see Arranging Graphs on page 137 Gallery File Type the path and file name of the Graph Style Gallery file for SigmaPlot to use when creating graphs using the Graph Style Gallery Available graph styles are displayed in the Graph Style Gallery For more information the Graph Style Gallery see Creating Graphs Using the Graph Style Gallery on page 182 Author Select and type your name or any other name you want to appear in the Summary Information as Author for a selected notebook item The name in this box is used by SigmaPlot as the default but can be changed for individual documents by choosing Summary Info from the File menu 20 Setting Program Options ae Introduction The Graph Graph defaults control attributes that are applied to all new graphs including Defaults Tab 7 Size and Position gt Font gt Settings for Symbols Lines and Bars To learn about graph defaults see Graph Page Basics on page 95 Figure 1 11 Options Graph Defaults
115. plots use an XYZ coordinate system to create a 3D line plot To create a trajectory plot 1 Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data 2 On the 3D Graph Toolbar click 3D Line Plot and then 3D Trajectory The Graph Wizard appears Since you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in the Selected 294 Creating Trajectory Plots Working with 3D and Contour Graphs Columns list Figure 7 10 Graph Wizard Create Graph Graph Wizard Select Columns Panel Data for es 2 Column 1 2 Select the column to plot Selected Columns by clicking the 1 Column 1 column in the 4 1 Column 2 worksheet Z 1 Column 3 3 Click Finish Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify the plot or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick different data columns for your plot or to add another plot to your graph For more information on making general modifications to your plot see Creating and Modifying Graphs on page 163 Creating Waterfall Plots 3D waterfall plots are stacked line plots along the Y axis Because hidden lines are eliminated waterfall plots are useful for showing trends of line plots Figure 7 11 Waterfall Plot Data 40 m S Dy ty i F 3D waterfall plots are limited to Many Z and XY Many Z data formats For more information on the available data formats for the graph you are making see the description of the gr
116. point sizes For a full page graph you don t want to use point sizes smaller than 24 points gt Don t use too many different colors and watch your color combinations Don t use red and green together since many people are red green color blind and don t use red and blue together because the human eye has difficulty focusing on both unless you are trying to achieve a 3D effect gt For slides a dark background such as black dark gray or dark blue creates the best effect Use light colored lines and text when you have a dark background For changing the background color choose File Page Setup see Changing Page Color on page 157 gt For publications that accept color graphs a light graph background color sets off the graph from the page For changing the background color choose File Page Setup for more information see Changing Page Color on page 157 For other principles of graphing you can refer to the resources listed under References on page 34 Printing to Files SigmaPlot can print pages to a disk file using any available Windows printer drivers including PostScript using a PostScript printer driver and HPGL using any Hewlett Packard plotter driver PostScript files are required by many digital typesetters and slidemakers and HPGL files can be imported into many word processors desktop publishing and drawing applications You can also create any other kind of printer file that can be printed at a l
117. standard deviation of the mean It is the sample standard deviation divided by the square root of the number of samples For sample standard deviation s StdErr n 95 Conf The value for a 95 confidence interval The end points of the interval are given by s stilt z n where x is the mean s is the sample standard deviation and t v z the t statistic for v n 1 degrees of freedom and z 1 96 standard normal percentile equivalent 99 Conf The value for a 99 confidence interval The end points for this interval are computed from the equation for the 95 confidence interval using z 2 576 Size The number of occupied cells in the column whether they are occupied by data text or missing values Sum The arithmetic sum of the data values in the column Min The value of the numerically smallest data value in the column ignoring missing values Max The value of the numerically largest data value in the column Min Pos The smallest positive value 64 Descriptive Statistics for Worksheets Statistics Options Figure 3 10 The Statistics Options Dialog Box Worksheet Basics Missing The number of cells in the column occupied by missing values denoted with a double dash symbol Other Either text or an empty cell To display only a portion of the available statistics use the Worksheet Options dialog box then select column statistics to show or hide For more information on chan
118. the graph until they are grouped with the graph see Grouping and Ungrouping Objects on page 135 for more information Use the Page toolbar to quickly and easily access Tools menu commands To learn about viewing hiding and positioning toolbars see Viewing Toolbars on page 16 H Graph Page 1 Data 1 Drawing Objects on the Page 125 Graph Page Basics The drawing tools on the Page toolbar buttons are i Select Object Use the Select Object button to select objects on the graph page z Draw Line Click this button to draw a line on the graph page T Draw Arrow Click this button to draw an arrow on the graph page m Draw Box Use the Draw Box button to draw a box on the graph page oO Draw Ellipse Click this button to draw an ellipse on the graph page Text Click this button to add text labels or manually created legends to the graph page Drawing Objects To draw an object 1 Click a drawing tool on the Page toolbar or choose a drawing command from the Tools menu 2 The pointer has a crosshair appearance when over the graph page Place the pointer over the page where you want the object to begin press and hold down the left mouse button then drag the pointer to draw the object 3 Release the mouse button to finish drawing the object 126 Drawing Objects on the Page Modifying Object Colors and Lines Use Format menu commands or double click selected objects to modify line type thickness
119. the plot to open the Graph Properties dialog box The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Grids and Planes Title and Legend Plot Pact SSS Rename Graph Wizard Settings For Handling Outhers Show each outlier Bos Flot Wean Line l Display Mean Line Line Type Solid Thickness _ 0 007in Color Black p 200in Cancel Apply Help Click the Plots tab From the Settings For list select Box Options To display a mean line in addition to the median line under Box Plot Mean Line select Display Mean Line If the check box is clear the mean line is not displayed To modify the mean line under Box Plot Mean line from the Line Type drop down list select a mean line type Select a line thickness and color using the Thickness and Color options Selecting None from the Line Type or Color lists creates a transparent mean line Selecting Custom from the color list enables you to use a custom mean line color or to create a new color Creating Box Plots 267 Working with 2D Graphs To change how outliers are handled from the Handling Outliers drop down list select either Show Each Outlier to plot outside the 10th and 90th percentiles or Show 5th 10th Percentiles to plot only the 5th and 95th per centiles as symbols At least six data points are required to compu
120. the worksheet Click Close to close the dialog box Plotting and Solving Equations 229 If desired you can add plot an equation and add it to the existing graph or plot a new equation on a new graph page Plotting Equations Use the Plot Equation dialog box to plot equations onto existing graphs This is onto Existing Graphs especially helpful if you want to see how the curves change by modifying the parameters To plot the equation 1 Select the graph 2 On the Graph menu click Plot Equation The Plot Equation dialog box appears Figure 5 61 i i Plot Equation d 5P t x Plot Equation Dialog Box ot Equation Sigma arameter x Equation Tab Equation Options Library Solve Equation Name Sigmoid 5 Parameter Sigmad 5 Parameter 1 Pararneter Minimum M asimum Intervals Co fa Jo coocoo fio oooooo fioo aw ooo feo sino 3 Either manually enter the equation in the f edit box or choose an existing equation or use the same equation as used previously if you want to change the parameters 4 To set the equation parameters click the Options tab To learn more about setting parameters see page 231 Figure 3 62 Plot Equation Triple 6 Parameter Plot Equation Dialog Box Options Tab Equation Options Library Solve Plot Plot Results M Add to current graph Columns Graph Data Column x column First Empty y column First Empty 5 Ifyou don t want to create a second
121. to rename 4 Click Rename Figure 5 21 Rename ltem Type a new name for the a Please provide a new name For Plot 2 plot in the Rename EN Item dialog box W Fancy Plot The Rename Item dialog box appears 5 Type anew name 6 Click OK The Rename dialog box closes 7 Click OK to close the Graph Properties dialog box Naming Plots 193 Creating and Modifying Graphs Naming Graphs The default graph names are numeric and include the graph type for example 2D Graph 1 2D Graph 2 and so on To assign a new name to a graph l 2 Double click the graph title that appears above the graph to select it Type the new name making any font changes as necessary using the Format Text Toolbar Click OK Picking Different Data for the Current Plot Figure 5 22 The Graph Wizard displays the available Data Formats for the current plot 194 Naming Graphs To change data columns for an existing plot iF Click the plot to modify Square handles appear over the data points for the clicked curve Do not click the graph or you will add a plot to the graph On the Standard toolbar clicking the Graph Wizard oh toolbar button The Graph Wizard appears Graph Wizard Modify Plot How is your data organized ix 7500 3 One column GEMI SE one Y column 11 7000 12 4000 10 5000 11 9000 i z 3 4 5 a a Under Data Format select a data format and click Next If you did not c
122. to see a preview of the graph If the preview is not satisfactory adjust the Smoother settings and options and click Preview again Each time you preview the settings are stored for subsequent review by clicking the right and left arrows 2 Click OK to accept the preview The the graph appears and the worksheet now contains the results of all selected computations Click the red Stop button at the bottom of the Smooth 3D Data dialog box to stop the process 428 Smoothing 2D and 3D Data 1 3 Using the Report Editor The SigmaPlot Report Editor is a text processor for annotating and documenting your graphs and data The Report Editor features a complete text editor and OLE2 insertion and editing It is also used by the Regression Wizard to report regression results This chapter covers Creating new reports see page 429 Setting report view toolbar and ruler options see page 430 Setting the margins and paper size for a printed report see page 430 Using the ruler see page 432 Setting tab stops see page 432 Indenting paragraphs see page 434 Changing text appearance and paragraph alignment see page 435 VVVVVVVY Inserting the current date and time see page 436 Creating Reports Create reports using the New command see Modified Notebook Items on page 38 or the Regression Wizard To create a new report gt Right click the section in the notebook where you want to create the report and on the
123. toolbar To learn more about the Page toolbar see The Page Toolbar on page 125 You can format tick and contour labels but you cannot edit their content To learn about formatting text see Formatting Text on page 146 For information on modifying Automatic Legends using the Graph Properties dialog box see Working with Automatic Legends on page 148 You can add an unlimited number of text labels and legends to any graph page SigmaPlot for Windows supports gt All TrueType PostScript and other fonts installed on your system gt Miultiple lines of text aligned left right or centered with adjustable line heights Mixed fonts and other attributes within a single label Multiple levels of superscripting and subscripting Rotation of text in single degree increments VVVY Color using up to 16 7 million different combinations of red green and blue El Graph Page 3 Data 1 OR x SigmaPlot provides powerful graphing capabilities You can enter YPESK letters and symbols like De superscripts You can use and subscripts and use multiple uge Of Scripts se ae x rotated in Text can be Working with Text on the Page 143 To create text labels or legends on a page 1 Select and view the page window then click the il button on the Page toolbar This places you into text mode until another mode or tool is selected 2 Click the page where you want the label to begin A text box appears 3 S
124. use to create new pages with specific attributes You can also create your own page templates and save them in a Template Notebook file JNT or use a graph page as a template by copying it into a different section The SigmaPlot Notebook Template file TEMPLATE JNT is located in the program directory Use the File menu New command to create pages from these templates Ternary Plot A graph that plots the proportions of three values on using three axes The proportion that each value is equal to its percentage of the whole and coordinates for each data point on the graph add up to 100 t Test A statistical test used to determine if there is a difference between the means of two samples Also called Student s t test Use the Statistics menu t test and Paired t test commands to perform a t test for two worksheet columns Text Box A dialog box option used to enter text information such as file names or values 493 Glossary Text File A plain text file format widely used by word processing desktop publishing and spreadsheet programs SigmaPlot can import and export text files Tick Labels Labels usually numeric which appear next to axis tick marks indicating the value of each tick Alphabetic characters can be added as prefixes or suffixes to the numbers You can also use date and time category or series labels Choose the Tick Labels settings of the Axes panel in the Graph Properties dialog box to modify tick la
125. with the minimum range value set at 0 001 and the maximum range value set at 99 999 The default range depends on the range of the actual data Probit A scale similar to the probability scale the Gaussian cumulative distribution function plots as a straight line on a probit scale The scale is linear however with major tick marks at each Normal Equivalent Deviation N E D X u o plus 5 0 At the mean X U the probit 5 0 at the mean plus one Changing Axis Scales 363 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Figure 10 3 Graphs of the Same Data Using Linear Probability and Probit Scales Figure 10 4 A Graph Showing the Category Scale 364 Changing Axis Scales standard deviation X U the probit 6 0 etc The default range is from 3 to 7 The range limit for a probit axis scale is to 9 120 99 999 99 99 100 99 9 8 99 80 60 70 4 30 40 A 10 4 4 20 4 pal 0 0 1 4 2 0 01 T T T T T 0 001 T T T T T T T T T T 4 2 0 2 4 4 2 0 2 4 4 2 0 2 4 Logit Uses the transformation hoyit w ay where a 100 and 0 lt y lt 100 The default range is 7 to 97 Like the probability and probit scales the logit scale straightens a sigmoidal curve Category A scale which uses numerical values or text from a worksheet column used to generate a plot Each distinct entry in the column is a separate category against which the corresponding data
126. with error bars Format data col umns as many X or single Y many X Error bar values are column means Plots data XYZ values in 2D space Format data columns as XYZ triplet many Z or XY many Z Plots data XYZ values in 2D space fill ing in the area between contour levels Format data columns as XYZ triplet many Z or XY many Z 3D Line Plots Creating and Modifying Graphs 3D Tra Plots data as XYZ data points con ia jectory nected with lines fl 3D Plots data as XYZ data points but only Water displays X or Y gridlines Format data as fall many Z or single XY many Z Creating Graphs Using the Graph Toolbar to Create Graphs Figure 5 2 2D Graph Style Toolbar Create a Graph Using the Graph Wizard Create graphs using either the Graph Wizard graph toolbar buttons or the Graph Style Gallery To learn how to create graphs using the Graph Style Gallery see Creating Graphs Using the Graph Style Gallery on page 182 If you want to select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph drag the pointer over your data You do not have to select data before you start a graph you can select the columns to plot during graph creation To create a graph using the graph toolbar 1 Select the desired graph type from the graph toolbar If you selected to create a graph type that has more than one style a graph style toolbar appears 2D Graph 2 Select a graph style The Graph Wizard a
127. worksheet Moving Data Move a block of data by cutting it selecting the upper left cell of the new location then pasting the block To learn more about inserting and deleting entire blocks of data see the following section Inserting Blocks of Cells Columns and Rows of Data on page 78 Deleting Data Use the Clear command to permanently erase selected data This operation does not copy data to the Clipboard and is faster than cutting Inserting Blocks of Cells Columns and Rows of Data You can insert blank blocks cells rows and columns into the worksheet and fill them with data If you re moving and copying cells you can insert them between the existing cells to avoid pasting over data To insert a column row or blocks of cells into the worksheet 1 Drag the mouse over the region where you want the empty block of cells col umn or row to appear The selected region of cells indicates exactly which cells will be inserted 2 On the Insert menu click Cells 78 Cutting Copying Pasting Moving and Deleting Data Figure 3 20 Inserting an Empty Block of Data in the Worksheet Figure 3 21 The Result of Inserting an Empty Block with Cells Shifted Down Using the Shortcut Menu to Insert Data Worksheet Basics The Insert Cells dialog box appears E Population 3 1 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 4 00 2 010 4 00 3 3 50 4 00 4 6 00 a 5 00 B 5 00 f g OO DO FO T 10 E E E 11 C 12 o o O Insert Cells
128. you have questions about the number of users allowed on your site you can contact SPSS at Telephone 510 412 2900 Fax 510 412 2909 To resolve the error when NOT running from a network 1 Check to see if you have another instance of SigmaPlot running on your sys tem by viewing the windows task list In Windows NT press Ctrl Esc and on Windows 95 press Ctrl Alt Del 2 Check to make sure that you filled in the registration information because SigmaPlot will not run if you have not entered your registration number Instead an error message like unable to initialize properly too many users or SigmaPlot is not properly registered will appear If you have entered the registration information but somehow the file got corrupted or tampered with you can delete the file USERDATA TXT from the application directory and then double click on the SigmaPlot Registra tion icon to re enter the data 3 Exit and Restart Windows Troubleshooting Resolving Printing Problems Common Printing Problems Problem My Hewlett Packard Deskjet 600c prints text characters too far apart with a space between each pair of characters Explanation This printer driver uses 2 cartridges one for black and the other for color The black cartridge supports three different resolutions Best 600x600 Normal 600x300 and Econo 300x300 The color cartridge always prints at Econo 300x300 independent of the black settings Solution
129. you want to align selected objects relative to each other Each Other moves aligned objects with respect to the last selected object which remains in a fixed position The last selected object can be distinguished from other selected objects by solid rather than hollow selection handles 5 To align objects relative to the page margins rather than the page edge select Page Margins If you select Page Margins objects will not move with respect to each other You can select Page Margins to place single objects To set margins for each page on the File menu click Page Setup 6 Click OK Working with Grids and Rulers Use grids and rulers to quickly and easily align graphs and objects on the page You can show or hide grids and rulers from the Tools menu Options dialog box View menu or you can right click the graph page to open the shortcut menu Although visible on the screen they do not print with the page Control the grid and ruler attributes using the Tools Menu Options dialog box 136 Working with Grids and Rulers Using Rulers Using Snap to Using Crosshairs Rulers are optionally displayed at the top and left hand side of all graph pages They display the current units set in the Tools menu Options dialog box You can choose between inches centimeters or points You can use Snap to if the grids are displayed or hidden Select Snap to in the Tools menu Options dialog box or right click the graph page and on the shortc
130. 0 50 00 ezo 9 00 kg 00 8 00 s20 800 oo 2700 7300 1 2 3 4 3 E T a If you are creating a graph with a single or multiple curve plot using XY YZ or XZ pairs enter all X Y or Z data in one column and the corresponding X Y or Z pair values in another column As long as all data pairs use a percentage or unitary scale SigmaPlot will compute the third column data shown in the resulting graph SigmaPlot computes third column data for plotting only Computed third column data is not displayed in the worksheet To create a ternary graph using data whose sum is not 100 or 1 first convert the raw XYZ data into normalized ternary triplet data by using the Normalize Ternary Data transform Ternary Graphs 335 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots Figure 8 23 Selecting the Data Columns to Normalize from the Normalize Ternary Data Column Picker Dialog Box Figure 8 24 Selecting the Scale Type from the Normalize Ternary Data Column Picker Dialog Box Creating Ternary Graphs 336 Ternary Graphs To normalize ternary data 1 On the Transforms menu click Normalize Ternary Data The Normalize Ternary Data Column Picker dialog box appears Normalize Ternary Data Column Picker x Data for Destination 3 nies 4000Ps H ETET j Select the Tae E columns to Selected Columns normalize into Source X 4000PS1 78 00 ternary data by Source 4000PS1 Y 75 00 clicking the Source
131. 00 122000 E 82000 11 70 7 AR ki i wer Y erhi 1e G Help Cancel lt Back Finish From the Data Format list choose the appropriate data format and click Next Specify which worksheet columns correspond to the data for your plot Since you selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices auto matically appear in the dialog box and you can click Finish to create the graph If you have not already picked columns note that a single data type is high lighted in the Selected Columns list This shows the data type you are picking a column for Begin picking data either by clicking the corresponding column directly in the worksheet or choosing the appropriate column from the Data Columns list Repeat this process for every column you are using to create your graph If you make a mistake while picking data select the wrong entry in the Graph Creating 2D Plots 243 Working with 2D Graphs Figure 6 11 Using the Create Graph Dialog to Pick Columns to Plot Wizard then choose the correct column from the worksheet You can also clear a column assignment by double clicking it in the list Create Graph Select Data Data for Y 3 Selected columns H Date EROE 2 Oxyc Ae 00 ee Select the column to plot by clicking the column in the worksheet a Column 1 1 Column 2 2 Column 3 K Ki 6 When you have finished picking data click Finish to create the plot and close the Graph Wizard
132. 000 15a and the error bar EBD 10500 values are read from Error calculation upper 570 fi tage ee Standard Deviation i asi fhe sewi 21400 Error calculation lower Worksheet Columns 11 700 36r Tiir ir Standard Deviation F Help Cancel Back Finish 4 From the Error Calculation Upper and Error Calculation Lower drop down lists specify the error calculation for the error bars Error Calculations are not applicable if you select Worksheet Columns or Asymmetrical Error Bars from the Symbol Value list 246 Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars ee Figure 6 16 Graph Wizard Data Format Figure 6 17 Using the Graph Wizard Create Graph Dialog to Pick Columns for the First Plot in the Graph Notice the Next button is enabled so that you can create an additional plot for the graph Working with 2D Graphs Click Next Create Graph Data Format How iz your data organized One column one 66000 E000 Y column i7000 6B i 3 124000 3 30 Eo TOS 11400 A 7 Oe Help Cancel Back Finish From the Data Format list select the appropriate data format X column averaged plots require a constant Y column value and Y column averaged plots require a constant X column value Click Next Create Graph Select Data Data for Error EE wet j Select the column Selected columns EBOTE 2 Cxye t0 plot by clicking the column in the worksheet Column
133. 196 modifying using Graph Properties dialog 189 190 moving 131 133 multiple curves same X or Y 241 multiple plots 198 naming plots 192 193 pasting without data 115 509 Index picking different data for current plot 194 195 pie charts 23 317 338 484 plotting data 240 242 plotting multiple curves 241 plotting X or Y using row numbers 242 polar plots 26 317 338 references for design 34 resizing for publication 359 resizing labels legends automatically 97 same X or Y for multiple curves 240 saving 46 scaling 131 133 scatter 3D 290 491 selecting 191 192 selecting style 167 177 selecting type 165 shortcuts to modify 192 single curve plots 240 sizing 131 133 stacked bar charts 492 styles 167 177 485 symbols 204 213 ternary 317 338 titles 194 types 11 165 types and styles 11 using Paste Special 112 115 viewing on page 123 124 working on pages 122 127 131 158 161 zooming in out 103 104 Graphs 2D see 2D graphs Graphs 3D see 3D graphs Greek symbols 145 entering 145 Grids 399 aligning graphs and objects 136 color 397 defined 485 displaying in front behind 399 graph back planes 399 hiding 399 line types 398 mesh graphs 11 modifying 303 snap to 137 turning on off 399 Grouped bar charts column averages 263 creating 261 262 creating with error bars 261 error bars 263 examples 261 510 spacing bars 223 225 Grouping objects text 135 Guidelines equation so
134. 2 pai Examples of gt Area Plots 7 65 1000 5 60 4 Temperature F 55 4 World Population log millions 50 4 10 4 45 Oo OC 6 O 16 O PR a T a ae a a a S Fs FF LF LCKTKFEFPEELSSS S 40 T T T T T T T T T T T 1 Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Months Year 238 2D Plot Types ee Bar Charts Figure 6 3 Examples of a Simple Bar Chart a Grouped Bar Chart and a Stacked Bar Chart Box Plots Figure 6 4 Example of a Box Plot 2 Working with 2D Graphs Bar charts plot data either as vertical or horizontal bars They originate from zero in either a positive or negative direction Simple bar charts plot each row of data as a separate bar and grouped bar charts plot multiple columns of data by grouping data in the same rows Stacked bar charts plot data as segments of a bar each data point is drawn as a bar segment starting where the previous data point ended fi 0 gt fi oa H A T N fi T T T T T 5 10 15 20 25 30 o 4 T T T T 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify bar width bar fill colors and bar fill patterns Add error bars to simple and grouped bar charts To learn more about grouped bar charts see Creating Grouped Bar Charts on page 261 To learn about using the Graph Properties dialog b
135. 344 scale direction 344 slice fills 127 source files for links 121 symbol fills 127 ternary axis direction 344 ternary graphs 338 ternary range 344 ternary scale type 342 343 text formatting 146 147 tick label text 389 tick values 392 units of measurement 156 157 see also Modifying Chapters outline 33 Characters non keyboard 145 using as symbols 208 Chart fills color incrementing 218 Charts creating pie charts 318 319 Cholesky decomposition 411 Clearing graph titles 125 graphs objects 125 legends 125 see also deleting Clipboard 78 cutting and copying data 74 78 111 defined 481 placing contents 482 using 111 Codes assigning to worksheet 451 457 defined 481 fill pattern codes 456 457 line type codes 456 symbol codes 454 456 Coefficients defined 481 regression 491 Color 219 assigning to worksheet 220 axis lines 372 373 bars 219 501 Index box plots 219 267 changing 217 contour fills 310 contour lines 310 custom incrementing schemes 220 222 custom using 158 161 error bars 253 frame lines 304 graph back planes 397 grids 397 incrementing chart fills 218 line 128 lines 214 mesh lines fills 299 page 157 158 radial axes 332 reference lines 414 tick marks 349 385 Color incrementing customizing 220 225 symbols 206 Column averaging defined 481 grouped bar chart 263 Column picker dialog normalizing ternary data 336 Column picker dialog box Graph Wizard 195 Column statisti
136. 363 Modifying Grids To change major or minor grid lines and Planes 1 Double click the graph to modify 396 Displaying Grid Lines and Backplanes Figure 10 36 Selecting the Backplane Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plats Axes Graph Title Mesh Plat Rename W Show title Planes Background N Color Dk Gray sY plane YZ plane Settings for J an plane Jackplane ay ap ed Le T T Rotation cr Cancel Apply Help Click the Graph tab Under Settings for select Backplanes If your graph is a 3D graph from the Plane list select the plane to modify When modifying a 2D graph only one plane is available To select a background color for the selected plane under Background select a color from the Color drop down list Select any of the listed colors or select Custom to use or create a cus tom color To learn about using custom colors see Using Custom Colors on page 158 Select None to create a transparent plane Transparent planes are espe cially useful when superimposing graphs over one another To select a grid to modify or display under Settings for select Grid Lines and then under Grid Lines select a plane from the from the Plane drop down list You can modify major or minor grid lines for any axis of the selected plane Displaying Grid Lines and Backplanes 397 Modifying A
137. 369 F Factor axis tick labels 391 File formats HPGL 448 import Comma Delimited CSV 59 Index import dBase DBF 59 import DOS files 59 import Lotus 1 2 3 WK 59 import Microsoft Excel XLS 59 import Mocha Worksheets 59 import Plain Text TXT PRN DAT ASC 59 import Quattro DOS WK 59 import SigmaPlot 1 0 and 2 0 SPW 58 import SigmaPlot Macintosh 4 and 5 Worksheet 58 import SigmaScan SPW 59 import SigmaStat 1 0 SMB 59 File menu commands Page Setup 155 File types 90 Files as objects to insert 119 breaking links between source and object 121 changing source for linked objects 121 embedding objects 113 122 EPS files 448 449 exporting as non notebook files 46 48 HPGL 449 HPGL files 448 449 importing data from 58 61 81 JNT files 493 linking objects 113 122 notebook templates 108 123 opening non notebook 44 PostScript 449 printing to 448 449 saving 46 saving notebook 46 SPW32 INI 459 467 text 61 62 updating links 120 Fill color modifying 298 Filled contour plots Fills creating 307 modifying 311 area plots 277 279 bar chart 127 box plot 127 box plots 267 change color of pattern lines and edge lines 128 change object fill background color 127 change object fill pattern 127 changing 217 contour plots 311 custom incrementing schemes 220 222 defined 484 increment customizing 220 225 mesh plots 299 507
138. 38 Modifying Ternary Axis Title Location ssessseseesseressseressnnnessnnnesnennsenenresrennsenennnenenn 339 Changing Ternary Axis Range Scale and Direction oeren 340 Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick Labels cerner 345 Publishing Graphs ccccccceecceeeeceeeeceeeeaueeeeaueeecaeeeeusenegueeenanens 353 Publishing Graphs on the World Wide Web cccccccesssecesssecesseeeessreeeesseeeeseeeeens 393 Submitting Graphs for PUBLICATION caa aannamen 356 PUDMGAULOM IDS aNd LICKS satin tes c citicaaitotaticaitean a a 309 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids cccceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeneees 361 CHANGING AXIS RANGO cipine san cadet asiun dtd E E ceuinshainiaetadeeieantannt ies 362 CHANGING AXIS Sales a ixicisdonisoroussavevetsiodetiantweiietanaersainin sia comnentun 2isdd oniueaeadanvaninbien 363 Changing Scale TYPe ou ccs scccesessseessseeussseeesecseessssesesseusesscesessseeeseceususesesessuenesesenes 366 Hiding Displaying and Deleting AXES ccccssccscsccsescssesssscctsvessssersssssesessenernesennecnas 3 0 MOVNO ANXOS Toemen E deve tahaneibonsisantatetiaanrnten 371 Changing Axis Line Color and Thickness esseseessrsessriisserieserrisserrisserreernas 372 SeN AXIS BICAK S stoornis a a a a aa a 374 Working with Axis Titles and Tick Labels 00 0 cece ccccssscccessseeeeeesseeeeesseeeesersateeeeees 375 Changing Tick Mark Intervals sviecaisetasietunnitbcercadradandesadoacaboandbevatdowagciebiveadwadebenat
139. 394 For an example of an Extreme Value Distribution axis scale refer to the Programming Guide Changing Scale Type 369 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Hiding Displaying and Deleting Axes Control the display of axes using the Lines settings of the Graph Properties dialog box Axes tab Hiding and The easiest way to hide an axis is to select it then press Delete The axis is hidden Displaying Axes rather than deleted You can also hide an axis by right clicking the axis then choosing Hide To view hide or modify the display of an axis 1 Double click the axis you can double click hidden axes as well 2 The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 10 10 Graph Properties Graph Properties Dialog Box Axes Tab Line Plats Axes Graph Settings Ais Apply to Daa o Rename tE Major ticks Settings for Line properties Color Black Thickness o 007in is oa Showplace axes mW Bottom Normal Pirrrrrrigdy l Top Normal I Labels all Tick Label gt os El Cancel Apply Help 3 Click the Axes tab 4 From the Settings for list select Lines 5 Under Show Place Axes select an axis to display that axis or clear an axis to hide it Hidden axes hide all ticks and labels associated with that axis 6 Click OK You can hide 3D axes but if frame lines are active or if the graph has grid lines a line will remain present To le
140. 4 Wk files opening 44 10th 90th percentiles box plots 267 2D graphs adding plots 198 Area plots 238 area plots 269 279 arranging data 240 242 asymmetric error bar plots 242 asymmetric error bars 249 bar charts 239 bi directional asymmetric error bars 251 box plots 239 268 column averaged error bar plots 242 creating 243 244 creating multiple axes for single plot 285 creating plots with asymmetric error bars 249 creating plots with bi directional asymmetric error bars 251 creating plots with error bars 248 error bars 245 examples 23 27 grouped bar charts 261 262 grouped bar charts with error bars 261 line scatter 491 linear regression lines 407 410 modifying plots 407 414 multiple axes 285 multiple plots 198 plotting data 238 240 242 266 plotting multiple curves 241 plotting mutiple curves same X or Y 241 plotting X or Y using row numbers 242 polar axes 333 quartile plots plots 250 range plots plots 248 reference lines 268 same X or Y for multiple curves 240 single curve plots 240 3D bar charts data format 167 fills 219 3D function generating mesh data 306 3D graphs adding plots 198 axes placement during rotation 303 497 SSS E Index bar chart data format 167 bar charts 289 changing view 299 creating 293 294 295 296 creating mesh 298 data format 167 examples 28 30 generating mesh data 11 light source 303 lighting 303 line data format 167 mes
141. 4 Cut shortcut 56 Cutting data 78 defined 483 notebook items between notebooks 45 objects graphs 111 Data 2D graphs 238 240 266 3D graphs 287 applying transforms 12 arranging for 2D graphs 240 242 arranging for 3D graphs 293 arranging for bubble plots 279 arranging for contour plots 293 arranging for polar plots 323 324 column statistics 63 contour plots 293 306 307 converting bubble plot area 280 converting data to diameters for bubble plots 280 converting to mesh format 11 copying 78 cutting 78 deleting 78 entering 53 94 exporting 62 484 generating mesh 306 generating random data 417 Graph Properties dialog 201 highlighting outliers 83 importing 58 61 81 486 inserting 58 long form mesh format 290 mesh converting to 11 moving 78 multiple curve plots ternary triplets 335 normalizing for ternary graphs 335 336 one column for multiple curves in polar plot 324 password protecting 355 pasting 78 504 pie charts 318 319 plotting additional 198 plotting different data for current plot 195 plotting portion of 201 plotting X or Y using row numbers 242 polar plots 323 324 325 printing 49 50 radial and angular values 323 rearranging 81 regression 12 removing outlying data 81 84 sampling 201 saving 46 selecting 75 76 selecting for ternary graphs 337 single curve plot ternary triplets 335 smoothing 11 smoothing 2D high frequency data 421 425 smoothing 3D mesh data 425 428 s
142. 40 Arranging Data for a 2D Plot Working with 2D Graphs do not need to be adjacent or the same length missing values are ignored Figure 6 6 Data for a 2D Graph Arranged and Picked as XY XY Pair Format for If the graph style you are creating plots more than one curve place as many Multiple Curves additional X and Y values in worksheet columns as you want to plot Enter X and Y data in the worksheet in consecutive columns or in any order you want Figure 6 7 Data for a 2D Graph Arranged and Picked as Multiple XY Pairs Using the Same SigmaPlot can graph many curves using the same X or Y data column There is Column for no need to duplicate a column that is used for more than one curve for example Multiple Curves Single X or Y vs Many Y or X Arranging Data for a 2D Plot 241 Working with 2D Graphs Figure 6 8 Data for a 2D Graph Arranged and Picked as X Many Y Using Row Numbers for X or Y Values Single X Single Y Many X or Many Y Figure 6 9 Data for a 2D Graph Arranged and Picked as Many Y Only Column Averaged Error Bar Plots Asymmetric Error Bar Plots enter the X data into only one column and enter the corresponding Y data into as many columns as you have curves Order and length of columns does not matter Ba SigmaPlot can also graph data as only X or Y values and use the row numbers of the columns as the corresponding Y or X coordinates If you want to graph data
143. 402 worksheets 46 Scale angular 327 329 axis 11 base exponent labels 390 category 364 366 changing 365 common log 363 custom 369 Date time 365 Extreme Value Distribution 369 linear 363 logit 364 natural log 363 natural logarithmic 363 probability 363 probit 364 tick labels 392 tick marks 349 387 types 11 365 366 369 Scale type changing 366 369 Scale axis base exponent labels 315 category 481 contour plots 311 312 defined 480 linear 487 logit 487 natural log 488 natural logarithmic 487 probability 490 probit 490 Scales Arrhenius 369 using a date and time scale 368 Scaling aspect ratio 479 graphs 131 133 objects 131 133 resizing labels legends automatically with graphs 97 setting aspect ratio option 97 using mouse 132 using Object Properties 133 Scatter and line plots examples 288 Scatter plots 3D data format 166 asymmetric error bars 249 bi directional asymmetric error bars 251 creating 243 244 data format 165 drop lines 227 error bars 245 examples 238 lines 216 quartile plots 250 range plots 248 symbols 204 213 Scatter plots 3D creating 293 294 295 296 defined 491 Scientific notation defined 491 using as axis values 315 391 Scroll box defined 492 Section creating 41 Index defined 492 editing 43 naming 43 new 41 Selecting all data in worksheet 76 columns 76 data 75 76 defined 492 entire worksheet 76 graph style 167 177 graph type 165 graphs 191 192 graphs o
144. 87 490 fitting data 12 linear defined 487 order 491 using data in Excel worksheets 93 Removing outliers 81 84 Report Editor 12 creating reports 429 formatting paragraphs 435 formatting text 435 formatting toolbar 435 ruler 432 setting paragraph indents 434 setting tabs 432 Report Options command 430 Report page defined 491 Reports creating 42 429 embedding objects 113 inserting date and time 435 linking objects 113 printing 51 Report Editor 12 setting page size and margins 430 setting ruler units 430 Requirements submitting graphs for publication 356 Resize symbols 150 Resizing embedded graphs 188 graphs for publication 359 Restoring legends to default settings 152 Results linear regressions 408 t test 402 Right clicking custom color 161 hiding graphs 123 520 hiding plots 200 selected graphs 192 selected graphs and objects 98 to create new sections 41 to create new worksheets 41 Rotating 3D graphs 303 491 3D graphs axes placement 303 angular axis 327 329 axis titles 376 contour labels 314 labels 145 pie charts 320 322 text 145 Rows deleting 80 81 inserting empty 78 80 selecting 76 sizing 66 74 titles 85 88 transposing 81 using as column titles 86 87 Rulers aligning graphs and objects 136 Running quick transforms 420 S Sampling data 201 Saving data 46 graphs 46 JNT files 493 linear regression results 408 notebook files 46 46 pages 46 t test results
145. B00 800 A 450 0 700 A Ww 00 ieo oao o o a00 100 15 00 14000 BD 1200 BOD ee i 2 If you omit the measurement unit the numeric values in the symbol size column are assigned the measurement unit specified in the Options dialog box Page tab 3 Click the toolbar Bl button the view the graph page 4 Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears 5 Select the plot that contains the symbols to modify from the Plot drop down list 6 Use the Size drop down list to choose the worksheet column containing the 212 Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options Figure 5 40 Using the Plots Tab to Select Symbol Size from a Worksheet Column symbol size values Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Plot Plot 2 Rename Graph wizard settings for Fill color Color Black Thickness A jo O07In 1 Area Fills Symbols Type t Circle Data 5 yr balz p Cancel Apply Help 7 Click OK 2 When creating a bubble plot the Graph Wizard automatically prompts you to pick a column to specify bubble size For more information see Bubble Plots on page 279 Changing Line Type and Other Line Options Changing Plot Line Attributes You can change the line type shape thickness and color for all lines in a plot Because plots can also have multiple curves you can also increment the line types and colors for a
146. Change the default setting from Normal 600x300 to either of the 2 selections 600x600 or 300x300 to avoid getting any of the spacing problems for text characters Problem While printing from SigmaPlot objects on the screen look fine but one of the following errors shows up Printer Busy Memory Overflow Error Printer Overrun or it prints no text a blank page or won t print at all Solution Try the following steps 1 Update the printer driver to the latest version by obtaining the available printer driver from either the printer company or the SPSS Technical Support Department To determine the current version of your driver go to the printer control panel Settings Printers from the Start bar in Win95 and select the desired printer by clicking it 2 If you are using a Hewlett Packard Laserjet IV or above or a compatible printer select Raster as Graphics Mode In Win95 this can be found under Settings Printers Properties Graphics If the above does not work try using a different printer driver For example the Apple Laserwriter II driver is a Postscript driver and using this when printing to a Postscript printer will often yield good results Improving Printing Speed in SigmaPlot Printing speed is influenced by your system s configurations and not by SigmaPlot When printing the Updating Page message appears and indicates that SigmaPlot is sending a map of the page through Windows
147. Changing Tick Labels 393 FSS E Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Typing Displays gg Era AD or BC 5 To change the display Time format select a format from the list or use the following table to enter a new label using any additional characters as delim iters 1 e colons spaces etc As you enter a different format the Sample window shows an example of the label Typing Displays hh or h 12 hour clock HH or H Military hours mm or m Minutes SS OF S Seconds uu or u Milliseconds H h m s or u No leading zeroes for single digits HH hh mm ss uu Leading zero for single digits tt Double letter AM or PM t Single letter AM or PM 6 Click OK Using Custom You can enter text and numbers into worksheet columns and use them as major Tick Labels tick labels To customize tick labels using worksheet columns 1 Enter the labels you want to use in a worksheet column in the order you want 394 Changing Tick Labels ee Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids them to appear Enter minor labels in the right adjacent column Figure 10 34 Tick Labels from a Column using the Symbol Font H Graph Page 4 Data 4 Of x Tick Labels 2 To skip specific labels leave an empty cell for that tick mark when entering the labels into the worksheet column 2 Double click the axis tick labels you want to modify The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 10 35 Graph Properties Selecting a Columns as t
148. Changing the Page The New Page toolbar button automatically uses whichever page is titled Created with the New Normal as the source for new pages If you want to modify the attributes of your Page Button new page open and modify the Normal page or replace it with the desired page 108 Using Graph Pages as Templates ee Changing the Template File Used for New Pages Figure 4 15 Options Dialog Box General Tab Graph Page Basics If there is no page named Normal in your template file the page is formatted according to settings found in the SPW INI file See Troubleshooting on page 471 for more information on modifying these settings SigmaPlot automatically uses the template notebook when you open a graph or graph page Set the file name in the General tab of the Options dialog box To change the source file template 1 On the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears Options worksheet Page General Macro Graph Defaults M Novice prompting IW Fast page open M Automatic legends I Retain notebook settings IW Retain window states Percentile method O Fast 3D printing Standard z Backup files with extension NE Save AutoRecower info every i T minutes T New notebooks use Excel workbook E scel format Template file C Program Files SigmaPlot SPwe Template int Browse Layout file C Program Files SigmaPlo SPw8 Layout int Browse Gallery file C Program Files SigmaPloSPwe G
149. Click Finish to close the Graph Wizard and view the changed graph Changing Graph Type and Style Change plots using the Graph Wizard however once you have defined a plot style and type the styles and types available for you to apply to the created plot are limited If the plot you ve selected cannot be changed to the plot type or style that you want use the Graph Wizard to create another plot using the desired style and type To learn about creating new plots see Creating Additional Plots on page 5 197 To change graph type and style 1 Click the plot to modify Changing Graph Type and Style 195 Creating and Modifying Graphs Figure 5 24 You can use Graph Wizard to change the type and Style of the graph py Square handles appear over the data points for the clicked curve Do not click the graph or you will add a plot to the graph 2 On the Standard toolbar clicking the Graph Wizard oh button to pen the Graph Wizard The Graph Wizard appears displaying the data format of the current plot 3 To change plot style click Back to view the Graph Styles list Choose from the list of available styles then click Next Graph Wizard Modify Plot Graph Styles Select the style of graph you want ta Simpl cnai Lin Multiple Straight Lines Simple Spline Curve ame Plots a single set of Y pairs connecting the datapoints with vertical and horizontal lines starting with Multiple Horizontal Step vertical Simp
150. Color Increments on page 220 To use automatically incrementing line types 1 Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Plot Plot 2 Rename Graph wizard Settings f aetiings for Line style Line color Type Color eee 2 Grayscale Thickness Shape a Smoothed Spline h d H Symbols Area Fills toh Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Plots tab Changing Line Type and Other Line Options 215 Select Lines from the Settings for list Select a plot from the Plot drop down list From the Type and Color drop down lists choose a line scheme Mes Y Windows is limited in its ability to supply the true colors for lines by the number of system colors available For the best representation of true line colors set your display to either HiColor 16 bit or TrueColor 24 bit 6 Right click the incrementing option selected in the Type and Color drop down lists and from the shortcut menu select First Line or First Color Choose First Line or First Color from the shortcut menu 8 Choose the line type or color to start the incrementing sequence 9 Use the Line Thickness Shape Line Color and Layering options to modify the lines if necessary For more information on modifying lines see Chang ing Plot Line Attributes on page 213 10 Click OK Changing Patterns and Fill
151. Column 16 Seta Column 17 Eror 3 Column 18 Seta A box plot is a summary plot that plots graph data as a box representing statistical values The boundary of the box closest to zero indicates the 25th percentile a line within the box marks the median and the boundary of the box farthest from zero indicates the 75th percentile Whiskers error bars above and below the box indicate the 90th and 10th percentiles In addition you can graph the mean and outlying points To create a box plot 1 Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data Creating Box Plots 265 Working with 2D Graphs 2 On the 2D Graph Toolbar click Box Plot and then click Horizontal Box or Vertical Box The Graph Wizard appears Figure 6 39 Graph Wizard Data Format Create Graph Data Format How it your data organized ix ari Fr 7 75000 aa 72000 One 2 column and 2 66000 38000 EEI at least one Y 717000 BBO 52000 column TAAN Da TO Sipa W040 6 000 Bim ES i200 T 64000 58000 13 0000 e B20 117000 13000 Sot al TR 149 i Help Cancel lt Back Finish 3 From the Data Format list choose the appropriate data format and click Next Figure 6 40 Create Graph Select Data Graph Wizard Select Data Data for Box 2 ea Dates Select the column Salae eaumne To 2 0 to plot by clicking z eee a Column 1 ee 0 worksheet Box 1 Columa 2 Finish Since you alrea
152. Data for Set Column A h select the Selected Columns column to plot by clicking the Set Column column in the Setz Column 6 worksheet Sets Column C You can perform Transform menu commands and user defined transforms on data in Excel worksheets The transform language uses syntax which refers to columns numerically or by the column titles currently assigned When prompted to pick columns you can select columns as you would on a SigmaPlot worksheet To perform user defined transforms on an Excel worksheet use the corresponding column number in place of the column letter that appears in the gray heading area at the top of the column For example the transform function col 1 data 1 100 corresponds to inserting data values from 1 to 100 into column A of an Excel workbook For more information see the Programming Guide You can use the statistics menu commands including the Regression Wizard with Excel worksheets Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot 93 Worksheet Basics Figure 3 34 Using the Regression Wizard with an Excel Worksheet When prompted to pick columns select the columns from the Excel worksheet just as you would from a SigmaPlot worksheet Results for statistics can be placed in Excel worksheets as well Equation Category T Save Sigmoidal a Equation Name Save 4s Sigmoid 3 Parameter Sigmoid 4 Parameter nh Fig 1 Xg Sigmoid 5 Parameter New
153. Graph Wizard appears Graph Wizard Create Graph x l Data Format How iz your data organized as EE Teman sY Pairs columns at Teman YZ Pairs least one triplet Temar 2 Pairs fou can skip the last Z column Select the appropriate format and click Next Graph Wizard Create Graph x Data tor 1 Column 1 ne h select the Selected Columns column to plot by clicking the 1 1 Column 1 column in the 1 Column 2 worksheet Since you selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in the dialog box 2 If you made a mistake picking columns highlight the wrong entry in the Graph Wizard then choose the correct column either in the worksheet or from the column list 4 Click Finish Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify the plot or to open the Graph Wizard to pick different data columns to plot or to add another plot to your graph For more information on making general modifications to ternary plots see Creating and Modifying Graphs on page 163 For detailed information on modifying ternary axes see Modifying Ternary Axes on page 338 Ternary Graphs 337 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots Modifying Ternary Modifying ternary graphs involves Graphs p Picking new data for the plot see Picking Different Data for the Current Plot on page 194 Changing line and symbol type size and color see Changing Symbol Type and Other Sym
154. Graphs ou ce eeseeseeeeeeseeeee 186 Creating SigmaPlot Graphs USING SPSS ooo ee cccsseeecssseeeesseeeesseeeesseeeesseeeesaes 188 Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using MicroSoft Excel serrer 189 Modiin OraDNS srania ieia a a ds sanalnusateandenes iavatac indent conambeateas 189 DEIECLING A GlaDMOb An OU dr A A n 191 Namin OLS ace cassiuacs taser iitanieatcasassae cucasaud a aR 192 ee Contents WARNING OAD aa A le aiun aatnstaeauatcash uate TT 194 Picking Different Data for the Current Plot ccc ccececcesseecesseesesseeeeeeeseseeeeanes 194 Changing Graph Type and SVG suseseixscdeastunseveiasecassestuateniwanleniviendnanaadsanastianeoiate 195 POG O INGW FIO IS airnean E E a e ar 196 Showing Hiding and Deleting Plots ccc secsssssssseessseesscseesssssessseeeesseneesseeees 199 Sampling Fewer Data Points ccc ccccsscsssesssssessssssssssssessesessseseeeseeeseneeeesseeseeses 201 Plotting Missing and Out of Axis Range Data Points o n 203 Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options cece eceeeecesseceseeeeseeeenees 204 Changing Line Type and Other Line Options 00 eceececeseeeeeseeeeesseeeerseeeeaees 213 Changing Patterns and Fill COlOrS oo cceecccesseccesseesesseeecseeecsseeeesseeeesssnesersneeenes 216 Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments ou eeecee essen 220 Changing Bar and Box Widths and Spacing cccccccescccesscecesseeeesseeeesseeecssneeeeees 222 AG GINGA AG Moding DOD LINGS 2c
155. Help Retain window states Select to make SigmaPlot windows toolbars and palettes sticky That is they will retain their size and position for your next SigmaPlot session Fast 3D printing Prints graphs at a lower resolution to speed up printing Backup Files Check this option to automatically create a backup file when saving any notebook You can also select the extension SigmaPlot assigns to these files by selecting the With Extension edit box and typing three letters These files appear in the directory where your original data files are stored Save AutoRecovery info every Set how often you want SigmaPlot to automatically save your work New Notebooks Use Excel Workbooks Select this option to open an Excel workbook each time you create a new notebook See Chapter 2 Notebook Basics Setting Program Options 19 Introduction Fast Page Open Improves saving and opening times for graph pages by not saving the attributes for hidden objects Retain Notebook Settings This option retains the windows and items open when the notebook was saved last and reopens them the next time the notebook is open When unchecked time is saved when opening a notebook that had many open items Excel Format Select an Excel format to use from the drop down list Percentile Method Select the method of computing percentiles when graphing error bars and creating box plots See Chapter 6 Computing Percentile Methods Template File Type the
156. Items Notebook Basics Printing Notebook Items You can print active worksheets graph pages reports and selected notebook items by clicking the Print button 4 on the Standard toolbar Printing Worksheets You can print any worksheet in a SigmaPlot notebook To print the current worksheet 1 Select and view the worksheet If you want to print only a portion of the col umns in the active worksheet select a block from the worksheet 2 Click the Print button g to print the worksheet using all the default settings To set printing options before you print the worksheet 1 From the File menu click Print 2 The Print Data Worksheet dialog box appears Figure 2 7 The Print Data Print Data Worksheet Worksheet Dialog Box M Page Title Data 1 Area to Print Headers I Column Titles I Column Numbers Cancel Setup W Row Titles W On Each Page Entire Worksheet Selected Cells Cell Appearance Columns i T Full Precision to i I Grid Lines 3 Specify whether you want to print the entire worksheet only the selected cells in the worksheet or a specified range of columns by selecting one of the options under Area to Print 4 Click OK to print the worksheet To print column statistics 1 Onthe View menu click Column Statistics The column statistics worksheet appears 2 On the File menu click Print The Print dialog box appears 3 From the Name drop down list select the p
157. Paste If you are importing a text file the Import Text dialog box appears Use this dialog box to view the text file and to specify other delimiter types or to build a model of the data file according to custom column widths Import Text Contour tet Format scheme Import NONE Use Analysis Add Femove elias Cancel Field format Portion to read z i D E E To fend White space Columns i E Ta Jend E i Tab delimited C Delimiter Overwrite at Row 1 Column 1 Model Analyze File contents A NAAAOANAAOANAANONA OOOANAAOOAAAOOAON 00AOAAANE H HHHOAHAOHAGOAHT 625641 625641 6260 OED 77889 BORG B0B8800000082 651282051282 05 1e ON 496186 HAAQOOCOHACOAAOOHF 676923076923 07 7e 882 039287 FEB B000000 00000084 1625641 625641 620 68 1 67656 A quicker method of importing text is copying the data in your source application then opening SigmaPlot and pasting the data 1 To specify a different column separator select Delimiter to activate the delimiter options then select the appropriate type You can select commas hyphens or any other characters For example many databases use semico lons as delimiters 2 To specify a model of the data use dashes to specify column widths and bracket characters and to define the column edges Use a vertical bar character to indicate a single character width column Click Analyze to re display the appearance of the fil
158. Plot Plt 2 Rename Graph Wizard ea gs ey Symbols Fill color Type E E column 8 mm Flack What s This Text symbol Thickness Area Fills Cancel Apply Help 4 Click the Plots tab From the Settings For list click Symbols 6 Under Symbols from the Type drop down list select the column that con Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options 209 tains the text or numeric values you want to use as symbols 2 The column option does not appear in the Type list unless text or symbols are entered in a worksheet column 7 Under Symbols right click the Type box and from the shortcut menu click Symbol Font The Text Properties dialog box appears Figure 5 37 Tae Using Text as a Symbol Font ae be Font Paragraph Select a new font from the Font Font style Font drop down list This Courier Mew Regular feature is especially useful if Tms Amn you wish to use Wingdings Trebuchet MS Zapf Dingbats as symbols ee Univers Condensed VAG Rounded Light VAG Rounded Thin Color Cancel Help 8 Click the Font tab 9 Select another font from the Font drop down list This feature is especially useful if you wish to use Wingdings Zapf Ding bats or other iconic or symbolic fonts as a symbol The Fill Color and Edge Thickness options do not apply to text and characters 10 Click OK Using Different By default all s
159. S228 8 8 Notebook a Nees T E xcell a acai in sep I M 4 X Excel workbooks created by SigmaPlot are initially limited to a single worksheet Excel workbooks with multiple worksheets that are opened by SigmaPlot as notebooks retain all sheets but only the first sheet can be used for graphs and statistics To open a new Excel worksheet gt Click the New Excel Worksheet button on the Standard toolbar Unprotecting Excel You cannot add delete or move Excel worksheets or macros within workbooks Workbooks within SigmaPlot until you unprotect the workbook However if you choose to unprotect an Excel workbook do not delete the worksheet that is used by SigmaPlot To unprotect an Excel workbook 1 Open an Excel workbook 2 On the Excel Tools menu click Protection and then click Unprotect Work book Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot 89 Worksheet Basics Using Excel as Default Workbooks Figure 3 31 Selecting Excel Workbooks as the Default Worksheet for New Notebook Opening Other File Types With Excel You can use Excel workbooks as the default SigmaPlot worksheet To set Excel as the default worksheet 1 Close all open Excel workbooks 1 On the SigmaPlot Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears Options Worksheet Page General Macro Graph Defaults W Novice Prompting W Fast Page Open M Automatic Legends I Retain Notebook Setting
160. Settings for Showyedit Appearance Upper specification nee Ll Upper control line Lines O Mean A Calc Area Fills o std dev x fo Mean only g Std dev Conk 95 poe Conk iag fe Constant Thickness Jo 007in 1 Label Upper specification Left Right T Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Plots tab 3 Select Reference from the Settings For list 4 Select a reference line to draw by selecting its check box You can add up to five lines for each plot The default names and calculations are the names commonly used when employing reference lines for quality Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines 413 10 11 control charts To change the reference line name select the line from the list then edit the Label box for that line To display the label next to the reference line select Left or Right for hori zontal reference lines or Top or Bottom for vertical reference lines To change the value or statistic used for the line select an option from the Calc drop down list If you are not using a mean as the calculation type a value to multiply the statistic by or a value to use as a constant in the box next to the Calc drop down list The calculation options apply only to the reference line highlighted in the Graph Properties dialog box list of reference lines To set the reference line value to a specific value select the Constant Calc option and
161. SigmaPlot waits for the Printer Driver within Windows to give the go ahead messages after each page segment is sent The following are some configuration variables to check Resolving Printing Problems 475 _ _ X _ _ _ Troubleshooting The Spooler Make sure that the Windows spooler is up and running In Windows95 it is selected in the START Settings Printers Properties Details Spool Settings Printer Memory and Hard Disk Space These are also factors in printing speed The more printer memory and hard disk space available the faster the printing occurs Graphics Mode Choosing the correct graphics mode for a type of graph can make a difference for HP Laserjet IV or above or any compatible printer Printing on HPGL 2 vector type mode is faster than Raster bitmap type unless you are printing a graph with error bars in which case it is the other way around Pasting Special Characters From time to time you may need to put some characters or symbols onto your graphs or presentations These symbols can be found in the Character Map dialog box In Windows 95 the Character Map is located in the Accessories group Figure 17 2 Character Map Dialog Box seule i Ea Font OP Arial Characters to copy Close Copy Shows available characters in the selected font Keystroke Spacebar Once a symbol is selected the appropriate keystrokes that are necessary for this particular symbol show
162. Suffixes prefixes contour labels 314 tick labels 392 Sum column statistics 64 Summary Information author 20 Superscript 143 Switching between date and time and numeric display 73 Symbols alphanumeric 208 assigning to worksheet 220 box plots 267 changing edge color 206 changing edge thickness 206 changing fills 206 changing size 205 changing type 205 characters used as 208 color incrementing 206 custom codes 454 456 custom incrementing schemes 220 222 defined 493 dot crosshair color 206 fills 127 Greek 145 increment customizing 220 225 inserting in legends 146 layering lines in front behind 214 modifying attributes 204 modifying in plots 204 213 resize 150 restoring to default settings 152 size values from a worksheet column 210 using characters as 208 Systat exporting to 63 System requirements 12 Excel workbooks 13 hardware 13 I t test calculation of t 402 unpaired test 403 Tempates Index applying 42 template files settings 108 TEMPLATE JNT 110 493 Templates creating 108 123 defined 182 493 JNT files 110 493 notebook files 108 123 Options 20 page 108 123 templates Graph Style Gallery 182 184 Ternary axes about 338 dragging 340 Ternary axis direction modifying 344 Ternary graphs 338 changing axis direction 344 changing range direction 344 changing scale direction 344 changing scale type 342 creating 336 337 data for multiple curve plot 335 data for single plot curv
163. T T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 oo A N OM BR OD O Cee eee 5 er Fh oO ine o H oa OD N Oo The order of the column pairs in the list determines the order of the bars for each group To change the bar orders within groups change the order the column pairs appear in the list by using the Graph Wizard to repick column data For more information about repicking data see Picking Different Data for the Current Plot on page 194 Use the Graph Wizard to create grouped bar charts with or without error bars If creating a grouped bar chart with error bars error bar values must be from worksheet column values entered prior to creating the plot You are prompted during graph creation for error bar worksheet columns To create a grouped bar chart 1 Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer over your data 2 On the 2D Graph Toolbar click Horizontal or Vertical Bar Chart and then click either Grouped Bar Chart or Grouped Error Bars Grouped Bar Charts 261 Working with 2D Graphs Figure 6 33 Using the Graph Wizard to Specify the Data Format Figure 6 34 Using the Create Graph Dialog to Pick Columns to Plot Notice that this dialog box also prompts you for the columns with
164. Tab worksheet Page General Macro Graph Defaults Eont Aria Size and Position Height 3 50 in Width 5 00 ini Top 2 50 in Left fi F5in Settings for Single Curve Symbol circle Fill Color Black Multiple Curves Symbol f v Doubles Fill Color IB Black and Whi Cancel Apoly Help Setting Program Options 21 Introduction Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs A SigmaPlot graph consists of one or more plots of data and one or more sets of axes It uses a specific coordinate system e g 2D Cartesian 3D Cartesian pie or polar and has a specific size and location on the page Plots are graphical representations of worksheet data For example view data as a vertical bar chart or change the plot to a horizontal bar chart even after creating the graph You can even display more than one plot on most graphs Axes are the scales that determine position of the graph s data points Each axis contains tick marks that indicate the type of scale used Scales range from linear to nonlinear within a Cartesian coordinate system Customize tick mark labels with worksheet cells or use numeric or time series labels The X Y and for 3D graphs Z coordinates are indicated on each axis by tick marks An axis can use a linear numeric scale nonlinear scales such as log natural log and probability or a date time scale 2D graphs can have multiple sets of X and Y axes The axes tick marks a
165. The 56 Moving Around the Worksheet Worksheet Basics commands on the right click shortcut menu are the same as the Edit menu Cut Copy Paste Delete Transpose Paste Insert Cells and Delete Cells commands Figure 3 5 Right click Edit Worksheet Menu P oe 4 5 pay 2 00 32 00 Dc 7 00 80 00 00 5 00 ee ee m 7 00 ee E 7 00 5 00 Oooo ee 00 4 00 ee EE 00 8 00 59 00 E sll Le FF a a 10 O Faste Led 11 Delete 12 O Le 13 O 14 O Insert Cells O 15 O O Delete Cells Oooo y 16 a Entering Data into a SigmaPlot Worksheet This section describes entering data into SigmaPlot worksheet columns and formatting the columns for numeric label or date and time display To enter data in a SigmaPlot worksheet 1 Place the cursor in a cell 2 Type anumber label or date and time value 3 Press Enter to move down one row or use the arrow keys to move around the worksheet You must press Enter before moving to another column Entering Dates Dates and times are entered using delimiters The delimiters used are determined and Times by the Windows regional settings For more information see Regional Settings on page 72 Date Delimiters The default date delimiter for most systems is the forward slash An entry that displays only two fields of a date value is assumed to be day and month If the second field s value is greater than 31 months and years are assumed Entries with two delimiters assum
166. This dialog box also controls which graphs on a page are displayed or hidden from view and the color of the page To learn about displaying or hiding graphs 154 Changing Graph Page Format Figure 4 51 The Margins Tab of the Page Setup Dialog Box py Changing and Displaying Graph Page Margins Graph Page Size and Orientation on the page see Hiding and Deleting Objects from the Page on page 123 To learn about changing page color see Changing Page Color on page 157 Page Setup Margins Page Size Graph Layout Cancel Apply Help Bottom fo 500in Left 0500n Bight 0500n H Show Margins The options in the Page Setup dialog box affect both the view of the page on screen and the printer settings for the page you are printing To learn more about printing pages see Printing Graph Pages on page 50 To change page margins and to view or hide margins on the current page l 4 2 On the File menu click Page Setup The Page Setup dialog box appears from which you can select the Margins tab if necessary to display the Margins tab of the Page Setup dialog box Use the Top Bottom Left and Right options to specify the width or height of the corresponding page margin You can type values in the edit boxes using any of the available units of measurement the value is converted to the current measurement units specified in the Options dialog box Type in for inches mm for millimeters and p
167. Transforme Se Horth rmn Layout Files of type Template Notebook Cancel amp 2 Select Template Notebook from the Files of type drop down list 3 Select Layout jnt from the SPW7 folder 4 Click Open 5 The Layout jnt notebook appears Figure 4 38 Layout Notebook 2 Layout Graph Layouts Centered 3 5 x 5 2 Centered 5 2 5 Summary 3 2 up 3 5 3 5 Delete 2 up a a a 2 up 3 5 x 3 5 lane Hel F ii 3 up 2 25 x 2 25 Summary Info n j Author J up 2 78 x 2 75 4 up 33 dup 2 754 2 75 1 Created 5 up 2 25 x 2 25 07 29 99 10 28 18 5 up 2 25 x 2 25 k poli Eup 2 257 2 25 025700 05 12 49 PM s ii B up 2 25 x 2 25 k Modified Description l 2 up 6 x 4 landscas Use these pages to 3 o a HEE rea 6 Open or view the notebook file containing the page you want to add to Layout jnt 7 Select the page you want to copy 8 Press Ctrl C 9 Select the section of Layout jnt where you want to add the new page Arranging Graphs 139 10 Press Ctrl V The page appears in Layout jnt and also at the bottom of the section Figure 4 39 Layout Notebook ae Layout with a New Layout Notebook T zee Lata Centered 3 5 x 5 Bar Chart and Scatter Plc l Centered B 5 Summary ian ia Bar Chart and Fie Chart 2 up 4 gi w 4 p j ca i Weste g rm an 223 5 3 5 landsc Help 220 y 2 25 a ga Summary Info Ato a Aro lane
168. Under Show Axis Title select the desired Axis title location from the At drop down list 5 Select Axis Title in the Rotate with Axis group box to rotate the axis title par allel to the axis 6 Click Apply Modifying Ternary Axis Title Location 339 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots 7 Continue to modify the titles of the other axes Specify the axis title you want to change using the Axis list then make the desired changes 8 When you have finished click OK Figure 8 28 Y Data Axis Titles at the Apexes and Along the Axes The titles along the axes are also rotated with the axes 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 X Data Changing Ternary Axis Range Scale and Direction Ternary axis scale type and range settings control the units and increments used to plot the data Axis scale range and direction are modified using the Scaling settings displayed in the Graph Properties dialog box Axes tab Axis range can also be modified by dragging a selected axis Modifying a ternary axis range can alter the size and even the shape of the graph Modifying Axis You can modify axis range by dragging a selected axis or apex Because ternary Range by Dragging axes are interdependent dragging an axis to modify its range can change the ranges of the other axes Dragging an apex modifies the ranges of the two axes which form the apex reducing the maximum of an axis range introduces a fourth axis creating a tra
169. XY pair Single Y Single X and bubble size data Bubble size values must be entered in a separate column Each value corresponds to the diameter of the symbol in whatever page units are being used If you want bubble size to correspond to area data you must convert your area data to diameters before creating the bubble plot Converting Area Data If you want your bubble plot to display area data you must run this transform to Diameters where area is the source column number and the diameter is the results column number This transform is derived from the formula for the area of a circle To convert your area data into diameters 1 Onthe Transforms menu click User Defined 280 Bubble Plots Working with 2D Graphs The User Defined Transform dialog box appears Figure 6 58 User Defined Transform untitled Iof x User Defined j Edit Transi Transform dialog box P Trigonometric Units i Degrees Radians Grade 2 Type the transform function as follows pi 3 14159265359 col diameter sqrt col area factor p1 where diameter is the column number for your diameter data area is the col umn number for your original data to be represented by area and factor is some number to increase or decrease the magnitude of your data to a reason able range It is very important to reduce the diameters of your symbols to a reasonable Bubble Plots 281 Working with 2D Graphs size before plotting them Figure 6 59
170. a Specifically it is the covariance divided by the product of the sample standard deviations SigmaPlot calculates the correlation coefficient for linear regressions Cubic Spline Interpolation A mathematical formula connecting data points with a smooth curve It can be roughly described as a running interpolation of cubic polynomials 482 ee Glossary Cursor Specifically the blinking vertical entry bar for text or the current cell highlight on the worksheet See also Pointer Curve The graphical display of a single data set either a line scatter curve or a set of bars or boxes SigmaPlot data sets are the data in a single worksheet column or ina set of XY or XYZ columns A plot can consist of multiple curves where more than one set of data columns are plotted See also Plot Curve Fit See Nonlinear Regression Cut Remove selected data or graphics and place them in the Windows Clipboard Press Ctrl X or use the Edit menu Cut command to cut data or graphics Cut displaces any current Clipboard contents Only the last cut item can be pasted Note that data and graphics use the same Clipboard The Clipboard contents can be placed at any selected worksheet or page location by pressing Ctrl V or choosing the Edit menu Paste command or Edit menu Paste Special command Clipboard contents can also be pasted into other Windows applications See also Paste Data Set A column or set of worksheet columns that have been picked to plot Colu
171. a see Using a Date and Time Scale on page 368 For directions on changing date and time labels see Changing Date and Time Tick Labels on page 392 gt For directions on changing data and time intervals see Tick Intervals for Date Time Axes on page 382 Although you can plot numeric data as date and time you should first view these numbers as dates and times in the worksheet to make sure they are sensible values For more information on displaying numbers as dates or times see Switching Between Date and Time and Numeric Display on page 73 If a worksheet cell is a label it won t plot as a date and time value In this case you may want to reenter the label as a date and time value see Entering Dates and Times on page 57 Changing Axis Scales 365 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Changing Scale Type To change an axis scale type 1 Select the axis to modify 2 On the Properties toolbar click the Axis Scale button The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 10 6 Grach P z Using the Scale Type list aki ll es from the Axes Tab of the Plots Axes Graph Graph Properties Dialog Box re penn x Data Rename tE Major tick Settings for Scale type Linear Linear Log common J Calculation HEE Log naturals Probability Data Range Probit Calculation ne Data Range fe Category E Datestime W Nearest tick Cancel Apply Help 3 From the Settings for l
172. aces or date and time format and you can also change the color and thickness of the worksheet gridlines and adjust data feedback colors These operations are described in this section If the contents of your column exceed the column width cell contents display as pound symbols Label entries are truncated To change a column width drag the boundary on the right side of the column heading until the column is the size you want To change a row height drag the boundary below the row heading until the row is the size you want To adjust column width and row height using the Options dialog box 1 On the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears 2 Click the Worksheet tab 3 Inthe Settings For list click Appearance 66 Displaying Worksheet Data 2 Changing the Appearance of the Worksheet Grid Setting Data Feedback Colors Setting Decimal Places Worksheet Basics 4 Set column width and row height in the Column Width and Row Height drop down lists 5 Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box SigmaPlot is accurate to twenty one significant digits regardless of how many decimal places you specify You can change the color and thickness of worksheet grid lines To change the grid appearance 1 On the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears 2 Click the Worksheet tab 3 Inthe Settings For list click Appearance 4 Set color and thickness in the Co
173. age or a new page if the worksheet has no associated graph pages The X axis representing the buckets is titled Bin The Y axis representing the frequency or the number of data points in each bin is titled Frequency Both use a linear scale Creating Histograms 405 Statistics 2 If you choose None SigmaPlot displays the worksheet with the output column containing the histogram frequency data Figure 11 6 Example of a Histogram Created Using the Histogram Wizard B Graph Page 2 Data 2 OF x Histogram For more information about modifying axes see Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids on page 361 The Histogram If you need to use uneven bucket sizes for a histogram use SigmaPlot s built in Transform Function histogram transform function To use the histogram transform function 1 Enter the data to analyze in column 1 the bucket values in column 2 of the worksheet Bucket values are used as the upper bounds inclusive of the histogram interval ranges The number of data points that fall within each specified range is counted The number of histogram bars is equal to the number of interval upper bounds entered The number of values that fall beyond the largest upper bound is also counted 2 On the Transforms menu click User Defined The User Defined Transform dialog box appears 3 Enter the following transform into the Edit Transform box 406 Creating Histograms Figure 11 7 Graphing the resul
174. age 383 Hide tick marks see page 384 Customize tick intervals see page 385 Change tick labels see page 387 VVVVVVVVVVVV VY Display grid lines and backplanes see page 396 361 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Changing Axis Range Axis range includes the values of the starting and ending points of an axis Choose to set axis range automatically or manually To change the axis range 1 Double click the axis to modify The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 10 1 Graph Properties Dialog Box Graph Froperties Axes Tab Scaling Settings Plats Axes Graph ERIE Apply to tE Major licks Rename Scale type Linear Range Start Calculation lo Data Range End Calculation jiz Data Range M Pad 5 J Nearest tick Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Axes tab 3 From the Axis drop down list select the axis you wish to modify 4 From the Settings for list select Scaling 5 To automatically set the axis range select Data Range from the Calcula tion list SigmaPlot automatically determines the axis range based on the data plotted For log axes or axes that forbid zero or negative numbers the minimum is set to the nearest major tick mark beyond the smallest value 6 To manually set the axis range select Constant then type beginning and ending axis range values in the Start and End edit boxes Note that Date Time axes display the ranges in date and ti
175. age is in a different section the data plotted by the graph is copied to the current worksheet 122 Dragging and Dropping Graphs Graph Page Basics Hiding and Deleting Objects from the Page You can delete drawn and pasted page objects from the page and graphs automatic legends automatically created graph titles plots and axes can be deleted and or hidden from view To learn about removing and hiding axes see Hiding Displaying and Deleting Axes on page 370 Hiding and Viewing The quickest way to hide a graph on page is to select the graph page then right Graphs ona Page click the graph you want to hide and on the shortcut menu click Hide To control which graphs are displayed on the page 1 Figure 4 26 Graph Layout Tab of the Page Setup Dialog Box 2 3 4 5 On the File menu click Page Setup The Page Setup dialog box appears Page Setup Margins Page Size Graph Layout Color E white Graphs on Page Polar Plot of Aver Bar Chart of Trpic Bar Chart of Dese Show OF Cancel Apply Help Click the Page Layout tab The graphs on the current page are listed in the Shown box To hide a graph select it from the list and click Hide The selected graph is moved to the Hidden list To select multiple graphs hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making selections To view a hidden graph select it from the Hidden list and click Show Click OK to apply your selection
176. alleryigg Browse Author SigmaPlot 6 0 User Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the General tab 3 Type the path and file name of the desired template file in the Template File field 4 Click OK The notebook becomes the default template source 2 If a valid default template source file is not specified a default page is created instead This page is a letter sized white portrait page by default Using Graph Pages as Templates 109 Graph Page Basics Adding New Pages to You can add a previously created page to the Template jnt notebook Template jnt per To add a page to Template jnt 1 On the File menu click Open The Open dialog box appears 2 Select Template Notebook from the Files of type drop down list 3 Select Template jnt from the SPW8 folder 4 Click Open 5 Open or view the notebook file containing the page you want to add to Template jnt 6 Select the page you want to copy 7 Press Ctrl C 8 Select the section of Template jnt where you want to add the new page 9 Press Ctrl V The page is added to Template jnt 10 Save and close Template jnt 11 On the File menu click New The New dialog box appears 12 Under New select Graph page The page you copied appears on the list 110 Using Graph Pages as Templates Graph Page Basics Cutting Copying and Pasting Graphs and other Page Objects Cutting and Copying Graphs Pasting Objects Cut and copy selected page obj
177. alog Boxes and graphs The Line and Fill tabs change fill patterns lines of your plots and objects The Size and Position tab changes position scaling and size for all objects To open the Object Properties dialog box select an object on the graph 100 Working with Page Objects Le Figure 4 6 Object Properties Dialog Box Text Properties Dialog Box Figure 4 7 Text Properties Dialog Box Font Tab Edit Text Dialog Box Graph Page Basics page right click and then on the shortcut menu click Object Properties Object Properties Fill Line Size and Position E sample Pattern Color Q Black Thickness 0 007 In Cancel Apply Help For more information see Drawing Objects on the Page on page 125 Use the Text Properties dialog box to change attributes of non editable text as well as attributes for multiple text labels and making global text changes Selecting text properties with no selected text sets the default attributes for new text labels Text Properties Font Paragraph Font ma Size 10 Font Style Regular H Color EE Ea l Underline Preview AaBbY ydr Cancel Help For more information on the Text Properties dialog box see Formatting Text on page 146 Use the Edit Text dialog box to create new text labels and edit existing labels Open the Edit Text dialog box using the text tool or by double clicking a title or label Working with Pa
178. alogs Dialog Box Automatic AlwaysApply 1 Apply When switching between the certain panels of Graph Properties dialog box a prompt dialog box appears asking if you want to apply the changes before switching panels If you click the Don t show this again always Apply check box this prompt is removed The Apply giani pea i You have made changes to Major Ticks Would wou like to apply those changes now before selecting Minor Ticks or discard those changes T Don t show this again always Apply Discard Cancel You can re activate this prompt by changing AlwaysApply 0 Graph Default The settings for the graph defaults are provided as a reference in the event you settings would like to restore the settings to the original values using the SPW INI file Graph Defaults Graph Height In MillilInches 3500 Graph Width In MillitInches 5000 Graph Position Left In MilliInches 1750 Graph Position Top In MillilInches 3500 Font Arial Page Color 16777215 468 OT ee The SPW INI File Single Curve Symbol Color 0 Single Curve Symbol Color Repeat 2 Multi Symbol Color 0 Multi Symbol Color Repeat 61696 Single Curve Symbol Type 2 Single Curve Symbol Type Repeat 2 Single Curve Symbol Type Adornment 0 Multi Curve Symbol Type 2 Multi Curve Symbol Type Repeat 61952 Multi Curve Symbol Type Adornment 512 Single Curve Line Color 0 Single Curve Line Color Repeat 2 Multi Curve Line Color 0 Multi Curve Line Color R
179. an use a frame to mark the origin axes or Frame Lines to mark the 3D extent of the graph Frame lines are unrelated to the lines used to draw axes and planes and are controlled independently of those lines Frame lines are drawn over the axes To add frame lines modify frame lines or hide frame lines from view 1 Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 7 25 Graph P A Graph Properties Dialog Box adsl ca 3D View Tab Frame Plots Axes Graph Lines Settings Tie E Graph 1 Rename W Show title Settings for Frame lines Relative to viewer Rear lines M Show rear lines Line type soid s Thickness Color Black Front lines I Show Front lines Line type Solid Thickness Color Black Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Graph tab 3 From the Settings For list select Frame Lines 4 From the Frame Lines drop down list select either gt Relative to Viewer If the frame is oriented from your perspective one set of lines is composed of the three cube edges closest to you and the other lines are the remaining sides of the cube The position of these lines is independent of the graph s rotation This is the default position gt Relative to Graph Origin If the frame is drawn according to the origin one set of the lines is drawn over the origin axes see page 300 and the 304 Frame Lines for a 3D Graph Figur
180. and PostScript fonts are provided below For more information on the Windows Fonts control panel see the Windows Users Guide For more information on Adobe Type Manager see the documentation provided by the program supplier Using Truelype Fonts Substituting Printer Fonts TrueType fonts are recommended if you are printing to printer s connected directly to your computer and are using a Windows compatible driver provided either with Windows or by the printer vendor Windows automatically renders TrueType fonts correctly in SigmaPlot both on your screen and printer Control TrueType fonts from the Windows Control Panel Use the Fonts control panel to add remove and enable or disable use of TrueType fonts Additional TrueType fonts are provided with many other applications and can also be purchased as separate packages SigmaPlot can use any correctly installed TrueType font For printers with their own built in fonts such as PostScript printers and later models of Hewlett Packard LaserJet printers the printer setup dialog box option Using TrueType Fonts 441 Printing Tips allows automatic substitution of the built in fonts for TrueType fonts These options are found in the advanced options of the style options log for that printer Many high resolution typesetters and slidemakers still only support PostScript fonts and not TrueType fonts If you plan to take or send a printer file to a service bureau to output on a type
181. andard Let k be the largest integer less than or equal to N 1 p 100 and let f N 1 p 100 k To compute the percentile value each of the above methods uses the formula v f xk 1 1 f xk 4 Click OK Creating Area Plots Area plots are 2D line plots with regions below or between curves filled with a color or pattern Most commonly an area plot is a line plot with shading that Creating Area Plots 269 Working with 2D Graphs descends to the axis You can add shade below a curve and shade in different directions and you can uniquely fill and identify intersecting regions Figure 6 43 Example of an Area Plot This example is actually four plots a simple straight line simple scatter vertical area and multiple area You can find this example in Samples jnb 270 Creating Area Plots ee Working with 2D Graphs Creating Simple and Simple Area Plots plot a single line plot with a downward fill Vertical Plots plot Vertical Area Plots single YX line plots with a left direction fill Figure 6 44 Example of an Area Plot Phase Diagram In this example we see two vertical area plots a simple area plot and a simple scatter plot C solid C quid Gas Jniple Point Pressure i Temperature To create a simple straight line area plot 1 Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data 2 On the 2D Graph Toolbar click Area Plot and then click Simple
182. andard default column in the Columns drop down list 4 Select Plot Results to create a grid of the computed smoothed values on the worksheet 5 Click Next To select columns to graph 422 Smoothing 2D and 3D Data Figure 12 8 Selecting columns to display a grid of smoothed data on the worksheet Figure 12 9 Selecting Smoothers from the Smooth 3D Data drop down list Transform Basics Accept First Empty as the default in the Curve Data Column list Smoother 2D Select Data Columns Select the columns for pour graph Clicking on a worksheet Curve Data Column column selects that column Column First Empti iy colurom First Empty T Potto current graph a M Create new graph Finish Select Create a new graph to create a line plot using the grid of data which appears on the worksheet Help Cancel Back To create another plot type and style clear Create new graph and create the plot manually For information on creating 2D plots see Creating 2D Plots on page 243 Click Finish The Smooth 2D Data dialog box appears Smooth 2D Data Sampling Proportion Polynonial Degree Reject Qutliers Description Local smoothing technique using polynomial regression and weights computed from the Gaussian density function To define smoothing parameters l 2 2 Select a smoother type from the Smoothers drop down list Set the Sampling Propo
183. aph Style Gallery 1 Open the graph that you wish to add to the Graph Style Gallery 2 If the Graph Style Gallery is not visible on your SigmaPlot desktop on the Graph menu click Graph Style Gallery 3 From the graph page select the graph and drag and drop it into the Graph Style Gallery window A thumbnail of the graph appears in the Graph Style Gallery palette The graph title appears as the graph style s name Alternative Methods There are two alternative methods to add graph styles to the Graph Style Gallery gt Ifthe Graph Style Gallery is docked select the graph on the page right click and on the shortcut menu click Add Graph The graph style appears in the Gallery Figure 5 12 ar Tr 5 3D Noisy Data 6400 Point Using the Right A Iigmariot MOOINEC INTESE J GUaIe omy ata on z Click Shortcut E File Edit Insert View Format Tools Graph Statistics Transforme Toolbox window Help la x menu to S dl S a l Ola OE Add a Graph to the WERKE RENREES EENEN evr tor Foe Graph Style Gallery b Here the Graph Ss Style Gallery is docked 30 Smoother merse Square CI D T n mir Ereate Graph Edit k Show Sidebar Summary Infa Grouped Bar Chart lear with Error Bars it ef ole rahi ER ae If the Graph Style Gallery is floating select the graph on the page and then on the Gallery click Add Graph The graph style appears in the Gallery m
184. aph type in SigmaPlot Graph Types on page 165 To create a waterfall plot Creating Waterfall Plots 295 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 1 Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data 2 On the 3D Graph Toolbar click 3D Line Plot and then click 3D Waterfall The Graph Wizard appears Figure 7 12 Graph Wizard Data Format Panel Graph Wizard Create Graph How iz your data organized Le ies Ee Al least one Z column for scatter two Z column required for mesh and contour 3 From the Data Format list choose the appropriate data format 4 Click Next Figure 7 13 Graph Wizard Select Columns Panel Graph Wizard Create Graph Data for First 2 Column 1 Select the column to plot Selected Columns First 1 Column 1 Last 1 Column 3 by clicking the column in the worksheet a nae Help Cancel Back Next Since you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in the Selected Columns list 5 Click Finish Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify plot lines color and transparency For more information on making general modifications to your plot see Creating and Modifying Graphs on page 163 296 Creating Waterfall Plots Working with 3D and Contour Graphs Creating Mesh Plots Figure 7 14 Specifying the Data Format Figure 7 15 Using the Create
185. are too big to easily handle Also you will now have to do some dpi calculations For example if you are producing a file that requires a final printed dpi of 600 and the graph is being reduced by a 65 ratio do not set the file dpi to 600 Instead use a dpi of 390 600 65 When this file shrinks to the final printed size the final dpi will also be 600 Why Use EPS Most publishers request either EPS or TIFF formats When given a choice choose EPS Why Because EPS is known as a vector format This means that the image is not made up of pixels but instead graphic descriptions of lines fills text and so on A vector format has no size It is dimensionless This means you can shrink it as small as you want or grow it as big as you want with no change in resolution dpi has no meaning for a vector file This format is ideal for a graph figure since there is no degradation of the quality of the figure as it re scales It is also means that when you place a vector format file in a document it often first appears at an arbitrary size and then you can scale it to the final desired size This can often startle annoy or confuse someone not familiar with the behavior of vector files The other vector format supported by SigmaPlot is the Windows Metafile format Post Processing If you must use TIFF files and you have access to Photoshop use it to optimize TIFF Files the file SigmaPlot does not have access to the expensive proprietary
186. arn about working with frame lines see Frame Lines for a 3D Graph on page 304 For more information on grid lines see Displaying Grid Lines and Backplanes on page 396 3 0 Hiding Displaying and Deleting Axes Moving Axes Moving 2D Axes Manually Figure 10 11 Moving an Axis by Dragging Moving Axes toa Precise Location Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids You can move 2D axes with your mouse or to a precise location with the Graph properties dialog box You cannot move 3D axes but you can hide them from view For information on hiding 3D axes see Hiding Displaying and Deleting Axes on page 370 To move a 2D axis with the mouse select the axis and drag it to a new position Y axes move only horizontally and X axes only vertically Moving ternary graph axes changes the axis range and scale along with the size and shape of the graph Axis titles move with the axis Ey Graph Page 2 Data 2 iofs Use the Lines settings in the Graph Properties dialog box Axes tab to position axes a precise distance from the graph origin For ternary plots see Modifying Ternary Axes on page 338 To move an axis 1 Double click the axis you want to move Moving Axes 371 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Figure 10 12 Graph Properties Dialog Box Axes Tab The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Grids and Planes Title and Legend Anis Iv Data Rename Apply to
187. art SigmaPlot a worksheet opens in the notebook window To make a notebook window active or current click it You can also click the Notebook button on the SigmaPlot toolbar From the notebook window you can open store move and delete notebook sections and items SigmaPlot Notebook Structure 37 Notebook Basics For more information see Opening Notebook Files and Items on page 44 and Copying Pasting and Removing Notebook Items on page 45 Figure 2 1 L Hotebook Notebook Window Notebook BT Section 1 iE Data 1 c Sedin ummary a section 3 Delete o Data 3 Help Report 2 o He a Section 4 Summary Info 4 Author ee SPS5 Ine Created 12 11701 09 35 53 Modified 12 11701 09 35 55 Description Graph Page Modified Notebook An asterisk next to a notebook item indicates that the item has been modified Items since the last time the notebook file was saved Opening Multiple You can open multiple notebook items Using the notebook to open and close Notebook Items multiple items will help you manage viewing multiple documents Figure 2 2 l i Example of Et eee de Multiple Dis Edi ft Yea foma rait Graph fiia Mui Toba ids He Notebook Items Cle i amp 6 e PRR MARPF As Swe Opened Sr en a Ie Ty g1 Grants m Open items are Brace i cui Fii i _ om E 2 Gong 2 Gourd oe shown in the iB UE 3 Pogue f notebook as
188. ary Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify tick appearance including tick Tick Marks Direction length and color You can also specify to view or hide tick marks which side of and Intervals the axis they extend from and the tick interval To modify tick marks 1 Double click the tick marks 346 Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick Labels Figure 8 37 Graph Properties Dialog Box Axes Tab Ticks Settings Figure 8 38 Graph Examples of Tick Marks Pointing counterclockwise Clockwise Both and 90 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Axis Apply to 5042 Rename gt Minor ticks Tick lines Length J0 019in ft a Thickness Settings for Scaling Cal e Clockwise in Sa T Clockwise in yh t Black CCW out Tick intervals Minor tick intervals per major tick interwal F Cancel Apply Help Click the Axes tab Select Ticks from the Settings For list Select either Major Ticks or Minor Ticks from the Apply to drop down list To turn tick drawing on and off and to select tick directions for both sides of an axis line use the Direction lists The second list is only avail able if a ternary plot range change has created a secondary axis Select Out In or In and Out to display tick marks on the selected axis out from the center of the graph
189. as only X or Y values enter the data for each plot into a column and do not enter data for corresponding coordinates Certain graph styles plot data by representing the mean of an entire column as a single data point In these cases place the values you want represented as a single X or Y value into one column Asymmetric error bar plots use two columns as the error bar source from which you can independently control the values of error bars Place the values you want to represent the error bars to the right of the plotted column 242 Arranging Data for a 2D Plot Column Means Creating 2D Plots Figure 6 10 Using the Graph Wizard to Specify the Data Format Working with 2D Graphs Plots the average of an entire worksheet column as a single datapoint then uses the column statistics to compute error bars as specified by the Error Calculation For information on the available 2D data formats see the description of graph styles in see SigmaPlot Graph Style on page 167 To create a 2D plot l Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer over your data Select the desired graph type and style from the graph toolbar The Graph Wizard appears Create Graph Data Format How iz your data organized 75000 S000 10 9000 andr columns at 2 Gem SEO 77000 least one pair 211 7000 eem 11 1000 124000 33000 9 5000 6 103000 114M0 14 1000 B00 Eo 34000 tT 84000 S6
190. as Windows metafiles SigmaPlot provides the following commands and functions to place link and embed objects on a graph or report page Command or Function Definition and Use Paste Command Embeds an OLE object if there is one in the Clipboard Connects to data in the originating application but not directly to a file If there is no OLE object in the Clipboard a non editable picture or text is placed Paste Special Command Allows you to choose Clipboard file types and to also embed objects and links Insert New Object Directly creates and places an OLE object Command without using the Clipboard Allows embedding the object or linking to a file Drag and Drop Moves or copies any Clipboard object usually OLE SigmaPlot can place and receive OLE and other types of objects such as scanned images clip art or text from a word processor For example you can place an equation created with the Microsoft Word Equation Editor into a SigmaPlot report and edit it with the Word Equation Editor when it changes Report 1 Times New Roman fia B 7 0 eae a e ee ee B kero eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit praessent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te feugait nulla facilisi s fl t 7 Use Paste Special Insert Object and Ctrl Drag to either link or embed the object in the page or report Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects 113 Graph Page Basics Linking appea
191. as individual bars and lines to show highlight groups or data Modify multiple selections simultaneously to save unnecessary steps gt Editing text is now easier than ever Editing text in the graph page is as easy as using your word processor or other presentation software Type or edit text directly on the page without using a dialog box when chang ing axis labels titles legend text or free form text Select your text then change font size type color and alignment with intui tive buttons visible from the toolbar gt Gain greater control over legends Break the connection between the column titles in the worksheet and the legend labels in the graph to avoid numerous edits when using graph templates or gallery items Lock legend text so that changing your worksheet columns doesn t affect your legend labels Or maintain the link between your data the graph legend when appropriate Duplicate graphs with new data using graph templates and graphs without having to modify the legend labels gt Multiple levels of undo Experiment with different annotations on your graph then quickly undo the last several changes and start again gt Import MS Access files MDB directly into SigmaPlot 10 New Features in SigmaPlot 8 0 OT ee Graph Types and Styles Templates Graph Defaults Axis Scales Automatic Legends Smooth 2D and 3D Data Introduction gt AutoSave You ll never have to worry about losing your work SigmaPlot
192. ases 378 Changing Tick Mark Appearance ccccccescccessseccsseeecsseeecsseeecsseeeesseeeserseeeeeeeeessaes 383 Customizing TICK Intervals oo ec eeeeccesseccssececcseecesseeccsseeccseeeessueecesseesersueserueeeesaes 385 Changing Tiek Lapel ornan aa ine ncn eat A pannan Gaeta st nes 387 Displaying Grid Lines and Backplane cccccccsscccsscccssseecesseeeesseesesseeseseeserseeens 396 LE LCS HS A a 401 Running Paired and Independent t Tests cccceccccsssscccesseeeeesseeeeessseeesersateeeeeas 401 FOU OU SU OCI ella aasien n E N A 403 Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines ou ccceccecsssccceessseeeeesseeeeessseeesensaneeeeees 407 ee Contents Transtorm BASICS sccwttcsndaindoiisesviatanes eer a e OSE 417 Perorming Quick TransfOnTIS sirriirurecoisrenmiiiir a d eri 419 SIMOOUMAG 2D and D Daalder E E EE O T NE 420 Using the Report Editor ccccccceceeeeneaeceeeeeeeaueeeeeseaueeeesneaaees 429 Creatina REDONS dizeria a S 429 SEEDING REPO OD ING eiin a a a a a a 430 Setting Report Page Size and Margins cccesecccesscecsseeecsseeeesseeeeeseeeessseeeersneeeeas 430 Using the Report Editor Ruler sessessesseressneressneneensuneerenusensnanenananenenannnennnnannernenrenns 432 SEUNG TaD ieir T ET A 432 Setting Paragraph Indents ci rcsis cece scienetitennadseaustaaituncenestocduics nein de duohartineedusbeaaniadderandainant 434 Formatting Text ANd Paragraphs cc cccessccccsseeceessseeece
193. asymmetric 251 bidirectional data format 169 calculating 258 cap width 253 color 253 creating 2D plots with 248 creating grouped bar charts with 261 custom directions 257 defined 484 direction 254 484 generating 258 grouped bar charts 263 horizontal data format 169 line thickness 253 mean computation method 258 methods for generating 259 modifying 253 modifying appearance 253 multiple and regressions data format 169 multiple data format 168 plot types 245 quartile plots 250 range plots 248 relative direction 255 simple and regression data format 168 simple data format 168 European address and phone number 32 Evaluating F at 234 mathematical expresions 233 236 Examples 2D graphs 23 27 3D graphs 28 30 contour plot 27 mesh plot 29 pie chart 23 polar plot 26 Excel worksheets creating graphs 92 limitations 91 new 41 opening 89 opening data files 90 regression 93 statistics 91 system requirements 13 toolbars 92 transforms 93 Unprotecting workbooks 89 using 88 94 using Date and Time format 74 using Excel Export commands 91 using Excel print commands 91 workbooks 12 Executing one line functions 419 Exploding pie chart slices 320 322 defined 484 Exponents defined 484 numeric tick labels 315 391 Exporting data 484 defined 484 Excel worksheets 91 into HTML 354 to Systat 63 worksheet data 49 50 62 484 worksheets as text files 62 Extreme Value Distribution scale
194. at WordPerfect can read The graphical formats available to output a SigmaPlot graph are EPS Encapsulated PostScript WMF Windows MetaFile BMP Windows Bitmap TIFF and JPEG For direction on exporting graphs and pages to files see Exporting Graphs and Pages on page 2 47 Once your graph is saved in a format that WordPerfect will accept open your WordPerfect document and choose the File menu Insert command then select File from the list In the Insert File dialog box set the List Files of Type to All Files then select the file you want to insert into WordPerfect and click OK Inserting SigmaPlot Graphs into WordPerfect 477 Notes Glossary 95 or 99 Confidence Lines See Confidence Line Angular Axes The angular axes of polar plot are drawn along the inner if applicable and outer circumferences of the graph By default the inner axis is not displayed but if your radial axes are offset from the center of the graph you can choose to display the inner angular axis See also Polar Plot Radial Axes Apex The maximum minimum or tip of the triangle for ternary plot axes ASCII File See text file ASCII stands for American Standard Code for Information Interchange Aspect Ratio The Aspect Ratio option allows for resizing of graphs and objects without distortion To maintain the aspect ratio the ratio of length to height of a graph or object during manual resizing make sure the Stretch Maintains Aspect Ratio option is
195. ater date by sending the file to the printer The kind of file created is entirely dependent on the printer driver used To print to a file rather than a printer 1 On the File menu click Print The Print dialog box appears 2 Select Print to File in the Print dialog box and click OK The Print to File dialog box appears 3 Enter the file name for the output file and click OK 448 Printing to Files Types of Files Printing Tips PostScript PostScript files are created when you use a PostScript printer driver to print file PostScript files can be dumped to another printer or high resolution output device later Use PostScript files if you want to take graph pages to a typesetting or slide making service You do not need to have a PostScript printer connected to install and use a PostScript printer driver EPS Encapsulated PostScript files are scalable line art graphic files You can export graphs and pages to EPS files by choosing File Export see Exporting Graphs and Pages on page 47 Note that EPS files contain no scaling information and are not designed to be sent to a printer If you attempt to print an EPS file directly to a printer you may receive unpredictable results HPGL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language files use the Hewlett Packard pen plotter language HPGL files are created when you use a Hewlett Packard plotter driver to print to a file Many applications are able to read these files some wi
196. ating and Modifying Graphs Use the Graph Wizard to create graphs This chapter provides an overview of the graph creation process using the Graph Wizard including descriptions of the different graph types and styles available and common modifications setting Graph Defaults Figure 5 1 Options Dialog Box Graph Defaults Tab Changing graph defaults affects only new graphs created To change existing graphs 1 Select the graph 2 Change its properties using the Graph Wizard or other dialog boxes and com mands The graph default options are intentionally limited and simple If you want to use more complex graph defaults use the page templates or the Graph Style Gallery to create complex graphs that can be applied to data as a template bypassing graph creation entirely For more information on using page templates see Using Graph Pages as Templates on page 105 For more information on using the Graph Style Gallery see Creating Graphs Using the Graph Style Gallery on page 182 To change your Graph Defaults 1 On the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears Worksheet Page General Macro Graph Defaults Eont Arial Size and Position Height 3 50 in width 5 00 in Top 250 in Left fi 75in Settings For ae Single Curve Circle Pg Black Su abala E a Multiple Curves fer Doubies jin Black and 4h Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Graph Defaults tab
197. atterns and Fill Colors on page 216 Bubble plots are XY scatter plots that use symbols to represent not only XY locations but also a third dimension represented by the size of the symbol Use bubble plots to plot population density epidemiological data or other similar data sets where a third variable can be clearly illustrated by the size of the symbols Data for bubble plots can either be X Y data in two separate columns or single X or single Y data in one column In both cases an additional column is needed to Bubble Plots 279 Working with 2D Graphs indicate bubble size values Since the bubble size column corresponds to symbol diameter you must convert the data for your third variable to diameters Figure 6 57 Bubble Plot Example of a Bubble Plot 18 5 x Q e 6 O O i 2 Y o Y Data 12 O 8 2 O 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 X Data Bubble plots must have at least one plot but can hold many more plots using different data formats if appropriate The bubble plot type has available only the default scatter style You can change the symbol type However if you use something other than a circle you will need a different equation to transform area to diameter Using X Y Values for Bubble plot X Y data is arranged in the same way as other 2D plot X Y data Bubble Plots with all X values in one column and all Y values in another Data for Bubble Size SigmaPlot can graph bubble plots using
198. axes 2 empty missing or non data cells 3 data outside the legal range for an axis for example a non positive value on a logarithmic scale You can ignore bad points using the Data settings of the Plots panel in the Graph Properties dialog box Bar Chart A plot which graphs data as vertical or horizontal bars with bar lengths equal to the data values If you plot more than one column of data the data is plotted as groups of bars Select a plot then use the Graph Wizard Modify Plot dialog box to change a plot to a bar chart See also Plot Type and Stacked Bar Chart Base of an exponent The number that is raised to the exponential power for example 10 or e Bitmap A general description for an image composed of individual bits or pixels Also a term for the Window bitmap graphic file format The resolution of a bitmap is dependent on the dpi or dots per inch it is created with Because the number of pixels that compose a bitmap is constant making a bitmap appear smaller increases its relative resolution by increasing its dpi Conversely making a bitmap larger reduces the dpi and its resolution 480 ee Glossary Block 1 A selected rectangular region of worksheet cells Blocks can be copied deleted pasted transposed sorted printed and exported 2 A transform language function that operates on worksheet blocks BMP See Bitmap Box Plot A plot type that displays the 10th 25th 50th 75th and 90th percentiles
199. behind it will be visible Use this option to more clearly show the intersections between two or more 3D meshes 298 Modifying Mesh Lines and Fill Color Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 2 Set your display to High Color 16 bit or True Color 24 bit for this y play feature to work properly Check your system s color capabilities under the Windows Display Properties Settings 6 If you are using a color scheme under Fill Colors from the Transition drop down list specify how the colors flow across the grid Select Discrete to use an increment with a clear shift between colors or select Gradient to use an increment with a gradual shift between colors 2 The Transition drop down list is available only when using a fill color scheme 7 To change mesh lines from the Settings For list select Lines Use the Color drop down list to change line color Selecting None creates transparent mesh lines and selecting Custom enables you to use or create a custom color For more information on using custom colors see Using Custom Col ors on page 158 8 To change line thickness move the Thickness slider or type a new value in the Thickness box 9 Click OK Changing Graph Perspective Rotation and Shading Changing the View of a 3D Graph Modify the view of the 3D graph by changing perspective and rotation of the graph and by enabling a light source to add shading To change the perspective of a 3D graph rotate a graph
200. bels See also Axis Range Tick Marks Marks along an axis indicating the precise location of each value at specific intervals Major tick mark intervals are determined by the axis range Minor tick marks create a specified number of intervals between major tick marks Tick mark intervals are also used as grid line intervals See also Axis Range and Grid Use the Ticks settings of the Axes panel in the Graph Properties dialog box to specify major and minor tick intervals Tick Origin The value used to compute the starting tick mark locations along an axis usually zero The actual starting value is determined by the range and major tick increment If the origin is less than the beginning of the axis range the tick increment is added to the tick origin until the axis range is reached The tick origin is specified in the Ticks settings of the Axes panel in the Graph Properties dialog box See also Axis Range TIFF Tagged Image Format File This is one of the most common bitmap graphic formats used by both PCs and Macintoshes and is the native file format for many graphic programs such as Adobe Photoshop See also Bitmap Toolbar Toolbars are floating palettes containing buttons to execute many common File Edit View Format Tools and Graph menu commands and to select a graph type and style with a single click These include selecting text line box and ellipse drawing modes inserting legends grouping objects and moving objects to the
201. blandit praesent luptatum zzril delenit aug e feugait pulla facilisi Loremipsurm dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit sed d nibh euismod tincidunt ut laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutt enim ad minim wenlam Quis nostrud exersi tation ullamcoreper su 2 To change the first line indent drag the marker at the top left of the ruler 3 To change the left indent drag the marker on the bottom left of the ruler 4 To move both the left and first line indents drag each marker separately 5 To change the right indent drag the marker on the bottom right side of the ruler 434 Setting Paragraph Indents Using the Report Editor To create an indented line drag the marker to the right of the left indent To create a hanging indent drag the marker to the left of the left indent Figure 13 6 Paragraph Indent im Report 1 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit sed dia nibh euismod tincidunt ut laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat w enim ad minim weniam quis nostrud exersi tation ullamcorepe larotis nisl Ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat Duis autem vel eum iriure hendrerit in vulputate welt esse moleshe cor dolore eu feugiat nulla Eacihsis at vero eros et accurnsan et iusto odio d blandit praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te Ceugait nul Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit sed dia nibh euismod tincidunt ut laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat w enim ad min
202. ble symbol sizes Fan Plot This is a polar plot with a restricted angular axis arc and radial axis length The radial axis positions are moved to the stop and start angles of the graph Fan Plot 440 3D Mesh and Scatter 4 Up Line and Step Plots Sample Graphs This is a graph of up to two 3D scatter plots and a mesh plot on a single graph 3D Graph 1 140 eyed Z Scatter 1 X vs Scatter 1 Y vs Scatter 1 Z Scatter 2 X vs Scatter 2 Y vs Scatter 2 Z HM Mesh X vs Mesh Y vs Mesh Z This is a set of four line graphs each with one set of x and two sets of y data plotted as a line and a step plot respectively Graph 1 Graph 2 25 25 204 20 154 154 a oO vi e a gt gt 104 104 54 54 O X Data 1 vs Line 1 Data X Data 2 vs Line 2 Data a X Data 1 vs Step 1 Data 5 X Data 2 vs LStep 2 Data 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 X Data X Data Graph 3 Graph 4 25 25 204 20 15 4 154 s oO i a Q gt gt 104 104 54 54 O X Data 3 vs Line 1 Data O X Data 4 vs Line 4 Data X Data 3 vs Step 3 Data X Data 4 vs Step 4 Data 0 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 X Data X Data 441 Sample Graphs Ribbon Plot A ribbon plot is created by a series of one interval wide meshes You can use the RIBBON XFM transform file to convert columns of data into mesh ribbons Ribbon Plot eyed Z Three T
203. bol Options on page 204 and Changing Line Type and Other Line Options on page 213 gt Modifying backplane color and grid lines see Modifying Grids and Planes on page 396 gt Changing axis properties including range and direction see Modifying Ternary Axes on page 338 To modify a ternary graph select the graph and open the Graph Properties dialog box To learn about selecting graphs and using the Graph Properties dialog box see Modifying Graphs on page 189 and Selecting a Graph or a Plot on page 191 Modifying Ternary Axes Ternary axes are drawn to represent increases in data value in a counterclockwise direction by default Axis direction can be reversed indicated by a reversal of tick labels and the tick direction changes accordingly Because ternary axes are interdependent any modification in the scale type or range of one of the axes is reflected in the other axes and may alter the shape and size of the graph You can modify the color and thickness of axis lines the appearance of tick marks and tick labels location and rotation of axis titles and display of each ternary axis independently Ternary axes can be modified similarly to other graph axes The following sections cover gt Changing display of axis titles Modifying Ternary Axis Title Location on page 339 gt Changing axis range scale and direction see Changing Ternary Axis Range Scale and Direction on page 340 gt Changing axis tick labels s
204. button to access previous Graph Wizard panels Click Finish when you have finished picking the data to create the plot To learn about modifying error bar information Changing Error Bar Appearance on page 253 To learn about repicking data for an existing plot see Picking Different Data for the Current Plot on page 194 Creating a Range Plot A range plot is an error plot that plots the highest and lowest values in a column or row of data as the range of the error bar using the mean or median value as the data point To create a range plot from columns of data l Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer over your data On the graph toolbar click Scatter Plot and then Simple Scatter Error Bars The Graph Wizard Create Graph dialog box appears Select Column Means or Column Median from the Symbol Value drop down list Select Maximum from the Error Calculation Upper drop down list Select Minimumtfrom the Error Calculation Lower drop down list Click Next The Graph Wizard prompts you to select a data format Select X Many Y from the Data Format list and click Next Since you ve already selected the data columns to plot the appropriate col umn titles appear in the Selected Columns list Click Finish A range plot appears 248 Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars Working with 2D Graphs Creating 2D Plots with Asymmetric Error Bars Create 2D scatter plot
205. cales 367 contour labels 313 316 contour lines 309 310 contour plots 308 316 drawn objects 127 131 drop lines 226 227 edges 218 embedded graphs 187 error bar appearance 253 error bar computation method 258 error bar direction 254 error bars 253 fill color 298 fills 219 frame lines 304 graph lighting 303 graph perspective 303 graph rotation 303 graph styles 195 196 graph titles 194 graph types 195 196 graphs 163 194 graphs using Graph Properties dialog 189 190 grid lines 303 grids 396 grids and planes 190 inserted object icons 119 line color 128 line end attributes 130 line thickness 129 line type 129 lines 216 mesh lines 298 mesh plots 299 multiple selected objects 131 multiple text labels 147 notebook items 38 object fills 127 object links 120 122 page color 157 158 page view 103 104 pasted object icon 118 patterns 219 pie charts 322 plot name 192 193 plot pattern line thickness 218 polar axes 333 polar plots 325 326 radial axes 333 radial axes arc 330 333 Index radial axes tick labels 333 source files for links 121 symbol attributes 204 symbols 204 213 ternary axis direction 344 ternary plots 338 ternary tick labels 349 ternary tick marks 348 text formatting 146 147 tick labels 392 tick marks 303 titles and legends 190 whisker cap widths 267 modifying for new pages 108 Mouse moving objects 131 sizing objects 132 Moving 2D axes 372 2D axes
206. ce 1 Select the worksheet columns by dragging the pointer over your data 2 On the Transforms menu click Smooth 3D Data The Smoother 3D Select Data dialog box appears Figure 12 11 Selecting the Data Columns to Smooth Smoother 3D Select Data Data for Source 2 from the Smoother 3D mee Select the input E Dialog Box we data for Selected Columns BS oai clicking the columns in the Source amp Column 1 Source r Column 2 Source Column 3 Data Fom AAA worksheet Smoothing 2D and 3D Data 425 Transform Basics 3 Click Next Figure 12 12 Smoother 3D Select Data Selecting the Data ee Columns to Smooth Select the columns for your results Coms W from the Smoother 3D le sll Dialog Box Results i Predicted Column 4 Residuals Column 5 W Plot Results Finizh To select worksheet columns for your results 1 Select Predicted First Empty from the Results list to compute a smoothed value at each data point 2 Select Residuals First Empty to differentiate between the smoothed value and the original Y value 3 Accept First Empty as the standard default column in the Columns drop down list 4 Select Plot Results to create a grid of the computed data on the worksheet 5 Click Next To select columns to graph 1 Accept First Empty as the default in the Columns drop down list Figure 12 13 Smoother 3D Select Data Selecting columns to
207. ce News Books 1719 N St NW Washington D C 20036 Scientific Illustration Committee of the Council of Biology Editors 1988 Illustrating Science Standards for Publication Bethesda Maryland Council of Biology Editors Inc Introduction Notes References 35 Sa a E Introduction 36 References 2 Notebook Basics The SigmaPlot notebook file contains all of your SigmaPlot data and graphs You can export the notebook file to other applications and accept data from other applications This chapter covers SigmaPlot notebook organization see page 37 Creating notebooks and adding notebook items see page 38 Renaming notebooks and notebook items see page 43 Opening notebooks and notebook items see page 44 Copying pasting and deleting notebook items see page 45 Saving your work see page 46 Exporting data graphs and text reports see page 46 VVVVVVVY Printing worksheets pages and reports see page 49 sigmaPlot Notebook Structure Each SigmaPlot notebook file contains many different documents arranged as a tree structure This tree appears in the notebook window with the notebook name at the top level one or more sections at the second level and one or more items at the third level Within each section you can create one worksheet and an unlimited number of graph pages reports equations and macros Notebooks retain their size and position between each use of SigmaPlot Every time you st
208. cel Workbooks Excel for Office 2000 97 and 95 takes full advantage of SigmaPlot s functionality Import excel workbooks into SigmaPlot Hardware Minimum requirements are 486 with 32 MB of RAM Serial Numbers This unique SPSS serial number is located on the CD cover Have this number available when you call for product support payment or system upgrade Copy this number to the registration card and send it in to SPSS Registration entitles you to gt Unlimited technical support gt System upgrades Installing SigmaPlot 13 Introduction Using SigmaPlot in Windows SigmaPlot runs under the Windows operating system and functions within the standard Windows interface For information on how Windows works please refer to your Windows documentation A brief explanation of standard Windows terminology as it applies to SigmaPlot is provided here Figure 1 1 SigmaPlot Notebook SigmaPlot Worksheet Page Toolbar SigmaPlot File Name Notebook Window Window pa ee Saeed me Pa E Fie GS pt ew Fyre Jo pah Gaia Ta Menu Bar i Standard Toolbar 2D and 3D FAE d LI iope ie y i e a T foe Dj Eeompie 3 Poe F LL Example Bar ered Lire kJ Dopis Se bax Pii a Ecke i Peh Le j Enamgi Ti Pale Pia f Aei Papuli Dia T Graph Toolbars Graph Style Gallery Eie Chart with ahis Ek nd Graph Page m vy Window rrr Eili E Column Statistics 4 T fen TAE TIET Window S
209. cel workbooks to Excel s native XLS file format as well as any other format supported by Excel To export Excel Workbooks 1 View the Excel worksheet 2 On the File menu click Export Excel s Save As dialog box appears 3 Select the desired format from the Save as type drop down list 4 Specify the drive and directory in which to save the file 5 Enter a file name 6 Click Save to save the file 5 Under Excel 5 0 export and page setup are not available Excel Toolbars An Excel workbook in SigmaPlot always uses Excel toolbar default settings of your last Excel session You can view any of Excel s toolbars by choosing View Toolbars Select a toolbar to use from the Excel Toolbars dialog box the toolbars appear near the workbook window X Switching from or closing an Excel workbook hides any Excel toolbars you may have displayed Creating SigmaPlot An Excel worksheet works the same as a SigmaPlot worksheet when creating Graphs With Excel graphs You can pre select data before beginning a graph or click or highlight Workbooks columns from the Graph Wizard 92 Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot Figure 3 33 Picking Data to Plot From an Excel Worksheet Using Transforms on Data in Excel Workbooks Using Statistics Worksheet Basics You can also create SigmaPlot graphs using Excel For more information see Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using MicroSoft Excel on page 189 2 in OI fo ee inm
210. checked in the Options AUTOEXEC BAT A DOS file that automatically executes a series of commands when DOS is booted Axis In a Cartesian graph an axis indicates the direction and range of X Y or Z values In SigmaPlot axes define the origin and scaling of a plot and include tick and label definitions Multiple axes for 2D graphs can be created using the Graph menu Add Axis command Because each 2D Cartesian plot can be associated with only one set of X and Y axes you can only create new axes if your graph contains multiple plots However since a graph can contain an unlimited number of plots you can create an unlimited number of X and Y axes for a graph X Note that an unlimited number of plots can share a single axis Axis Break A range along the axis where portions of a plot are omitted If there is a large empty range between two sets of data you can use an axis break to omit the empty range Axis Direction For ternary axes the direction that the data increases This can be counter clockwise by default or clockwise Axis Label Axis titles and tick labels Axis titles can be automatically taken from the Axis name as shown in the Axis panel of the Graph Properties dialog box or manually typed using the Tools menu Text command Tick labels can be numeric time series or taken from a worksheet column See also Tick Labels 479 Glossary Axis Pair The top and bottom or left and right pairs in an axis Each axis i
211. ck appearance 378 modifying titles and legends 190 moving axes 371 pie charts 319 positioning 2D axes 371 radial axes 330 viewing hiding axis 370 Graph Properties dialog box 100 modifying tick appearance 383 Graph style multiple straight lines 170 simple straight line 170 Graph style data format bidirectional error bars 169 Horizontal dot plot 170 horizontal point plot 169 hortizontal error bars 169 multiple area plot 173 multiple error bars 168 multiple error bars and regressions 169 multiple horizontal step plot 171 multiple regressions 167 multiple scatter plot 167 multiple spline curves 170 multiple straight line 171 multiple vertical area plot 173 multiple vertical step plot 170 simple area plot 173 simple error bars 168 simple error bars and regression 168 simple horizontal step plot 171 simple regression 167 simple scatter plot 167 simple spline curve 170 171 simple straight line 171 simple vertical step plot format 170 vertical area plot 173 vertical dot plot 170 vertical point plot 169 Graph Style Gallery adding styles 184 applying graph styles 183 creating graphs 182 184 define 182 docking 183 Graph styles 3D graph display 11 cubic spline interpolation 11 error bars 11 regression 11 selecting with Graph Wizard 11 graph styles using the Graph Style Gallery 182 184 Graph titles deleting 125 Graph Toolbar 177 Graph toolbars 2D 3D 102 Graph type data format 3D bar chart 167 3D line plot 167 3D
212. ckness is 60 sigmaPlot Graph Types There are more than a dozen graph types available in SigmaPlot Choose a graph type using the Graph Wizard or the graph toolbar To learn about making graphs see Creating Graphs on page 177 Graph Types Scatter Plots data as XY points using symbols Plot SigmaPlot Graph Types 165 Creating and Modifying Graphs O k A B 2 M amp RE 166 SigmaPlot Graph Types Line Plot Lineand Scatter Plot Area Plot Polar Plot Ternary Plot Vertical Bar Chart Hori zontal Bar Chart Box Plot Pie Chart Con tour Plot 3D Scat ter Plot Plots data as XY points connected with lines Plots data as XY points using symbols connected with lines Plots data as XY points with regions below or between curves filled with a color or pattern Plots data using angles and distance from center Plots data on a coordinate system based on three different components which always add up to 100 Plots data as Y points with vertical bars Plots data as X points with horizontal bars Plots data as the median and percentiles Plots data as a percent of the total Plots data as XYZ values in 2D space For mat data columns as many Z single XY many Z or XYZ triplet See Arranging Data for Contour Plots and 3D Graphs on page 289 Plots data as XYZ data points in 3D space Format data columns as many Z single XY many Z or XYZ triplet See pa
213. color line end appearance arrow heads etc object fill color pattern and pattern color You can make these modifications using the Object Properties dialog box You can also use the Graph Properties dialog box to change fill patterns and colors To find out more see Changing Patterns and Fill Colors on page 216 Changing Object Fills Change fill patterns and colors of drawn rectangles and ellipses and of graph symbols bars and boxes using the Object Properties dialog box 2 When you select multiple objects fill options apply to all selected objects that can be filled including lines To learn how to customize the color see Using Custom Colors on page 158 To change the background color of an object fill 1 Select the object s to modify on the graph page 2 On the Format menu click Fill The Object Properties dialog box appears Figure 4 29 Object Properties Object Properties Dialog Box Fill Tab Fil Line Background Example ot E Red Foreground Paten E Color Q Black Thickness orn Cancel Apply Help 3 Click the Fills tab 4 From the Background Color drop down list choose a color 5 Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box To change the fill pattern of the selected object Modifying Object Colors and Lines 127 4 Select the object to modify on the graph page On the Format menu click Fill The Object Properties dialog box app
214. colors chart fills 218 Incrementing schemes customized 220 222 defined 491 Independent graph pages 45 Independent t test 403 performing 402 Information using this manual 33 Insert Cells shortcut 56 Insert Date and Time command for reports 436 Insert Graphic Cells command 220 Insert New Object command 119 Inserting columns and rows 78 80 data 58 defined 486 displaying inserted objects as icons 119 Index graphs into FrontPage 356 linked objects 120 modifying inserted object icons 119 new object 119 objects from file 119 Insertion mode turning on off 58 Installing SigmaPlot 12 13 serial numbers 13 Interpolating data setting mesh range values 427 Intersections idenitying in area plots 276 Intervals confidence prediction 64 409 410 setting for contour plots 312 tick mark values assigned to a worksheet 387 Inverse distance interpolation defined 486 J JNT files 137 Journals preparing graphs for publication 356 359 K Key column 77 Keyboard moving around worksheet 55 moving graphs and objects using arrow keys 134 Keystrokes functions 55 L Labels adding to page 143 146 aligning 12 135 136 automatic scaling with graphs 97 axis titles 377 479 axis values 392 column titles 85 88 column type 394 contour 313 316 creating 143 148 defined 486 editing tick 389 entering non keyboard characters 145 formatting 12 frequency of contour 314 graph titles 194 erouping
215. commodates large data sets summary statistics a mathematical transform language and much more OLE2 technology is fully supported You can annotate graphs with the MS Word Equation Editor edit your graphs directly inside Word or PowerPoint or plot your data with an Excel spreadsheet right inside SigmaPlot Introduction New Features in SigmaPlot 8 0 New features in SigmaPlot 8 0 include gt Create SigmaPlot graphs using Microsoft Excel You can use SigmaPlot directly inside Microsoft Excel With just a click of a button you can activate the SigmaPlot Graph Wizard and eliminate tedious cut and paste data preparation steps Worried about date and time formats changing unexpectedly or that you might lose data derived from in cell formulas and macros Fear no more With SigmaPlot you can generate professional graphs embedded in Excel worksheets to keep your raw data and graphs in one handy file gt Save time by modifying objects and properties with new toolbar palettes Change colors modify line thickness add fills and other annotations using handy toolbar palettes in the main toolbar not hidden in dialog boxes as you would in other desktop products Selectively edit objects on your graph such as individual bars and lines to show highlight groups or data gt Modify multiple selections simultaneously to save unnecessary steps More Editing Flexibility Using the new Page toolbar selectively edit objects on your graph such
216. cs defined 482 maximum value 64 minimum positive value 64 minimum value 64 missing values 65 other values 65 printing 49 setting Options 18 21 size of sample 64 standard deviation 64 standard error 64 sum of sample 64 viewing 12 63 Column width changing 66 68 Columns asymmetric error bar plots 242 averaging 63 column and row titles dialog box 85 column averaged error bar plots 242 defined 481 deleting 80 81 inserting empty 78 80 inserting graphic cells 220 inserting symbol size values 210 502 key 77 multiple Z 289 picking different data for current plot 195 plotting multiple curves same X or Y 241 plotting X or Y using row numbers 242 plotting XYZ 293 same X or Y for multiple curves 240 selecting 76 Sizing 66 sizing 74 sorting data 77 statistics 63 switching from rows to columns 81 tick labels 316 394 titles 85 88 type labels 394 using as row titles 86 Commands embedded graphs 187 Common log axis scale 363 Common logarithmic axis scale 363 defined 482 Compression formats post processing TIFF files 358 Computing see calculating Confidence intervals adding to 2D graphs 409 410 calculating 410 412 linear regressions 409 410 Confidence lines 95 and 99 confidence interval 64 defined 411 412 482 CONFIG SYS file defined 482 Configuring printer settings 50 Contour fills color 310 modifying 311 Contour labels changing frequency 314 numeric 315 316 rotating 314 skipping 395 suffixes
217. cssseeeesseescsseeecsseeseseeserseeens 131 Moving Objects to the Front or Back ou ccc sccccesssseesssseesssssessseusessesesesesesesenenss 134 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects 0 eee cceeccccsecccssseecesseeesesseecesseeseeenneseeteesens 135 Aligning Page Objects ooo ccc ccccscsssesssssessssseesssesesssesesssenessseeeuscsesevsseusssseneesseneneaes 135 Working with Grids ANGsRUlGlS 2iiscs dcenvassnacadadudeierananaeinsctctsawndnassaia vans Gebesleceualeaes 136 PAV FAINT Grape sindaci N tues dee Wad aunatn ba aaeasciaat T 137 Working with Text on the Page cccccsescssevessscccrsessusersuscnsssesuaneevascnsseasssenersesensernas 143 Working with Automatic LegendS cccccssscssescssscccssssceessssessusssssseeseneesecseneseevensen 148 Changing Graph Page FOrMAL scscsissccocesssievesscdaasarivavseivasivariedcnevesssevavsvarisocsansviediaianss 154 SUNG EIS EO MG ON ONS keanan actuate cahinatanecth EE A 158 Creating and Modifying Graphs cccccccceeesceeeeaeensaeeeeeeeeeeaaes 163 SEUNG Graph DefaullS ssiazea iss ecudtennsahcacdaanerhiidbnmisatetica aie clan a E O 164 SIGMAPIOL GIADA TY DGS instore tisadindeacapsteata ic ssinbu nsicua a usknns adelante aa 165 SigmaPlot Graph Oly 10 wsicisinstcwetite ed itnleidaiouad dai a aiai eia a 167 Creatina Grapho merina a T 177 Using Templates Layouts and the Graph Style Gallery nnee 182 Creating Graphs Using the Graph Style Gallery oneee 182 Creating and Modifying Embedded SigmaPlot
218. ct Properties dialog box Size and Position tab To set graph size and location with the Object Properties dialog box l 2 6 Select the graph or object on the page by clicking it Right click the selected item and on the shortcut menu click Object Properties The Object Properties dialog box appears Object Properties Size and Position Postion 4 500in f OF Height ary 3 000in fio Ea Cancel Apply Help Click the Size and Position tab To set the distance of the selected object from the top and the left of the page under Position move the Top and Left sliders or type new values in the Top and Left boxes To change the size of the selected object under Size move the Height and Width sliders to set the size to specific measurements or scale the object to a new size by typing a percentage in the Height and Width boxes Click OK You can use your keyboard arrow keys to move graphs and objects on a graph page Select the object using your mouse and then move the object by using the Moving and Sizing Graphs and Objects 133 arrow keys You can also select objects by pressing the Tab key Press Shift Tab to scroll back Press Shift Arrow to select multiple objects Pressing an arrow key moves the graph or object one one point or 014in You can change this default setting in the spw ini file If you have activated Snap to grids nudge will not work unless you set the nudge value to be
219. cted Columns list To change the selected data select the wrong entry in the Graph Wizard then choose the correct column from the worksheet You can also clear a column assignment by double clicking it in the Selected Columns list Figure 6 52 C an Sele D Graph Wizard Select Data ee ee Data for 4 H Select the column Selected columns to plot by clicking the column in the worksheet T Column 1 1 Column 2 amp e Column 3 a Column 4 Help Cancel 2 You can plot no more than 2500 data points per curve and you cannot plot more than four curves Creating Area Plots 275 Working with 2D Graphs 3 Click Finish to create the graph Figure 6 53 Example of a Complex Co mplex Area Plot Area Plot Intersections only appear for two our more curves and a legend appears for each intersection Y Data BE Ag Rainfall Eo Avg Temperature fy rg Rainfall Aug Te mpe rature Converting a Multiple You can uniquely identify intersecting areas of all curves of a multiple area plot Area Plot to a with a separate fill by using the Graph Properties dialog box Each possible Complex Area Plot intersection appears on the area plot and each identifiable set of intersections uses the next color or pattern in the selected scheme You can display intersections for a minimum of two curves and a maximum of four Plots with two curves will have up to three different regions one region fo
220. custom colors see Using Custom Colors on page 158 Frame Lines for a 3D Graph 305 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 8 To the modify frame line thickness move the Thickness slider or type a new thickness value into the thickness field 9 Click OK Creating Contour Plots Contour graphs and filled contour graphs plot 3D data on an X YZ coordinate system with the Z data vertical indicated with lines at specified Z intervals If you select Many Z as the data format SigmaPlot uses column numbers as the X values and row numbers as the Y values If you are using X YZ triplet data it needs to be reformatted as mesh data For more information on using the XYZ triplet format see Smoothing 3D Data on page 425 Figure 7 28 Contour Plots To create a contour plot 1 Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data 2 On the 3D Graph Toolbar click Contour Plot and then Contour 306 Creating Contour Plots Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 3 The Graph Wizard appears Figure 7 29 Graph Wizard Create Graph Graph Wizard Data x Data Format Format Panel How is your data organized x Y andZ Many Z columns at eat Many 2 least one triplet O Hep Cancel Back Finish 4 From the Data Format list select the appropriate data format and click Next The Graph Wizard prompts you to specify which worksheet columns corre spond to the data for your plot Since
221. d JS WKW_F JD WKW_F CSV CSV Tab Delimited JS WKW_F JD WKW_F TAB TAB Plain Text JS WKW_F JD WKW_F TXT TXT Sigmascan SigmaScan Pro JS EUXFF JD EUXFF SPW SPW Mocha SigmaScan Image JS EUXFF JD EJXFF MOC MOC DIF JS WKW_F JD WKW_F DIF DIF Export Page Sigmar lot 3 40 Notebook pAs JNB SigmaStat 2 0 Notebook SNB SLomMar lor 2 0 JS HIXEE JID RIJXPE SPW SPW SigmaPlot 1 0 JS EUXFF JD EJXFF SPW SPW Export Page INSO SigmaPlot 3 0 Notebook JNB SigmaStat 2 0 Notebook SNB SLOMar Lou 2 s0 JIS RIUXFS JD ERIXFF SPW SEW SEgmar Loc 0 JS BIXEE ID RIXEE SPW lt SPW Bitmap EBBMP2 FLT BMP BMP TIFEFSEBTIF VEED ILF cs LE MetaFile EMWMF2 FLT WMF WMF Encapsulated Postoeript EMPS 2s FELT EPS EBG JPEGSEBJPG24 FLL UPG JPG 464 ee Paper Size Definitions Text Defaults The SPW INI File These are the paper size settings for the Page Setup dialog box for printed graph pages given in 1 254 Paper Names and Sizes US Letters 2159 2794 uo bLegal 2U59 3556 US Letter Small 2159 2794 US Legal Small 2159 2970 BAS 5 2O099 7 2970 These are the default options for newly created text as set in the Text Options dialog box These are reset each time the Text Options dialog box is opened and changed with no text selected Text Options Name Arial Italic 0 Weight 400 Underline 0 Size 20 Color 01 LineSpacing 139 Alignment 2 Rotation 0
222. d row wise by categories with corresponding data as is often the default data organization for both statistics data tables and databases Using this format you can plot data files from other statistical packages such as SigmaStat or SPSS without having to divide the data into groups Figure 6 5 Example of Category Data LEESE Ee E 1 NBRHOOD LAME AL IMPROVAL 4 TOTVAL 5 5ALEFF a 4 36454 0000 92442 0000 20896 0000 145000 0 aa 4 30720 0000 5244 0000 15964 0000 138000 0 35 A 30602 0000 62498 0000 13100 0000 126500 0 af 4 30720 0000 67 736 0000 18455 0000 145000 0 35 4 31270 0000 79233 0000 10503 0000 125000 0 39 4 31270 0000 55473 0000 16743 0000 162000 0 40 4 45973 0000 2946 0000 54925 0000 190000 0 41 4 43974 0000 414933 0000 31467 0000 162000 0 42 25200 0000 79938 0000 5138 0000 130500 0 43 6 14861 0000 59259 0000 74119 0000 743200 0 44 6 14376 0000 48957 0000 63933 0000 57300 0 45 6 13440 0000 41177 0000 54617 0000 61000 0 46 6 45765 0000 Slee 0000 26992 0000 440000 0 47 6 15244 0000 55169 0000 70413 0000 a F The Category Data format is available when creating all summary plots such as gt All error bar plots using a statistic to compute the error bars and or datapoint gt Box plots gt Point plots XY Pair Format for a Single Curve If the graph you are creating uses only one set of X and Y values enter all X data in one column and all corresponding Y data in another column These columns 2
223. ded graph inside SigmaPlot you can right click the inactive graph and choose to Open the SigmaPlot Graph Object The graph will open as a graph page and worksheet inside SigmaPlot as an Embedded Page Note that no notebook window or file is associated with this graph You can use the File menu to update the source document or save a copy of the graph off as a new file Creating and Modifying Embedded SigmaPlot Graphs 187 SR E Creating and Modifying Graphs Viewing Data for an If you need to view or edit the data for an embedded graph you must open that Embedded Graph graph inside SigmaPlot Resizing Embedded The sizing and scaling of the SigmaPlot graph is controlled by the container Graphs application that is the program for the document where the graph has been embedded However you can change the size of the page for the embedded graph itself This is particularly useful if for some reason the graph has been clipped or you need to rescale and resize the graph or other page objects Resizing the Graph Page The embedded graph resides on a graph page that has been clipped to just contain the embedded content You can resize this page if necessary using the Page Setup command from the page right click menu or from the Graph menu Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using SPSS If you have SPSS 11 0 you can create SigmaPlot graphs as embedded objects which you can view and edit inside the SPSS Viewer To create a SigmaPlot graph as an
224. default bar chart bars are centered around the data point Use Align to alternately draw the bars right or left aligned with the data points Figure 5 53 10 10 10 From Left To Right Bar ra ga 8 Charts with Alignments to the Left of the X Points to 6 E 6 6 the Right of the X Points and Centered over 4 4 4 the X Data Points i 2 24 2 0 0 0 10 Click OK Uniform versus Uniform bar widths set all individual bars to the same width using the width of Variable Bar Widths the narrowest bar If the values which the bars are plotted along are unevenly incremented the bar widths still remain constant Variable bar widths set the widths to be as wide as possible as determined by the Bar Thickness and Group Spacing settings If the values which the bars are 224 Changing Bar and Box Widths and Spacing plotted along are evenly incremented this option has no effect However if the values which the bars are plotted along are unevenly incremented the bar widths will vary according to their corresponding values Figure 5 54 10 10 The bar chart on the left is set to a uniform width the bar chart on the right i 8 uses a variable width 6 4 ga 4 J OT 1
225. dial axes is a representation of the same data so the range and scale must be the same for each radial axis however you can modify the color tick marks labels location and display of each radial axis independently Radial axes can be modified by gt Displaying or hiding any axis see Modifying Radial Axes Lines and Position on page 330 gt Changing display of axis and tick label titles see Displaying and Changing Radial Axis Ticks and Labels on page 332 gt Changing axis lines see Modifying Radial Axes Lines and Position on page 330 gt Changing axis scaling see Changing Axis Scales on page 363 y Changing tick marks see Changing Tick Mark Intervals on page 378 gt Changing axis tick label type see Changing Tick Labels on page 387 Changing Angular Axis Scaling and Position Angular Axis Scaling Polar plot angular axis scale and range settings control the axis units and increments used to plot data You can modify axis scale range units and rotation using the Scaling settings of the Graph Properties dialog box Axes tab To change an axis scale range units and rotation 1 Double click the plot Changing Angular Axis Scaling and Position 327 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 8 12 Graph Properties Dialog Box ca AR leeds Axes Tab Scaling Settings Plats Axes Graph Axis Apply to Angular Data Rename tE Major ticks
226. dialog box appears Figure 4 10 Z The Zoom Dialog Box oa oom Ta 400 Soy 200 Page width C 100 FullScreen OF Cancel ai Help Custom eee 2 Choose the desired zoom level to fit the page to the window or to zoom to a full screen view Select Custom and move the slider or enter a specific zoom 104 Zooming In and Out Graph Page Basics level to set a percentage of magnification Figure 4 11 Graph Page Zomed to 200 El Graph Page 1 Data 1 i fo A 20 OU J 20 Using Graph Pages as Templates Graph page templates simplify graph and graph page creation and modification You can use templates to create pages and graphs with preset properties For example if you need to create a set of slides you can open pages that are already set to attributes for slides Never use templates to add a graph to a page Template pages are ordinary graph pages Any graph page can act as a template page if it is copied to a section or used from the File menu New command to create a new page All attributes from the page size color margins and orientation are retained Any graphs and other objects on the page are also duplicated Template graphs automatically plot the worksheet column data that was selected when the graph was created When applying a page to a worksheet make sure your data is already arranged as required or repick the data for the graph after apply
227. dialog box appears 2 Click the Axes tab 3 From the Settings For drop down list select Ticks 4 Under Tick Intervals from the Type drop down list select a tick interval type Tick intervals are defined by the unit Type used and the selected Count Dates fall at 12 00 AM of the first day for that period The major tick interval options available are limited by the data range You are prevented from 382 Changing Tick Mark Intervals ee Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids selecting time units that would create too many tick marks 5 To increase the period between tick occurrences change the Count For example set ticks to occur every other Type date by changing the Count to 2 or every fifth by changing the count to 5 Counts must be positive integers 6 Toset minor tick intervals from the Apply to drop down list select Minor Ticks 7 Select the minor tick Type and Count Any time unit equal to or smaller than the Major interval type can be used as the Minor interval type Do not select a minor interval that creates hundreds or even many thousands of minor tick marks Changing Tick Mark Appearance Tick Mark Direction Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify tick appearance including tick length and color You can also specify tick mark direction or hide tick marks altogether For information on changing tick marks for polar plots see Working with Axis Titles and Tick Labels on page 375 For
228. ditors The following example describes importing a SigmaPlot graph into FrontPage To insert the graph into FrontPage 1 Export a graph into HTML format 2 In FrontPage place the cursor on the page where you want to insert the Web Viewer graph 3 On the Insert menu click File The Select File dialog box appears 4 Select the HTML file you created in SigmaPlot to import into your FrontPage project and click Open A Javascript object containing WebViewer graph information appears at the insertion point on the page na The graph is not visible on the page until viewed using Internet Explorer Submitting Graphs for Publication The following are some guidelines for preparing graphs for submission to journals or other printed form This process is not necessarily simple and requires understanding both the figure requirements of the publication as well as graphic file formats and terminology Figure Submission The ultimate destination for most SigmaPlot graphs is a publication and most Requirements publishers are now equipped for digital pre press This requires graphic files with specific formats and properties Keep in mind the requirements of the different journals and other publications These tend to vary but are usually available at the web site for the journal submission requirements Some URLs as of the writing of this document for requirements for some major publications are gt Nature http www nature com natur
229. dth If you are copying date time values from another program to SigmaPlot make sure that the program is displaying dates times in a format that SigmaPlot accepts as valid data entry For example if you are pasting dates from Excel make sure the dates are displayed as numbers separated by slashes or whatever date delimiter Windows is set to To change Excel formats see your Excel reference or with an Excel worksheet active in SigmaPlot choose Microsoft Excel Help from the Help menu to view the topic about Date and Time formats Keep the following in mind when copying or importing date and time formatted data gt Pasted or imported numeric data does not automatically convert to Date and Time format You must be convert it using the same start date Day Zero that is used by the other program gt When copying worksheet values values are copied as numeric strings not date time gt SigmaPlot recognizes Date and Time formats imported from Excel but you will need to convert most other non text dates and times from numbers to dates and time setting Row and To set row and column size for a selected block of data Column size 1 Select a block of data on the worksheet 2 On the Format menu click Cells The Format Cells dialog box appears 3 Click the Rows and Columns tab The Selected box reflects the selected block of rows and columns 4 Set column width and row height from the Column Width and Row Height drop down
230. dy selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in the Selected Columns list You need a minimum number of data points to compute each set of 2 percentiles At least three points are required to compute the 25th and 75th percentiles five points to compute the 10th percentile and six points to compute the 5th 90th and 95th percentiles If SigmaPlot is unable to compute a percentile point that set of points is not drawn 4 Click Finish to create the graph Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify the plot or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick different data columns for your plot or to add another plot to your graph 266 Creating Box Plots Modifying Box Plot Fills Widths and Symbols Changing Other Box Plot Attributes Figure 6 41 Graph Properties Plots Tab Working with 2D Graphs The fill width and symbol settings for the boxes can be modified using the appropriate Graph Properties Plot tab settings For changing gt gt gt Symbols used to display extreme data points see Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options on page 204 Box fill color and patterns including edge and whisker color see Changing Patterns and Fill Colors on page 216 Box widths see Changing Bar and Box Widths and Spacing on page 222 To add a mean line change which outliers are displayed and change the 10th and 90th percentile whisker cap widths l Double click
231. e Standard toolbar or by using a page template Templates consist of preformatted pages along with optional pre created graphs You can use any page as a template For more information about using templates see Using Graph Pages as Templates on page 105 Creating New Notebook Files and Items 41 Notebook Basics To create a new graph page 1 Select the section in which you want the page to appears 2 Click the New Page button on the Standard toolbar The Graph Page dialog box appears 3 Click Yes to create a graph click No to create a blank graph page To use page templates 1 On the File menu click New The New dialog box appears 2 Select a template from the Type list 3 Descriptions of the templates appear under Description Creating New You can manually create a report or use the Regression Wizard to automatically Reports generate reports See the Programming Guide for more information To create a new report 1 Right click the section where you want to create the report 2 On the shortcut menu click New and then click Report A new report appears Creating New Use the shortcut menu in the notebook to create an equation using the Function Equations dialog box For more information on creating equations using the Regression Wizard see the Programming Guide For more information about plotting equations see Plotting and Solving Equations on page 228 The Regression Wizard can also create regression equat
232. e 335 data format 166 defined 335 line plots 334 line scatter plots 334 modifying plots 338 modifying tick labels 349 modifying tick marks 348 normalizing data for 335 336 plot data set 337 scatter plots 334 selecting data 337 selecting worksheet data 336 third column data 335 Ternary triplets data for 335 multiple curve plots 335 Text adding to page 143 146 alignment 143 editing contour labels 315 editing tick labels 389 entering 143 148 formatting 146 147 grouping ungrouping 135 properties dialog 147 rotating 145 subscript 143 superscript 143 523 l Index using as plot symbols 208 Text box defined 493 Text files defined 494 importing 61 62 text files exporting worksheets 62 Text labels creating 143 Text mode entering non keyboard characters 145 Text Properties dialog changing text lables 387 Thickness axis lines 372 373 contour lines 310 grid lines 398 line 129 214 radial axes 332 reference lines 414 tick marks 349 385 Thickness plot pattern lines 218 Three dimensional see 3D at beginning of index Tick 382 Tick direction 383 Tick intervals Date and Time 382 Tick labels custom 316 394 date and time 316 Date and Time axes 394 defined 494 editing text 389 factors 391 modifying 392 modifying ternary 349 numeric notation 315 prefix suffix 392 radial axes 333 text attributes 387 time and date 391 using from a worksheet column 316 394 Tick Line options 385 Tick marks cust
233. e 7 26 These graphs use the Viewer as the point of reference The graph on the left draws only the front lines and the right graph draws only the back lines Figure 7 27 These graphs use the Origin as the point of reference The graph on the left draws only the origin lines and the right graph draws only the non origin lines Working with 3D and Contour Graphs other lines draw the remainder of the cube The position of these lines is dependent on the graph s rotation M AO ie Hp SEY gt SK d W x Y i Z7 n AAN MIWA SH WH TRUN Mey Aff MEN INE SEY ONE LS Hide frame lines or add frame lines to your graph by selecting or clearing the appropriate Show check box Selected frame lines are drawn A graph cannot display frame lines for both the Relative To Viewer and Rela tive To Graph Origin perspectives If Relative To Graph Origin is selected from the Frame Lines drop down list the Show check boxes for Relative To Viewer are cleared automatically and vice versa To change the frame line type under Front lines from the Line Type drop down list select a line type To change a frame line color under Front Lines from the Color drop down list select a frame line color Choose None from either list to create transparent frame lines Choose Custom from the Color drop down list to use or create a custom color For more information on using
234. e Data Format list and click Next Since you ve already selected the data columns to plot the appropriate col umn titles appear in the Selected Columns list 8 Click Finish Bi directional asymmetrical error bar plots plot the error bar values relative to the axis and not the data point SigmaPlot plots the first two column in the worksheet as the XY data values then the adjacent two sets of columns as the left to right error bar values and then the last two columns as the bottom to top error bar values Because SigmaPlot automatically uses adjacent columns to calculate both the right and top error bar values do not select the data before creating the graph To create a bi directional asymmetrical error bar plot 1 Click the Graph Wizard button gs on the Standard toolbar The Graph Wizard appears 2 From the Graph Types list select Scatter Plot and click Next 3 From the Graph Styles list select Bidirectional Asymmetric Error Bars and click Next Create Graph Style x Graph styles Select the style of graph you want to create Multiple Error Bars Simple Error Bars amp Aeg Multiple Error Bars amp Ae Horizontal Error Bars Bi directional Error bars Vertical Asymmetric Ero Horizontal Asymmetric E ae Plot ey pairs using four columnae for s andr error bar end values Help Cancel Next gt Finish Creating 2D Plots with Asymmetric Error Bars 251 a E Working with 2D Graphs From th
235. e Data Format list select XY pairs and click Next On the worksheet click the column you wish to use as X1 and then click the column you wish to use as Y1 Click to select the column you wish to use as the left error bar values Sigma Plot automatically uses the adjacent column as the right error bar values Click to select the column you wish to use as the bottom error bar values SigmaPlot automatically uses the adjacent column as the top error bar values Click Finish to create the graph Creating Error Bar Plots Using Category Data You can create SigmaPlot error bar plots using category data either entered into a SigmaPlot worksheet imported from SPSS or you can create graphs as embedded objects in SPSS For a description of category data see Category Data on page 240 To learn how to create graphs inside SPSS see Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using SPSS on page 188 You can also create scatter plots and bar charts using category data To create a SigmaPlot error bar plot using category data Open or import a worksheet using a category data format For more information on importing worksheets see Importing Files from Other Applications on page 58 On the Graph menu click Create Graph The Graph Wizard Create Graph Type dialog box appears Select a graph type from Graph types list and click Next The Graph Wizard Create Graph Style dialog box appears Select a graph style that uses error bars from the Gra
236. e best one The ranking in which you should choose your format is gt SigmaPlot gt EPS gt TIFF gt Printed hardcopy not really a file but some publications actually still prefer this These formats are regardless of whether the graph is color or not Some publishers will directly accept SigmaPlot files Most others accept EPS TIFF or both Determine how much the figure is going to be scaled using the size of your current figure For example if your graph is 5 inches wide but the figures are printed at 3 25 Submitting Graphs for Publication 357 Publishing Graphs inches wide then scale your graph by a factor of 3 25 5 or 65 4 Increase text labels and line widths accordingly on your SigmaPlot graph For example if you reduce your graph to 65 of the original size and text must be 10pt in height increase your labels to at least 15 5pt Alternately you can reduce the graph itself to the final publication size 5 Make any other changes to your graph to meet the publisher s requirements such as typeface labeling and so on 6 Once you have your graph formatted produce the selected file Make sure that you select the figure click it before choosing export this will automati cally crop your figure for you If you are producing an EPS file you don t need to pay attention to dpi at all If you must use TIFF format make sure you use the CMY K compressed TIFF format Uncompressed TIFF files
237. e depending on your selection of either Paste or Paste Link and the explanation in the Result box changes depending on your selection in the As list 7 Select the type of object to paste from the As box then click OK The object appears at the selected location Placing Objects You can select objects from applications that are installed on your system and to without the Clipboard place them into a SigmaPlot graph or report with the Insert New Object command The object types available on your system depend on the applications installed and appear in the Object Type drop down list of the Insert New Object dialog box To insert an object using the Insert Object command 1 View the report or graph page and click where you want the insertion point 2 On the Insert menu click New Object The Insert Object dialog box appears 118 Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects Figure 4 22 The Insert Object Dialog Box Graph Page Basics If you want to display the new object as an icon select Display As Icon You can also specify a different icon to display the inserted object Click the Icon button to open the Change Icon dialog box Choose a different icon from the available options or click the Browse button to search for alternative icons on your system To create a new object to place on the report or graph page select Create New then choose the type of object from the Object Type list Click OK to open the applicati
238. e individual folders that contain notebook items Notebook items are worksheets and graph pages you have created using SigmaPlot Each notebook section may contain only one worksheet but can contain unlimited pages Within sections notebook items are indicated as worksheets or graph pages by icons that appear next to item names Select object To choose an object on the page in order to perform an operation such as move or delete on it Graphs axes text labels and drawn objects can be selected Items can only be selected when the Tools menu Select Object command is checked To select an object click while the pointer is over the object Selected objects are surrounded by square handles or a dotted line You can select multiple objects by dragging a dotted line box completely around the objects or by holding down the Shift key while selecting individual objects Series Labels Tick labels that are automatically incremented in time units days months or years or in an alphabetic or numeric sequence Series tick labels are selected using the Tick Labels settings of the Axes panel in the Graph Properties dialog box Sort To arrange items in an ascending or descending order Selected blocks of worksheet data can be sorted using the Transforms menu Sort Selection command If you sort more than one column all columns are sorted according to the selected key column Spline Curve A smooth curve passing through all the data points o
239. e month day year If you enter only two digits for the year the current century is implied Examples are given in the Entering Data into a SigmaPlot Worksheet 57 SSS Worksheet Basics following table the twentieth century is assumed to be the current computer clock setting Value Entered Resulting Date 2 2 February 2 2 32 February 1932 2 2 02 February 2 1902 Time Delimiters The default time delimiter is usually a colon Entries displaying two fields of a time value are assumed to be hours and minutes If PM is not specified hours less than 12 are assumed to be morning hours An entry with two colons assumes hours minutes seconds Insertion and Press the Insert key or use the Edit menu Insertion Mode command to switch Overwrite Modes between overwrite and insert data entry modes If in Insertion mode Ins appears in the status bar A check mark next to the Insertion Mode command on the Edit menu also indicates that the worksheet is in insertion mode If in Insertion Mode new data entered in a cell does not erase the previous contents Any existing data in the column is moved down one row If you paste a block of cells existing data is pushed down and or to the right to make room for the pasted cells If you cut or clear data data below the deleted block moves up and or to the left If not in Insertion Mode the worksheet is in overwrite mode Data entered into a cell replaces any existing data If you paste a b
240. e of text label characters specified in points one point 1 72 inch Landscape Orientation of a page so that page width is greater than page height Page orientation is controlled using the File menu Page Setup command or Printer 486 Glossary Properties options in the Print dialog box See also Orientation Page and Portrait Legend An explanation of the symbols on a graph Legends are inserted by choosing the Tools menu Text command selecting a location on the page then selecting the Symbols button to specify the graph placement of symbols and legend style to use for the legend Line Graph A plot type in which data points are connected by lines Line graphs and trajectory graphs are 2D Cartesian graphs or 3D Cartesian graphs using a line plot type Use the Graph Wizard Modify Plot dialog box to change a plot type and style See also Scatter Plot and Plot Type Linear Curve Fit or Linear Regression A linear regression of plotted data performed to a specified order SigmaPlot can calculate Ist to 10th order regressions and save the coefficients and R values to the worksheet Use the Statistics menu Regressions command to perform regressions See also Confidence Interval and Regression Linear Axis Scale An axis scale in which values along the axis increment arithmetically Link Use the Edit menu Paste Special command to place a linked object on the graph page Linking the object appears to place a copy of the obj
241. e plot or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick different data columns for your plot or to add another plot to your graph For more information on making general modifications to your plot see Creating and Modifying Graphs on page 163 For information on changing mesh attributes see Modifying Mesh Lines and Fill Color on page 298 Modifying Mesh Lines and Fill Color To modify mesh lines and fill color 1 Figure 7 16 Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Mesh Settings 2 3 4 5 Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plats Axes Grids and Planes Title and Legend 3D View Plot Piot Rename Graph Wizard settings For Fill Colors Lines Color FI Grayscale Color Black Transition E3 i Thickness l Transparent o 007in Cancel Apply Help Click the Plots tab From the Settings For list select Mesh To change the color of the mesh under Fill Colors from the Color drop down list select a color Select none to create a transparent mesh select Custom to create a custom color see Using Custom Colors on page 158 and select one of the color schemes or color columns to increment the mesh from bottom to top using a color array For information on using custom col ors from a column Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Incre ments on page 220 To make your mesh translucent under Fill Colors select Transparent Objects
242. e submit gta index html 4 8 gt Science http www submit2science org mtsweb directions html 396 Submitting Graphs for Publication ee Creating Files for Figure Submission gt gt Publishing Graphs The Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences http intl pnas org misc iforc shtml Submitting Manuscripts Journal of the American Chemical Society http pubs acs org instruct illus html and http pubs acs org cgi bin submission_gen si filetypes pl Journal jacsat Many journals also use the Cadmus electronic prepress service Their requirements can be found at http cjs cadmus com da pages guidelines html The steps to producing a file for publication can vary from publisher to publisher For more information regarding publication requirements see Figure Submission Requirements on page 356 When preparing a figure for file export first determine gt gt gt gt The final size of the figure including the size of text usually inches or millimeters The required line weights Acceptable typefaces especially important for EPS Encapsulated Postscript files The desired final dpi the dots per inch resolution if necessary To produce a file for publication l Determine the final size of the figure the heights of text and thicknesses of lines and whether the figure will be color grayscale or black and white Determine what file formats are acceptable and choose th
243. e using the new model 3 To save text import formats enter a name into the Format scheme box then click Add Delete unwanted import formats using the Remove button 4 To specify a different range enter the rows and columns to read then click Analyze You can use this feature to eliminate file headers and other undesired text Importing Files from Other Applications 61 E Worksheet Basics Importing Axon Files Figure 3 8 Import Axon File Dialog Box 5 When you are finished specifying the file parameters click Import The spec ified data from the file is imported SigmaPlot can import data files produced by Axon Instruments Inc laboratory equipment and data acquisition programs SigmaPlot imports both text and binary data files if you select one of these options the Import Axon dialog box appears prompting you to select a range of data to import The File selected is indicated in the dialog box title Select the range of data by specifying the Row and Column ranges the default is the entire range Click Import to place the data in the SigmaPlot worksheet Import Axon File Spikes01_atf Fortion to read Row i To 256 z Column i z To Jb Exporting Worksheet Data Exporting Worksheets as Text Files Exporting worksheets does not export associated graphs To export the worksheet and the graph you need to export the graph page to a SigmaPlot Graph SPW file To export a SigmaPlot work
244. ea Plot Plot using a Y Many X data format Y Data Data Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify the plot or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick different data columns for your plot or to add another plot to your graph You can identify intersections either by using the Graph Properties dialog box or by creating a complex area plot To learn more see Creating Complex Area Plots on page 274 and Converting a Multiple Area Plot to a Complex Area Plot on page 276 Creating Complex Complex Area Plots plot multiple line plots with downward fills and Area Plots intersections To create a complex area plot 1 Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data 2 On the 2D Graph Toolbar click Area Plot and then click Complex Area Plot 214 Creating Area Plots I ee Working with 2D Graphs The Graph Wizard appears Figure 6 51 C EE Graph Wizard Data Format reale raph Dati Format Data format How iz your data organized aw axl a T 34000 75000 72000 ner column and 7 36000 cemo 6 6000 at least one 2 J 68000 TO 5 2000 column J 33000 124000 14000 104000 1050 amon asmo 11 500 120000 7 SEN B40 13 0000 F i170 gmo san a Tere A 8 E Help Cancel Back Finish From the Data Format list choose the appropriate data format and click Next Since you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in the Sele
245. earn more about moving labels and other page objects see Using Your Mouse to Change Graph and Object Size on page 132 Axis title position relative to the axis remains constant when the axis or graph is moved Working with Axis Titles and Tick Labels 377 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Changing Tick Mark Intervals Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify tick intervals For information on changing tick marks for polar plots see Working with Axis Titles and Tick Labels on page 375 For information on changing tick marks for ternary graphs see Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick Labels on page 345 2 Tick Intervals options vary depending upon the axis scale used For example there are no tick interval options for category axes Changing Linear and To change the tick intervals for linear and probit axis scales Probit Scale Tick 1 Double click the tick marks you want to change Mark Intervals The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 10 18 Graph Properties The Axes Major Tick Intervals Options for a Plots Axes Graph Linear Axis Avis Apply to x Data Rename 28 Maior ticks Settings f aE ee Tick lines Length 0 050in Thickness Color Black Tick intervals Major ticks Every From wee Automatic E fo Apply Help Jd Outward Scaling Top M none v Labels H I ie d L d Tick Label SS
246. ears Under Foreground from the Pattern drop down list choose a pattern and pattern density Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box To change the color of the fill pattern lines and edge lines l 2 4 Select the object to modify on the graph page On the Format menu click Fill The Object Properties dialog box appears Under Foreground from Color drop down list choose a color Choose none to create a transparent pattern and edge line Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box To set pattern and edge line thickness l Zn 4 Select the object to modify on the graph page On the Format menu click Fill The Object Properties dialog box appears Under Foreground move the Thickness slider or enter a value in the Thick ness box to set pattern and edge line thickness Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box Changing Lines For drawn lines and graph lines you can change line type color and thickness You can also use the Object Properties dialog box to add arrowheads and other line endings to lines To learn about using custom colors see Using Custom Colors on page 158 To change line color ile 2 Select the object s to modify On the Format menu click Line 128 Modifying Object Colors and Lines Figure 4 30 Object Properties Dialog Box Line Tab 5 The Object Properties dialog box appears Object Properties Color
247. eatures 148 Working with Automatic Legends Figure 4 46 Example of a Graph Displaying an Automatic Legend The legend uses the column titles of the data plotted Editing Individual Legend Entries You can also add legend symbols to any text label or title To learn how to add symbols to text see Creating Text Labels on page 143 Y Data 2 Oe aa rrr December January February March April May June July X Data Col 6 Col 5 vs Col 8 You can edit and format the text for individual legend entries using the Edit Text dialog box For more information on using the Edit Text dialog box see Editing Text on page 143 To edit legend entries 1 View the page 2 On the Page menu click the Text button 3 Double click the legend entry that you want to edit 4 Edit the text of the legend entry as desired using the Formatting toolbar You can also change the legend symbol properties including Symbol size by clicking the Symbol button To learn more see Sizing Legend Symbols on page 150 Working with Automatic Legends 149 Increasing the Line Spacing for a Legend Figure 4 47 Increasing Spacing Between Legend Entries sizing Legend Symbols Figure 4 48 Using the Symbol Dialog Box to Resize Legend Symbols You can increase the spacing between legend symbols by increasing the height of the legend box Click the box to select it then drag the top or bottom handle to increa
248. ecially useful for bar charts and is not available for 3D plots 18 4 16 4 14 4 o 12 4 7p C Q 10 7p o m m 8 4 6 4 2 0 ao Bp x Y NHN tt K A y v Sample 11 Click OK To view hidden grid lines or hide visible grid lines l 2 3 Open the Graph Properties dialog box Click the Grids and Planes tab To hide grid lines under Grid Lines from the Style drop down list select None To display grid lines change the style to a style other than None Click OK Displaying Grid Lines and Backplanes 399 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids 400 Displaying Grid Lines and Backplanes 1 1 Statistics This chapter covers many of the features available on the Statistics menu including gt VV Y Running t tests see page 401 Computing a histogram see page 403 Plotting and modifying linear regression lines see page 407 Adding and modifying reference lines see page 412 Running Paired and Independent Tests A t test determines if the mean values of two data columns are significantly different by testing the hypothesis that the means of the two columns are equal SigmaPlot can perform both paired and unpaired t tests A paired t test requires columns of equal length since the data is assumed to be before and after data on the same subjects An independent f test can be performed on differently sized columns since no relationship is assumed between
249. ect on the page but actually only places a reference to the original object file and modifies the object every time the original file is changed Logarithmic Scale See Common Log and Natural Log Logit Scale An axis scale based on the logit equation y a Logit Wl eo z Menu Bar A list of menus appearing at the top of the SigmaPlot screen These menus can be selected with a mouse or by pressing Alt and the first letter of the menu name When one menu appears the adjacent menu can be pulled down by pressing or lt Mesh Plot A mesh plot is a 3D Cartesian plot of an even XY grid from XYZ data points generating a surface The worksheet data for mesh plots must be in a specific order to create the mesh Mesh data can be generated from scatter data using inverse distance interpolation See also Inverse Distance Interpolation Metafile A standard Windows graphic file format also known as a Windows picture file Metafiles are a vector or line based file format as opposed to a bitmap format Metafile graphics are printed at the highest resolution a printer is capable of no matter what size they are scaled to 487 Glossary Natural Log Scale An axis type that plots data along a logarithmic scale using base e Normalize Ternary Data Raw data must be converted to unitary data 0 1 or percentage data 0 100 in order to be plotted on a ternary graph The Transforms menu Normalize Ternary Data command does this conve
250. ects to the Clipboard using the toolbar or by using Edit menu commands To cut or copy a graph or other page object select the graph or object to cut or copy by clicking it To cut the item click the toolbar Ed button choose the Edit menu Cut command or press Ctrl X To copy the item click the toolbar button choose the Edit menu Copy command or press Ctrl C A copy of the selected graph or object or is placed in the Clipboard Since copied items remain in the Clipboard until replaced you can paste as many copies as you want without having to cut or copy the object each time You can paste Clipboard contents to any open page report or into any other Windows application that supports Windows Metafiles or OLE Object Linking and Embedding To paste an object to a page click where you want the object to appear then press Ctrl V You can also press Shift Insert click the toolbar Paste button or choose the Edit menu Paste command For more information on OLE see SigmaPlot and OLE on page 113 To learn about pasting objects and graphs between applications in general see Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects on page 112 The Clipboard is a Microsoft Windows feature To learn more about how the Clipboard works refer to your Windows Users Guide Cutting Copying and Pasting Graphs and other Page Objects 111 Graph Page Basics Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects There are various ways to paste SigmaPlot objec
251. ed objects as icons 118 tick marks 376 377 toolbars 15 17 92 viewing 370 W Waterfall plots examples 289 Weibull scale see Extreme Value Distribution scale 029 Index Whiskers box plots 267 defined 495 Widths bar box widths 224 box widths 267 whisker caps 267 Window menu commands 103 Wizards Graph 177 Histogram 403 407 Regression 12 Worksheet assigning codes 451 457 associating additional pages 102 changing data feedback colors 67 changing grid color and thickness 67 column statistics 63 91 column titles 85 88 column type labels 394 creating 41 defined 495 delecting columns and rows 80 81 entering data 53 94 Excel 88 94 exporting as non notebook file 46 48 exporting data 49 50 484 going to a cell 56 importing data 58 61 81 inserting columns and rows 78 80 inserting graphic cells 220 inserting symbol size values 210 insertion mode 58 moving around 55 moving between notebooks 45 moving data 78 naming 43 new 41 opening 44 overwrite mode 58 printing 49 50 right click pop up menu shortcuts 56 row titles 85 88 selecting all data 76 selecting data 75 76 selecting entire 76 Set data feedback colors 67 setting Options 18 21 SigmaPlot 12 size 12 sorting data 77 statistics 12 Statistics showing hiding 65 transposing rows and columns 81 526 Worksheets printing 49 setting decimal places 67 worksheets exporting as text files 62 X X Y values bubble plo
252. ee Modifying Tick Label Display on page 349 gt Changing axis tick marks see Modifying Ternary Tick Mark Line Appearance on page 348 To learn more about displaying or hiding any axis see Hiding Displaying and Deleting Axes on page 370 For more information on changing axis lines see Changing Axis Line Color and Thickness on page 372 338 Modifying Ternary Axes Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots 2 Axis breaks cannot be created for ternary axes Modifying lernary Axis Title Location Figure 8 27 Graph Properties Dialog Box Axes Tab Labels Settings You can position axis titles of ternary graphs either at the apex or along the length of the axis You can also rotate them to a position parallel to the axis To reposition a ternary graph axis title 1 Double click the axis The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Axis Apply to 5042 Rename binor ticks Settings for Rotate with axis Tal Lines IM Axis title T Tick labels OT Ion Me ni Add to minor tick labels Prefix mooo Suffix Scaling Labels E al Ockiwise sew Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Axes tab 3 Select Labels from the Settings For list 2 identify which axis is associated with and axis title keep in mind that the title at the apex is always at the 100 point or maximum for that axis 4
253. eeeessnesertneees 289 Creating 3D Scatter Plots and 3D Bar Charts o oo ccc ecessecessesessseeessseeeeseesersneess 293 Creating Trajectory Plots urina E E ET 294 Creating Waterfall Plots ooo ccc ccssscsssessssseesssssesssssssssseeesseesessseseueseeeseseueueseeneeses 295 Creatina Mesh PIOUS ranita cin r NT E 297 Modifying Mesh Lines and Fill Color osssssssesesssiesrrssrirrrrrrsrrrrerrrsrrrserrrsrrrrrrrrrsrresn 298 Changing Graph Perspective Rotation and Shading esses 299 SU GRADIW AXIS PIICOMONT x sratsnceszodecastnotdescasinadetaaatin nausea dalisaausseseavsancedeuetivessodssamnantent 303 Contents vi Hame Lines tora GU GTapN sninen anen E 304 Creatin GOMTOUL PIOUS ase csiasissctnctccasatnetuateses sansa a 306 Moding COMMEOLN RIOTS 25s aoreach ec E AE E EE 308 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots cccceeeeseeeeeeeeees 317 PIE CNAS cinnire iaa a a 318 POF Fe LOLS siosioina a A ceedduceua tanita 323 ModitVing POA AXES aitsssvisccispudiniavibassuituitateluwtiuesicioveddasbelaleonid eda neni 326 Changing Angular Axis Scaling and Position 00 ccc cccceseeccseeeesseeeesseeeeseeeesteeens 327 Modifying Radial Axes Lines and Position essesneeennsesnrnsssrrnrerrrsrrrrnerrrrrsrrrrrerrrren 330 Displaying and Changing Radial Axis Ticks and Labels n a 332 TOMA Graph e E ueaauetateet 334 Modifying Ternary AXeS sisnisiscs sdvsavcasdssursuoisairsunaubsvasbosanuonsseptansthtauinasineinvdavednabsoiwaiSanbaves 3
254. een 18 Deleting Blocks of Cells Columns and Rows of Data accs 80 Contents Switching Rows to COlUMNS ssssssssesssesrserrsrrrssrrnerrrsrrnsrrrnerrrnrnnnrrrnsrnnsrrnsrrnrerrenerene 81 Removing Outliers and Other Data usc cccsssscssssssesssseesssseessssesessseeessseesessesensees 81 Entering and Promoting Column and Row Titles o ae 89 Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot c ccs secsessssessssseesssseeessseeeseseesesseesenses 88 Graph Page BASICS scree cecscanseta sania eA E Aa 95 SEUNG Fade OPUONS oniinn a dostiastuadnannun 96 Working with Page Objects ooo cic ssccssessssessseessssssesssesecssensveneeussseeeseeseuesesneaseneees 97 Adding Another Graph to a Page uuu ccc cccccsssssseesssssesssessssseeussseesssseeessseneesseseneaes 102 Looming Mand OUl a N idiatauae cadena aiecelaiteneant 103 Using Graph Pages as Templates ooo ccc cccssecesseccesseceesseececeeesceeescsseeessseesersatens 105 Cutting Copying and Pasting Graphs and other Page Objects accenn 111 Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects cascnns 112 DRAGGING ANG FOP PING GV ADIN ssi cessrshenaesaccanare tarsal R 122 Hiding and Deleting Objects from the Page cessccessceccsssecessresessreeeesseeseseeesens 123 Drawing ODjects OM ING Page cacetsisssiadintiaayiectnesasiancdeeaas ined a aai 125 Modifying Object Colors and Lines ce eceessccesscccesececsseeeeeeeeeeeeeecsseeseseesessatens 127 Moving and Sizing Graphs and Objects ccceccessecc
255. eessseeecesseeeeesaeeesersateesetseeeees 43 Opening Notebook Files and IteMS oe eecececceeseccssseccesseeeenseeeesseesesseesessneeeseeeseneeens 44 Copying Pasting and Removing Notebook Items n e 45 SAVING OUI VVOMK sertar andia ekina a a 46 Exporting Notebooks and Notebook Items 2 0 0 0 cceesececesseeeeesseeeeceseeeeecsseeesenaees 46 Printing Notebook TOMS ssiiscvssvnssprasteva vuetavdonsasmndinsdsinateysutacneduanasnndubiesubsanataiesbandvadantias 49 Worksheet BASICS siiciicscicscscrocrninrpiiceiiearoroi eiir iinei aiii Eai D3 Setting Worksheet Display Options sssseesesseeesreesrreerrnerrnserrnsrrnnerrrsrrrnerrrnsrrneerrserras 54 Moving Around the WW OFKSING Cli oie scadanvanthansanstesdacs iebtaadseluesnaisiviciancnaseasteuncaadsevanetes 55 Entering Data into a SigmaPlot Worksheet cccccccsscccesseecesseeeesseeecsseeeesseeeesteeens 57 Importing Files from Other Applications 2 0 ccc cessseccssseecsseesesseesessnesesneeeeseesens 58 EXDOLUNG WOrKSNCET Dalai A a Ta 62 Descriptive Statistics for Worksheets u sscsseeeiresnreesnnensnissnrussnunsnrnsrnnnsrnnsrrnnsrnrens 63 Displaying WOrks Heet Dala aensaniarsainennn aa a s 66 Selecting a Block of Data ooo cece cessecccsseecesseeeeseeeeccseeeccsseecesseeseseesesseesersueserseneeeaes 15 SONE DA a T A a A 11 Cutting Copying Pasting Moving and Deleting Data 0 0 0 ceeeeesseeeeseeeerees 18 Inserting Blocks of Cells Columns and Rows of Data ceceeeesceseeeeeenee
256. elect the font character size and other starting character attributes from the Formatting toolbar 144 Working with Text on the Page The following table outlines the functions of each button These buttons act on selected text or set the format for following text Control Function Aria Set Font Set Size l iil ae ee Normal Format Bold Italic Underlined Superscript One Level Subscript One Level Toggle to Greek Symbol Font Left Align Center Align Right Align HI Line Spacing Multiline Paragraph Only Rotation W Fed Color The Rotation Alignment and Line Spacing options affect the entire label not just the selected text and Line Spacing is a minimum spacing control not fixed If you change the height of characters by changing font sizes or by adding superscripts or subscripts the line height adjusts automatically 2 Using the Default Text Properties you can set default text label attributes by opening the Text Properties dialog box with no labels selected For more information on using the Text Properties dialog box see Formatting Text on page 146 In addition to using the Greek text button to add a Greek symbol to text you can also select pre existing text and choose Symbol as the font type in the Text Properties dialog box Type your label Working with Text on the Page 145 Figure 4 43 The Symbol Dialog Box Editing Text and Individual Characters
257. em that you want to copy and on the shortcut menu click Copy 3 Right click the section where you want to paste the item and on the shortcut menu click Paste The selected item is pasted to the current notebook and section Items removed from a notebook file using the Delete button are removed permanently To remove an item from a notebook gt Select the item and press Delete The item is deleted If you copy a graph page into an empty section or a section that has no worksheet you create an independent page The independent page retains all its plotted data without the worksheet You can store the pages from several different sections that have different data together this way However if you ever create or paste a worksheet into a section all independent pages will revert to plotting the data from the new worksheet Use independent pages as templates or to draw or store objects You cannot create graphs for an independent page until it is associated with a worksheet and no longer independent Copying Pasting and Removing Notebook Items 45 Notebook Basics saving Your Work Be sure to save your work at regular intervals To save a notebook file for the first time 1 Click the Save button Bi The Save As dialog box appears 2 Navigate to the directory where you want to save your notebook 3 Type aname for the notebook in the File Name text box 4 Click Save to save the notebook file and close the Save As dia
258. embedded object in SPSS 1 In SPSS on the Graphs menu click SigmaPlot Graph The Graph Wizard Create Graph Type dialog box appears 2 Use the Graph Wizard to create the graph To learn more about creating SigmaPlot graphs using the Graph Wizard see Create a Graph Using the Graph Wizard on page 177 Modifying Embedded When you create a SigmaPlot graph using SPSS it appears as an embedded SigmaPlot Graphs SigmaPlot object in the SPSS Viewer IN SPSS To modify SigmaPlot graphs in SPSS 1 Double click the graph A box appears surrounding the graph 2 Double click the graph again to open the Graph Properties dialog box To learn more about creating and modifying embedded graphs see Creating and Modifying Embedded SigmaPlot Graphs on page 186 To learn more about modifying graphs see Modifying Graphs on page 189 and Modify ing Error Bars on page 253 188 Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using SPSS Creating and Modifying Graphs Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using MicroSoft Excel You can launch the Graph Wizard and subsequently create a SigmaPlot graph using Microsoft Excel Just as you would using SigmaPlot you can select data from the workseet You can also select ranges of data If you change your data in Excel the SigmaPlot graph automatically updates To create a graph using Microsoft Excel 1 On the Excel toolbar click the SPW button or on the Excel Insert menu click SigmaPlot graph The Graph Wizard appears
259. enter the value to the right Automatically calculated statistics are derived from the plot data All data points graphed including multiple columns of data are used for reference line calculations Use the Appearance options to set a line type thickness and color for the highlighted reference line Each reference line can have separate line attributes Use the Direction drop down list to draw reference lines horizontally or vertically Use the Layering drop down list to draw reference lines either Behind or In Front of the selected plot Click Apply when finished modifying the current reference line then high light another reference line to continue modifying reference lines or click OK ee Statistics Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines 415 Statistics 416 Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines Using the Transform Language Transform Basics This chapter covers Using transforms and regressions to generate data see page 417 gt Performing Quick Transforms see page 419 gt Smoothing 2D and 3D Data see page 420 For an in depth discussion of transforms and regression refer to the Programming Guide It contains descriptions and examples of all transform functions and the regression wizard as well as many complete transform and curve fitting examples and results Modify and manipulate worksheet data using SigmaPlot s extensive mathematical transformation language Use transfo
260. ents This data contains rapid variation such as noise contamination Figure 12 5 An example of noisy data and then its conversion to quiet data Note that the original noisy data points appear on the graph o 200 a ac ER E oo 200 200 400 S00 eno To select the data source 1 Select the worksheet columns by dragging the pointer over your data Smoothing 2D and 3D Data 421 Transform Basics 2 On the Transforms click Smooth 2D Data The Smoother 2D Select Data dialog box appears Figure 12 6 Selecting the Data Columns to Smooth Data for Source r from the Smoother 2D Column 2 eS Select the input Dialog Box data for eel MIE PT clicking the columns in the worksheet Smoother 2D Select Data Selected Columns SOWIE Column Source Y Column 2 hs Data Fromn Pair Next Einish 3 Click Next Figure 12 7 Selecting the Data Columns to Smooth Columns Select the columns for pour results from the Smoother 2D so 4 First Empty Dialog Box Smoother 2D Select Data Results W Predicted First Empty mA esiduals First Empty W Plot Results To select columns for results 1 Select Predicted First Empty from the Results list to compute a smoothed value for each data point 2 Select Residuals First Empty to differentiate between the smoothed value and the original Y value 3 Accept First Empty as the st
261. epeat 2 Single Curve Line Type 2 Single Curve Line Type Repeat 2 Multi Curve Line Type 2 Multi Curve Line Type Repeat 62464 Single Curve Bar Color 12632256 Single Curve Bar Color Repeat 2 Multi Curve Bar Color 0 Multi Curve Bar Color Repeat 61697 Bar Width 600 469 The SPW INI File Notes 470 18 Troubleshooting This appendix provides you with tips for resolving common problems and gives advice for improving SigmaPlot performance on your system It includes Installation suggestions Ways to reduce or eliminate memory and other errors Solutions to common printing problems Tips on improving printing speed Inserting special characters VVVVVY Inserting SigmaPlot graphs into WordPerfect Troubleshooting Installation Problems General Advice for Windows 95 Users Common Questions Explanations and Solutions Certain conditions in your Windows Setup may interfere with the installation of your new version of SigmaPlot This section describes how to resolve most common difficulties Install in SafeMode SAFEMODE is a mode of running Windows 95 that is designed specifically for troubleshooting problems and for the installation of new applications In this mode all Terminate and Stay Resident TSR programs will not be run and the video display will be set to a generic VGA mode To install SAFEMODE restart your computer and when the words Starting Windows 95 appear on the screen press F8 Select SafeM
262. erclockwise to move the label from one side of the axis to the other Click OK Hide tick marks by clicking the ticks and pressing the Delete key You can also right click the labels and choose Hide To specify the direction for radial axis tick marks for each pair of radial axes l Double click any radial axis tick mark The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Axis Apply to Radial Data Rename 28 Maior ticks Settings f 22 LO Tick lines Direction Length spoke 1 3 Sealing 10 0800 5S fnan zI ft Thickness Te t Spoke 2 4 Jo 007in 7 foo 2 nf PP Outvward 7 Color Black Tick intervals Major ticks a Automatic Cancel Apply Help Click the Axes tab Pi utward k Select Ticks from the Settings For list Select either Minor Ticks or Major Ticks from the Apply To drop down list Use Direction options to change the tick directions on the radial axes You can only change the directions for Spokes 1 and 3 together and for 2 and 4 Displaying and Changing Radial Axis Ticks and Labels 333 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots together Selecting Inward orients the ticks clockwise and Outward points the ticks counterclockwise Figure 8 20 Polar Plots with All Ticks Pointing Inward Spokes 1 3 Inward and2 4 Outward and All Ticks Pointing in Both Directions
263. ermines the graph scale There should be no need to change the scale unless a mistake was made during graph creation Changing the scaling from Percentage to Unitary can also hide out of range data Figure 8 32 Ternary Graphs Using Percentage and Unitary Axis Scales The data range used for Percentage is 0 100 the data range for Unitary data is 0 1 To change ternary axis scale type 1 Double click the angular axis The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 8 33 Graph Properties Dialog Box Axes Tab Scaling Settings Plats Axes Graph Graph Properties Anis s042 Rename Scale type Percentage fO 100 Percentage 0 100 EENE Settings for Ar Counter clock ee oF 2 Click the Axes tab 3 Select Scaling from the Settings for list 4 Select the new axis scale type from the Scale Type drop down list 5 Click OK 2 When you change the axis scale type for one axis it is changed for all axes Changing Ternary Axis Range Scale and Direction 343 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots Changing Ternary Ternary graph axes show data increasing in either a clockwise or Axis Direction counterclockwise direction Modifying axis direction changes all three axes ternary axes are interdependent Ternary graph axes have interdependent axis ranges from 0 to 100 where 0 to 100 is the default setting The axis range and scale control the axis un
264. ernary Graphs This graph is actually composed of three separate ternary graphs with different axis ranges and directions MgSO 7H O K SO 442 Sample Graphs Filled Contour Plot This is a filled contour plot with the lines turned on Both major and minor contours are set to use an incremented color scheme Notice how the legend reflects what each color on the graph represents Contour Graph MM 5 00e 4 MO 1 0ce 5 MO 1 5e 5 MMM 2 0c 5 MM 250 5 MM 3 0045 MMM 3 5e 5 Y Data 420 440 460 480 500 520 X Data Waterfall Plot This is a waterfall plot using an incremented color scheme Waterfall plots are line plots placed along the Y axis in a 3D line plot The hidden lines are eliminated by line fills Waterfall Plot Z Data 443 Sample Graphs 444 J Screen and Printer Fonts Printing Tips SigmaPlot relies entirely on Windows font and printer drivers for all of its output These drivers were installed with Windows or came with the printer and were installed separately The precise options and settings available for each driver vary Options available for the drivers provided with Windows are described in the Windows Users Guide Your printer vendor should have provided documentation for any drivers shipped with your printer All TrueType and PostScript fonts are fully supported using the Windows Fonts control panel and Adobe Type Manager Some tips on using both TrueType
265. erns You can also use the Edit menu Insert Graphic Cells command to sequence lines colors symbols and fill patterns Coefficient A real number that multiplies a variable in an algebraic expression See also Correlation Coefficient and R Value Column Averaging Plotting the mean value of each column This is most often used as a means of creating error bars Standard deviation standard error or 95 or 99 confidence values can be used as error bar values Column The SigmaPlot worksheet consists of columns and rows A column generally holds a range of numbers to be plotted as a set This set can be X Y or Z values plotted against another column or against their row numbers Columns can also be plotted as pie chart slices or averaged and plotted as a single data point See also Pie Chart and Column Averaging 481 Glossary Columns can also hold labels and sequences of custom symbol or line types fill patterns error bar directions and colors Column Statistics A collection of statistics computed for each column Open the Column Statistics window by choosing the View menu Column Statistics command Common Log Scale An axis type that plots data along a logarithmic scale with base 10 See also Natural Log Scale Confidence Line For a regression line there is a probability that any given data point will fall within a certain distance from the line A confidence interval is the region where a data point will fall with a
266. ers Laser printers default to a halftone screen of only 60 but can often handle up to 100 If you are producing high resolution at 1200 dpi a halftone of 120 is possible and at 2400 dpi you can use a screen frequency of 150 magazine quality Printing to High Resolution Typesetters and Slide Makers There are a few points you should keep in mind when producing graphs for image setters and slide makers Many of these are general design and layout principles that can be applied to any graph gt Don t use hairline line widths Although hairline may appear fine on laser printed output it will be too thin for image setters and slide makers You can use set default line options by choosing Format Line to change line widths all at once see Changing Multiple Page Objects on page 131 gt Many journals and magazines don t accept color so consider using a gray scale for fill colors If you are producing slides color generally achieves a better effect Avoid the use of fill patterns hatching whenever possible and never mix patterns and colors this tends to be confusing gt Don t use too many different fonts type faces no more than two on one page Also many publications accept only san serif fonts such as Helvetica Optimizing Printer Output 447 Printing Tips or Arial You can format text labels and set default text options by choosing Format Text Properties see Formatting Text on page 146 gt Don t use small
267. ervals from Column 3 Es OO m LT odl Pt To use worksheet columns to customize tick intervals 1 Enter the desired tick marks into an empty worksheet column 2 Double click the tick marks The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 10 27 Selecting a Column for Tick Label Intervals 386 Customizing Tick Intervals Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Axis Apply to lv Data Rename PE Major ticks Settings f a See Tick lines solid Thickness Color Black Tick intervals Major ticks Every From P a Automatic dl i fo ieee Manual Apply Help F Inward Right Scaling E Inward s Data Y Scatter 1 Y 1 Error Line 1 ee Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids 3 Click the Axes tab 4 From the Settings For drop down list select Ticks 5 From the Apply To drop down list select Major Tick Intervals 6 Under Major Tick Intervals from the Ticks drop down list select the column number or title of the column you want to use for major tick marks 7 Click OK 2 The numeric values of the intervals are automatically used for tick labels that you can modify them like any other tick labels Changing Tick Labels SigmaPlot can display tick labels in a variety of ways for both major and minor tick marks standard numeric labels time and series labels or values and text from a worksheet column You can also add a suffix or prefix t
268. es 370 displaying 370 hiding 370 modifying 370 Axis 3D placement during rotation 303 about 283 adding 285 additional for multiple plots 283 Index angular 333 breaks 11 374 375 category scale 364 changing range 363 changing scale 365 changing scale types 366 369 common log 363 contour range values 312 creating multiple for single plot 285 Date Time 365 defined 479 dragging to modify ternary ranges 340 Extreme Value Distribution axis scale 369 labels 377 labels defined 479 line attributes 372 373 linear 363 linear scale 363 487 logarithmic scale 363 487 488 logit scale 364 487 modifying 303 modifying range by dragging 340 moving 2D 372 multiple 11 multiple pairs 285 natural log 363 natural log scale 363 488 origin axes 300 488 pair defined 480 placement defined 480 polar 333 positioning 3D 303 positioning using Graph Properties dialog 371 probability scale 363 490 probit scale 364 490 radial 333 radial tick labels 333 range values 362 range changing 362 range defined 480 scale types 363 365 366 369 scale values 392 scale category 366 scale custom 369 tick labels 392 tick marks 349 387 titles 377 479 turning on off 370 using drawing tools using formatting commands 12 using Object Properties dialog 373 X and Y 11 Axis breaks creating 374 375 defined 479 499 Index Axis scale Arrhenius 369 Extreme Value Distribution 369 t
269. es contain examples of these plots as well as some additional 3D features Incremented bar fill colors 3D grid lines Shaded back planes 28 Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs Introduction Overlapping and transparent meshes Z axis drawn at left side Light source Grid lines at major Shading tick intervals Mesh plot with colored fills and lines Y axis drawn at front bottom 12 EARR A Ot 8 vy Y I U ete 3D graph view can be eo Ae ia displayed at any horizontal and vertical Axes automatically rotation move to the front view at any rotation X axis drawn at front bottom Front view frame lines Scatter plot with id drop lines 3D graphs can be displayed with EI jin varying perspectives a aE Wi js depth i I i cji a0 Ta Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs 29 Introduction Waterfall Plot 3D waterfall plots are stacked line plots along the Y axis of a 3D line plot Example Because hidden lines are eliminated waterfall plots are useful for showing trends of line plots The following example includes gt Incremented line fill color gt Eliminated hidden lines Line fill color is incremented Hidden lines are eliminated Stacked line plots are along the Y axis 30 Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs ee Area Plot Example A Simple Bar Chart Temperature F a To T i 60 Introduction Area plots are 2D line plots with regions below or between curves fi
270. es made to the source file To edit a linked object select the object name in the Links dialog box then click Open Source The source file opens in the appropriate application where you can make changes then exit the application and return to SigmaPlot If Automatic updating is selected the object reflects the changes if Manual updating is selected you must click the Update Now button to apply changes to the linked object To change the source file for a linked object click Change Source Choose the new path and file name then click OK The link appears in the Links dia log box with the new path and file name You may need to click the Update Now button to view this change in your document Change Source 5 Source Ok Cancel Directories C Secanprosimages arch bmp avginten tif Help idili bird _drk tif Ees bird _lit tif Ej scanpra birds tif a Metwork blood ti Ea mages call bmp circle bmp List Files of Type Drives A Files E3 c local drive To end the link between an object and its source file click Break Link The object is no longer treated as a linked object Click OK to close the Links dialog box Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects 121 Graph Page Basics Dragging and Dropping Graphs Using OLE you can drag objects between compatible applications within Windows Additionally you can drag and drop graphs from one graph page to an
271. est way to estimate the location of solutions is to 1 Using the Plot Equations dialog box graph the function equation y f x 2 Observe where the graph intersects the x axis This technique aids in determining range limits for the independent variable in the Function Solver Solve tab of the Plot Equation dialog box If the distance between two solutions of an equation is small relative to the size of the range then the Function Solver may not return both solutions The resolution of the solutions is approximately two orders of magnitude less than the size of the Plotting and Solving Equations 235 range You can obtain higher resolution by adjusting the range limits to reduce the range size There is particular difficulty due to roundoff error in determining solutions to 0 f x at points where the graph of y f x does not cross the x axis but lies on one side of it And example of this situation is the graph of y x 3 x 2 at x 0 Although in many cases as with the above equation the Function Solver provides the solution in some cases however the solution will not be found and recorded in the Results box If you suspect that there is such a solution and the Function Solver does not find it then try the following technique for approximating the solution 1 Alter the value for the left side of the equation by a small amount 2 Re solve the equation This is equivalent to slightly shifting the graph of the e
272. et appears You can create a new section in the notebook from the shortcut menu To create a new section in the notebook using the shortcut menu 1 In the notebook right click to open the shortcut menu 2 On the shortcut menu click New and then click Section A new section appears in the notebook Another method to create a new notebook section is to copy and paste a section in the notebook window Whenever you copy and paste a section its contents appear at the bottom of the notebook window SigmaPlot names and numbers the section automatically For example if you copy notebook Section 3 the new section is named Copy of Section 3 Copied sections create copies of all items within that section as well Creating a new worksheet creates it in a new section that is appended to the end of the notebook There can only be one worksheet per section New Excel worksheets are limited to one worksheet only in the workbook To create a new SigmaPlot worksheet gt Click the New Worksheet button 8 on the Standard toolbar A new worksheet appears To create a new Excel worksheet gt Click the New Excel Worksheet button g on the Standard toolbar A new Excel Worksheet appears which you can modify and save in the Sig maPlot notebook You can also copy and paste existing worksheets see Copying Pasting and Removing Notebook Items on page 45 You can create a new graph page by either clicking the New Page button on th
273. ew the graph or report page 3 Click the location where you want the object to appear then press Ctrl V The graphic is pasted to the page If the object can be an OLE object Sigma Plot always defaults to the OLE object 4 To paste the object as a specified file type choose the Edit menu Paste Spe Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects 117 Graph Page Basics cial command The Paste Special dialog box appears Figure 4 21 Paste Special Using the Paste Special cdi Dialog Box to Paste an Ee eer Object from Microsoft Word to SigmaPlot As Cancel ie Paste Microsoft Word 6 0 Document object Metafile Picture Paste Link M Display As core Result Document Inserts the contents of the Clipboard into VOUT P document so that you may activate it using ladi Microsoft Word 6 0 object It will be displayed as an icon Change Icon 2 Note that the options available in the Paste Special dialog box depend on the type of file being pasted 5 Ifyou want the object displayed as an icon click Display As Icon Click the icon to view and edit the object in its source application You can also specify a different icon to display the pasted object Click Change Icon and select a different icon 6 Click Paste to paste the object as a specified file type Select Paste Link to paste the object as a linked file that can be updated in another application 2 The options in the As list chang
274. expressed as log units To divide numeric tick label values by a specific number enter a divisor in the Factor Out drop down list A value of 2 divides label values in half a factor of 0 5 doubles the tick label values etc To specify the number of places used to display numeric tick labels under Precision select Automatic to let SigmaPlot automatically deter mine precision or select Manual then select the number of decimal places to use from the Places drop down list Click OK To format series tick labels 1 Double click the tick labels of the axis you want to change The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Axis Apply to Iv Data Rename 28 Maior ticks Settings for Type 123 Numeric gt Tick label font 123 Numeric 13 X Data 25 Y Scatter 1 lt Y1 Error Line 1 Scaling Precision ie Automatic Manual E r places Factor out 1 Cancel Apply Help From the Settings for list select Tick Label From the Apply To drop down list select either Major Ticks or Minor Ticks From the Type drop down list select Series From the Series drop down list select a series From the Length drop down list set the number of characters to use for the Changing Tick Labels 391 Sa E Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids tick label 7 From the Start At drop down list specify which series
275. f a scatter graph SigmaPlot uses a cubic spline interpolation to generate the curve Use the Plot menu Lines Options command to change a line to a spline shape Stacked Bar Chart A bar chart plot type where each bar is divided to represent each category SigmaPlot plots each row in the selected columns as a stack in a bar Standard Deviation Std Dev A measure of the spread of the data about the mean The sample standard deviation is the square root of the ratio of the sum of 492 Glossary the squares of the residuals divided by degrees of freedom the number of data points minus one Standard Error of the Mean The standard deviation of the mean computed by dividing the sample standard deviation by the square root of the sample size Std Err n Swap File Windows makes use of virtual memory swapping temporary buffers and information to a swap file specified in the Virtual Memory settings in the Control Panel You can use a swap file to optimize the performance of SigmaPlot on your system Symbol The figure such as a circle or triangle used to represent a data point in a line or scatter plot Plot symbols are modified using the Symbols settings of the Plots panel in the Graph Properties dialog box Template All of the settings for a page except for the data Use templates to create complicated sets graphs from existing pages SigmaPlot includes a template notebook file containing several page templates you can
276. from the Open Import and Export dialog boxes The number corresponds to Last used type from the Open Filter Import Filter and Export Filter lists See Changing the File Type Orders on page 17 456 Nonlinear Regression OneEditWindow 0 LastSection 3D LastEquation Lorentzian The OneEditWindow setting can be used to display the Regression edit code dialog box as a single window in the style of previous versions of SigmaPlot To set display to a single text window set OneEditWindow 1 A setting of 0 creates multiple edit windows The LastSection and LastEquation settings determine the default category and equation opened upon startup of the Regression Wizard These are saved each time an equation is both selected and run on data 499 The SPW INI File sigmaPlot Program 460 Window Size and Position Changing the File Type Orders Settings WindowPos 0 1 1 1 4 4 168 22 930 669 The WindowPos settings determine the SigmaPlot application window state size and location upon opening The first two settings determine the state of the window on startup 0 1 in window 0 2 minimized 2 3 maximized The next two settings can be ignored This setting does not apply to Windows 95 The next pair of settings are unused The last four settings determine the Window size and position They are the pixel screen coordinates for the top left x top left y lower right x lower right y of the window respecti
277. front or back of the page You can view the function of a toolbar button using Tool Tips Move the mouse pointer over the button and leave it there for a moment without clicking to view the Tool Tip Transform A mathematical equation that generates data either by performing calculations on columns of data in the worksheet or by producing series of random or automatically incremented numbers Transforms are created using the Transforms menu User defined Transform command See the Programming Guide for a complete description of transform functions 494 ee Glossary Transparent Meshes Turning a 3D mesh plot transparent enables you to more clearly show the intersections between two or more 3D meshes You must have a High Color 10 bit or True Color 24 bit video card for this feature to work properly You may check your system s color capabilities under the Windows Display Properties Settings Transpose Paste Switches the orientation of worksheet data so that columns become rows and rows become columns Use the Edit menu Transpose Paste command to paste Clipboard data with rows and columns transposed Unitary Scale An axis scale with an absolute range of 0 1 used by ternary plots Whiskers Indicate the 10th and 90th percentiles of a box plot Whisker cap width can be modified and color can also be applied to whiskers Error bars are sometimes referred to as whiskers Worksheet Worksheets are the containers for the data yo
278. g calculations performed for each column appear in a Column Statistics win dow for that worksheet E Data 1 Column Statistics _ 0 F 1 2 3 4 Be Mean Seen HEINE 24 3333 396 5000 Std Dev 200 7477 38 3960 SSFP Std En 634020 127987 892 5000 95 Cont 143 6095 29 5144 47239298 o 99 Cont 206 3249 429484 192332280 Size 4103 0000 0000 Total 689 0000 2s o000 OOD Min 40000 4 000 OF Max e54 0000 95 0000 780000 Min Pos 4 0000 4 0000 eooo S Missing ooo ooo ooo Other 4093 0000 0 0000 3 0000 al r To close the Column Statistics window gt On the View menu click Statistics again or click the X button in the upper right corner of the worksheet window To determine the statistics shown in the Statistics windows use the Statistics Options dialog box to see Statistics Options on page 65 Most calculations ignore empty cells missing values and text The following statistics appear in the Column Statistics window Mean The arithmetic mean or average of all the cells in the column excluding the missing values This is defined by Descriptive Statistics for Worksheets 63 Worksheet Basics yo Sle M i 1 Std Dev The sample standard deviation is defined as the square root of the mean of the square of the differences from their mean of the data samples x in the column Missing values are ignored 1 Be S 7 aa i 1 Std Err The standard error is the
279. g and Promoting Column and Row Titles 87 a Worksheet Basics To promote individual cells 1 Click the cell on the worksheet that you want to promote to a column or row title 2 On the Format menu click Column and Row Titles The Column and Row Titles dialog box appears 3 Click the Row tab to promote a row cell to title click the Column tab to pro mote a column cell to a title 4 Click Promote The the content of the cell appears as the column title 5 Select Delete Promoted Column or Delete Promoted Row to delete the origi nal cell once it has been promoted 6 Click Next or Prev to move to the next desired column or row then follow steps 2 through 4 Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot SigmaPlot supports Microsoft Excel workbooks which you can use to create graphs run transforms and perform regressions and other statistics on your data Most Excel commands are available when Excel workbooks are viewed as are the Excel toolbars The SigmaPlot Graph Statistics and Transforms menus are 88 Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot Worksheet Basics also available When an Excel worksheet is in focus all keyboard shortcuts are assigned to Excel s hotkeys not SigmaPlot s aa A SigmaPlot Notebook 17 Piel Es Worksheet in File Edt View Insert Format Tools Data Graph Statistics Transforms Window Help SigmaPlot a BES o c BS ck 47 E 8B A Arial gt i0 BiU
280. g category data see Cre 186 Creating and Modifying Embedded SigmaPlot Graphs ee Using Embedded Graph Menus and Commands Editing Embedded Graphs Creating and Modifying Graphs ating SigmaPlot Graphs Using SPSS on page 188 Using the Paste to PowerPoint Slide or Insert Graphs into Word Toolbox macros The following SigmaPlot menu commands are available while editing embedded SigmaPlot graphs Edit Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Paste Link Insert New Object Links Object Toolbar Stop Refresh Suspend Redraw Format Text Properties Line Fill Size and Position Bring to Front Send to Back Group Ungroup Align Arrange Graphs Tools Select Object Text Draw Box Draw Ellipse Draw Line Draw Arrow Graph Select Graph Graph Properties Add to Gallery Save as Web Page Paste to PowerPoint Slide Contents and Index Tip of the Day SigmaPlot Tutorial SigmaPlot Automation SPSS Science on the Web Publication Assistant About SigmaPlot Denotes a command only available from the embedded graph menus You can choose to edit a SigmaPlot graph from inside the current program or open the embedded graph inside SigmaPlot Editing in place To edit a graph in place simply double click it You can also right click it and choose to Edit the SigmaPlot Graph Object To modify the graph at this point right click or double click the graph to access the different and settings Opening graphs To open an embed
281. g pages and other notebook items see Copying Pasting and Removing Notebook Items on page 45 106 Using Graph Pages as Templates Graph Page Basics If you plan to copy a page set up your worksheet so that the data is in the Figure 4 13 The Templates Dialog Box appropriate columns before applying the template You can also change the columns to plot after applying a template by selecting the plot opening the Graph Properties dialog box and using the Graph Wizard button For more information on picking different columns to plot see Picking Different Data for the Current Plot on page 194 Overwriting an Existing Page When you apply a template to an existing graph page all features of the existing page are lost To apply a template to an existing page 1 Make the graph page the active window 2 On the File menu click Templates The Templates dialog box appears Templates x Bar Chart for Slide Cancel Black Slide Blue Slide Browse Landscape Legal Normal Help Summary Infa Graph Page 3 Select a template from the Templates list 4 Click Apply To apply a template from a different notebook template file 1 Make the graph page the active window 2 On the File menu click Templates The Templates dialog box appears 3 Click Browse 4 Select the path and file name of the desired SigmaPlot Notebook or template file Using Graph Pages as Templates 107 Graph Page
282. g the number to a text cell which removes the data point from both graphing and computation To remove or ignore an outlier l Zz Find the outlier on the graph then click it to select the curve pause and then click again do not double click View the worksheet Switching Rows to Columns 81 Worksheet Basics The data for the selected symbol is indicated with colored highlighting Figure 3 23 Selecting Data Points on a Worksheet 3 Parameters 4 Prediched 5 Residuals x column jogi 2 0667 4 0818 0 4152 0 0000 1 2152 5 2970 0 2970 0 0469 3 3 0000 7 5000 6 5121 0 9879 O 0938 d ON 2 Onn FPR C 0 1404 3 Select the highlighted worksheet cell s then on the Format menu click Cells The Format Cells dialog box appears Figure 3 24 Format Cells Format Cells Dialog Box Data Rows and Columns Type Numeric Settings Multiple Lines Cancel Aol Help 4 Select Text from the Type list then click OK This converts the number to text characters you can tell this if the alignment 82 Removing Outliers and Other Data Figure 3 25 Graph with Removed Outlier Highlighting Outliers Worksheet Basics of the cell changes to be left aligned Y Data Ooutierinduded Fe 0 70324831 Outierescluded F 0 893 15409 The data point is no longer plotted and if you perform additional statistics on the graph the data point will also be ignored Another way to remo
283. ge 289 sigmaPlot Graph Style Scatter Plots 3D Line Plot 3D Mesh Plot 3D Bar Chart Creating and Modifying Graphs Plots data as XYZ data points connected with lines Format data columns as many Z single XY many Z or XYZ triplet See page 289 Plots data as a 3D surface Format data columns as many Z single XY many Z or XYZ triplet See page 289 Plots data as Z values on an XY grid For mat data columns as many Z or single XY many Z See page 289 Many graph types have several styles to choose from When you select a graph type either from the graph toolbar or from the Graph Wizard you are prompted to choose a graph style b F O F a i amp J ad on me on in Simple Scatter Multi ple Scat ter Simple Regres sion Multi ple Regres sions Plots a single set of XY pairs Format data columns as XY pair single X or sin gle Y Plots multiple sets of XY pairs Format data columns as XY pairs single Y many X single X many Y many X or many Y Plots a single set of XY pairs with a regression line Format data columns as XY pairs single X or single Y Plots multiple sets of XY pairs with regression lines Format data columns as XY pairs single Y many X single X many Y many X or many Y SigmaPlot Graph Style 167 Creating and Modifying Graphs Simple aa Error Bars FE Multi a 5 ple Error Bars Simple Error Ba
284. ge 249 To change the error bar source after you have created the graph 1 Select the plot to modify by clicking it Small square black handles surround the selected plot 2 On the Standard toolbar click the Graph Wizard button A Modifying Error Bars 259 Working with 2D Graphs The Graph Wizard appears Figure 6 30 Graph Wizard Modify PI Graph Wizard Modify Plot cal la i Data Format How is your data organized a IDes a One column BE 105000 E i300 E aa Help Cancel Back Mext Finish 3 Click Next 4 From the Data for Error drop down list select a column as a new error bar source Figure 6 31 Graph Wizard Modify Plot Choose the new error bar source from the Data for Data for Error Error drop down list Column 1 Select the column to plot by clicking the column in the worksheet Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 ouma Help Cancel Back Hert Finish 5 Click Finish The graph appears with the new error bars 260 Modifying Error Bars Working with 2D Graphs Grouped Bar Charts Figure 6 32 Examples of Grouped Bar Charts with and without Error Bars Creating Grouped Bar Charts a Create grouped bars charts by picking multiple columns for a single plot Data points within the same row appear within the same group and each additional column adds another bar to each group There are as many groups as there are rows of data TIE l
285. ge 389 To modify tick label display along an axis l Double click the axis you want to change Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick Labels 349 The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 8 41 Graph P i Graph Properties Dialog Box did sekka calls Axes Tab Labels Settings Plots Axes Grids and Planes Title and Legend Avis Zbota H Rename Apply to E Major Ticks Settings For Show Asis Title Add to Major Tick Labels sans i m Labels Suffix PE As Major Tick Labels Rotate with Axis Tick Label I Left T Clockwise I Avis Title F F Right M COW M Tick Labels Ticks Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Axes tab 3 Select Labels from the Settings For list 4 Select the Major or Minor tick Labels check boxes Depending on the selected axis the check boxes are Top Bottom Left or Right 5 To change the direction of the axis tick labels select the Clockwise and counterclockwise CCW check boxes You can draw in both directions at once To draw tick labels at the 90 tick position clear both direction options Figure 8 42 50 50 50 Ternary Graph Axes with Mi Tick Labels K 40 7 counterclockwise Both 70 Pa 70 Clockwise and m i m CounterClockwise and Neither 90 a re 90 100 H 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 0100 1090 2080 3070 4060 5050 0 10 20 30 40 50 6 To add a suffix or prefix to the major or minor tick labels on ternar
286. ge Objects 101 Graph Page Basics Figure 4 8 Edit Text Dialog Box You can format individual characters within a text string by selecting the text and using the text toolbar buttons in the dialog box Edit Text Arial Ap Nee E E A a e You can create long text labels with E multiple lines yesa symbols Cancel bold alic bold italic underlined supe SUB arc Help Symbol and Using any Windows font Use the Edit Text dialog box to gt Create and edit text labels gt Edit graph and axis titles gt Modify automatic legend labels For more information on entering and editing text see Arranging Graphs on page 137 Adding Another Graph to a Page Creating a New Graph for the Current Page Copying a Graph on the Same Page You can add additional graphs to the current graph page by gt Creating a new graph onto the current page gt Copying a graph to the same page gt Copying and pasting a graph from another page To learn about adding additional plots to the same graph see Adding New Plots on page 196 If you want to add a graph to a page by creating a new graph first add the data for the new graph in the worksheet associated with the current graph page View the active graph page then either select a graph from the graph toolbars choose the Graph menu Create Graph command or click the Graph Wizard button A To learn more about graphs see Creating and Modifying Gra
287. ges creating 42 selecting objects 98 Paired t test 402 defined 493 performing 402 Paper size 155 Parameters setting in equations 231 Password protecting data 355 Passwords protecting data on the Web 355 Paste shortcut 56 Paste Special command 112 115 defined 489 displaying pasted objects as icons 118 embedding objects 113 122 linking objects 113 122 modifying pasted object icons 118 Index pasting graphs without data 115 Pasting data 78 defined 489 graphs as metafiles 113 graphs to page 103 graphs objects with the Paste Special command 112 115 objects 112 115 transpose 81 see also Inserting Patterns assigning to worksheet 220 changing 217 changing color lines of fills and edges 128 changing density of plot fills 218 changing object fills 127 modifying 219 plot line thickness 218 set pattern and edge line thickness 128 setting thickness 128 Performing quick transforms 420 Perspective 3D graphs 303 defined 489 Photoshop post processing TIFF files 358 Picking data different columns to plot 195 different data for current plot 195 Pie charts 219 adding exploding slices 320 322 creating 318 319 data format 166 defined 489 example 23 examples 318 fills 127 219 modifying 322 plotting data 318 319 rotating 320 322 sample graph 25 slice edges 127 slices 484 Planes defined 480 Plot fills pattern density 218 Plot styles multiple curves 244 Plot types error bars 245 Plots 306 517
288. gineering scientific notation for worksheet values select Engineering Notation 7 Click OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box Displaying Worksheet Data 69 Worksheet Basics Changing Date and SigmaPlot has a variety of date time displays When you enter a value into a date Time Display time formatted cell SigmaPlot assumes internal date time information about that value from the year to the millisecond For example if you enter a day and month you can display the month and year To view and modify the current settings 1 On the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears Figure 3 14 Selecting a Date lilt Display Format Worksheet Fage System Macro Graph Defaults Settings Far Numeric Statistics Appearance Sample Date Time Day ero an M1996 3 42 13 Cancel Apply Help Regional Settings 2 Click the Worksheet tab 3 Inthe Show Settings drop down list click Date and Time 4 To change the display Date format type one of the following examples into the Date box or select a format from the drop down list Typing M d yy MM dd yy MMMM dddd YYY OF ayy 70 Displaying Worksheet Data Displays No leading 0 for single digit month day or year Leading 0 for single digit month day or year Complete month Complete day Complete year ee Day Zero Worksheet Basics MMM Three letter month ddd Three letter day gg E
289. ging data display and column width options see Sizing Columns and Rows on page 66 To specify which statistics are shown or hidden l On the View menu click Statistics The Column Statistics worksheet appears On the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears Options Worksheet Fage General Macro Graph Defaults Settings Far Numeric Date and Time Appearance Not Shown Shown 962 Cont 99 Cont 4 Show lt Max ons Mean hair gt Hide gt zl Cancel Apply Help Click the Worksheet tab Select the statistic s you want shown or hidden Use the Show and Hide buttons to move the statistics between the Shown and Not Shown lists Select the appropriate options to change the column widths and data display Descriptive Statistics for Worksheets 65 Worksheet Basics Displaying Worksheet Data Figure 3 11 Numbers are displayed in Column 1 dates are displayed in Column 2 and text is shown in Column 3 sizing Columns and Rows You can display data in your worksheet columns as gt Text gt Numbers gt Date and Time values gt Graphic information 2 2 00 5 14 1998 Dogs 3 300 F998 Fish 4 400 8723 1998 Birds J ooo 5 m B 7 3 You can enter numbers labels and dates and times directly into the worksheet You can also convert numbers to dates and times and vice versa You can change column widths number decimal pl
290. graphs with Graph Wizard 177 graphs with Graph Wizardr 177 histograms 403 407 JNT files 493 labels 143 148 legends 143 148 multiple area plots 273 multiple axes for single plot 285 multiple curves 241 new equations 42 new graph for current page 102 new graph pages 42 new object to insert 119 new reports 42 page templates 108 123 pie charts 318 319 plots using category data 252 plots with date and time scale 368 polar plots 325 reports 429 sections 4 simple straight line area plots 271 single curve plots 240 ternary graphs 336 337 text labels legends 143 vertical area plots 271 worksheets 41 Crosshairs 137 Cubic spline interpolation defined 482 Curves asymmetric error bar plots 242 column averaged error bar plots 242 defined 483 multiple for polar plots 324 multiple in graph 244 multiple same X or Y 241 plotting multiple 241 244 plotting X or Y using row numbers 242 same X or Y for multiple curves 240 single 240 spline curve 492 Custom color 158 161 right clicking 161 Custom scale creating 369 Custom tick mark intervals 385 Customer Service 32 Customizing 503 Index color increments 220 225 error bar directions 257 fill increments 220 225 fill sequences in worksheet 451 457 line increments 220 225 line sequences in worksheet 451 457 symbol increments 220 225 symbol sequences in worksheet 451 457 tick labels 316 394 tick mark intervals 387 customizing graph styles 182 18
291. greater than or equal to the Snap to value You cannot nudge computable objects such as plots and all parts of plots tick marks and regression reference and grid lines Moving Objects to the Front or Back You can move selected objects so that they appear in front of or behind other page objects To move an object to the front or back 1 Select the object to move by clicking it 2 To move the selected object to the foreground on the Page toolbar click Bring to Front The selected object is drawn in front of all other objects 3 To move the selected object to the background on the Page toolbar click Send to Back The selected object is drawn behind all other objects 2 If you select more than one object the selected objects remain in their relative front to back positions Grouped objects including titles and legends with graphs move as a single object 134 Moving Objects to the Front or Back Grouping and Ungrouping Objects You can move and modify selected items on the page by grouping multiple objects as one object To individually modify grouped objects you must ungroup them first Objects and text must be grouped with the graph for them to stay in place and move with the graph if you shift the graph s location To group and ungroup objects 1 On the Page toolbar click Select Object 2 Select the graph by clicking it if you wish to attach the graph to the objects or text 3 Select the object
292. h 288 mesh data format 167 mesh lines fills 299 mesh plots 298 modifying 287 306 modifying mesh lines and fill color 298 multiple plots 198 origin axes 300 perspective 303 plotting data 287 293 positioning axes 303 rotation 303 scatter 491 Scatter and line 288 scatter data format 166 smoothing mesh data 11 trajectory 294 waterfall plots 289 295 3D mesh plots data format 167 3D plots see 3D graphs 3D scatter plots adding drop lines 226 227 data format 166 lines 216 symbols 204 213 A Accessing SigmaPlot user information 33 Adding axes 285 axis breaks 374 375 contour fills 310 contour labels 313 316 exploding slices to pie charts 320 322 frame lines 304 graphs to pages 102 103 labels to page 143 146 multiple axes for single plot 285 new plots 198 498 plots to graphs 197 198 prefix suffix to tick labels 392 reference lines 268 sections to notebook files 41 styles to Graph Style Gallery 184 suffixes prefixes 314 text to page 143 146 worksheets to notebook files 41 Aligning axis titles 377 legends 153 objects graphs labels 12 135 136 snap to grids 137 text 143 using crosshairs 137 using snap to 137 with grids 136 with rulers 136 Alphanumeric symbols 208 Angular axes about 326 arc 327 329 defined 479 modifying 333 range 327 329 rotation 327 329 scale 327 329 Angular values 323 Apex dragging to modify ternary axis ranges 340 Applying data transforms 12 graph page layouts
293. h pages are true graphical representations of a printed page that contain graphs text and other drawn and pasted objects You can select objects on graph pages and modify them using the Graph and Object properties dialog boxes and with the graph and drawing toolbars You can manipulate all objects graphically using your mouse A page can contain an unlimited number of graphs and other objects and you can create an unlimited number of pages for each worksheet You can also paste graphics OLE Object Linking and Embedding objects and other objects onto a page Graph pages are created in several ways Notebook Basics on page 37 describes a new graph page as a notebook item see Creating a New Section on page 41 You can also create graphs using the Graph Style Gallery see Creating Graphs Using the Graph Style Gallery on page 182 This chapter describes how to create a new graph page using templates see Using Graph Pages as Templates on page 105 Setting Page Options Figure 4 1 Options Dialog Box Page Tab 96 Setting Page Options Control graph page properties are using the Options dialog box Page tab To open the Options dialog box on the Tools menu click Options and then click the Page tab Options Worksheet Page General Macro Graph Defaults Units M Page Undo finesse I Stretch Maintains Aspect Ratio Points pt MW Graph Object Resize with Graph IY Show Rulers Grids W Show Grid Grid Density 9 25
294. hange the data format for your graph your previous column choices appear under Selected Columns To change column assign ments under Selected Columns select the desired assignment then under Data For select the appropriate column from the worksheet or from the data Creating and Modifying Graphs list Figure 5 23 You can change the column assignments using Graph Wizard Modify Plot Data For Column 2 the Graph Wizard E EE Select the z column to plok by clicking the tems Ony 55 00 column in the worksheet 60 0200 62 4300 Help Cancel Back Merck Finish To clear a column assignment by double click it in the Selected Columns list 6 Ifyou did change the data format for your graph a single data type is highlighted in the Selected Columns list The highlighted data type indicates the data column to pick To pick data either click the corresponding column directly in the worksheet or choose the appropriate column from the Data for list Use this method to pick X Y or Z data R and theta data and error bar data if applicable 7 Ifyou make a mistake while picking data click the mistaken entry in the Graph Wizard then choose the correct column from the worksheet 8 Repeat the process for every data column When you have chosen the data appropriate for your style of plot click Back to repick data columns or if applicable click Next to pick data for additional plots 9
295. have these settings apply to subsequently opened or created reports make your 430 Setting Report Options ee Figure 13 1 Page Setup Dialog Box Using the Report Editor changes then close the page Newly opened or created reports will use all of these settings To open the Page Setup dialog box l Zz Select the report window On the File menu click Page Setup The Page Setup dialog box appears Page Setup Source Autos elect Tray Margins Inches Left ji 25 Right 47 25 Top j Eottom h Cancel Printer The page sample at the top of the dialog box reflects changes i Portrait Landscape Select the paper size and source from the Size and Source drop down lists To select the printer click Printer The Page Setup dialog box appears on which you can select and setup any printer configured for your system To change the paper orientation under Orientation select either Portrait or Landscape To change the margins under Margins inches type the desired values into the four boxes The current ruler units appear in the Margins title Setting Report Page Size and Margins 431 Using the Report Editor Using the Report Editor Ruler Use the Report Editor ruler to view margins and to both view and modify report page tabs and paragraph indents Figure 13 2 First Line The Report i Editor Ruler 0 h y es a epee Pan Na far ant a E Soi po Poraa Doa Left Indent
296. he Regression Wizard provides an extensive set of equations for curve fitting Add a first order regression to a graph by selecting one of the graph styles that has a regression Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines 407 Statistics Modifying and Adding Linear Regression Lines Figure 11 8 Regression Line Tab Viewing and Saving Regression Equation Results To modify or add a regression to a plot 1 Click the plot to select it 2 On the Statistics menu click Linear Regression The Linear Regression dialog box appears Linear Regression Regression Line Confidence Intervals Resulte Regressions T Each Curve W All Data In Plot Color Black Extend To Axes Thickness Pass Through Origi T Pass Through Origin OOF Cancel Apply Help 3 Click the Regression Line tab 4 Select either Each Curve to draw a regression for the data in each curve of the selected plot or All Data In Plot to draw a single regression for all of the data in the selected plot from the Regressions group box If neither box is selected a regression is not drawn If both boxes are selected regressions are drawn for each curve and for all the data in the plot 5 Under Line choose the desired regression order Order drop down list 6 Select the regression line type from Type drop down list 7 Select line color from the Color drop down list 8 To change line thickness move
297. he Source for the Tick Labels Plots Axes Graph Anis Apply to lv Data Rename PE Major ticks Settings for Type IE Series Tick label Font 123 Numeric Eh Series Column 1 B Tick Labels h 9 characters Start at Step by january z ji months After Repeat from December Sr January g Length Cancel Apply Help 3 Click the Axes tab Changing Tick Labels 395 Sa E Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids 4 From the Settings for list select Tick Labels 5 From the Type drop down list select the column to use for major labels Labels for minor contours are automatically taken from the column to the right of the major tick labels 6 To change the font used for the tick labels click Font The Text Properties dialog box appears You can use the Symbols font for Greek characters and the Wingdings and other symbol fonts for iconic labels 7 Click OK Displaying Grid Lines and Backplanes Display and modify grids for each graph plane using the Graph Properties dialog box Grid lines are associated with both a backplane and one of the two axes which form the plane If a graph has multiple axes the axes used are the original pair You can choose to turn on and modify grid lines for both major and minor tick intervals Tick intervals are controlled using the Graph Properties dialog box Axes tab Scaling settings For more information see Changing Axis Scales on page
298. he clipboard into VOUT P S document so that you may activate it using SigmaPlat 4 0 The SigmaPlot graph appears in the other application 5 You can now in place activate the graph by double clicking it or open it in SigmaPlot by choosing the Edit menu Object command If the application does not support OLE the SigmaPlot graph is pasted as a metafile or bitmap graphic SigmaPlot graphs pasted with the Edit menu Paste command take their plotted data with them in the form of the plotted graph the worksheet is not shown If 116 Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects Graph Page Basics you want to view or edit the data you must open the graph rather than simply editing it Ei lih s 4o Microsoft Word Document SigmaPlot Sail 1 Eile Edt View nsert so ac Table Window Help ET Pasted into ee ee a Microsoft Word for Office 97 as an OLE Object Example of Sigma Plot graph pasted into hvicrcsott Word as O LE object Histogram Frequency z G F 4 E 2 1G i Bin Page 1 Sec 171 At Lr Col 1 57 PM REC MAE EXT EE WPH Pasting Objects onto You can paste contents including OLE objects into both page and report a Graph Page documents or Repori To paste artwork text from a word processing application or other objects onto a graph or report page 1 Open the application and file containing the desired artwork or text and cut or copy the object 2 Switch to SigmaPlot and vi
299. he notebook itself Section and without opening the Summary Information dialog box Item Names To in place edit l 2 On the notebook window click the section or item you want to rename Click the file or item a second time Type the new name Press Enter The new section or item name appears in the notebook window Renaming Notebook Files and Items 43 Notebook Basics Opening Notebook Files and Items Opening You can open SigmaPlot files and other types of files as SigmaPlot notebooks Notebook Files To open a notebook file that is stored on a disk 1 Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar The Open dialog box appears i as ee lt Open Dialog Box ope ma Look ir E ope Tl c Macto Transtorms Se GT est JNB Samples G Gtest2 JNB J Transforms SS Ligand JNE 2 B atchFile jnb gh SigmaPlot Macro Librar jb 2 Butterfly Wingspans tJNB 2 ExportTest JNB Files of type SigmaPlot Notebook Cancel E 2 Choose the appropriate drive and directory of the notebook file to open 3 Double click the desired notebook file 4 Ifyou want to open another type of file choose the type of file from the Files of type list 5 Click Open Opening Worksheets You can open a worksheet report or page by double clicking its icon in the Reports and Pages notebook window You can also select the item and click the Open button Open worksheets pages and report appear in their ow
300. he page the shape of the pointer changes according to its current function Polar Plot Polar plots show data in an r f O format where r is the distance from the origin of the graph and theta 0 is the angle described by a line passing 489 Glossary through the center of the graph and the plotted data point and another line passing through the center of the graph horizontally on the page Portrait Orientation of the page so that the height is greater than the width Page orientation is controlled using the File menu Page Setup command or Printer Properties options in the Print dialog box See also Landscape and Orientation Position Defines the position of a graph on a page Graph position is displayed in the Size and Position panel of the Object Properties dialog box accessed by right clicking a selected graph and choosing Properties from the popdown menu You can also use the Format menu Size and Position command to center and align selected graphs and objects with respect to the page Preferences See Options Probability Scale An axis scale in which a sigmoidally shaped curve identical to the Gaussian cumulative distribution function appears as a straight line Probit Scale An axis scale identical to the probability scale except that it is expressed in terms of standard normal deviates increased by five A probability of 0 5 50 corresponds to 0 standard normal deviates or five probits One standard normal deviate
301. iable dimension Box Widths Final Population Lifespan weeks Shaded graph backplane with Y axis grid lines DL5 Diet Tick mark direction pointing out Graph Title ee a Top X axis with tick ee 6 marks turned off Y axis with a linear axis scale 5 T 4 Cc O O Left Y axis title s Populat Left Y axis with a ae Spline fine plot of data major tick marks i generated with the nonlinear curve fitter 0 0 2 6 4 a Time hours Numeric major X axis with a tick labels linear axis scale 24 Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs Population Growth with and without Inhibitor oth and 95th percentiles displayed as symbols Tukey box plot with mean value lines HX12 IND7 X axis tick labels using a category axis scale Scatter plot of column averaged data points with Y error bars computed from the Standard deviations Reference line Automatically generated legend Without Inhibitor O With Inhibitor Right Y axis with tick marks turned off Bottom X axis title ee Introduction Pie Chart Example Use Pie charts to display a quick comparison of ratios in a data set The example figure displays gt Slice fills gt Text labels gt Exploded slices Exploded slices Text labels _ Hadean Eon Cenozoic Era Mesozoic Era Archean Eon Paleozoic Era Incremented fill colors Proterozoic Eon Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs 25
302. ics on page 95 System Options The General tab of the Options dialog box controls application settings Novice Prompting Novice prompts are warning information and confirmation messages that display before system operations occur To disable novice prompting clear the check box 18 Setting Program Options ee Figure 1 10 Options Dialog Box System Tab Introduction Automatic Legends SigmaPlot creates a legend each time a graph is created based upon the specifications of the graph When this check box is selected the legend appears by default If this check box is cleared legends are not automatically displayed but can be displayed by selecting Show Legend in the Title and Legend tab of the Graph Properties dialog box To learn more about automatic legends see Graph Page Basics on page 95 Options Worksheet Page General Macro Graph Defaults Novice prompting Fast page open MN t Iw Fast M Automatic legends I Retain notebook settings IY Retain window states Percentile method O Fast 3D printing Standard zl Backup files with extension NB Save AutoRecover info every f 0 minutes D New notebooks use Excel workbook Excel format Template file C Program Files SigmaPlot SPw Template int Browse Layout file C Program Files StgmaPlot S PW as Layout nt Browse Gallery file C Program Files SigmaPlotySPWe G aller jgg Browse Author SigmaPlot 6 0 User Cancel Apply
303. ide top or bottom of the original axis Graph Wizard Add Axis dd ARIS to which side a aaa The new axis is Righ z placed on the Left i a right side of the Lett Offset 5 3 graph BF Ib i sho r Je O Hep Cancel Back ua Finish Click Finish to add the new axis according to the specified settings The New axis appears on the graph and the plot re scales to reflect the new axis 16 50 oe 8 Y Axis 2 a a a R R R R arrai 2 4504e 6 2 4505e 6 2 4505e 6 2 4506e 6 2 4506e 6 2 4507e 6 2 4507e 6 2000 284 Creating Multiple 2D Axes Creating Multiple Axes for a Single Plot Figure 6 65 The second temperature axis for the single plot was created by first creating a dummy plot creating a Y axis for the dummy plot then manually scaling the axis range Working with 2D Graphs If you want to use two or more X or Y axes for a single plot for example to show two different units of measurement first create a plot which graphs empty columns then add an axis to the empty plot To add an axis to the second plot l Right click the graph and on the shortcut menu click Add New Plot The plot type does not matter so long as it is a 2D Cartesian plot Pick any data format Pick empty columns when prompted to select the data to plot On the Graph menu click Add Axis to create multiple axes Create an axis for this dummy plot at the desired locati
304. iest way to hide a graph axis title or tick label is to click it and press Hiding Axis Titles delete You can also use the Graph Properties dialog box and Tick Labels view or hide axis titles 1 Double click the desired axis 376 Working with Axis Titles and Tick Labels Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 10 17 Graph Properties Graph Properties Dialog Box Axes Tab Labels Settings Plats Axes Graph Axis Apply to x Data Rename tE Major ticks Settings for dd to major tick labels Prefix Suffix e Show axis title M Bottom Top Major tick labels Jw Bottom Top Cancel Apply Help 2 Select Labels from the Settings For list 3 To view or hide the axis title under Show Axis Title select or clear Bot tom or Top to specify the position of the axis label To view or hide Major Tick labels from the Apply to list select Major Ticks then under Major Tick Labels then select or clear Bottom or Top to specify the position of the tick label To view or hide Minor Tick labels from the Apply to list select Minor Ticks then under Minor Tick Labels select or clear Bottom or Top to specify the position of the tick label 4 Click OK Moving an Axis Title To move an axis title drag it with the mouse just like any other text label or on the Format menu click Size and Position To l
305. ight line plane or curve This is also commonly known as curve fitting 490 ee Glossary SigmaPlot uses a least squares method to curve fit your data Choose the Statistics menu Regression Wizard command to pick an equation and run the curve fitter You can also define any equation using the SigmaPlot transform language See also Transform Regression Coefficients The coefficients ag a calculated for polynomial 0 10 poly linear regressions SigmaPlot can save these regression coefficients to the worksheet See Regression Regression Equation Library Notebook A notebook file which stores sets of regression equations which can be viewed browsed open and run by the Regression Wizard Regression Order The exponent of x in the polynomial regression y ay a X anx aioe SigmaPlot can calculate up to 10th order regressions See also Regression Regression Wizard A graphical wizard interface used to guide you trough nonlinear regression curve fitting procedures See Regression Report A text document that supports text and paragraph formatting and object pasting Reports are saved to notebooks Reports are also produced by running the Regression Wizard Rich Text Format RTF A text file format that supports complex text and paragraph attribute formatting The SigmaPlot report is stored in RTF Rotation 3D Graph The vertical and horizontal angles of rotation for a 3D Cartesian graph These indicate the
306. ile4 C SPW TEMPLATE JNT Pagew DefaultPageWidth 8500 DefaultPageHeight 11000 These are the page heights and widths used for new pages in the absence of a template file or if there is no page named Normal in the template file Pagew hmetares 300 MetaBitmap 1 By default SigmaPlot generates 3D plots using a bitmap rather than a metafile The hmetares setting determines the default resolution of that bitmap This setting is changed to match the resolution of exported graphic files The MetaBitmap setting determines whether a bitmap or metafile is used to render the 3D plot 1 use a bitmap O use a metafile A bitmap is recommended if any gradient lighting and transparency is used If you never use these setting you can change MetaBitmap 0 pagew CrossHairsEnabled 0 GridShown 1 GridSpacing 250 GridDots 0 GridColor O0xffttfso RulersShown 1 GridSnap 0 These settings under the pagew heading determine the default grids rulers snap to and crosshair features 1 show 0 don t show pagew DefaultZoomLevel 5 467 The SPW INI File This setting under the pagew heading determines the default zoom 5 50 1 10 and 10 100 and so on Edit Text Dialog Box Dialog Positions Position Edit Text 302 349 These setting control the location where the Edit Text dialog box for graph page appears when opened When the dialog box is moved and OK is clicked this setting is updated Graph Properties PageDi
307. im wenlam quis nostrud exersi tation ullamcorepe Formatting Text And Paragraphs The Formatting Toolbar appears at the top of the Report Editor Using it you can change report text attributes such as font font size color and style of selected text Figure 13 7 Formatting Toolbar Formatting Times Mew Roman if oie To modify text with the Formatting Toolbar 1 Select the text you want to modify You can select individual characters words paragraphs or the entire report 2 To format character font size weight angle underlining or color use the formatting toolbar buttons 3 To set paragraph alignment use the Formatting Toolbar buttons for left center and right paragraph justification 4 To add bullets a to selected paragraph click the Bullets button To remove bullets click the Bullets button again You can also right click the report page and on the shortcut menu click Bullet Style Bullets are applied to the selected text Formatting Text And Paragraphs 435 Using the Report Editor Inserting the Current Date and Time into a Report To insert the current date and time into reports l 2 Figure 13 8 Date and Time Dialog Box Select the report and click where you want to insert the Date or Time On the Edit menu click Insert Date and Time Select the date and time format from the Available Formats list Click OK The current date and time appear as text at the
308. indicates that you are in selection mode Selected objects are surrounded with square handles selected axes and text are surrounded by dotted lines Figure 4 2 Selecting an Axis EJ Box Plot Data 5 Of x Box Plots with w ardable Widths Selecting Multiple Objects To select multiple objects hold down the Shift key while clicking objects or drag a window completely around the objects you want 98 Working with Page Objects ee Figure 4 3 Selecting Multiple Objects Graph Wizard Graph Page Basics to select When you select multiple objects only the last selected object has solid black handles the other objects have hollow handles E Graph Page 1 Data 17 You can edit copy paste move size and scale delete or hide all selected page objects including graphs text drawn objects and pasted objects The following table summarizes the results of selecting various objects on the graph page Select By Opens Graphs Double click Graph Properties dialog box Plots tab Plots Double click Graph Properties dialog box Plots tab Axes Double click Graph Properties dialog box Axes tab Tick marks Double click Graph Properties dialog box Axes tab Tick labels Double click Graph Properties dialog box Axes tab Axis titles Double click Edit Text dialog box Legends Double click Edit Text dialog box Fills or Lines Right click Object Properties dialog box The Graph Wizard guides you through a series of dialog boxes t
309. information on changing tick marks for ternary graphs see Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick Labels on page 345 To turn tick drawing on and off and to select tick directions for both sides of an axis 1 Double click the tick marks Changing Tick Mark Appearance 383 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 10 24 The Axes Tick Direction Options Plats Axes Graph Graph Properties Axis Apply to Iv Data Rename 28 Maior ticks Direction Left a Outward T Inward Tick lines Length 0 050in Thickness I Color Black Settings for Scaling Labels zal Tick Label Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Axes tab 3 From the Settings for list select Ticks 4 From the Direction list for either axis gt Select Outward to point tick marks away from the graph gt Select Inward to point tick marks toward the inside of the graph gt Select Both to point tick marks in both directions gt Select none to hide tick marks Directions for tick marks are independent for either side of the axis Hiding Tick Marks To hide tick marks 1 Click the tick marks on the page 2 Press Delete or right click and from the shortcut menu click Hide Changing Tick Mark To change tick mark length color and thickness Line Attributes 1 Double click the tick mark 384 Changing Tick Mark Ap
310. ing Fine Horizontal Fine Incrementing None Right rising Fine Right falling Fine Cross Hatched Fine Horizontal Fine Vertical Fine Grid Fine Graphic Cell Codes You can sequence plot lines symbols and fill patterns from an order that appears in a column These sequences can be placed into a column by choosing Edit Insert Graphic Cells You can also directly type the code for these symbols into a cell Correctly typed codes appear as a graphic in worksheet cells The codes for the symbols lines and patterns are shown below Symbol Codes Codes for filled and unfilled a fill color of none symbols as well as dotted and crossed symbols are available Use the none symbol type when you want to create curves which alternate between lines only and symbols only Code Symbol Type symbol 1 0 none symbol 1 3 R dot only symbol 1 5 crosshair only symbol 2 0 hollow circle symbol 2 1 solid circle 090086 symbol 2 3 dotted solid circle symbol 2 2 hollow circle with crosshair symbol 2 5 solid circle with crosshair 454 Graphic Cell Codes symbol 2 6 symbol 3 0 symbol 3 1 symbol 3 2 symbol 3 3 symbol 3 4 symbol 3 5 symbol 4 0 symbol 4 1 symbol 4 2 symbol 4 3 symbol 4 4 symbol 4 5 symbol 5 0 symbol 5 1 symbol 5 2 symbol 5 3 symbol 5 4 symbol 5 5 symbol 6 0 symbol 6 1 symbol 6 2 symbol 6 3 symbol 6 4 symbol 6 5 symbol 7 0 symb
311. ing from the origin to the plotted data point Polar plots are useful for showing data where one value 0 is periodic in nature like a clock An example of this is a graph that shows average temperatures of differing geographical regions during the days of a month or months of a year Arranging Data for Polar Plots Data for Radial and Angular Values R Theta Using X Y Values for Polar Plots Data for polar plots can be entered in either one of two ways gt R 9 values gt X Y coordinates To arrange data using O angular and R radial values enter all 8 values in one column and enter the corresponding R values in another column Data is plotted as O versus R which is similar to X Y plots in organization but differs from X Y plots in that R is usually the dependent variable Polar plot X Y data is arranged the same as 2D plot X Y data with all X values in one column and all Y values in another column however polar plots are plotted as R 0 pairs defined as R Nx 7 and 8 atan 2 x where R is the radius and is the angle of the data point from the origin Polar Plots 323 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots Data for Multiple Curves Using Data from One Column for Multiple Curves Making Polar Plots Figure 8 9 Choosing an Angular Axis Unit from the Angular Axis Unit list 324 Polar Plots Since SigmaPlot can graph more than one curve per plot place as many additional 0
312. ing the template You can determine which columns are plotted by either looking at the worksheet footers or you can open the Graph Properties dialog box for the template graph and click the Plots tab and then under Settings for click Data Using Graph Pages as Templates 105 Graph Page Basics Graphs created by templates can be modified like any other graph See Creating and Modifying Graphs on page 163 How to Apply There are three methods for using pages as templates Templates Method Result Using a template from the New Creates a new page with attributes from Page command the template applied Copying a graph page from one Creates a new page in a section using the notebook section to another data in the existing worksheet for graphs Overwriting an existing page Replaces the existing page To create a new page with attributes from a template 1 On the File menu click New The New dialog box appears Figure 4 12 New Dialog Box Cancel Landscape Ad Legal Help Description aL bp 11 Blank white portrait page 2 Select Graph Page from the New drop down list 3 Select the type of graph page you want to open from the Type scroll down list 4 Click OK Copying a Page The best method of applying a page template to a worksheet is to use an existing graph page as a template The copied page acts as a template using the worksheet in the new section For information on copyin
313. ion Tips and Tricks Making Global Changes Resizing Graphs Use the Line and Text Properties dialog boxes to make global changes to your graphs before publishing To make global changes to text and lines 1 Select the graph 2 From the Format menu click Line or Text Properties The Object or Text Properties dialog box appears from which you can make graph format changes If you need to resize you graph for publication set your fonts and line widths first then turn the automatic re scaling of these objects off before resizing your graph To resize your graph for publication 1 From the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears Publication Tips and Tricks 359 Publishing Graphs 2 Click the Page tab 3 Clear Graph Objects Resize with Graph To re scale the graph precisely gt From the Format menu click Size and Position Before You Export Select the graph before you export otherwise you will export the entire page including unnecessary white space surrounding the graph Disk Space and Make sure you have enough disk space and memory before trying to export a Memory large graphic file For a large file you need at least 200 megabytes or more free on both your system drive for swap and temp file space as well as the same on your destination drive You can also increase your Virtual Memory to a very large size but this isn t necessary if you have sufficient hard drive space availab
314. ioning on a page 490 scaling 131 133 selecting on a page 98 set pattern and edge line thickness 128 sizing 131 133 updating links 120 using the Paste Special command 112 115 viewing object links 120 122 working on pages 122 127 131 158 161 OLE2 defined 488 embedding 112 121 linking 112 121 pasting graphs 112 121 One line functions executing 419 Opening data files into Excel worksheets 90 defined 488 embedded graphs 187 Excel worksheets 89 new graph page 41 non notebook files 44 notebook files 44 notebook items 44 worksheets 44 Options author information 20 automatic 97 automatic legends 19 backup files 19 Column statistics 65 column statistics 18 21 Date and Time 18 defined 488 graph defaults 165 graph pages 96 97 grid colors 97 grid density 97 grids 97 novice prompting 18 numbers 18 page 18 21 page undo 97 page units 96 setting program 96 97 show rulers 97 Snap to 97 statistics 18 stretch maintains aspect ratio 97 Index system 18 templates 20 worksheet 18 21 Orientation defined 488 Origin axes defined 488 of tick marks 494 Origin axes 300 Other values column statistics 65 Outliers box plots 267 highlighting 83 removing 81 84 Output creating files 448 449 EPS files 449 HPGL files 449 PostScript files 449 Overwrite mode 58 defined 488 Page adding graphs 102 103 aligning objects graphs 135 136 ass
315. ions To create a new equation 1 Right click the section where you want the equation to appear 2 On the shortcut menu click New and then Equation The Function dialog box appears in which you enter the proper programming code For more information see the Programming Guide 42 Creating New Notebook Files and Items Notebook Basics Renaming Notebook Files and Items Use the Summary Information dialog box to change information that is stored with your notebook files sections and items To change summary information 1 Figure 2 4 Use the Summary Information Dialog Box to Change Name Author or Comment of a Notebook Item 2 3 On the right side of the notebook window click Summary The Summary Info dialog box appears Summary Information Notebook C Program File les Sarmples IMB Item Type Graph Page Created O9f12 95 16 07 19 Modified 01 26 2001 11 26 48 Title Scatter Plot with Error Bars and Fitted Curves Suthor 5P55 Inc Description This is a scatter graph of symbols with error bars and a line plot draw through the symbols IF you dont have your Fitted line data you can use SigmaPlot s nonlinear regression Help Cancel Select the Entry Title Author or Description box then type the new name Click OK to close the dialog box The new section or item name appears in the notebook window In place Editing You can change the name of a notebook section or item in t
316. ions You can specify the symbol type used either for the symbols in a single curve or for all the curves in a plot The default is to use the same symbol for a single curve and increment symbols for multiple curves You can only modify symbols Plots that normally use symbols are scatter plots line plots line scatter plots bubble plots polar plots box plots 3D scatter plots 3D trajectory plots and ternary plots 2 Bubble plots use circles as the default symbol shape If you choose a different symbol shape you must change the transform function used to translate area to diameter For more information see Bubble Plots on page 279 To use different symbol types within a single curve or for each curve you can increment types automatically see Automatically Incrementing Symbols on page 206 You can also choose to use your own order of symbols or to use text as symbols For more information see Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments on page 220 and Using Characters and Text as Symbols on page 208 2 You cannot increment Symbols for single curves unless there is only one curve within a plot Changing To change symbol attributes Sym bol Type 1 Double click the plot Size and Color 204 Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options Figure 5 31 Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Symbols Setting a a The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph P
317. ions on page 228 Click the Solve tab Plotting and Solving Equations 233 The entered equation appears in the f box on the Solve tab Figure 5 67 Solve Tab of the Plot Equation Dialog Box Plot Equation Four Parameter Logistic Curve Equation Options Library Solve Equation Emin max min t1 E CS01 Hillslope f Results Options Evaluate f at Solve equation for x within range m oo Evaluate 4 Under Options select the mode of operation You can select from one of the following gt Evaluate F at Enter a numerical value for each variable that occurs in the expression in the boxes that appear at the bottom of the dialog box gt Solve equation for x within range Enter a numerical value into the box which appears to the left of the expression the default value is 0 to complete the definition of the equation You must also enter limits for a range of values of the equation variable The default range limits are taken from the values entered on the Equation tab 2 The Solver is only available for expressions containing a single independent variable although any number of parameters can be present 5 Under Options click Evaluate or Solve depending on the selected mode of operation The resulting value or the equation solutions that lie between the prescribed 234 Plotting and Solving Equations Figure 5 68 Equation Solving Guidelines range appear in the Results box Plo
318. iscing elit sed d nibh euismod tincidunt ut laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat wolutg enim ad minim weniam quis nostrud exersi tation ullamcoreper su a tab drag the tab marker off the ruler You can also set tabs from the Tabs dialog box 1 Onthe Format menu click Tabs This command is only available while viewing a report window The Set Tab dialog box appears Set Tab Tab position in inches mLeader character Cancel Mone Dots Center Hyphens Decimal Underline 2 Enter tab stops in the Tab stop position in inches box Enter Tab locations using the current ruler units 3 Click OK to add the tab setting to the list Click Clear to remove a selected setting Click Clear All to remove all tab settings Setting Tabs 433 Using the Report Editor setting Paragraph Indents You can set left right and first line indents for individual paragraphs These settings are saved with the report To set paragraph indents 1 Select the paragraph s to change the indents Figure 13 5 Report Editor Ruler C GELCUS k nibh euismod tincidunt ut laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volut enim ad minim wenlam quis nostrud exersi tation ullamcoreper su nisl ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat Duis autem vel eum iriure hendrerit in vulputate velit esse mole consequat vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero eros et iusto odio di gnissim qui
319. ish to create the plot The simplest way to select a region of data is to drag the columns or range using the mouse You can however manually enter the ranges into the Graph Wizard This is necessary when creating graphs using Microsoft Excel where it is not possible to use the mouse to select a range of data The Graph Wizard supports the following formats when specifying a region in the worksheet gt rc Notation Specify a cell using the letter r to denote the row and the letter c to denote the column For example to specify the cell in the third row and twelfth column you would enter r3c12 To specify a rectangular region follow the upper left cell of the region by the lower right cell separated by two periods For example if the upper left cell of the region is r2c1 second row first column and the lower right cell of the region is r4c4 fourth row fourth column you would enter r2c1 r4c4 into the Graph Wizard You can also specify the column first For example both c2r2 c4r5 and Figure 5 8 Selecting a Range of Data Using the rc Format Figure 5 9 Selecting a Range of Data Using the Excel Format Creating and Modifying Graphs r2c2 5c4 denote the same region in the worksheet Create Graph Select Data Data tor Y 4 rc rcd EEIE G h Select the column Selected columns Time e to plot by clicking u Se n Column 1 Rows 2 3 janes ert Yi Column 2 Rows 2 3 C
320. isk to your WINDOWS S YS TEM directory y If you are prevented from renaming the file in Windows you can instead rename the file in DOS Exit Windows then use the DOS RENAME command by typing C WINDOWS SYSTEM gt REN THREED VBX THREED OLD 3 You are now ready to try the installation again The Setup program should install successfully Question My installation stalls and gives this message Cannot copy file VBRUN300 DLL to WINDOWS SYSTEM file already in use The installation procedure cannot be continued or Visual Basic Applications running close applications Explanation This problem may occur if you attempt to install while other Windows applications are running in the background For instance Visual Basic applications make use of the system wide file VBRUN300 DLL This means that this file cannot be copied to WINDOWS SYSTEM if you are running a Visual Basic application while attempting to install SigmaPlot Solution In this case follow these steps 1 Quit the installation procedure Check to see which applications are currently 472 Troubleshooting Installation Problems OT ee Troubleshooting running in the background by bringing up the Windows Task List on screen Press CTRL ESC on your keyboard Quit ALL applications other than Pro gram Manager Keep a backup copy of the file on your system while preventing the Setup program from identifying it Choose the File Manager Search command to exa
321. ist select Scaling 4 From the Scale Type list select the desired axis scale type The default axis scale is Linear for all numeric data Category for text data and Date Time for date and time data 5 Click OK Using a Use the category scale type by plotting a column containing categories against Category Scale other columns of data values or modify an already existing plot to use a category 366 Changing Scale Type Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids scale by changing the axis scale type to Category then using the Graph Wizard to repick the data and assign your category column as the X or Y coordinate values Figure 10 7 Plotting Category Data Using a Category Scale E 2 3 1 Cemocrats 45 00 5 54 41 00 48 2 Fiepublicans 24 00 35 00 411 FA Graph Page 3 Data 37 To plot a column of text as a category scale 1 Enter your category data text into a worksheet column and corresponding data into adjacent worksheet columns 2 On the Graph tool bar click the graph type and style you want to create The Graph Wizard appears 3 Select the data format and click Next 4 Since you have not already selected your data from the worksheet click the worksheet columns to assign them under Selected Columns Plot your cate gory column as the category axis data type and pick your other column s as the corresponding data type 5 Click Finish to create the graph To modify a plot to use a category sca
322. item to begin labeling tick marks with 8 From the Step By list set the frequency or increment of series items to use For example if you are using a Days of the Week series you might choose to start with Monday and to step labeling by 2 days at a time Tick labels appear as Monday Wednesday Friday Sunday Tuesday etc 9 To re start tick labeling from a specified point use the After and Repeat From drop down lists For example if you were using a Days of the Week series and were stepping by 2 days at a time you might use the After and Repeat From lists to specify that after Friday repeat the series from Monday Tick labels appear as Mon day Wednesday Friday Monday Wednesday Friday etc 10 Click OK Adding a Prefix or To add a suffix or prefix to the major or minor tick labels on a selected axis Suffix to Tick Labels 1 Double click the axis you want to change The Graph Properties dialog box appears 2 Click the Axes tab 3 From the Settings For list select Labels 4 From the Apply To drop down list select either Major Ticks or Minor Ticks 5 To add a prefix or suffix to the major or minor tick labels type the prefix or suffix into the appropriate Add to Tick Labels Prefix or Suffix boxes All labels on the selected axis appear with the specified suffix or prefix You can use any keyboard or extended characters Use the Windows Charac ter map accessory program or Alt Numeric keypad combinations to
323. itles 86 Entering and Promoting Column and Row Titles ee Figure 3 29 Using Column Contents as Row Titles Worksheet Basics All the cells of the selected row are promoted not just those cells which contain column titles This may effect other data sets in the worksheet To use a column for row titles l F 4 If necessary enter the row titles you want to use in a single worksheet column Select the cells in the row you want to use as row titles On the Format menu click Column and Row Titles The Column and Row Titles dialog box appears 32 Data elas a A 5 0000 5 0000 5 0000 8 0000 4c Variable B 4 0000 4 0000 4 0000 36 0000 4c Variable C 5 0000 5 0000 5 0000 5 0000 4c Variable O 4 0000 0000 4 0000 6 0000 5 0 Varlable E 4 0000 87 0000 54 0000 44 0000 fal Column and Row Titles Column Aow rows 1 5 af calumn 1 Title cE gt Next gt Promote column i to titles Promote W Delete promoted column Cancel Apoly Help Click the Row tab The column you wish to promote appears in the Promote column to titles box Select Delete Promoted Column to delete the original column once it has been promoted Click Promote The selected column contents appear as row titles and the Column and Row Titles dialog box closes Using a Cellasa Use the Column and Row Titles dialog box to promote individual cells to column and row titles Column or Row Title Enterin
324. its and increments used to plot data To modify the axis direction 1 Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 8 34 Graph Properties Dialog Box Staph LOnenies Axes Tab Scaling Settings Plats Axes Graph Anis Apply to 5042 Rename f Minor ticks Setti f Scale t Settings for Scale type Arane Percentage 0 100 Start Direction 0 00 Plrrrrradrday B Clockwise As Counter clockwise End 100 00 Tn Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Axes tab 3 Select Scaling from the Settings for list 4 Select the axis you wish to modify from the Axis drop down list 5 Select the axis direction from the Direction drop down list 6 Click OK The tick directions change on all three axes and the axis ranges reverse Changing the axis directions inverts the 0 100 direction of the labels and changes the direction of the tick marks However axis titles only move if they are positioned along an axis not at an apex Apex position for each vari 344 Changing Ternary Axis Range Scale and Direction Figure 8 35 Ternary Graphs Displaying Counterclockwise Left and Clockwise Right Axis Directions Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots able remain constant regardless of axis direction Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick Labels Tick and Tick Label Directions and Ownership Ternary axes tick marks indicate the precise l
325. ividual Legend Entries on page 149 To halt automatic legend Legends updating see Locking Legend Text on page 153 To edit an automatic legend 1 Double click the graph to open the Graph Properties dialog box 2 Click the Graph tab Figure 4 49 Graph P Use the Graph tab of the a chile Graph Properties dialog dox Plats Axes Graph to Edit an Automatic Legend Title E Graph 1 Rename F Show title Settings for Legend appearance Legend properties For legend symbol Col 1 vs Col 2 M Show legend Font I Framed in box T Lock legend ZA Size Width Legend text Eol 1 vs Col2 Edit Symbol placement EE ABC Before text Style symbo amp lines OF Cancel Apply Help 3 To show or hide an automatic legend under Legend Properties select or clear Show Legend Grid Lines ca Backplanes 2 To learn how to show or hide graphs for all subsequentially created graphs see Permanently Displaying and Hiding Automatic Legends on page 153 Working with Automatic Legends 151 10 11 12 13 14 To enclose the legend in a box under Legend Properties select Framed in Box To hide a legend box under Legend properties clear Framed in Box To modify the line thickness and fill of the legend box under Legend Properties click Box to open the Object Properties dialog box To halt all automatic updating of the
326. jects Using Your Mouse to Move Graphs and Objects Figure 4 32 Moving a Graph You can modify graph or object size and position either by using your mouse on the page or by setting specific position size and scaling options in the Size and Position tab of the Object Properties dialog box When you use your mouse to move graphs graph titles axis labels and automatic legends are automatically grouped with a graph and move with it You can move graphs and objects to other page windows FA Grouped Bar Chart with Error Bars Data 27 _ Jol x To move a graph or object with your mouse 1 Select the desired graph 2 Drag it to the desired position A dotted outline of the graph follows the pointer indicating the location of the moved graph 3 Release the mouse button The graph moves to the new position Moving and Sizing Graphs and Objects 131 Using Your Mouse to The easiest way to adjust the size and shape of a graph is to resize the graph using Change G raph and the mouse You can also specify proportional scaling of graphs and objects so that Object Size the height and width ratios are maintained and choose to rescale graph and axis titles and tick marks accordingly To adjust graph or object size with the mouse 1 View the page window 2 Click the graph or desired objects to select them Selected page objects are surrounded with small square handles 3 Place the pointer over a handle 4 Press and hold d
327. k the file name Depending on the type of file the data is either imported immediately or another dialog box appears If you are importing SPSS sav files the Import Worksheet dialog box appears prompting you to select variables to import To select variables to import l De In the Unselected Variables list select a variable you want to import Click the single gt arrow to move that variable to the Selected Variables list Click the double gt gt arrow to move the entire contents of the Unselected Variables list to the Selected Variables list Importing Files from Other Applications 59 Worksheet Basics SigmaPlot Sigmastat sigmascan Mocha Worksheets and DIF MS Excel Lotus 1 2 3 Quattro and dBase Files Figure 3 6 Import Spreadsheet Dialog Box Click Import to place the data in the SigmaPlot worksheet 2 SPSS data files use category data as the default data format To learn how to create a graph using category data see Creating Error Bar Plots Using Category Data on page 252 To learn how to create a SigmaPlot graph from within SPSS see Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using SPSS on page 188 If you are importing a SigmaPlot SigmaStat SigmaScan Mocha or DIF file a dialog box appears prompting you to select a range of data to import Select the range of data by specifying the start and end of the range the default is the entire range Click Import to place the data in the SigmaPlot workshee
328. king with 2D Graphs Linear or polynomial regressions with confidence and prediction intervals and reference lines can be drawn for each curve To learn about plotting with regressions see Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines on page 407 For information on adding reference lines see Adding Reference Lines on page 412 2D Plot Types Scatter Line and Scatter line and line scatter plots graph data as symbols as lines only with no Line Scatter Plots symbols or as symbols and lines Line shapes can be straight segments splines or steps Add drop lines to either axis to any of these plot types and add error bars to plots with symbols Draw linear or polynomial regressions with confidence and prediction intervals for each curve Figure 6 1 14 40 Examples of a Stepped 12 35 Line Plot a Scatter Plot 10 30 and a Line Scatter Plot 25 20 j 15 A 10 2 5 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 For more information on adding drop lines see Adding and Modifying Drop Lines on page 226 To learn more about creating scatter and line scatter graphs with error bars see Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars on page 245 Area Plots Using area plots you can fill an area under a curve with a color making the curve easier to see You can orient the fill up down left or right If your curve is a closed polygon you can also fill the polygon You can have multiple curves plots on a page so you can stack Area Plots 80 Figure 6
329. l specified for the axis range 2 Tiek values from a column are not applied to the post break interval 9 To set axis break properties under Break Properties from the Symbol drop down list select a break symbol type then use the Length Color and Thickness options 10 Click OK Working with Axis Titles and Tick Labels SigmaPlot automatically labels graph axes with titles and tick labels Axis titles can be modified like any other text label For information on how to edit tick labels see Changing Tick Labels on page 387 Editing an To edit an axis title Axis Title 1 On the graph page double click the axis title Working with Axis Titles and Tick Labels 375 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids The Edit Text dialog box appears Figure 10 16 a A Editing an Axis Tite CEEE ojx Edit Text Avial Ji Nee Sa se fo e f Ea AS Cancel Help Symbol 2 Make your changes to the title 3 Click OK For more information on how to use the Edit Text dialog box see Working with Text on the Page on page 143 2 You can also rename an axis title from within the Axis tab of the Graph Properties dialog box Double click the axis then click Rename The Edit Text dialog box opens Rotating Axis Titles To rotate an axis title 1 Double click the axis title Edit Text dialog box appears 2 Select a degree of rotation for the selected label from the Rotation drop down list Viewing and The eas
330. l the list of video display options and choose either VGA or SVGA from the list You will be prompted to install the Current or newer driver choose Current then restart Windows for the change to take effect Attempt to reinstall once you are back in Windows If you are unsuccessful you may need to contact the manufacturer of your graphics card to update the driver Troubleshooting Installation Problems 413 Troubleshooting sigmaPlot Errors Figure 17 1 The Too Many Users Warning Important Network Information Single User Solution 474 SigmaPlot Errors After installation if you double click the SigmaPlot icon and get an error message such as the one shown below there are a number of possible solutions SigmaPlot 7 0 AN Sory There are too many people using Sigmaplot 7 0 As of SigmaPlot version 3 02 ALL workstations running SigmaPlot from a network must have FULL access to the application directory Each time SigmaPlot is launched it creates small files in the network application directory and deletes them when it closes If SigmaPlot cannot write to and erase from the application directory it will not be able to run its counting routine and will not launch correctly Look in your SigmaPlot application directory for LOCKFILE S YS Delete the LOCKFILE SYS file and then attempt to restart SigmaPlot Make sure that you have not exceeded the number of seats allocated on your network site license If
331. lar axes labels are analogous to standard Cartesian graph titles and labels However radial tick marks and labels have additional positioning options Other than display and position polar plot tick marks and labels have the same options as Cartesian graph tick marks and labels Changing Axis To view hide or move titles and tick labels on the radial axes Title and Tick 1 Double click a radial axis Labels Display The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 8 18 Graph Properties Dialog Box oe ai sh Axes Tab Labels Settings Plats Axes Graph Axis Apply to Radial Data Rename tE Major ticks gt Settings for Add to major tick labels Prefix moo Suffix Major tick labels Spoke 1 Spoke 3 E clockwise Gi counterclockwise Spoke 2 m E clockwise h i T counterclockwise eE Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Axes tab 332 Displaying and Changing Radial Axis Ticks and Labels ee Hiding Tick Marks Radial Axis Tick Mark Direction Figure 8 19 Graph Properties Dialog Box Axes Tab Ticks Settings 8 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots Select Labels from the Settings For list Select either Minor Ticks or Major Ticks from the Apply To drop down list To move or hide the major or minor tick labels on the radial axes use the Major or Minor Tick Labels options Select None to hide the labels Select clockwise or count
332. lay 68 Edge lines setting the color 128 setting thickness 128 Edges bar box 127 defined 483 plot line thickness 218 slice 127 Edit menu commands Copy 78 Cut 78 Delete Cells 78 Insert New Object 119 Paste 78 Transpose Paste 81 Edit text defined 483 Editing automatic legends 151 axis tick labels 387 axis titles 375 377 contour labels 314 315 embedded graphs 186 187 graph titles 194 notebook items 43 notebook sections 43 object links 121 page format 154 pasted graphs in other applications using OLE2 112 121 plot name 192 193 radial axes tick labels 332 SPW32 INI file 459 467 text 146 147 tick labels 389 editing 43 Ellipses drawing 125 Embedded graphs available menus and command 187 creating in SPSS 188 editing 186 187 opening inside SigmaPlot 187 resizing 188 viewind data 187 viewing data 188 Embedding defined 483 006 objects 113 122 Reports 113 Encapsulated PostScript see EPS files Entering column titles 85 88 data 53 94 equations 228 Greek symbols 145 labels 143 146 row titles 85 88 symbols in legends 146 text 143 148 EPS files 358 creating 448 449 defined 484 importing 449 Vector formatssee EPS files Equations confidence intervals 411 412 creating 42 228 linear regression 410 411 manually entering 228 plotting 228 236 prediction intervals 412 setting parameters 229 231 solving 233 236 solving guidelines 235 236 Error bars asymmetric 249 bi directional
333. le 1 Double click the axis you want to modify The Graph Properties dialog box Axes tab appears 2 Select Scaling from the Settings For list 3 Select Category from the Scale Type drop down list 4 Click Apply to change the scale type without closing the dialog box Changing Scale Type 367 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids 5 Click the Plots tab and then click Graph Wizard The Graph Wizard Modify Plot dialog box appears 6 Under Data Format select the data format you want to use and click Next 7 Click the columns in the worksheet to choose the worksheet columns to assign to plotted data under Selected Columns Plot your category column as the data type you want to use as the category axis and pick you other col umns s as the corresponding data type 8 Click Finish to create the graph with the newly assigned worksheet data and modified axis Using a Date and SigmaPlot graphs date and time data from worksheet columns as specific calendar Time Scale dates and times against which corresponding data values in other columns are plotted For more information on entering date and time data see Entering Dates and Times on page 57 To create a plot using a date time scale 1 Enter dates or times into a column of a worksheet For example enter 1 1 2 1 3 1 etc indicating months and days 2 Enter corresponding data into a separate worksheet column or columns Figure 10 8 A Worksheet With Dates in C
334. le C My Documents chicago 01 ls Browee T Link pede Microsoft Excel Inserte the contents of the file as an object into Ufone ier your document so that you may activate it using the program Which created it It will be displayed as an Icon Change Icon 7 Click OK Viewing and You can view and modify links with the Links dialog box The Links dialog box Modifying displays all links associated with the current graph or report page Object Links To view and modify links 1 View the graph or report page by selecting it 2 On the Edit menu click Links The Links dialog box appears displaying the path file name type of file and if it is a manually updated or automatically updated link of all links on the page Figure 4 24 Links The Links Dialog Box Update Now Open Source Change Source Break Link Soue checanprokimages eaf bmp Type Bitmap Image Update Automatic Manual If you do not have any linked objects on the page the Links box is empty 3 To change the updating to either Automatic or Manual select the unse 120 Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects I ee Figure 4 25 The Change Source Dialog Box 6 7 Graph Page Basics lected option If Automatic updating is selected the object changes automati cally when the source file is changed If Manual updating is selected you must use the Update Now button to update the linked object with any chang
335. le Note that it can take awhile to generate these files depending on your system s speed and available RAM 360 Publication Tips and Tricks Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Axes are the scales or rulers along which data is plotted 2D Cartesian graphs have an X horizontal axis and a Y vertical axis For 3D graphs the X and Y axes form the base of the graph and the Z axis is the vertical axis Polar plots use an angular axis to draw the circumference of the plot and the radial axes to draw the radius of the plot An axis is always associated with at least one plot on a graph and determines the scaling of the plot Each axis consists of pairs of lines that you can move and modify independently Tick marks are short lines along the axis that represent scale intervals You can display and modify tick marks for each axis Grid lines are attached to the graph planes and can be drawn at tick intervals for all axes Make most axis modifications using the Axes tab of the Graph Properties dialog box This chapter describes how to Change an axis range see page 362 Change an axis scale see page 363 Hide display and delete axes see page 370 Move axes see page 371 Modify axis line color and thickness see page 372 Set an axis break see page 374 Add and edit axis titles see page 375 View and hide axis titles and tick labels see page 376 Change tick mark intervals see page 378 Modify tick mark appearance see p
336. le vertical Midpoint Multinle Wertical Midnnin Help Cancel Back Mext Finish 4 To change the plot type click Back twice to view the Graph Types list Choose from the list of available graph types then click Next iple 5 5 Click next until you can select a data format again for the new plot type or style from the Data Format list then click Next You are prompted to specify which worksheet columns to plot 6 If necessary repick the data columns to plot Otherwise click Finish to com plete you plot type or style change If you are changing a 3D plot to a mesh plot you may need to smooth your data For more information on smoothing 3D data see Smoothing 2D and 3D Data on page 420 Adding New Plots 196 Adding New Plots Graphs can have multiple plots and plot types Although most 2D graphs with multiple curves do not require more than one plot if you want to mix plot types on a single graph you will need to create multiple plots If you want multiple sets of lines symbols or bars just plot multiple columns of data for the same plot see Creating Multiple Curves on page 244 I ee Creating and Modifying Graphs Use multiple plots per graph rather than a single plot with many curves only if different plot types or styles are required i e placing a bar chart and a line plot or a 3D scatter and mesh plot on a graph if different data formats are required such as XY and Y only for a scatter plot o
337. legend text for the whole legend select Lock legend To learn more see Locking Legend Text on page 153 To show or hide individual legend entries for a specific plot or curve under Legend appearance from the For legend symbol list select or clear a legend entry To annotate from the For legend symbol drop down list enter the text for a legend symbol by selecting the symbol then select the Legend text box and type text Do this for as many legend symbols as you want To move the legend symbols either to the right or to the left of text select a position from the Symbol placement drop down list If you have no legend symbol selected this operates on all legends If you select a specific entry from the For Legend Symbol list this option affects only that symbol To modify the appearance of the symbols for the current legend select a symbol style from the Style drop down list The Style drop down list only affects scatter and line plots If you have no legend symbol selected this operates on all symbols If you select a specific entry from the For Symbol list this option affects only that symbol To change the text size or style under Legend properties click Font The Text Properties dialog box appears For more information on using the Text Properties dialog box see Formatting Text on page 146 To restore all legend text and symbols to the default settings under Leg end properties click Reset The Reset button also unlocks
338. legends and can be used instead of column numbers in transforms To enter or edit a worksheet column or row title double click the title and enter or edit the title Press Enter to accept the new title Labeling worksheet columns keeps previous number of column with the new added name You must use at least one text character in every column title If you need to use a number as column title type a space character by pressing the space bar before the number You can enter and edit column and row titles using the Column and Row Titles dialog box To enter or edit a column title 1 On the Format menu click Column and Row Titles The Column and Row Titles dialog box appears 2 Click the Column tab 3 Enter the column title in the Title box 4 To edit an existing title move to that column by clicking the Next or Prev buttons then edit the title 5 Click OK to close the Column Titles dialog box when you are finished edit ing column titles To enter or edit a row title 1 On the Format menu click Column and Row Titles The Column and Row Titles dialog box appears 2 Click the Row tab 3 Enter the row title in the Title box 4 To edit an existing title move to that row by clicking the Next or Prev but tons then edit the title 5 Click OK to close the Column and Row Titles dialog box when you are fin ished editing row titles Entering and Promoting Column and Row Titles 85 Worksheet Basics
339. les from the window You can either double click a graph or click Create Graph to create a graph The graph then appears in a location defined by the graph style Docking the Graph The SigmaPlot Graph Style Gallery is a resizable window that you can dock like a style Gallery toolbar or leave floating Double click the Graph Gallery title bar to dock or undock it or drag it to the desired docked or undocked position Applying Graph Use the Graph Style Gallery to quickly apply your own custom graph styles to Styles to Pages data To apply a graph style 1 On the Graph menu click Graph Style Gallery The Graph Style Gallery window appears Figure 5 11 Graph Style Gallery Box Graph Style Gallery Ea 7 ur Create Graph Edit Add Graph Summary Delete PELE Help Grid Grouped Bar Chart with Error Bars 2 Double click the graph style you want to use The Graph Wizard Create Graph panel appears To learn how to use the Graph Wizard see Create a Graph Using the Graph Wizard on page 177 3 Select the worksheet columns you want to use for the plot 4 Click Finish to create the plot Creating Graphs Using the Graph Style Gallery 183 Creating and Modifying Graphs Adding Styles to the After creating and formatting a graph you can save its style in the Graph Style Graph Style Gallery Gallery and later apply that style to future SigmaPlot graphs To add a graph style or object to the Gr
340. letely unobstructed view of the page To view the full page without toolbars title bars scroll bars or the status bar on the View menu click Full Screen The page appears without any obstructions To return to normal view of the page press any key on the keyboard The screen returns to its normal appearance There are three ways to change the magnification of the entire graph page gt Select a zoom level from the toolbar drop down list You can also enter a custom zoom anywhere between 10 to 2500 gt Click the Custom Zoom button P on the Standard toolbar to zoom in on a specific region of the page The pointer changes to a magnifying glass select Zooming In and Out 103 Graph Page Basics a region on the page by dragging the mouse then release the mouse button The region is zoomed to the selected area Figure 4 9 Using the Zoom Pointer to Select a Region on the Page H Graph Page 1 Data 1 gt Use keyboard shortcuts while viewing the page window The zoom keyboard shortcuts to view the page are gt At 50 actual size press Ctrl 5 gt At 100 actual size press Ctrl 1 gt At 200 actual size press Ctrl 2 gt At 400 actual size press Ctrl 4 gt Entire page press Ctrl F gt Magnified for a specific region press Ctrl U Using the Zoom Use the Zoom dialog box to change the zoom level to fixed or custom levels Dialog Box J To change the zoom 1 On the View menu click Zoom The Zoom
341. lick Delete Cells The Delete Cells dialog box appears 3 Select the direction you want the existing data to shift when the block is deleted or to delete an entire column or row select Delete Columns or Delete Rows 4 Click OK delete the block columns or rows The existing data shifts in the specified direction Using the Shortcut You can delete columns by using the shortcut menu Deleting columns shifts Menu to Delete Data existing columns to the left To delete columns 1 Right click the column number or title 2 On the shortcut menu click Delete Columns 80 Deleting Blocks of Cells Columns and Rows of Data ee Worksheet Basics The Delete Columns dialog box appears In the Delete columns list specify the column or starting column of the block you want to delete Click OK switching Rows to Columns You can rearrange data from a row oriented format to a column orientation or vice versa When you swap data SigmaPlot pastes contents with the row and column coordinates transposed To swap data column and row positions l 2 3 Select the block of data to transpose Cut or copy the selected data Select the cell where you want to begin pasting the data On the Edit menu click Transpose Paste The data is pasted to the worksheet with the column and row coordinates reversed Removing Outliers and Other Data You can manually omit or ignore an outlying point or group of points by convertin
342. lick the color line symbol or fill pattern in the Insert Graphic Cells dialog box you want to place in the cell Do not mix graphic cell types within the same column for example place colors in one column symbols in a different column fills in yet another column and lines in a fourth column However you can use multiple columns to define several different increments of the same graphic cell type For example you can have several columns containing colors of differently ordered increments The item appears in the worksheet cell Continue adding to the column in the order you want the curves to use the colors lines symbols or patterns The order of the curves is the order in which they appear in the Selected Columns drop down list in the Graph Wizard Close the Insert Graphic Cells dialog box Click the View Page Bl button Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Plot Plot 5 Rename Graph wizard Settings for Pattern and edge Color Cc Black Pattern Bine Thickness Fill color Color o Dk Green I1 Widths r t A Error Bars Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments 221 Entering Graphic Cells Manually Generating Color Gradients with a Transform 10 11 12 13 From the Plot drop down list select the plot to modify From the Settings For
343. line Intervals Confidence intervals also called the confidence interval for a regression describe the range where the regression line values will fall a percentage of the time for repeated measurements Prediction intervals also called the confidence interval for the population describe the range where the data values will fall a percentage of the time for repeated measurements You must compute a regression in order to compute confidence and prediction lines To add prediction and confidence lines 1 On the Statistics menu click Linear Regression Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines 409 Statistics Figure 11 10 The Confidence Intervals Panel of the Linear Regression Dialog Box gt The Linear Regression dialog box appears Linear Regression Regression Line Confidence Intervals Resulte Method 953 a Confidence Prediction MW Confidence Intervals Prediction Intervals Type Long Dash Color Black Color Black Thickness J ooo Thickness 0 007 Cancel Apply Help Click the Confidence Intervals tab Type jana z Choose the method of prediction to use from the Method drop down list Select either 95 or 99 for confidence and prediction intervals Select the Confidence Interval and or Prediction Interval option and select a line type and color then move the Thickness slider or enter a value in the Thickness box to set line thickness Line color
344. list select Fills Area Fills Symbols or Lines depend ing on what you have defined in the worksheet Choose the name of the column which contains the appropriate graphic cells from the Symbols Type Fills Foreground Pattern or Lines Type or Color drop down lists If you are applying a large number of colors or other property schemes you may wish to turn off the automatic legend which will attempt to display your first 25 different data points Click the Titles and Legends tab and clear Show Legend Click OK You can also add graphic cells to the worksheet by entering the code in the cell If you want to enter symbols using codes enter the code for the symbol type in the cell See Color Symbol Line and Fill Schemes and Codes on page 451 for a list of all these codes You can also use the RGBCOLOR transform function to add colors to worksheet cells and columns You can also use the RGB transform to transform a third or fourth variable to color and add another dimension to your graph For more information on the use of this transform see the Programming Guide Changing Bar and Box Widths and Spacing Figure 5 50 From left to right bar charts with a group spacing of 50 and relative thickness of 100 group spacing and relative thickness both set to 66 and both settings set to 100 Control the amount of space between bars and boxes and between grouped 2D bars by adjusting the percent of the maximum possible widths
345. lled with a color or pattern Most commonly an area plot is a line plot with shading that descends to the axis You can add shade below a curve and shade in different directions You can also identify intersecting sections This example consists of two plots and includes gt A simple bar chart using hairline bars gt A multiple area plot using the X many Y data format Average Daily Temperature Range and Precipitation Oakland CA A Multiple Area Plot Begin 10 1970 End F431 2000 0 35 0 30 0 25 T Ti 020 a at 015 S E 00 0 05 0 00 Jan Feb hlar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Now Dec Jan Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs 31 Introduction SigmaPlot Help Customer Service Training Seminars Tell Us Your Thoughts SigmaPlot s online help uses new HTML online Help View the HTML Help using Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4 0 or higher If you have any questions concerning your shipment or account contact your local office see page 33 Please have your serial number ready for identification when calling SPSS Inc provides both public and onsite training seminars for SPSS products All seminars feature hands on workshops SPSS seminars will be offered in major U S and European cities on a regular basis For more information on these seminars call your local office see page 33 Your comments are important Please send us a letter and let us know about new and interesting applications using
346. lock of data the block overwrites existing data Importing Files from Other Applications You can import data from other applications into an existing worksheet for graphing worksheet display or running regressions When you import data it appears at the position of the worksheet cursor You can import the following file types can into SigmaPlot worksheets gt SPSS sav gt SigmaPlot 1 0 and 2 0 files SPW gt SigmaPlot Macintosh 4 Worksheet 98 mporting Files from Other Applications ee py SPSS SAV VVVVVVVVVVVVV VY Worksheet Basics SigmaPlot Macintosh 5 Worksheet SigmaStat 1 0 files SNB SigmaPlot and SigmaStat DOS files SPG SP5 TableCurve 2D and 3D files Microsoft Excel files XLS Lotus 1 2 3 files WKS WK Quattro DOS files WK dBase files DBF Plain Text files TXT PRN DAT ASC Comma Delimited files CSV SigmaScan SigmaScanPro Worksheets SigmaScan Image Mocha Worksheets Axon Text and Binary formats When you import data from another application that is left justified SigmaPlot assumes it is text To import data l Place the cursor to the worksheet cell where you want the imported data to start On the File menu click Import The Import File dialog box appears Select the type of file you want to import from the Files of Type drop down list Change the drive and directory as desired select the file you want to read then click Import or double clic
347. log box To save changes with the same name and path 1 Click the Save button Bi Your file is saved To save to a new name and path 1 On the File menu click Save As The Save As dialog box appears 2 Navigate to the directory where you want to save your notebook 3 Type aname for the notebook in the File Name text box 4 Click Save to save the notebook file and close the Save As dialog box Exporting Notebooks and Notebook Items Exporting Notebooks 46 Saving Your Work Use SigmaPlot s Export command to export worksheet page and report contents as files of different formats Use the Export command to save SigmaPlot 8 0 notebooks as older SigmaPlot files Any features exclusively supported by SigmaPlot 8 0 will be lost upon conversion To export a notebook 1 Click the notebook window ee Exporting SigmaPlot Worksheets 2 Exporting Graphs and Pages Notebook Basics 2 On the File menu click Export The Export dialog box appears 3 From the Files of type drop down list select a file format 4 Enter the file name directory and drive for the exported file 5 Click Export to create the file Exporting worksheets does not export associated graphs To export the worksheet and the graph you need to export the graph page to a SigmaPlot Graph SPW file You can only export the entire Sigma Worksheet If you want to export a portion of the worksheet delete the portion you don t want to e
348. log box appears Figure 8 4 Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Pie Slices Settings Plots Axes Grids and Planes Title and Legend Plot Plot 1 Rename Graph Wizard Settings For First Slice Counterclackwise from Graph Properties Pie Slices Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Plots tab 3 Select Pie Slices from the Settings For list 4 Move the Counterclockwise from slider to change the starting angle Increas ing the starting angle for the first slice moves the starting slice counterclock wise The default is 0 3 o clock 5 Click OK Adding Exploding Use the Graph Properties dialog box to add single or multiple exploding slices Slices To explode one slice 1 Double click the pie chart 320 Pie Charts Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 8 5 i Graph Properties Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Pie Slices Settings Plots Axes Graph Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph Wizard Settings for First slice starts counterclockwise at Explode eb Single Slice numbered counterclockwise Exploded slice 2 Click the Plots tab 3 Select Pie Slices from the Settings For list 4 Select Single Slice from the Exploded Slices drop down list 5 Select the number of the slice to explode from the Slice drop down list By default the first slice begins at 0 and proceeds co
349. lor and Thickness drop down lists 5 Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box Data Feedback highlights the cells and columns on the worksheet that correspond to the selected curve or datapoint s X and Y values You can change these colors on the Options dialog box To change the data feedback colors 1 On the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears 2 Click the Worksheet tab 3 Inthe Settings For list click Appearance 4 Set data feedback colors and thickness in the X and Y drop down lists 5 Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box The column width limits the number of decimal places allowed The maximum number of decimal places cannot exceed the column width To set the number of decimal places used for worksheet values 1 On the Tools menu click Options Displaying Worksheet Data 67 a E Worksheet Basics The Options dialog box appears Figure 3 12 Changing Worksheet ila Column Width Worksheet Fage General Macro Graph Defaults Settings For Appearance Display As E Notation hen Needed Decimal Places E Engineering Notation Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Worksheet tab 3 Inthe Settings For list click Numeric 4 Select the number of decimal places from the Decimal Places drop down list 5 Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box Changing Display numbers in four ways in your worksheet using the Tool
350. lot Plot 2 Rename Graph wizard Fill calor Color 7 Monochrome i Black Black Settings for Size Thickness Area Fills Cancel App Hep Click the Plots tab From the Settings for list select Symbols From the Plot drop down list select the plot to modify To change the symbol type for the selected plot from the Type drop down list select a symbol type or choose to increment symbols using the one of the symbol schemes To create a plot that displays lines only turn off symbols by choosing None To learn more about automatically incrementing symbols see Automatically Incrementing Symbols on page 206 To learn about using custom symbol schemes see Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments on page 220 For information on using text as symbols see Using Characters and Text as Symbols on page 206 To change the size of the symbol move the Size slider or type a new value in the Size box By default all symbols in a plot are the same size Use sym bols of different sizes by entering symbol sizes in a worksheet column then selecting the column from the Size list To change the fill color of symbols for the selected plot under Fill Color select a color from the Color list or choose to increment fill colors using the one of the incrementing schemes To turn off symbol fills select None To learn more about automatically incrementing symbol fills see Automati
351. lving 235 236 H Halftones printing 447 Halting 153 Hardware system requirements 13 Help system defined 485 using 32 Hiding automatic legends 151 152 153 axes 370 axis titles 376 377 contour lines 309 graph titles 124 graphs on page 123 124 graphs using shortcut menu 123 grid lines 399 legends 124 plots 200 plots using shortcut menu 200 radial axis labels 332 statistics 65 tick marks 376 377 toolbars 15 17 High frequency data smoothing 421 425 Highlighting outliers 83 Histogram Wizard using 404 406 Histograms bucket values 405 creating 403 407 defined 486 histogram transform function 404 Histogram Wizard 403 407 HISTOGRM XFM transform 406 407 Horizontal bar chart data format 166 Horizontal dot plot data format 170 Horizontal error bars data format 169 Horizontal point plot data format 169 Hot key defined 486 Icons changing display for inserted objects 119 changing display for pasted objects 118 displaying inserted objects as 119 displaying pasted objects as 118 Identifying area plot intersections 276 Ignoring outliers 81 84 Important note flag used in manual 33 Importing 60 Axon files 62 data 486 data files 58 61 81 defined 486 DIF files 60 EPS files 449 HPGL files 449 SigmaPlot files 60 SigmaScan files 60 SigmaStat files 60 SPSS files 59 text files 61 62 In 32 Inches page units 156 157 Incrementing lines 215 symbol color 206 Incrementing
352. maPlot Graph Style 171 Creating and Modifying Graphs 172 SigmaPlot Graph Style Simple Error Bars Multi ple Error Bars Simple Vertical Step Plot Multiple Vertical Step Plot Simple Hori zontal Step Plot Plots a single set of XY pairs as sym bols with error bars connected with straight lines If using worksheet col umns or asymmetric error bar columns format data columns as XY Pair or Single Y If using columns means the first col umn entry or the last column entry as symbol values format data columns as X Many Y or Many Y If using row means row median first row entry or last row entry as symbol values format data col umns as X Y Replicate or Y Replicate Plots multiple sets of XY pairs as sym bols with error bars connected with straight lines If using worksheet col umns asymmetric error bar columns col umns means the first column entry or the last column entry as symbol values format data columns as X Many Y or Many Y If using row means row median first row entry or last row entry as symbol values format data columns as X Many Y Rep licates or Many Y Replicates Plots a single set of XY pairs connect ing symbols with vertical and hori zontal lines starting with vertical Format data columns as XY pair single X or single Y Plots a multiple sets of XY pairs con necting symbols with vertical and hor izontal lines starting with vertical Format data col
353. manually 371 2D Axes with mouse 371 around the worksheet 55 axes to precise location 371 axes with Graph Properties dialog 371 axis titles 377 data 78 graphs 131 133 graphs and objects using arrow keys 134 notebook items between notebooks 45 objects 131 133 objects to back front 134 radial axis 330 333 to worksheet cell 56 toolbars 17 Moving objects 131 Multiple area plots creating 273 Multiple axes creating 285 Multiple curves creating 244 plotting data 244 regression options 408 same X or Y for 240 Multiple error bars data format 168 Multiple error bars and regressions data format 169 Multiple plots 198 additional axes 283 Multiple regressions data format 167 Multiple scatter plot data format 167 Multiple spline curve format 170 Multiple straight line data format 171 Multiple straight line plot 170 Multiple Z columns 289 Naming graph pages 43 graphs 194 notebook files 43 notebook items 43 plots 192 193 sections 43 worksheets 43 Natural log axis scale 363 Natural log scale 363 defined 487 488 Needle plot creating 224 New Excel worksheet 41 graphs with templates 105 pages with templates 105 sections 41 worksheets 41 New Features SigmaPlot 10 New features 10 11 Noisy data smoothing 421 425 Non keyboard characters see text Non notebook files exporting to original file format 46 48 opening 44 Normal using as source template for new pages 108 Notebook files adding new sections 41 adding
354. me units 7 Select Pad 5 to add padding to both ends of the axis 362 Changing Axis Range Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids 8 Select Nearest Tick to extend the range to the nearest major tick mark 9 Click OK Changing Axis Scales Axis Scale Types Figure 10 2 Graphs of the Same Data Using Linear Common Log and Natural Log Scales You can control the axis units and increments used in representing your data Axis scale and range are modified with the Scaling settings of the Graph Properties dialog box Axes tab You can also use transforms and tick labels and intervals from worksheet columns to create your own custom axis scales see Using a Custom Axis Scale on page 369 Linear A standard base 10 numeric scale This scale is recommended for a date axis when an exact representation of spacing depicted by dates is not required Otherwise use the date time scale Common Log A base 10 logarithmic scale Natural Log A base e logarithmic scale 5000 10000 8 e8 _ 4000 e7 4 1000 6 3000 eal eo 4 2000 100 e4 1000 ma e3 4 0 e2 1 T T T T T 1 T T T T T T 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Probability The inverse of the Gaussian cumulative distribution function The graph of the sigmoidally shaped Gaussian cumulative distribution function on a probability scale is a straight line Probabilities are expressed as percentages
355. metrically on a log scale This option is only available for log axis scales To change the mean computation method l Double click the plot with a log axis scale to open the Graph Properties dia log box Click the Plots tab From the Settings For list select Error Bars Working with 2D Graphs 4 From the Mean Computation drop down list select Arithmetic or Geometric Figure 6 29 Graph Properties Selecting Arithmetic or Geometric from the Mean Plots HES Grids and Planes Title and Legend Computation list Plat Pict 1 Rename Graph Wizard Setings or Error bars avi Direction T Area Fills itr bath MM Black RH ne Thickness Positive Error Bars a o10in Ur eee Data point Cap width Reference From columns 0 100 E or Negative Mean computation arithmetic Arithmetic ieometric Cancel Apply He Drop Lines ka 5 Click OK Changing Error Use this method to change the error bar source after you have created a graph Bar Source ou Can gt Plot the means of worksheet columns as single data points and compute the error bars values from column statistics column averaging gt Use data in worksheet rows and columns as error bar values see Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars on page 245 gt Use data in two adjacent worksheet columns as the absolute error bar values see Creating 2D Plots with Asymmetric Error Bars on pa
356. mic axes You can use the geometric mean instead of the arithmetic mean when using error bars See Error Bar and Column Averaging Graph In SigmaPlot a graph is an object on the page of specific size and location associated with a coordinate system Back planes plots and axes are attached to graphs Graphs can contain multiple sets of plots 2D graphs can have multiple axes Graphs are created with the Graph Wizard or Graph menu Create Graph command See also Back Plane Coordinate System Page and Plot Graph Defaults A limited set of graph attributes that can be set to apply to newly created graphs Graph defaults do not affect existing graphs Set graph defaults using the Tools menu Options command Graph Style The style of a graph determines the appearance of data on the graph The style you can assign to a graph depends on the graph type The Graph Wizard lists the available graph styles once you have selected a graph type Graph Type The kind of representation for graphed data SigmaPlot can produce 2D line and or scatter plots bar and stacked bar charts Tukey box plots line and or scatter polar plots contour plots and 3D line and or scatter bar charts and mesh plots Pie charts do not have different plot types Graphic Object See also Object Any object appearing on the page and capable of being moved for example text lines boxes ellipses and graphs Grid Horizontal or vertical lines incremented according to
357. mine files in your WIN DOWS SYSTEM directory and to find the file VBRUN300 DLL The Search Results windows should show the file Then choose the File menu Rename command to rename the file VBRUN300 DLL as VBRUN300 OLD and close the File Manager Copy the file from the SigmaPlot installation disk to your WINDOWS S YS TEM directory If you are prevented from renaming the file in Windows you can instead rename the file in DOS Exit Windows then use the DOS RENAME command by typing C WINDOWS SYSTEM gt REN VBRUN300 DLL VBRUN300 OLD You are now ready to try the installation again The Setup program should install successfully Question The installation starts fine but as soon as Initializing Setup appears on the screen my computer crashes Explanation Problems like this are usually linked to a video driver conflict Switching the video driver you are currently using to a standard Microsoft VGA or SVGA driver will probably solve the conflict Solution Here are the steps to make the setup changes l Quit the attempted installation and double click the Windows Setup icon usually located in the Main group of the Windows Program Manager Under the setting Display you will see the name and resolution details if any of the video driver you are currently using Write down the full details of the current settings so that you can return to those settings later Choose the Options menu Change System Settings command scrol
358. mn assignment labels at the bottom of the worksheet indicate the data sets for the currently selected plot See also Plot and Curve Date Time Scale An axis that plots true calendar dates and times using real time increments Delimiter A symbol or character used to separate data fields within a data file format for example white space commas semicolons or colons Dialog Boxes Windows of commands and options that appear on the screen Use dialog box options to view and change graph and program settings DOS Shell Used to access the DOS prompt from within Windows to run DOS commands The DOS window mays not contain enough memory to run large applications Drag Move the mouse while holding down the left mouse button Dragging is used to move objects stretch objects or select regions Drop Lines Lines which can be added to 2D and 3D plots which use symbols Edges This term refers to the outline of bar chart bars symbols box plot boxes pie chart slices and the lines in a 3D graph mesh grid Edge color is determined by the color of the fill pattern Edge thickness can be modified using the Fills settings of the Plots panel in the Graph Properties dialog box Edit Text Dialog Box A dialog box used to enter or edit text labels or symbols on the graph page Embed Use the Edit menu Paste Special to embed an object on a graph page Embedding an object on the page places a copy of the object on the graph page 483 Glossary
359. mns To see these values on the View menu click Column Statistics Column Statistics are described in Descriptive Statistics for Worksheets on page 63 Graph Pages Graph pages are true graphical representations of a printed page that contain graphs text and other drawn and pasted objects You can select and modify objects on graph pages using the Graph and Object properties dialog boxes and with the graph and drawing toolbars You can also manipulate objects graphically using your mouse A page can contain an unlimited number of graphs and other objects and you can create an unlimited number of pages for each worksheet You can also paste graphics OLE objects and other objects onto a page Excel Workbooks You can open Excel workbooks in SigmaPlot If you open an Excel workbook many Microsoft Excel menus and commands appear in SigmaPlot You can store and save data in the top sheets of an in place active Excel workbook however you can only plot data on one sheet of the Excel workbook To learn more about using Excel in SigmaPlot see Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot on page 88 Reports Reports are text based pages where you enter save and print formatted text You can also paste graphics OLE objects and other objects into reports SigmaPlot Notebook Structure 39 Notebook Basics Equations Use equations to perform nonlinear curve fitting using the Regression Wizard or you can plot equations using the Plot Equation dial
360. mplates Layouts and the Graph Style Gallery Templates apply the contents of an entire page which you can use as the source for new pages This is useful if the graphs you use have a complex layout with multiple graphs and non graph objects Layouts are similar to templates but do not overwrite existing pages Instead they use the size and position attributes of the pages in the layouts to modify your existing graph Create your own layout to fully maximize the potential of this feature Use the Graph Style Gallery to create individual graphs When you create and define a graph in the Graph Style Gallery you simultaneously set the graph defaults for future graphs The Graph Style Gallery preserves all attributes of a graph except for the data which you select when you create a graph using the Graph Style Gallery Creating Graphs Using the Graph Style Gallery Use the SigmaPlot Graph Style Gallery to create a graph from a predefined graph style When creating a custom graph style you save all graph plot and axes attributes including graph size and position Then you can quickly use these attributes to create future graphs All you supply is the data and the Graph Style Gallery formats the rest 182 Using Templates Layouts and the Graph Style Gallery ee Creating and Modifying Graphs Each graph style that you create appears as a thumbnail preview in the Graph Style Gallery You can create new graphs by choosing one of the sty
361. n necting the data points with vertical and horizontal lines starting with ver tical Format data columns as XY pairs many X many Y single X many Y or single Y many X Line amp Scatter Plots bal lt 1 gt Simple Hori zontal Step Plot Multiple Hori zontal Step Plot Simple Straight Line Multi ple Straight Lines Simple Spline Curve Multi ple Spline Curves Creating and Modifying Graphs Plots a single set of XY pairs connect ing the data points with vertical and horizontal lines starting with hori zontal Format data columns as XY pair single X or single Y Plots multiple sets of XY pairs con necting the data points with vertical and horizontal lines starting with horizontal Format data columns as XY pairs many X many Y single X many Y or single Y many X Plots a single set of XY pairs connect ing symbols with straight lines Format data columns as XY pair single X or sin gle Y Plots multiple sets of XY pairs con necting symbols with straight lines Format data columns as XY pairs many X many Y single Y many X or single X many Y Plots a single set of XY pairs connect ing symbols with a spline curve For mat data columns as XY pair single X or single Y Plots multiple sets of XY pairs con necting symbols with spline curves Format data columns as XY pairs many X many Y single Y many X or single X many Y Sig
362. n You may have to move the graphs back into position Use the Page Options dialog box to change the units of measurement used on the page Page units of measurement are important when specifying margins and object size and position These settings apply to all pages and graph and object properties dialog boxes To change the unit of measurement used l On the Tools menu click Options 156 Changing Graph Page Format The Options dialog box appears _ Figure 4 53 Options Options Dialog Box Page Tab Worksheet Page General Macro Graph Defaults Units IY Page Undo I Stretch Maintains Aspect Ratio M Graph Object Resize with Graph i Millimeters mm Points pt W Show Rulers Grids T Show Grid Grid Density i As Dots f As Lines ea g Snap to Cancel Epp Help 2 Click the Page tab 3 From the Units box select the unit of measurement to use on the Page You can choose to use inches millimeters or points 4 Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box Changing Page Color You can change the color of a page using the Page Setup dialog box This is especially useful when creating output for slides or for overhead projectors To change the color of a page 1 Make the page active by selecting it or by choosing its name from the Win dow menu A check mark next to the name of the page indicates that the page is active 2 On the File menu click Page Setup
363. n models and steps you through the regression process The Regression Wizard produces plots of your fitted curves as well as statistical reports Regression Wizard Equation Category Select the equation to fit your data Save Folnomial Equation Mame save s Hew lryverse First Order Inverse Second Order Edit Code Inverse Third Order Hep __ Cancel Back Next Eimi Transform Basics Performing Quick Transforms Figure 12 3 Quick Transform Dialog Box and Functions Palette Use the Quick Transform dialog box to enter and execute simple one line mathematical functions to modify one or more columns of data This can save you time as the Functions palette which appears directly below the Quick Transforms dialog box provides immediate access to frequently used transforms No knowledge of complex programming is required Note that you cannot run transforms on date and time columns To use date and time data you must first convert the data to numeric data run the transform and then convert the column back to date and time data To learn more see Switching Between Date and Time and Numeric Display on page 73 To perform a Quick Transform l With the worksheet in view on the Transforms menu click Quick Transform The Quick Transform dialog box appears with two Equation drop down lists The Functions palette also appears directly below it and contains many of the most commonl
364. n page 189 and Selecting a Graph or a Plot on page 191 To hide display and modify contour plot lines l Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Grids and Planes Title and Legend Plot Plot Rename Graph Wizard Settings For Cancel Apply Help Click the Plots tab From the Settings For list select Contours To modify contour lines from the Contours drop down list select Major or Minor The Line Styles reflect the contour you select in the Contour drop down list Select Major to change the Line Styles for major contours Select Minor to change the Line Styles for minor contours To specify the line type of major and minor contour lines from the Modifying Contour Plots 309 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 8 Type drop down list select a line type Select one of the incrementing schemes to increment contour line types or select None to create transpar ent lines To learn about using custom increment schemes see Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments on page 48 To select the color of the contour lines from the Line Style Color drop down list select a color You can choose from several predefined color schemes or select None to create transparent lines Select the Custom option to create a custom color For more information see Using Custom Col ors on page 158 To set the thickness of the
365. n page 98 objects on page 98 page objects 98 plots 191 192 right clicking graphs 98 192 rows 76 text on page 98 Selection mode 98 Serial numbers 13 Setting axis breaks 374 375 decimal places 67 equation parameters 231 line intervals for contour plots 312 passwords 355 printing options 49 50 program options 459 467 report options 430 setting page options 96 97 Setting up graph page format 154 Settings 3D graph view 299 angular axis 327 329 aspect ratio 97 axis range 362 column statistics 18 21 error bars 253 frame lines 304 Graph Defaults 164 graph defaults 165 object location on page 133 program options 96 97 radial axes 330 333 reference lines 414 statistics 65 template files 108 worksheet 18 21 Shading 3D graphs 303 521 Index Shapes lines 214 Shortcut menu hide 123 200 Shortcuts worksheet 56 Showing see Viewing SigmaPlot installing 12 13 new features 10 registration 13 system requirements 12 using in Windows 14 using OLE2 to edit graphs pasted to other applications 112 121 using this manual 33 SigmaPlot files producing files for publication 357 Simple error bars data format 168 Simple error bars and regression data format 168 Simple regression data format 167 Simple scatter plot data format 167 Simple spline curve data format 170 171 simple spline curve simple spline curve data format 171 Simple straight line data format 171 Simple straight line plot data forma
366. n the pair can be moved or turned on or off independently using the Lines settings of the Axes panel in the Graph Properties dialog box Axis Range The minimum and maximum values of an axis controlling the scale and extent of the plotted data SigmaPlot uses default axis ranges unless you specify the range manually in the Scaling settings of the Axes panel in the Graph Properties dialog box Major tick intervals are also controlled by the axis range Axis Placement The position of an axis relative to the origin and extent of the graph The graph extent is the size of the graph as indicated in the Object Properties dialog box Use the Lines settings of the Axes panel in the Graph Properties dialog box to change axis positions Placement is described as a percentage of the axis distance from the original position with respect to the graph extent where 0 is the original position Axis position can also be changed by selecting an axis and dragging it Axis Title See Axis Label Axon File The format produced by an Axon Instruments data acquisition device This file format can be read into SigmaPlot worksheets using the Import command Backplane The plane at the back of a graph formed by the axes Grid lines are attached to backplanes Backplanes are selected and modified using the Grid and Planes panel of the Graph Properties dialog box Bad Points Any of three types of data points 1 data that fall outside the range specified for the
367. n window and in the notebook as a colored icons Double clicking an item that is already open brings the item s window to the front Opening Multiple Items You can open as many items as your system s memory allows However you can only simultaneously open items associated with the current notebook If you open an item from a different notebook the current items close and the item in the other notebook opens 44 Opening Notebook Files and Items Notebook Basics Copying Pasting and Removing Notebook Items Copying and Pasting Notebook Items Removing a Notebook Item Copying a Page to a Section with No Worksheet Copying and pasting items in your notebook helps you to organize your SigmaPlot notebook and easily create copies of important data and graphs You can copy and paste items within a notebook and from one notebook to another You cannot copy a worksheet into a notebook section that already contains a worksheet SigmaPlot always creates a new section for pasted worksheets that is appended to the end of the current notebook Copying and pasting pages and worksheets between sections results in using graph pages as templates To learn about creating and using templates see Using Graph Pages as Templates on page 105 To copy and paste a notebook item 1 Open both the source and destination notebook file windows The source notebook for a copied item must be open for a copy to take place 2 Right click the it
368. ncrements on page 220 For examples of fill schemes see Color Symbol Line and Fill Schemes and Codes on page 451 For more information on modifying fills see Changing Plot Fill Patterns and Colors on page 217 There are two line type incrementing schemes Monochrome and Incrementing There are seven different incrementing color schemes to choose from for line colors To use automatically incrementing fills 1 Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears 2 Click the Plots tab 3 From the Plot drop down list select the plot that contains the fills to modify 218 Changing Patterns and Fill Colors Figure 5 46 i A Graph Properties Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Right click Menu Plote Axes Grids and Planes Title and Legend Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph Wizard Settings for Custom color First Color wf H Thicknes Jo O07 Ir Fill color Pattern and edge Color Calor eT as trict Reference Cancel Apply Help 4 From the Settings For list select Fills 5 Select a scheme from the Color and Pattern drop down lists Colors and pat terns appear in the bars boxes or pie chart slices of the plot in the same order as the right click shortcut menu 6 Right click the incrementing option and from the shortcut menu select First Pattern or First Color and then select the pattern or color to start the incre menting sequence 7 Click
369. nd Ternary Plots must have at least one single or multiple curve plot but can hold many more plots each with a different style and data format If your raw values do not add up to 100 or 1 SigmaPlot can convert them to normalized ternary data If you have XY YZ or YZ pair data SigmaPlot can compute the third column values shown in the resulting graph For more information on creating another plot for an existing ternary graph see Adding New Plots on page 196 If you are creating a graph with a single curve plot using only one set of XYZ values whose sum is 100 or 1 enter all X data in one column all Y data in another column and the corresponding Z data in another column The columns do not have to be adjacent to one another but they must be the same length Ternary triplet data should always add up to 100 or 1 For information how to convert data whose sum is not 100 or 1 see Normalizing Ternary Data on page 335 If you are creating a graph with a multiple curve plot using multiple sets of XYZ values where the sum of each set is 100 or 1 enter into worksheet columns as many additional ternary triplet data sets as you want to plot Each set of ternary triplet data is a separate plot curve All ternary triplet data sets should add up to 100 or 1 For information how to convert data whose sum is not 100 or 1 see Normalizing Ternary Data on page 335 Plot 1 Data Plot 1 r Data Plot 1 2 Data 4 11 00 59 00 25 00 0 00 17 00 34 0
370. nd tick labels can be numeric time series or customized with worksheet column labels 22 Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs Introduction 2D Cartesian Graph The following figures show examples of 2D Cartesian graphs available in SigmaPlot Image art cutfrom a paint program and pasted onto the page using the Windows Clipboard Post break tick interval 1200 set to anew value n 800 F Y axis break at 400 b a 75 alongthe n axis length are lan gt 200b d g aw 160 HE monospecies with competition 2 120 F Error bars using worksheet column data 80 Bar fill colors use a PAR i x pattern from a ae I l worksheet column E 1 months 3months 5months 7months 9months 11 months X axis tick labels using text from a worksheet column Common log scale Y axis with major and minor tick marks Scatter plot of color gradient filled symbols using a point plot style per Area Counts 1st Order Regression 95 Confidence Interval 95 Prediction Interval Base and exponent log axis tick labels Legend symbols and text labels Grouped bar chart with specified bar and group widths 99 confidence and predicted interval linear regression lines True Date and Time January April July October sangay axis scale 1996 e displaying months and weeks Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs 23 Introduction Variable box widths can be used to express another var
371. ng Data for a Pie Chart All data is placed into a single column Making a Pie Chart 318 Pie Charts Pie charts plot a single worksheet column by representing each data point in the column as a pie slice Each data point in the column is graphed as a slice size equivalent to the data point s percent of the sum of all the data The first pie slice starts at 0 3 o clock by default Additional slices are added counterclockwise in the order the data points occur in the column To organize data for a pie chart place data in a single worksheet column A OOo A rs 40000 cc rs 1 2 3 4 5 B T a g 0 L To make a pie chart 1 Select worksheet data before creating the graph 2 On the 2D Graph Toolbar click Pie Chart Figure 8 3 Using the Create Graph Dialog Box to Pick Columns to Plot 2 3 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots The Graph Wizard appears Graph Wizard Create Graph Data For Pie Column 1 ERESHE Select the ET SE column to plot elected Columns ine See by clicking the 55 F300 column in the worksheet Specify which worksheet column corresponds to data for your plot Since you selected a column prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choice auto matically appears in the dialog box and you can click Finish to create the pie chart If you selected the incorrect columns to plot select a column either by click ing the correspondi
372. ng column directly in the worksheet or selecting the appropriate column from the Data for Pie list If you make a mistake while picking data click the wrong entry in the Graph Wizard then select the correct column from the worksheet Click OK Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify the pie chart or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick a different data column for your plot For more information on making general modifications to your plot see Creating and Modifying Graphs on page 163 2 You cannot add plots or axes to pie charts Modifying Pie Charts Modifying pie charts includes gt gt gt gt Picking new data for the graph see Picking Different Data for the Current Plot on page 194 Changing fill color and patterns of pie chart slices see Changing Patterns and Fill Colors on page 216 Rotating the pie chart see the following section Adding exploded pie slices to the pie chart see the following section To modify a pie chart select the graph and open the Graph Properties dialog box To learn about selecting graphs and using the Graph Properties dialog box see Modifying Graphs on page 189 and Selecting a Graph or a Plot on page 191 Pie Charts 319 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots Rotating the Pie Use the Graph Properties dialog box to rotate pie charts or add single or multiple exploding slices To rotate the pie 1 Double click the pie chart The Graph Properties dia
373. ns are unavailable when working with data in an in place active Excel workbook gt You cannot insert graphic cells into an Excel workbook for customized sequences of colors lines symbols and patterns When an Excel workbook is the active window there is no Edit menu Insert Graphic Cells command gt An Excel workbook does not have an associated Statistics worksheet To view Statistics for data in an Excel workbook use Excel s own statistics or copy and paste the data into a SigmaPlot worksheet To display the statistics worksheet for the active SigmaPlot worksheet on the View menu click Statistics Within sigmaPlot you can use Excel s advanced Print functions You can also export Excel workbooks to the Excel XLS file format with the File menu Export command Printing Excel Workbooks To specify page setup functions for the active Excel workbook on the File menu click Page Setup to open the Page Setup dialog box You can modify page margins headers and footers and sheet settings Page Setup CIDHE Margins Header Footer Sheet Orientation aa i Portrait C Land ortral Landscape aa ST Print f Adustto 100 2 normal size i Fit to i 4 pagels wide by i tall Options Paper Size Letter 81 2171 in Print Quality eon dpi First Page Mumber uto Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot 91 a E Worksheet Basics Exporting Excel Workbooks You can export in place active Ex
374. ns check box displays color toolbar buttons on your screen rather than monochrome The Show Tool Tips check box hides the toolbar help tags that appear as you drag the mouse over the toolbar A toolbar can be moved from its default position to anywhere in the screen and its positions can be changed from horizontal to vertical To position a toolbar Drag the move bar on a docked handle or drag the title bar on a floating tolbar to move it to another location Using Toolbars 17 Introduction setting Program Options Use SigmaPlot s program options to control application settings as well as how worksheets and new pages and graphs will appear To change program options 1 On the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears Figure 1 9 a Options Dialog Box sete Worksheet Page System Macro Graph Defaults Settings For Display As E Notation When Needed Decimal Places E Engineering Notation Cancel Apply Help 2 Choose the appropriate tab and make changes 3 Make the appropriate user defined changes Worksheet Options Worksheet options include settings for numbers statistics date and time worksheet display default column width number of decimal places and use of engineering notation Using this tab is described in Chapter 3 Worksheet Basics Page Options Page options control graph page properties Working with graph pages is explained in Graph Page Bas
375. ny plot with multiple curves Lines can only be modified in or added to plots that normally use lines z e scatter plots line plots line scatter plots polar plots 3D scatter plots 3D trajectory plots and ternary scatter line and line scatter plots To change the attributes of lines in a selected plot 1 Double click the plot Changing Line Type and Other Line Options 213 The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 5 41 Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Plats Axes Graph Plot Plot 2 Rename Graph wizard Settings for g Line color Color J Grayscale ka Graph Properties Line style Type sold E E y t3 Thickness Layering Symbols o 007n e F tuine behna gt Shape ac Smoothed Spline Area Fills r Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Plots tab 3 Select Lines from the Settings for list 4 Under Line style from the Type drop down list choose a line type To learn more about incrementing symbols see Automatically Incrementing Symbols on page 206 To learn about using custom increment schemes see Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments on page 220 2 To create a plot that displays symbols only choose None to turn off lines 5 To change the thickness of the line move the Thickness slider or by type the new value in the Type box 6 Choose a line shape from the Shape drop down li
376. o all major or minor tick labels on a selected axis and modify the calculation and precision of numeric labels view different dates and times select among many different series labels and change the font and other text attributes Changing Tick Label To learn more about using the Text Properties dialog box see Formatting Text on Font and Other page 146 Text Attributes To change the font size style or color of tick labels 1 Right click the tick labels and from the shortcut menu click Changing Tick Labels 387 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Text Properties Figure 10 28 Selecting a Column for Tick Label Intervals B Graph Page 4 Data 47 Of x Text Properties Graph Properties Hide The Text Properties dialog box appears 2 Click the Font tab 3 Change text attributes for tick labels the same way you would for any text label You can also use the Rotation drop down list on the Paragraph tab to rotate tick labels but no other Paragraph settings are applied to tick labels Changing Tick You can change the type of tick label used for all axis types except for category Label Type axes For date time tick labels see Changing Date and Time Tick Labels on page 392 To change all other tick label types for all other axes 1 Double click the tick labels you want to change 388 Changing Tick Labels Figure 10 29 Changing the Tick Label Type Formatting Numeric Tick Labels a M
377. o select the type and style of graph and to select worksheet data for plotting After you create the graph you can open the Graph Wizard to add or modify plots and axes Chapter 5 Creating and Modifying Graphs discusses using the Graph Wizard at length Working with Page Objects 99 Graph Page Basics Figure 4 4 Create Graph Type The Graph Wizard Displaying a List si lt a Select the type of graph you want to create Fer Line Plot tome ie Plots data as sty Line and Scatter Plot points using ds symbols Graph Properties To open the Graph Properties dialog box double click anywhere on the graph or Dialog Box onthe Graph menu click Graph Properties The Plots Axes and Graph tabs offer many customizing features The tab that appears depends on where you click on the graph Figure 4 5 Graph Properti Graph Properties Plots Tab lsd thet Plots Axes Graph Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph wizard Settings for Click the Graph Wizard button above to change these settings Data sampling ie Entire range only rows Plot type Stacked Bars Data Format Many Data source Yi Y Data Stack 1 Male Stack 2 Female Fills 11 widths Cancel Apply Help For in depth information see Modifying Graphs on page 18 Object Properties Use the Object Properties dialog box to make simple modifications to the objects Di
378. o set a constant width for all bars or boxes from the Width drop down list select Uniform This is the default setting If the bars are set to Uniform the Bar Thickness setting has the same effect on all bars For more informa tion on using the Uniform and Variable width settings see Uniform versus Variable Bar Widths on page 224 To set potentially uneven widths for bars and boxes select from the Width drop down list select Variable If the constant column values are uneven the bars will vary in width according to the corresponding axis values For more information on using the Uniform and Variable width settings see Uni form versus Variable Bar Widths on page 224 Change bar widths according to the percent of their total widths 1f the bars Changing Bar and Box Widths and Spacing 223 are set to Variable so that wide bars are more affected than thin bars 2 Bars created with a single plot will not overlap However you can create bars using separate plots and overlap them see Spacing Bars from Different Plots on page 263 8 To create a needle plot move the Bar Thickness slider to set bar widths to the narrowest possible widths Figure 5 52 700 An Example of a Histogram Needle Plot Ae To make a needle plot create a bar chart and set the Bar Thickness to Needle so 400 Frequency 300 200 100 Bin 9 To change bar alignment from the Align drop down list select either Cen ter Left or Right By
379. ocation of each value at specific intervals determined by the axis range Tick marks and tick labels along ternary axes have both direction and origin Every tick location can have tick marks and labels pointing in clockwise counterclockwise both clockwise and counterclockwise and perpendicular directions independent of the actual direction of the data Tick marks and labels indicate which values correspond to the plotted data points by the direction they lean in The direction also indicates which axis the tick is actually controlled by This can be a different axis than the tick mark is actually drawn on For example the default ticks for the X axis are drawn leaning in a clockwise direction on the bottom axis These tick marks also correspond to the counterclockwise tick marks on the Y axis If you change the tick mark attributes for X axis ticks you can affect tick marks that are actually drawn on a different axis Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick Labels 345 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots The following figure best illustrates tick mark and label ownership Figure 8 36 A Ternary Graph with All Tick Labels and Marks Drawn 0 Ternary Plot The X Axis ticks and labels X Ades Ticks and Labels 10 are drawn in light gray the Y Z AXis Ticks and Labels Axis ticks and labels are Y Axis Ticks and Labels drawn in black and the Z Axis ticks and labels are drawn in dark gray Modifying Tern
380. ociating with worksheet 102 automatic legends 148 153 changing format 154 clearing graphs objects 125 color 157 158 copying graphs 103 copying objects graphs 111 creating graphs for current 102 creating new objects to insert 119 cutting objects graphs 111 defined 488 deleting objects 125 editing format 154 embedding objects 113 122 exporting as non notebook file 46 48 hiding graph titles 124 hiding graphs 123 124 hiding legends 124 inserting objects from files 119 legends 143 146 linking objects 113 122 magnifying 103 moving between notebooks 45 moving objects graphs 131 133 naming 43 opening new 41 orientation 486 paper size 155 pasting graphs 103 pasting graphs objects 112 115 positioning graphs objects on 490 selecting graphs 98 selecting objects 98 selecting text 98 setting grid color 97 setting grid density 97 setting Options 18 21 setting options 96 97 setting snap to grids 97 setting units of measurement 96 setup 154 showing grids 97 showing rulers 97 sizing graphs and objects 131 133 specifying graph and object location 133 specifying graph and object size 133 starting new 41 templates 108 123 text and labels 143 146 units of measurement 156 157 viewing full 103 viewing graphs 123 124 working with graphs 122 127 131 158 161 working with objects 122 127 131 158 161 zooming in out 103 104 Page objects selecting on a page 98 Page toolbar 125 Page undo Options 97 Pa
381. ode from the Microsoft Windows95 Startup Menu When the Windows95 screen appears begin installation Question My installation stalls and gives this message Cannot copy file THREED VBX to WINDOWS SYSTEM file already in use followed by THREED VBX is out of date installation procedure cannot continue Troubleshooting Installation Problems 467 Troubleshooting Explanation This problem may occur if you attempt to install while other Windows applications are running in the background For instance Microsoft Office makes use of the system wide file VBRUN300 DLL This means that this file cannot be copied to WINDOWS SYSTEM if you are running Microsoft Office while attempting to install SigmaPlot Solution In this case follow these steps 1 Quit the installation procedure Check to see which applications are currently running in the background by bringing up the Windows Task List on screen Press CTRL ESC on your keyboard See Install in SafeMode on page 17 471 2 Keep a backup copy of the file on your system while preventing the Setup program from identifying it Choose the File Manager Search command to examine files in your WIN DOWS SYSTEM directory and to find the file THREED VBX The Search Results windows should show the file THREED VBX Then choose the File menu Rename command to rename the file THREED VBX as THREED OLD and close the File Manager Copy the file from the SigmaPlot installation d
382. odifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Axis Apply to Iv Data Rename ZE Major ticks Settings for Type 123 Numeric Tick label font 123 Numeric Scaling i Precision 2 Data Automatic SS Y Scatter 1 Manual Y1 Error E places Line 1 Factor out rs Cancel Apply Help Click the Axes tab From the Settings for list select Tick Labels From the Apply To drop down list select either Major Ticks or Minor Ticks To use a numeric type of tick label from the Type list select Numeric then use the Label Notation options To use a series type of tick label from the Type list select Series Click OK If you want to plot data versus true calendar dates you should have entered date and time data in the worksheet and use a date time axis scale To format numeric tick labels l Double click the tick labels of the axis you want to change Changing Tick Labels 389 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids The Graph Properties dialog box appears i Figure 1 0 30 Graph Properties Selecting Numeric Tick Label Notation Plots Ames Graph Axis Apply to Iv Data Rename PE Major ticks Settings for Ty pe 127 Numeric Tick label Font Scaling Label appearance when below Precision i Automatic anes z107 Manual anes a places
383. of both the individual bars and the bar groups 2 3 4 5 6 7 To control bar and box width and spacing for bar charts and box plots l Double click the plot to modify 222 Changing Bar and Box Widths and Spacing Figure 5 51 Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Widths Settings The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plats Axes Grids and Planes Title and Legend Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph wizard Settings for Bar thickness Group spacing weet aaeennensamaeennsonsesaesnnsusaessenstensrsaeerssustestsestonstsnss Peale Wooo E T eee reer eae Thin 20 0 wide Width style AAH Uniform be Widths Bar alignment Reference PICS Center Cancel Apply Help Click the Plots tab From the Settings For list select Widths To change the width and spacing between bars for all bar charts and box plots move the Bar Thickness slider The wider the bars or boxes the less space between them The narrower the bars or boxes the more space between them To change the width and spacing between groups of 2D and 3D bars move the Group Spacing slider This option is only available for grouped and 3D bar charts SigmaPlot sets grouped bar widths and spacing to as wide or as narrow and as far or as close as possible given the corresponding spacing or width setting T
384. of the column s and or sample only a portion of the data from the column This is useful if you are interested only in graphing part of the data or if you want to increase drawing speed while working on the graph To plot only a portion of your data 1 Double click the graph The Graph Properties dialog box appears 2 Click the Plots tab 3 Select the desired plot from the Plot drop down list 4 To plot only a portion of your data under Data sampling select Only Rows and then enter the range to plot 5 To sample the column rows by a specified increment select by and type a number Typing a 2 samples every other row and reduces the number of rows plotted by 50 typing a 3 samples every third row and so on You can also use the By list to select a number of rows plotted Figure 5 28 You can sample data using the Plots tab on the Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Graph Properties dialog box Plat Pct ssi Rename Graph wizard Settings for Data sampling Click the Graph i Entire range Only rows Wizard button above to change these settings Plot type Vertical Dot Plot Data Format Y Pairs Data source a 1 Year Y 1 Column 12 E p p P Symbols e ali Area Fills F 6 Click OK Sampling Fewer Data Points 201 Sa Creating and Modifying Graphs 202 Sampling Fewer Data Points Plotting Missing and Ou
385. og box See the Programming Guide for more information on regression Managing Notebook Sections Notebook sections are place holders in the notebook window They contain notebook items but no data However they can be named opened and closed You cannot have sections within sections You can create as many new Sections as you want in a notebook You may also create reports within each section to document the items in each section Figure 2 3 shows several notebook sections containing notebook items Figure 2 3 A SigmaPlot Notebook lle aa E lof Window showing the AT My Research Data and Graphs tree structure of the BA Triad 2 Notebook with open o ao a Summary and closed sections Delete Each item and section can r onhe Te have its own name 2 Preliminary Results and all items can have t I Trial 2 Summary Info separate author and S i Trial 3 Author description information P Preliminary Data T Created 121172001 10 29 46 Modified 12 11 2001 10 40 55 Description Worksheet To expand or collapse a section double click the section icon or click the or symbol 40 Managing Notebook Sections Notebook Basics Creating New Notebook Files and Items Creating a New Notebook File Creating a New Section Creating New Worksheets 2 Creating New Graph Pages To create a new SigmaPlot notebook file click the New Notebook toolbar D button A notebook with a single workshe
386. ol 7 1 AONE EOAR OO eOdAdM dK IASI PrP PPRPPLCEHE EL SERO Color Symbol Line and Fill Schemes and Codes hollow circle with crosshair hollow square filled square dotted hollow square dotted filled square hollow square with crosshair filled square with crosshair hollow triangle up filled triangle up dotted hollow triangle up dotted filled triangle up hollow triangle up with crosshair filled triangle up with crosshair hollow triangle down filled triangle down dotted hollow triangle down dotted filled triangle down hollow triangle down with crosshair filled triangle down with crosshair hollow diamond filled diamond dotted hollow diamond dotted filled diamond hollow diamond with crosshair filled diamond with crosshair hollow hexagon filled hexagon Graphic Cell Codes 455 Color Symbol Line and Fill Schemes and Codes Line Codes symbol 7 2 O dotted hollow hexagon symbol 7 3 6 dotted filled hexagon symbol 7 4 hollow hexagon with crosshair symbol 7 5 filled hexagon with crosshair Codes for all available line types are provided Use the none line type when you want to create curves which alternate between lines only and symbols only Code Line Type line 1 none line 2 solid line 3 SS long dash line 4 SSS medium dash line 5 0 se short dash Olne ree eee ees dot line 7 eS dash dot line 8 Sa dash dot dot Fill Pattern Codes 456 Line Codes Codes for pa
387. ol of Settings for Seni a Type cor DETA has Thi a zl the incrementing scheme Size First symbal y t p 154in Text symbol B Symbol font a E ic Thickness Area Fills T Cancel Apply Help Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options 207 Using Characters and Text as Symbols Figure 5 34 Using Text from a Worksheet Column as Plot Symbols a ge ae oe 7 Click the Plots tab From the Settings for list select Symbols From the Plot drop down list select the desired plot To increment symbol types and fill and edge colors automatically under Symbols from the Type Fill Color and Color lists select a symbol scheme There are seven different incrementing color schemes to choose from for both fill and edge colors Increment schemes do not include None as a symbol type To change the first symbol type or color used in the incrementing sequence from the Symbols Type Fill Color and Edge Color drop down lists select Incrementing Right click the selected Incrementing option and from the shortcut menu click First Symbol or First Color then click the sym bol type or color to start the incrementing sequence Click OK You can use numbers characters and text as symbols by entering them in a worksheet column and specifying the column in the Graph Properties dialog box Relative Cytochrome Base Pairs Differences 50 40 30 Insects 20 Amphibians 0 200 400 600
388. oll bars or move the highlighted worksheet cursor with the keyboard Function Move one column right left Move one row up down Move one window view up down Move to end of column Move to end of worksheet Move to top of column Move to column one row one Move to last column of next data block Keystroke or T or lL Page Up or Page Down End End End or Ctrl End Home Home Home or Ctrl Home Ctrl gt Moving Around the Worksheet 55 Worksheet Basics Move to first column of previous data block Ctrl lt lt Move to top row of previous data block Ctrl T Move to last row of last data block Ctrl J Put cells into Edit mode F2 Going to a Cell You can move the worksheet cursor to any cell in the worksheet by specifying the column and row number in the Go to Cell dialog box To go to a Cell 1 Onthe Edit menu click Go To The Go to Cell dialog box appears Figure 3 4 Go to Cell Notebook 1 Data 1 x Moving to a Specific Cell in the Worksheet Column i Row 1 Cancel I Extend Selection to Cell 2 Enter the desired column and row number To select the block of cells between the current highlight location and the new cell click Extend Selec tion to Cell 3 Click OK to move to the new cell Using the Worksheet In addition to the menu commands and toolbar buttons referred to in the body of Shortcut Menu this manual right clicking the worksheet displays a shortcut menu
389. olumn 1 Jan 1 of Jan 15 97 Febr1 97 Feb 15 97 Marl oy Mar 1o o Apr l a Api 15 97 May e97 May 15 97 Jun 9r 3 Drag the pointer over both the category and data columns 4 Create the graph using the graph toolbar or the Graph Wizard 368 Changing Scale Type ee Using a Custom Axis Scale Figure 10 9 A Graph Using the Arrhenius Scale You can skip labeling tick intervals by using empty cells in the tick label column Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids 5 Plot your date and time column as the date time axis 6 Pick your other column s as the corresponding axis 7 Click Finish to create the graph Use the transform language to transform your data for a new axis scale then use tick intervals from a column to the place correct ticks marks and labels For example to use an Extreme Value Distribution scale apply the transform f y In n 100 100 y and for the Arrhenius scale use the transform f y 1 273 T 273 Apply the transform to both your original interval values and data then plot the transformed data using the transformed intervals as the tick mark values and the original interval data as tick labels G EE A A by a To learn how to run transforms see the Programming Guide For more information on using tick intervals from a column see Customizing Tick Intervals on page 385 For more information on using tick labels from a column see Using Custom Tick Labels on page
390. olumn 3 Rowe 2 3 Column 4 Rowe 2 3 Help Cancel Finish Excel Notation You can use Excel notation in the Graph Wizard In Excel notation the columns are alphabetized in lexicographic order and the rows are numbered In this case to specify a rectangular region you would again specify the upper left and lower right cells For example both A3 D9 and A3 D9 specify a region with the upper left cell in the first column third row and the lower right cell as the fourth column ninth row Note that the separator is a colon The letters are case insensitive Create Graph Select Data Data tor Y 4 e309 Selected columns ES Data Select the column Time to plot by clicking the column in the Column 1 Rows 3 3 mqadicsthssh Column 2 Rows 3 9 i 2 Column 3 Rows 3 9 a Column 4 Rows 3 9 Finish Creating Graphs 181 Creating and Modifying Graphs gt Column Numbers Notation You can make a selection of a consecutive group of entire columns by specifying the range of column indices For example to specify columns 1 through nine type 1 9 or 1 9 Figure 5 10 Selecting a Range of Data Using the Column Data for y 9 Numbers Format ist fea Dat select the column Selected columns BOE 2 Oxye to plot by clicking ee the column in the ee 78 00 worksheet Create Graph Select Data Column 5 Column 6 Column Column Column 9 Help Cancel Finish Using Te
391. olumns Panel Graph Wizard Create Graph Data forz Column a Selected Columns Select the column to plot by clicking the Column 1 column in the Y Column 2 worksheet 5 Click Finish Modifying Contour Plots Modifying contour plots involves gt Picking new data for the plot see Picking Different Data for the Current Plot on page 194 gt Changing contour line attributes and hiding or displaying lines see Displaying and Changing Contour Lines on page 309 308 Modifying Contour Plots Displaying and Changing Contour Lines Figure 7 33 Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Contours Settings Working with 3D and Contour Graphs Modifying back plane color and grid lines see Modifying Grids and Planes on page 396 Changing the vertical Z data range and scale see Changing Contour Vertical Z Data Range and Scale on page 311 Changing X and Y axis and tick attributes see Modifying Grids and Planes Titles and Legends on page 190 Adding colors to contour fills see Adding Fills to Contour Plots on page 310 Turning on or off interpolated fills see Modifying Interpolated Filled Contours on page 311 Changing and displaying contour labels see Displaying and Modifying Contour Labels on page 313 To modify a contour plot select the graph and open the Graph Properties dialog box To learn about selecting graphs and using the Graph Properties dialog box see Modifying Graphs o
392. olumns as Theta R pairs XY pairs many Theta Many R sin gle Theta many R or R many Theta Plots angle and distance data points connected with lines Format data col umns as Theta R pairs XY pairs many Theta Many R single Theta many R or R many Theta SigmaPlot Graph Style 113 Creating and Modifying Graphs Ternary Plots Vertical Bar Charts 174 SigmaPlot Graph Style Scatter amp Lines Scatter Lines Scatter amp Lines Simple Bar Grouped Bar Simple Error Bars Plots angle and distance data as sym bols connected with lines Format data columns as Theta R pairs XY pairs many Theta Many R single Theta many R or R many Theta Plots ternary triplet data as symbols For mat data columns as X Y and Z values or XY YZ or XZ pair data Plots ternary triplet data as data points con nected with lines Format data columns as X Y and Z values or XY YZ or XZ pair data Plots ternary triplet data as symbols con nected with lines Format data columns as X Y and Z values or XY YZ or XZ pair data Plots a single column of data as Y val ues Format data columns as XY pair or single Y Plots multiple columns of data in a series of bars Format data columns as single X many Y many Y many Y repli cates or single X many Y replicates Plots data as Y values with error bars If using worksheet columns or asymmetric error bar columns as the symbol value so
393. omizing intervals 387 Date and Time axes 382 defined 494 hiding 376 377 intervals assigned to a worksheet 387 labels 392 494 length 349 385 modifying 349 387 524 modifying ternary 348 origin 494 turning on off 384 viewing 376 377 Time and date see also Date and Time Time delimiters Date and Time format 58 Titles axis 377 column 85 88 column and row titles dialog box 85 graph 194 hiding graph 124 row 85 88 using cells as column or row titles 87 using worksheet columns as row titles 86 using worksheet rows as column titles 86 Toolbars defined 494 displaying 15 17 drawing 125 Excel 92 graph 177 hiding 15 17 positioning 17 Tools menu draw arrow 125 draw box 125 draw ellipse 125 draw line 125 Tools menu commands Text 143 148 ToolTips 17 Trajectory plots creating 293 294 295 296 lines 216 symbols 204 213 Transforms applying to data 12 defined 12 494 generating mesh data 306 HISTOGRM XFM 406 407 quick 420 using data in Excel worksheets 93 using transform language 417 Transparent mesh creating plots 297 selecting shading 297 video card requirements 495 Transpose Paste shortcut 56 Transposing defined 495 rows and columns 81 Troubleshooting installation problems 471 pasting special characters 476 problems with printing 475 SigmaPlot Errors 474 TrueType fonts printing 445 446 t test defined 493 paired test 402 performing 402 Tukey plot see
394. on Select the new axis then use manual scaling to set the appropriate range and tick interval for the new axis This scale is often a linear transformation of the opposite axis scale for example a Celsius scale to a Fahrenheit scale Fuerage Daly Tempe ratu re Ory Gulch AZ EE or iy f By TT mB EL 5 Ls Cf ZF 7 KIE E i arc a ay hal Hopi iy iow areas Ce E lag Fa enhe 200 To learn more about creating and modifying axes see Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids on page 361 Creating Multiple 2D Axes 285 Working with 2D Graphs Notes 286 Creating Multiple 2D Axes Fi Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 3D Plots This chapter describes 3D graphs and procedures specific to 3D graphs This chapter covers VVVVVVVVVVVVY Basic 3D plot types and styles see page 287 Arranging data for contour Plots and 3D graphs see page 289 Creating 3D scatter and bar charts see page 293 Creating trajectory plots see page 294 Creating waterfall plots see page 295 Creating mesh plots see page 297 Changing mesh plot attributes see page 298 Changing the rotation and lighting for 3D graphs see page 299 Understanding 3D axis placement see page 303 Modifying the frame lines for 3D graphs see page 304 Generating more data for mesh plots see page 306 Creating contour plots see page 306 Modifying contour lines and labels see page 308 Create 3D XYZ plots from many worksheet columns or col
395. on associated with the selected object Create the desired object then use the application s appropriate Exit command to close the application and return to SigmaPlot The created object is displayed on the graph or report page as an embedded object Insert Object object pe Microsoft Equation 2 0 Microsatt Excel Chart Microsoft Excel Worksheet Microsoft Graph 9 Chart Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Microsoft PowerPoint Slide Create New Create from File Display As Icon Result Inserts a new Microsott Equation 2 0 object into i ajin your document To insert an object from an existing file on the report or graph page select Create from File then type the path and file name of the desired file in the File edit box or click the Browse button to open the Browse dialog box from which you can select the appropriate path and file name of the object you want to place Select the Link option to place the object on the page as a linked object When a file is linked it is modified in your graph or report page when it is modified in the original application If the Link option is not selected the Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects 119 Graph Page Basics object is pasted as an embedded object Figure 4 23 Insert Object The Insert Object Dialog Box After Selecting Create From Ok File with the Display as C Create New a ee aa Icon Option Checked ance i Create from Fi
396. on either side of zero encompasses 68 2 of the area under the normal curve A probit of 6 1 5 corresponds to the 84 1 probability and a probit of 4 1 5 corresponds to the 15 9 probability 68 2 84 1 15 9 Quality Control Lines See Reference Lines R Value The correlation coefficient or square root of R R is sometimes called the coefficient of determination and is a measure of the closeness of fit of a scatter graph to its regression line where R 1lisa perfect fit SigmaPlot calculates R when performing all regressions See also Correlation Coefficient and Regression Radial Axes The radial axes of a polar plot are drawn along the radius of the graph and by default are displayed as four axes extending from the center of the graph to the outer edge of the graph Reference Lines Horizontal or vertical lines on a Cartesian graph drawn at specific values The value can be computed as either the mean of the data a specified multiple of a specific statistic above or below the mean or a specific number The statistics available are standard deviation standard error of the mean and 95 or 99 confidence intervals Regression Regression is most often used by scientists and engineers to visualize and plot the curve that best describes the shape and behavior of their data Regression procedures find an association between independent and dependent variables that when graphed on a Cartesian coordinate system produces a stra
397. on page 105 Using Custom Colors Color drop down lists have a Custom option that opens the Color dialog box from which you can select a custom color from over 16 7 million possible 158 Using Custom Colors Configuring Your Display for Color Figure 4 55 Selecting the Custom Color option from the Text Properties Dialog Box Figure 4 56 The Color Dialog Box combinations of red green and blue 24 bit color These color controls are available in the Graph Properties Object Properties Options and Page Setup dialog boxes If you want the truest representation of what your colors will appear like when printed you should always set you display to the highest color level possible Most Windows systems support Hi Color 16 bit or True Color 24 bit modes Right click your desktop choose Properties select Settings then set your Color palette to the highest possible level To select a custom color 1 Open the dialog box that has the color option in it and from the Color drop down list select Custom Text Properties Font Paragraph Font rial Size 10 z Font Style Regular Color C Custom l Underline Preview AaBbY ydr You have not already selected a custom color the Color dialog box appears Color Basic colors ivestsenennee Define Custom Colors gt gt e If a custom color has already been defined for this option the custom color is selected For directions on how to selec
398. ontal Error Bars Bi direc tional Error Bars Vertical Point Plot Hori zontal Point Plot Creating and Modifying Graphs Plots multiple sets of XY pairs with error bars and regression lines If using worksheet columns asymmetric error bar columns columns means the first column entry or the last column entry as symbol values format data columns as single X many Y or many Y If using row means row median first row entry or last row entry as symbol values format data col umns as single X many Y replicates or many Y replicates Plots XY pairs with horizontal error bars If using worksheet columns or asym metric error bar columns as the as symbol values format as XY pairs single X sin gle Y many X or many X If using col umn means column median the first column entry or the last column entry as symbol values format data as single Y many X or many X If using row means row median the first row entry or the last row entry as symbol values format data columns as single X replicate sin gle Y single X replicate many X repli cates or single Y many X replicates Plots XY pairs with both horizontal and vertical error bars Format data col umns as XY pairs Plots columns of data as Y values For mat data columns as many Y single X many Y many Y Replicates or single X many Y replicates Plots columns of data as X values For mat data columns as many X single Y many X
399. operties select a color from the Color drop down list Choose None to make the axis transparent and choose Custom to open the Custom Color dialog box For more information on custom colors see Using Custom Colors on page 158 6 To change the thickness of the axis under Line Properties move the Thick ness slider or type a thickness in the Thickness box 7 Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box 3D graph frame lines are drawn over axes lines and may obscure 3D axes modifications For more information on frame lines see Frame Lines for a 3D Graph on page 304 You can also change axis line attributes by right clicking the axis and choosing Object Properties You can also select the axis and then on the Format click Line or on the Properties toolbar click the Line Properties button Object Properties Example Type Thickness o OOF in Cancel Apply Help To learn more about using the Object Properties dialog box to change line appearance see Changing Lines on page 128 Changing Axis Line Color and Thickness 373 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids setting Axis Breaks You can set axis breaks for 2D Cartesian graphs over specific ranges at a specific location along the axis and you can change the major tick intervals that occur after the break You can also use several different break symbols
400. or fills see Creating and Modifying Graphs on page 163 Modifications to pie charts polar plots and ternary plots are discussed in Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots on page 317 For information on modifying axes see Chapter 10 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids This chapter covers Different 2D plot types and their attributes see page 238 gt Creating a basic 2D plot see page 243 gt Creating a graph that plots multiple lines bar or data sets using the same style see page 244 Creating a plot with error bars see page 245 Creating plots with asymmetric error bars see page 249 Creating error plots using category data see page 252 Modifying and customizing error bar appearance see page 253 Creating a grouped bar chart see page 261 Spacing bars for overlapping bar charts see page 263 Creating a grouped bar chart with error bars see page 263 Changing box plot appearance see page 267 VVVVVVVVYVY Computing percentile methods for error bars and box plots see page 268 gt Creating an area plot see page 269 gt Creating a bubble plot see page 282 Adding multiple axes see page 283 Create 2D Cartesian XY plots from many worksheet columns or column pairs Each column is represented as a separate curve set of bars or box depending on the plot type 2D graphs must have at least one plot but can display many more plots each with a different type and style 231 Wor
401. orlSolid box then click Add to Custom Colors The color appears in the first available box of the Custom Colors list Select the color to use from the Custom Color list then click OK Re defining Custom Colors Figure 4 58 Choosing the Custom Color command from the shortcut menu for Text Color The Color dialog box closes and you are returned to the dialog box from which you opened the Color dialog box The color drop down list that you are using now has the color you created as an option with the word Custom next to it If the custom color you created is a duplicate of a pre existing system color the system color is selected instead of the Custom option in the drop down list If you want to change a custom color right click the Color drop down list without opening it On the shortcut menu click Custom Color the Colors dialog box appears Select a new custom color to use as described above Text Properties Font Faragraph Font rial Size 10 T Underline What s This Preview AaBbY ydr Custom Color Cancel Help Using Custom Colors 161 Notes 162 Using Custom Colors 9 Creating and Modifying Graphs About SigmaPlot Graphs and Plots This chapter covers the basics of SigmaPlot graph creation and modification These include VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV VY y Setting graph defaults see page 164 SigmaPlot graph types see page 165 and styles see page 167 Creating a new
402. ormation on entering dates and times see Entering Dates and Times on page 57 You can convert between date time and numeric display when gt Importing data gt Switching numbers to dates gt Modifying the display between date time and date time To display worksheet cells in Date and Time format l 2 3 View the worksheet Select the data you wish to display in date time format On the Format menu click Cells The Format Cells dialog box appears Format Cells Data Rows and Columns Type Numeric Text Sample arn 1996 03 42 13 PM Date MdA Time hhmm sst O H Regional Settings Cancel Apply Help Click the Data tab In the Type list click Date and Time Select date and time formats from the Date and Time drop down lists The sample box changes according to your choice Click OK The data is displayed showing the date time or date and time as specified Displaying Worksheet Data 13 Worksheet Basics The dates and times that are entered as dates and times are automatically dis played as such Using Date Time You can copy date time values from a SigmaPlot worksheet and paste them into Format with Other other programs such as an Excel workbook or you can copy date time values Programs from another program and paste them into a SigmaPlot worksheet If the date time format you are pasting is larger than the worksheet column width you may need to change the column wi
403. orting 77 ternary graphs 337 transposing 81 using transform language 417 viewing for embedded graphs 187 188 viewing in embedded graphs 187 X Y many Z for contour and mesh plots 291 XY pairs 240 XY values for polar plots 323 Data brushing 81 84 Data feedback changing colors on worksheet 67 set colors on worksheet 67 Data format 3D graphs 166 box plots 166 contour plot 166 graph styles 167 177 graph types 165 horizontal bar chart 166 horizontal dot plot 170 line and scatter plot 166 line plot 166 long form mesh 290 multiple area plot 173 multiple horizontal step plot 171 multiple regressions 167 multiple scatter plot 167 multiple spline curves 170 multiple straight line 171 multiple vertical area plot 173 multiple vertical step plot 170 171 pie chart 166 polar plot 166 scatter plot 165 simple area plot 173 simple regression 167 simple scatter plot 167 simple spline curve 171 simple straight line 171 simple vertical plot 170 ternary graphs 166 vertical bar chart 166 vertical dot plot 170 verticle area plot 173 Data set defined 483 Date and Time Options 18 tick intervals 382 Date and Time axis scale tick labels 394 tick labels for contour plots 316 tick marks 382 Date and Time format Date delimiters 57 date delimiters 73 entering 57 regional settings 72 time delimiters 58 using with Excel 74 worksheet display 70 74 Date and time scales creating pltos with 368 Date delimiters Date
404. otation only when needed set the range to by typing values in the Lower and Upper ranges in the edit boxes These values are expressed in log units Modifying Contour Plots 315 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 6 Figure 7 39 The Series Labels Settings for Contour Labels 10 11 12 13 316 Modifying Contour Plots Use the Precision options to specify the number of places used to display numeric tick labels Select Automatic to let SigmaPlot automatically deter mine precision or select Manual then select the number of decimal places to use from the Places drop down list To use a series type of contour label from the Type drop down list select Series then from the Series list select the type of series Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph wizard Settings for Type Contour label Font Contours Label Format Series Length i iii Months E characters Start at Step by January 1 g After Repeat from December January Scale Labels Cancel Apply Help From the Length drop down list select the number of characters to use for the labels From the Start At drop down list select the series item to begin labeling tick marks with then from the Step By drop down list select the frequency or increment for the series To restart tick labeling from a specified point use the After and Repeat From
405. other To drag a graph into another application you must be operating within Windows or Windows NT 4 and the other application must support OLE 1 Make sure the other application is open and visible from the desktop with the location where you want to drop the graph also visible 2 Select the SigmaPlot graph you want placed in the other program then drag the graph from the SigmaPlot page If you want to drop a copy of the graph press the Ctrl key while dragging 3 Move the mouse to the location you want the SigmaPlot graph to appear 4 Release the mouse the graph appears at the drop location You can now edit the graph with SigmaPlot in the future by double clicking Note that you can also drag and drop graphs onto your Windows desktop 244P into another document at a later date Dragging and You can drag a graph from one graph page to another If you drag a graph from a Dropping Graphs different notebook section it will insert its data into the destination section Between Pages worksheet To copy or move a graph from one graph page to another 1 Open the source and destination pages The pages must still be within the same notebook but can be in different sections 2 Select the graph and drag it from the original page to the new page If you want to copy rather than move the graph press the Ctrl key while dragging 3 Release the mouse where you want the graph to appear The graph is placed on the new page If the p
406. ource format data columns as single X or YX pair If using columns means the first column entry or the last column entry as symbol values format data columns as many X or single Y many X If using row means row median the first row entry or the last row entry format data columns as single X replicate single Y single X replicate many X repli cates or single Y many X replicates SigmaPlot Graph Style 175 Creating and Modifying Graphs Grouped Error Bars Stacked Bars Box Plots ahal Vertical Hori A zontal Contour Plots Contour ae pute Filled Q Contour 176 SigmaPlot Graph Style Plots data as multiple sets of X values in a series of bars with error bars If using worksheet columns or asymmetric error bar columns as the symbol value source format data columns as single Y many X or many X If using row means row median the first row entry or the last row entry format data columns as many X replicates or single Y many X repli cates Error bar values are from the worksheet Plots multiple columns of data as a series of stacks in bars Format data col umns as single Y many X many X sin gle Y many X replicates Plots the median 10th 25th 75th and 90th percentiles as vertical boxes with error bars Format data columns as many Y or single X many Y Error bar values are column means Plots the median 10th 25th 75th and 90th percentiles as horizontal boxes
407. own the left mouse button to drag the handle to a new loca tion The shape of the pointer changes when you move it over a handle indi cating the direction you can stretch the graph or object Drag a side handle to stretch or shrink an object horizontally drag a top or bottom handle to stretch or shrink an object vertically or drag a corner handle to stretch an object two dimensionally A dotted outline of the resized graph or object follows the pointer position Figure 4 33 Resizing a Graph Eq Grouped Bar Chart with Error Bars Data 2 Dragging a corner handle preserves the aspect ratio relative height and width of objects by default Also graph text symbols and tick marks are rescaled along with the graph To disable these features use the Tools menu Options command and change these Page option settings see Setting Page Options on page 96 5 Release the mouse button when finished The graph or object resizes to the indicated size 132 Moving and Sizing Graphs and Objects Setting a Specific Size and Location Figure 4 34 Object Properties Dialog Box Size and Position Tab Nudging Graphs and Objects 2 Unlike graphs and drawn objects you cannot stretch or shrink text labels manually To resize text change the font size To learn how to resize text see Formatting Text on page 146 To move a graph or object to a specific location on the page or to scale the graph or object to a specific size use the Obje
408. ox to modify bar fills and colors see Adding and Modifying Drop Lines on page 226 Box plots graph data as a box representing statistical values The boundary of the box closest to zero indicates the 25th percentile a line within the box marks the median and the boundary of the box farthest from zero indicates the 75th percentile Whiskers error bars above and below the box indicate the 90th and 10th percentiles In addition you can graph the mean and outlying points For information on modifying box plots see Modifying Box Plot Fills Widths and Symbols on page 267 35 30 You need a minimum number of data points to compute each set of percentiles At least three points are required to compute the 25th and 75th percentiles five points to compute the 10th percentile and six points to compute the 5th 90th and 2D Plot Types 239 Working with 2D Graphs 95th percentiles If SigmaPlot is unable to compute a percentile point that set of points is not drawn Arranging Data for a 2D Plot Organize data for SigmaPlot graphs by columns Place data for the X values of a graph in a single column and place data for the corresponding Y values in another column For information on creating a graph see Creating and Modifying Graphs on page 163 For information on creating another plot for an existing graph see Adding New Plots on page 196 2 Category Data Use the Category Data format indexed data if your data is organize
409. pearance Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 10 25 Graph Properties Dialog Box Axes Tab Ticks Settings Plots Axes Graph Graph Properties Axis Apply to Iv Data Rename 28 Maior ticks Settings f a EPN Tick lines Length Scaling o 050in A o E Inward oi To Thickness ee Jl Right Labels zal Tick Label 0 032in Siaa i Color Black Tick intervals Major ticks we Automatic Cancel Apply Help 2 From the Settings For list select Ticks d Inward 3 From the Apply to drop down list select Major Ticks for Minor Ticks 4 To change tick length an thickness under Tick Line move the Length and Thickness sliders 5 Select a color from the Color drop down list Choose from any of the listed colors or select Custom to use a pre defined custom color or cre ate your own color Select None to create transparent tick marks 6 Click OK For more information on using custom colors see Using Custom Colors on page 158 Customizing Tick Intervals You can specify major tick locations by entering major tick values into a worksheet column then selecting that column from the Graph Properties dialog box Customizing Tick Intervals 385 Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids Custom tick intervals are not available for minor ticks Figure 10 26 A Graph with Custom Tick Int
410. pezoid graph Dragging a selected axis toward or away from the center of the graph modifies all three axis ranges by the same increment maintaining the original shape of the graph To modify ternary axis ranges 1 View the ternary graph 2 Select either an apex or an axis to modify 3 A selected apex displays a black square selection handle and is surrounded by a dotted line a selected axis displays a selection handle at the center point 340 Changing Ternary Axis Range Scale and Direction I ee Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots of its range and is surrounded by a dotted line Figure 8 29 Dragging an Axis to Rescale a Ternary Plot Range B Graph Page 3 Data 7 Iofs 4 Drag either the apex or the axis toward or away from the center of the graph The axis ranges adjust accordingly 2 Modifying axis ranges of ternary graphs often introduces additional axes These axes are the second axes of each pair of axis lines An axis which appears as a result of moving an apex is paired with the axis opposite the apex which moved Additional axes can be modified and are controlled in the same way as the three original ternary axes using the Axes tab of the Graph Properties dialog box Figure 8 30 The Results of Different Range Changes on Ternary Plots The left graph Y axis was dragged to 50 The right graph Y apex was dragged to 50 X Data Modifying Ternary Modify ternary graph ranges u
411. ph styles list and click Next The Graph Wizard Create Graph Error Bars dialog box appears Select either Category Mean or Category Median from the drop down list Select error calculations from the Error calculation upper and Error calcula tion lower drop down lists and click Next 252 Creating Error Bar Plots Using Category Data OT ee Working with 2D Graphs The Graph Wizard Create Graph Data Format dialog box appears 7 From the Data for Categories drop down list select a column that corre sponds to the categorical data you wish to plot 8 From the Data for Y drop down list select the column that corresponds to the Y data you wish to plot and click Finish An error bar plot appears Modifying Error Bars Figure 6 22 Examples of Graphs with Error Bars Changing Error Bar Appearance Compute error bars for scatter line scatter and bar charts Select error bar values when you pick the data for a plot and compute using values in a worksheet column or using column means see Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars on page 245 You cannot add error bars to existing plots However you can select the desired plot on the page and change its plot type and style so that it includes error bars To learn about changing graph type and style see Changing Graph Type and Style on page 195 5 7 8 6 7 4 eoe 5 6 3 S 4 5 4 3 2 mr a 3 g 2 1 e 1 g g 1 2 3 4 5 6 j 0 2 4 6 8 30 20 10 0 10 20 30
412. phs on page 163 One of the quickest and the easiest ways to add a second graph is to copy the one you have already created then modify it see Cutting Copying and Pasting Graphs and other Page Objects on page 111 102 Adding Another Graph to a Page OT ee Copying and Pasting a Graph from One Page to Another Graph Page Basics You can copy a graph from a graph page within the current notebook section or from a different notebook section To copy a graph from one page to another 1 Select the graph you want to copy 2 Press Ctrl C 3 Make the destination page the current page either by opening it or if it is already open select the graph page name from the Window menu A check mark next to the page name indicates that it is the active window 2 If the destination page is in a different notebook than the source page you must close the source page and any other open work in the source notebook 4 Press Ctrl V to paste the graph The graph appears on the current page and the graph data appears in the worksheet associated with the current page Another method is dragging and dropping as described in Dragging and Dropping Graphs on page 122 Zooming In and Out Viewing the Full Page Magnifying Use SigmaPlot View menu commands to control display of the worksheet window You can view the page at several different levels of magnification magnify the page centering on a specified page location or choose a comp
413. plotting saved equations see page 231 4 From the Variables group box select either 2D or 3D 5 Set the independent variables using the Name Minimum Maximum and Intervals boxes 228 Plotting and Solving Equations Figure 5 59 Add As Dialog Box Figure 5 60 Plot Equation Dialog Box Equation Tab 10 11 Name Type the name of the independent variable s Minimum and Maximum Type the extent of the range of values for the cor responding independent variables Intervals Set the number of intervals for sampling independent variables over a specified range You can also select a column in the worksheet The range of that column appears in the Minimum and Maximum edit boxes To set the equation parameters click the Options tab To learn more about setting equation parameters see Setting Equation Parameters on page 231 Click Add As The Add As dialog box appears Add As x Equation Hame Type name of new equation here Cancel Type the name of the equation in the Equation Name edit box Click OK The equation name appears in the Name drop down list on the Equation tab Plot Equation New Equation Equation Options Library Solve Equation Sigmoid 5 Parameter 1 Parameter Untitled Varables Mame Minimum basinum Intervals f 2D Jo c00000 fia o00000 fioo ca M po po o Click Plot A graph page appears with the plotted equation and the equation values appear in
414. port a SigmaPlot graph into HTML format 1 Open a graph page 2 Select the page objects you want to publish 3 On the File menu click Save As Web Page The Export File dialog box appears 4 Enter a name of the file in the File name box HTML SigmaPlot Web Graph already appears in the Save as type box 5 Click Export The Export Web Graph dialog box appears Figure 9 1 Export Web Graph Dialog Box Export Web Graph Set Size Height SiG Cancel width 6 064in Set Password M Export selected only i Help 6 To set the size of the figure select desired measurements from the Height and Width drop down lists 2 Note that one inch is 96 pixels and the Export Web Graph dialog box uses a fixed aspect ratio 7 To export the currently selected graph or objects select Export Selected Only 8 To export the entire graph page clear Export Selected Only 9 To password protect the file click Set Password 354 Publishing Graphs on the World Wide Web Password Protecting Data on the Web Figure 9 2 Set Password Dialog Box Exporting Data Associated with the Graph Figure 9 3 Graph Page Dialog Box Publishing Graphs 2 For detailed instructions for setting passwords see Password Protecting Data on the Web below 10 Click OK Three files are created an HTM file which references a saved JPG file and a JNB file You can later insert this HTM file into any HTML editor 2 Microsoft
415. ppears To learn about modifying plots see SigmaPlot Graph Style on page 167 and SigmaPlot Graph Types on page 165 To learn about repicking data for an existing plot see Picking Different Data for the Current Plot on page 194 To create a 2D graph using the Graph Wizard 1 On the Standard toolbar click the Graph Wizard EN button Creating Graphs 177 Creating and Modifying Graphs The Graph Wizard appears Figure 9 3 Create Graph Type Graph Wizard Graph Types Select the type of graph you want to create Line Plot mes Plots data as sty Line and Scatter Plat Bomnts using ee symbols Horizontal Bar Chart Bos Plot Pie Chart Contour Plot gt Fintsh 2 Under Graph Types select the type of graph you want to make 3 Click Next 4 Under Graph Styles select the desired graph style See SigmaPlot Graph Style on page 167 to learn about the different graph styles available for different graph types Figure 5 4 Create Graph Style Graph Wizard Select the style of graph you want to create Plots a single set of Simple Regression a pairs Multiple Regression Simple Error Bars Multiple Error Bars Simple Error Bars amp Reg Multiple Error Bars amp Ae Horizontal Error Bars Bi directional Error bars gt Help Cancel lt Back Finish 5 Click Next 6 Ifthe graph style you have chosen uses error bars you are prompted to choose an error bar source and
416. quation up or down until it lies on both sides of the axis In general the Results edit box then reports two solutions that are very close together As smaller amounts are used to adjust the left side of the equation these two solutions are seen to converge to one solution As an example try solving the equation 0 sin 2 x cos 3 x over the range from x to x 2 The Function Solver will indicate that there are no solutions Using the above technique will yield solutions that are close to the true solution of PI 2 Spurious Solutions A less frequent problem involves the appearance of spurious solutions Due to the limits of floating point numbers the value of an expression f x at x a might compute to zero even if x a is not a true solution to 0 f x This situation commonly arises when the graph of y f x is very flat near a point where it intersects the x axis For example consider the equation 0 x201 If you solve this equation over the range from x 0 to x 1 then the Function Solver will return 13 solutions even though the only true solution is x 0 This is because each of 13 results raised to the 201st power is equal to zero in the machine s floating point representation 236 Plotting and Solving Equations i About 2D Plots Working with 2D Graphs This chapter describes two dimensional graphs and procedures specific to 2D graphs To learn about making general graph modifications like changing symbols lines
417. r each tuple and one region for the intersection Three curves yield up to seven regions and four curves up to fifteen To change a multiple area plot to a complex area plot 1 Double click the multiple area plot 276 Creating Area Plots Working with 2D Graphs The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 6 54 Graph Properties Using the Graph Properties Dialog Box to Plats Axes Grid and Planes Title and Legend Identify Intersections Flot Pict 1 Rename Graph wizard Settings for J Grayscale r Pattern MB none Symbols Direction Down bi Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Plots tab 3 Select Area Fills from the Settings for list 4 Select Identify Intersections 5 Click OK to close the dialog box and accept the changes Shading in Use the Graph Properties dialog box to change the direction of fill colors in an Different Directions area plot To change the area fill direction 1 Create an area plot 2 Double click the graph Creating Area Plots 277 Working with 2D Graphs The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 6 55 Graph Properties Using the Graph Properties Dialog Box to change the Plots Axes Grids and Planes Title and Legend direction of the area fill Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph wizard Settings for Fill color Color E Gray Pattern L none
418. r and minor contour labels involves changing the font style size and color of the text To open the Text Properties dialog box 1 Double click the contour plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears 2 Click the Plots tab 3 From the Settings For list select Details 4 Click Font The Text Properties dialog box appears To learn about using the Text Prop erties dialog box see Formatting Text on page 146 Use the Graph Properties Detail settings to modify numeric contour labels To change numeric contour labels 1 Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears 2 Click the Plots tab 3 From the Settings For list select Details The numeric contour settings appear 4 To use a numeric type of contour label from the Type list select Numeric then use the Label Notation options 5 From the Use list specify which type of numeric display to use The Scientific Notation and Engineering Notation options always use scien tific notation or engineering notation to display numbers For large numbers options use scientific or engineering notation only when numbers exceed a specified range Use the Above and Below lists to specify the range beyond which scientific notation or engineering notation is used For log scale you can select to display number only the Exponent or both the Base and Exponent For linear scale you can always use scientific notation or only when needed If you use scientific n
419. r contour labels Minor contour labels Label appearance Graph Properties Add to major labels Prefix suffix o Add to minor labels Prefix mooo Suffix oo Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Plots tab Contours T align with contour line Label Frequency Details 3 From the Settings For list select Labels 4 To display or hide contour labels under Contour Labels select or clear Major Contour Labels and Minor Contour Labels Selected options display labels and cleared options hide labels 5 To align contour labels parallel to the contour line under Label Appear ance elect Align With Contour Line Clear the option to align the contour labels parallel to the X axis 6 To control how many labels appear for the contour lines move the Label Frequency slider Move the slider toward Fewer to reduce the number of contour labels or move the slider toward More to increase the number of contour labels 7 To add to the contour labels under Add to Major Labels and Add to Minor Labels in the Prefix and Suffix boxes type the prefix or suffix 8 To separate a suffix or prefix from the tick label type a space before a suf fix or after a prefix 9 Click OK 314 Modifying Contour Plots Changing Contour Label Text Attributes Changing Numeric Contour Label Settings Working with 3D and Contour Graphs Changing the text attributes for both majo
420. r if a curve requires a different axis scale range etc 2D graphs with multiple plots can also have multiple axes For information on adding multiple axes to a 2D graph see Creating Multiple 2D Axes on page 283 Figure 5 25 Example of a Graph with Two Plots Each plot has Separate Y axes Relative population density of beetles Percent normal rainfall 1972 1974 1976 1978 1980 1982 Year Creating Use the Graph Wizard the Add Plot command or Graph Wizard toolbar Additional Plots button to add a plot to a selected graph To add another plot to a graph 1 Click the graph to modify Small square handles surround the graph Do not click a curve or you will modify that curve instead 2 On the Graph menu click Add Plot The Graph Wizard appears displaying all the graph types The available styles and types for a new plot are limited depending on the other plot types and styles in the current graph for example you cannot add a Polar plot to a 2D Cartesian plot or vice versa 2 If the selected graph cannot accommodate the plot type or style that you want to add the plot will be created as a new graph You can move the graph of the new plot over the original graph so that it appears to be in the same graph Adding New Plots 197 oee gt lt lt lt lt aa ee c S T TuTS 4Moo Creating and Modifying Graphs 3 Under Graph Type select a graph type and click Next 4
421. r the data you want to analyze in an empty column of the active work sheet On the Statistics click Histogram The Histogram Wizard appears lolx 2 3 R 4 coe 1 1 0000 48 0529 2 2 0000 45 4364 Po 3 3 0000 45 9871 a 4 4 0000 47 8041 Las 5 5 0000 51 4997 Po E 6 0000 44 935 H Histogram x Output for Histogram 10 Column 3 Select the 11 A Tite aa E Selected Columns 17 EE RAT frequency by Source Column 2 clicking the column in the worksheet Cancel Back Next Finish Select the data for the histogram by choosing the appropriate column from the Source for Histogram drop down list Select the column for your output data by choosing the column from the Out put for Histogram drop down list Click Next 6 Figure 11 4 The Histogram Wizard Buckets Dialog Box 7 8 9 Figure 11 5 The Histogram Wizard Graph Style Dialog Box 10 Statistics The Histogram buckets panel appears Histogram Enter the number of bins Buckets or buckets to fid Use Help Cancel Back Newt Emits Specify the number of buckets you want to use Enter values from 1 to 1000 Click Next Select the graph style from the Graph Styles list A preview of the graph appears Histogram Select the style of graph you want to create A e Horizontal Step None Help Cancel Back Newt Finish Click Finish The graph appears on the active graph p
422. ra AD or BC 5 To change the display Time format type one of the following examples into the Time box or select a format from the drop down list Typing Displays hh or h 12 hour clock HH or H Military hours mm or m Minutes SS Or S Seconds uu or u Milliseconds H h m s or u No leading zeroes for single digits HH hh mm ss uu Leading zero for single digits tt Double letter AM or PM t Single letter AM or PM 6 Click OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box Setting a Start Date is only necessary if you are importing numbers to be converted to dates or converting dates to numbers for export The starting data must match the date used by the other application Displaying Worksheet Data 11 a Worksheet Basics Select a date from the Day Zero drop down list or type your own start date The default start date is 1 1 1900 Figure 3 15 Opti The Day Zero sate Drop down List Worksheet Page General Macro Graph Defaults Settings For Numeric Statistics Appearance Sample 471796154213 Date Maw gt Time HH mmss Day ero hano Regional Settings Cancel Apply Help Day Zero becomes the number 1 00 when you change from Date and Time to Numbers format The basic unit of conversion is the day that is whole integers correspond to days Fractions of numbers convert to times Zero and negative numbers entered into the worksheet convert to days previous to the Day Zero start date Conve
423. rency and to enable the light source for shading To learn more about modifying meshes see Modifying Mesh Lines and Fill Color on page 298 and to learn about using the light source see Changing the View of a 3D Graph on page 299 ee 3D Bar Charts Figure 7 3 3D Bar Charts Waterfall Plots Figure 7 4 Waterfall Plots Working with 3D and Contour Graphs Create bar charts in 3D space using 3D data Modify 3D bar charts by changing fill color and pattern and adjusting bar width and spacing For information on changing bar chart fill color and pattern see Changing Patterns and Fill Colors on page 216 To learn about modifying bar width and spacing see Changing Bar and Box Widths and Spacing on page 222 Waterfall plots graph 3D data as stacked line plots along the Y axis Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify plot lines color and transparency Arranging Data for Contour Plots and 3D Graphs Organize data for SigmaPlot graphs by column Typically data for contour plots and 3D graphs is composed of X Y and Z value columns or one or more Z columns and optional X and Y columns 3D bar charts scatter plots and line plots can use any three columns as X YZ data however contour and mesh plots require a strict arrangement of the data If multiple Z columns are plotted they all must be next to each other The X and Y columns can be located anywhere Arranging Data for Contour Plots and 3D Graphs 289
424. rinter you wish to use Printing Notebook Items 49 Notebook Basics 4 Click OK The Print Data Worksheet dialog box appears Figure 2 8 Print Data Waorksh The Print Data Worksheet E Dialog Box for V Page Tile ERRE Columns Statistics Area to Print Headers W Column Titles I Column Numbers C Entire Worksheet W Row Titles Cancel Selected Cells W On Each Page Setup i Columns i Cell Appearance T Full Precision te 3 FF Grid Lines 5 To print the names of the statistics that appear in the row region of the work sheet under Headers select Row Headings 6 Click OK to print To configure printer settings 1 On the Print Data Worksheet dialog box click Setup The Print dialog box appears 2 Click OK when you are satisfied with the Printer settings or click Properties to edit the printer properties Note that the Properties dialog box options vary from printer to printer Printing Graph Pages You can print any graph in a SigmaPlot notebook To print a graph page 1 Select and view the page window 2 Click the Print button 8 to print the page using all the default settings To set printing options before you print the graph page 1 On the File menu click Print The Print dialog box appears 2 Click Properties The printer Properties dialog box appears 3 Click OK when you are satisfied with the printer properties settings 50 Printing Notebook Items
425. rms to create new data by performing functions on existing data or generate calculated or random data which can then be placed in worksheet columns To create a user defined transform 1 View the worksheet 2 Onthe Transforms menu click User Defined 417 Transform Basics Figure 12 1 User Defined Transform Dialog Box Regression Wizard 418 Figure 12 2 Regression Wizard The User Defined Transform dialog box appears User Defined Transform untitled Iof x Edit Transform Run Close E Open Save Save Ag ERIE Help Trigonometric Units f Degrees Radians Grads watch Single Ster 3 Type transform instructions into the Edit Transform field You can enter up to 32 000 characters in the Edit Transform field 4 Click Run You can save the contents of the transform window to a file Since this is a text file you can view or print these files using any word processor You can open previously saved transforms in the transform window for execution or modification A library of sample transforms is named Xfms jnb in the Transforms folder To view these files click the Open button in the User Defined Transforms dialog box and open a transform file These transform examples also include a sample SigmaPlot graph file displaying the results of the transform The Regression Wizard provides access to the over 100 built in curve fitting equations and to your own regressio
426. ror Bars El Cancel Apply Help Changing Patterns and Fill Colors 217 Click the Plots tab From the Plot drop down list select the plot that contains the fills to modify From the Settings for list select Fills a ge ae oe To change the background fill color under Fill Color from the Color list select a color or choose to increment fill colors using the one of the incre menting schemes to change the background fill color gt To turn off background fills select None gt To create a custom color select Custom 2 To learn more about creating custom colors see Using Custom Colors on page 158 6 To change the fill pattern and density for the selected plot under Pattern and Edge from the Pattern list select a fill pattern or select to increment fill pat terns using one of the fill schemes To turn off fill patterns select None 7 To change the thickness of the pattern lines and edges move the Thickness slider 8 Click OK Automatically When incrementing fills automatically different fill colors and patterns are Incrementing assigned to each bar box and pie chart slice in the plot If you are incrementing Chart Fills fills for a grouped bar chart fill colors and patterns are assigned to each group in the plot in the same order the column pairs forming the groups are listed in the Graph Wizard To learn about using custom increment schemes see Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color I
427. rosoft Word document as an OLE object and use the SigmaPlot Graph Properties dialog box to edit it by double clicking the graph When you link to SigmaPlot and double click the graph or report the notebook file containing the graph or report opens See Placing SigmaPlot Graphs into Other Applications on page 115 You can change the source of any linked object with the Change Source command See Viewing and Modifying Object Links on page 120 View as Icon With OLE the View as Icon feature allows you to place an icon representing the application that created the file in your data For example if you have a description of a graph written in a Microsoft Word document you can embed it and display it as an icon that shows on the graph page If you want the object 114 Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects Figure 4 18 Displaying a Microsoft Word Document as an Icon on a Graph Page Identifying Objects on the Graph Page Placing SigmaPlot Graphs into Other Applications Graph Page Basics displayed as an icon check the Display As Icon option Click the icon to view and edit the object in its source application FA Graph Groups 4 B OR x a J Document You can determine the type of object on the graph or report page with the Edit menu Object command Select the object then on the Edit menu click Object The Object command changes to reflect the file type of the selected object For example if you selec
428. rs amp Regres sion 168 SigmaPlot Graph Style Plots a single set of XY pairs with error bars If using worksheet columns or asymmetric error bar columns format data columns as XY Pair or Single Y If using columns means the first column entry or the last column entry as symbol values format data columns as single X many Y or many Y If using row means row median first row entry or last row entry as symbol values format data columns as single X single Y replicate or Y repli cate Plots multiple sets of XY pairs with error bars If using worksheet columns asymmetric error bar columns columns means the first column entry or the last column entry as symbol values format data columns as X many Y or many Y If using row means row median first row entry or last row entry as symbol values format data columns as single X many Y replicates or many Y replicates Plots a single set of XY pairs with error bars and a regression line If using worksheet columns or asymmetric error bar columns format data columns as XY pair or single Y If using columns means the first column entry or the last column entry as symbol values format data columns as single X many Y or many Y If using row means row median first row entry or last row entry as symbol values format data columns as single X single Y replicate or Y repli cate fast Multi ple Error Bars amp Regres sions Simple Hori z
429. rs to resample data to a rectangular grid of independent variable values Each smoothing method weights the data contained in a window surrounding the smoothing location The radius of this window is called the bandwidth radius A linear or non linear technique is then applied to the weighted data to compute each smoothed value The weight assigned to each data value in the window is determined by its normalized distance u from the smoothing location 420 Smoothing 2D and 3D Data Transform Basics Choose one of the following smoothing methods Loess Applies the tricube weight function 1 z to weight the data The smoother is polynomial of degree 1 2 or 3 Use with 2D or 3D data Running Average Computes the average of the dependent values Use with 2D or 3D data Running Median Computes the median of the dependent variable Use with 2D or 3D data Negative Exponen Applies a Gaussian weight function e to weight tial the data and a quadratic fit Use with 2D or 3D data Bisquare Applies a bisquare weight function 1 i Use with 2D or 3D data Inverse Square Applies a Cauchy weight function Use with 2D or 3D data Inverse Distance Applies the weight function p to the x y data Use with 3D data only 2 You can find smoother method guidelines in the 2D and 3D Smoothers sections of Samples jnb smoothing 2D Data Use the Smooth 2D Data dialog box to remove undesired high frequency data compon
430. rs to place a copy of the object in the destination application but actually only places a reference to it Therefore the object is modified every time the original file is modified You can only link to a file if you create an object using the Paste Special or Insert New Object commands or if you drag and drop an object with the Ctrl key held down Linking is useful when you need to update an embedded object when the file is updated The disadvantage of linking objects is that you cannot open a referenced file if the locations of either the SigmaPlot file and the source file change Embedding places a copy of the object in the destination application and then you can edit it by activating its source application when you double click it Embedding does not use a reference file the file is actually embedded completely in the SigmaPlot file For example if a Microsoft Word embedded object has been placed in a SigmaPlot report and you double click it Microsoft Word opens Word temporarily runs under SigmaPlot When you are finished editing the item and close Word SigmaPlot remains open Embedding an object has the advantage of keeping all the associated data in one place but can create large files Placing SigmaPlot You can paste SigmaPlot graphs and reports into other applications and link or Objects into Other embed them for future editing with SigmaPlot For example you can paste a Applications SigmaPlot graph into a Mic
431. rsion between date time values and numbers can occur for the calendar range of 4713 BC to beyond the year 4 000 AD The internal calendar calculates dates using the Julian calendar until September 1752 After that dates are calculated using the Gregorian calendar 5 If you convert numbers to dates a start date is applied If you convert the dates back to numbers be sure you use the same start date as when you converted them or they will have a different value Regional Settings Drop down lists in the Options dialog box worksheet tab use the current date time settings in your operating system The Windows Regional Settings control date time delimiters 12 or 24 hour clock and AM PM display Date and time display formats may be affected by your operating system s Regional Settings For example if your Time Zones are specified as British English your date values appear as dd mm yy If the setting is US English your date values appear as mm dd yy If you want to view or modify the current settings or view alternative settings available on your system click the Regional Settings button or modify them directly from the Windows Control tab 12 Displaying Worksheet Data 2 Switching Between Date and Time and Numeric Display Figure 3 16 The Format Menu Cells Dialog Box Worksheet Basics Date and time values appear on the worksheet using the date and time delimiters generally a forward slash or colon For more inf
432. rsion for you Notebook File SigmaPlot notebook files are files that contain worksheets graph pages reports and regression equations Notebook files are provided as a means for automatic file organization enabling you to keep separate notebooks for separate groups of data Novice Prompting Messages alerting you to certain situations or which double check some choices for example telling you that data contains missing values or asking for confirmation before clearing data Novice prompting can be disabled using the Tools menu Options command OLE2 Objects pasted from the Clipboard to a graph page can be linked embedded or placed on the page as a generic object without any kind of file reference Linked and embedded objects use OLE2 Object Linking and Embedding version 2 Open Load a file into SigmaPlot either a JNB notebook file JNT template notebook file or any other file format supported by SigmaPlot Options Settings used to customize SigmaPlot behavior and to set program defaults Use the Tools menu Options command to access the Options dialog box Orientation page Describes the orientation of a page Page orientation can be either portrait right side up or landscape sideways Page orientation is controlled using the File menu Page Setup command or Printer Properties options in the Print dialog box See also Portrait and Landscape Orientation text Describes the rotation of a text label around an axis so the te
433. rt slider to change the length of the radial axes Setting the slider to 0 draws the axis from the center of the graph outward 25 draws the axis beginning a quarter of the distance from the center 50 draws it half the distance from the center and so on Figure 8 16 Radial Axes in the Default Positions and Offset by 45 with an Axes Start of 30 6 Click OK Changing Radial To display and modify radial axes lines Axes Lines 1 Double click a radial axis The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 8 17 Graph Properties Graph Properties Dialog Box Axes Tab Lines Settings Plats Axes Graph Axis Apply to Radial Data Rename f Minor ticks Settings for Show place axes W Spoke 1 Line properties Color Black Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Axes tab Modifying Radial Axes Lines and Position 331 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots 3 Select Lines from the Settings For list 4 To view or hide a radial axis select Spoke 1 2 3 or 4 The Show Place Axes boxes display the axis location on the graph 5 To change line color and thickness under Line Properties select a color and thickness from the Color and Thickness drop down lists 6 Click OK Displaying and Changing Radial Axis Ticks and Labels Use the Graph Properties dialog box Axes tab Labels settings to display polar radial axis labels and modify tick labels Angu
434. rt command to select files to import Increment See Scheme Insert A data entry mode where existing data is moved aside to make room for entered data When typing text labels on the page you are always in insert mode To switch between insert and overwrite modes on the worksheet press Insert or choose the Edit menu Insertion Mode command Worksheet data is moved down one row When entering text press the Insert key to toggle between insert and overwrite modes In insert mode characters are moved to the right to make room for the new characters See also Overwrite Inverse Distance Interpolation Inverse distance interpolation is a method of generating an evenly spaced XY mesh from X YZ data points The Z value for each interpolated data point is calculated using the Z values of all original data points The weight given the value of the nearer original data points versus the farther data points can be modified JPEG A compressed bitmap graphic file format commonly used on the World Wide Web See also Bitmap Label Any text string including tick labels axis titles and text entered using the Tools menu Text command Tick labels are modified using the Tick Labels settings of the Axes panel in the Graph Properties dialog box Text labels manually placed on the page can be modified by double clicking them or using the Format menu Text Properties command See also Axis Label Rotation Label Size Font and Tick Labels Label Size The siz
435. rtion to determine a fraction of the total number of data points used to compute each smoothed value The interpretation of the Sampling Proportion depends on the Bandwidth Method To learn more about choosing a Bandwidth Method see page 424 Set the polynomial degree from the Polynomial Degree list if applicable Select Reject Outliers to reduce the effects of outlier points on the Smoothing 2D and 3D Data 423 Transform Basics smoothed values To set smoothing options 1 Click Options The Smoothed Curve Options dialog box appears Figure 12 10 The Smooth Curve Options Dialog Box Smoothed Curve Options m Values Minimum STAN Maximum 15 000000 Intervals ho Y Values Minimum 0 00000 Maximum 52 683043 Intervals es OF Cancel dl Help Bandwidth Method Fixed W Plot Raw Data Nearest Neighbors 2 Change the Minimum and Maximum for the X values to new beginning and ending values for the X ranges For 2D smoothing the Y values are the smoothed values and therefore unavailable in the Smoothed Curve Options dialog box 3 Set the bandwidth method to either Fixed or Nearest Neighbors Fixed Sets the same bandwidth radius the same at every smoothing location The radius is computed by multiplying the Sampling Proportion value times half of the difference between the set Minimum and Maximum independent variables X values Select Fixed if the density of
436. s Backup Files with Extension SNE W Nen Notebooks Use Excel Workbook Excel Format Percentile Method Defaut Cleveland Template File C Program Files SigmaPlot S Pw TAT emplate jrit Browse Layout File C Program Files SigmaP lot s P Layout jrit Browse Gallery File C PROGRAM FILESSSIGMAPLOT SS PW Z GALL Browse Author EPSS Inc Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the System tab 3 Select New Notebooks use Excel Workbook 4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box All new notebooks will use Excel workbooks as the default worksheet Using an Excel workbook as the default SigmaPlot worksheet you can use Excel s Open options and also open file types available to Excel The following file types use the Excel Import filters if Excel workbooks are the default worksheet gt MS Excel gt Lotus 1 2 3 gt dBase 90 Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot OT ee 2 SigmaPlot Functionality within Excel Workbooks Additional Features With Excel 97 Figure 3 32 Setting Printing Options Using Excel s Page Setup Dialog Box Worksheet Basics gt Plain Text gt SYLK Opened data files automatically appear in a new Excel workbook in a new notebook file To format data that opens into a single column on the Excel Data menu click Text Columns To understand how Excel works with other applications please see your Excel documentation The following functio
437. s The radial axes are spokes of the circle and scale the distance from the center of the circle the radius or R There are four radial axes referred to as spokes 1 4 Figure 8 11 A Diagram of the Axes of a Polar Plot Angular Axis Radial Axis Inner Angular Axi Angular Data Radial Axis breaks cannot be created for either radial or angular axes Angular Axes The angular axes can be drawn along the inner and outer circumferences of the graph By default the inner axis is not displayed Angular axes can be modified by gt 326 Modifying Polar Axes Changing axis titles see Working with Axis Titles and Tick Labels on page 375 Displaying or hiding either axis see Hiding Displaying and Deleting Axes on page 370 Changing axis lines see Changing Axis Line Color and Thickness on page 372 Changing axis scaling range and rotation see Changing Angular Axis Scaling and Position on page 327 ee Radial Axes Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots gt Changing the amount of polar arc displayed see Changing Angular Axis Scaling and Position on page 327 gt Changing tick marks see Changing Tick Mark Intervals on page 378 gt Changing axis tick labels see Changing Tick Labels on page 387 The radial axes are drawn along the radius of the graph and by default are displayed as four axes extending from the center of the graph to the outer edge of the graph Each of the ra
438. s Lines Every From wo Automatic r 50000 fo Cancel Apply Help Click the Plots tab From the Settings For list select Scale From the Scale Type list select Linear or Log Common scale The linear scale uses a standard base 10 numeric scale and the log scale uses a base 10 logarithmic scale To manually set the Z axis range in the Start and End boxes enter begin ning and ending range values To automatically set the Z axis range from the Calculation drop down lists select Data Range SigmaPlot automatically determines the vertical range based on the Z data plotted To add padding to both ends of the axis select Pad 5 To extend the range to the nearest major tick mark select Nearest Tick Click OK Changing Contour Use the Graph Properties Line Interval settings to select line intervals for Major Line Intervals and Minor contours To set line intervals l 312 Modifying Contour Plots Double click the plot Figure 7 37 Graph Properties Plots Tab Scale Settings Displaying and Modifying Contour Labels Working with 3D and Contour Graphs The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph Wizard Settings for Scale type pply to EAMmajor Data Contours T 7 End Calculation Nearest tick 351605 63 Data Range Line intervals Lines Every From Labels a Manual 50000 fo
439. s 121 Breaks see axis breaks Bubble plots 204 2D 283 applications 279 arranging data 279 arranging data for size 280 converting area data to diameters 280 plotting data 279 transforms dialog 280 X Y values 280 Bucket values histograms 405 C Calculating confidence intervals 410 412 error bar mean 258 error bars 258 linear regressions 410 412 prediction intervals 410 412 Cap width see Error bars Cartesian defined 481 Category axis scale 364 Category data using to create plots 252 Category scale creating 366 defined 481 modifying 367 Cells defined 481 moving to 56 using as column or row titles 87 Centering axis titles 377 Changing 3D graph view 299 area plot fill color 278 axis color 373 axis range 362 363 axis scale 365 axis scale types 366 369 axis thickness 373 bar box fills 127 color of fill pattern lines and edge lines 128 colors 217 column width 66 68 contour labels 313 316 contour plots 308 316 contour range values 311 312 default layout template file 141 fill patterns 127 fills 217 grids 396 inserted object icons 119 line end attributes 130 line types 129 213 multiple selected objects 131 object background fills 127 objects fills 127 page color 157 158 pasted object icons 118 Index pattern and edge line thickness 128 pattern density of plot fills 218 patterns 217 pie charts 322 polar plots 325 326 radial axes 330 333 radial axes tick labels 333 range direction
440. s 248 example 26 323 grouped bar charts 261 262 lines 216 line 238 modifying 325 326 line and scatter 238 offsetting radial axes 331 linear regression lines 407 410 plotting data 323 324 325 modifying 2D 407 414 radial and angular values 323 multiple curves 244 radial axes 330 333 reference lines 268 sample graph 26 scatter 238 symbols 204 213 types available 238 240 266 using XY values 323 Plots 3D Polar plots multiple curves bar charts 289 data from one column 324 mesh 288 Polynomial order modifying 287 306 regression lines 408 scatter and line plots 288 Portrait types available 287 page orientation 155 waterfall plots 289 Portrait orientation Plotting defined 490 equations onto existing graphs 230 Positioning 018 2D axes 372 2D axes using Graph Properties dialog 371 3D axes 303 defined 490 graphs on page 490 objects labels on page 490 toolbars 17 PostScript EPS files 449 fonts 449 printing files 449 printing fonts 446 Precise location moving axes to 371 Precision options 391 Prediction intervals adding to 2D graphs 409 410 calculating 410 412 defined 412 linear regressions 409 410 Prefixes contour labels 314 tick labels 392 Preparing graphs for publication 356 359 Printer drivers printing tips 445 449 Printer settings configuring 50 Printers fonts 445 Printing column statistics 49 Excel worksheets 91 graph pages 50 halftones 447 notebook items 49 PostScript files 449 PostScript fon
441. s and close the Page Setup dialog box 2 Note that hidden graphs do not print To learn about showing and hiding plots see Showing Hiding and Deleting Plots on page 199 Hiding and Deleting Objects from the Page 123 Graph Page Basics Hiding Graph You can hide automatically generated graph and axis titles and legends from view Titles and Legends without being permanently removed from the graph page To hide an automatic legend or automatically created graph title 1 Right click the legend or title and on the shortcut menu click Hide The title or legend is not deleted only hidden 2 You can also hide graph titles axis title and legends using the Graph Proper ties dialog box Open the Graph Properties dialog box by double clicking the graph You can also right click the graph and on the shortcut menu click Graph Properties 3 Click the Graph Tab 4 Under Settings for select Legends 5 To hide the graph title clear Show Title Figure 4 27 N Graph Properties Hiding Graph Tiltes and Automatic Legends Using Plots Axes Graph the Graph Properties Title Dialog Box Grouped Bar Chart with Error Bars j Rename M Show title Settings for Legend properties Fx Show legend Eont Lee in box T Lock legend Reset Legend appearance For legend symbol Data 1 C Dataz Box Legend text Data 1 Edit Symbol placement EE AGC Before text Style
442. s and text to group by holding down the Shift key while selecting individual objects Handles appear around the graph and each selected object 4 On the Page toolbar click Group The Group command and button are available only when more than one object is selected All selected objects are grouped and can be selected moved sized aligned and positioned as a single object To ungroup objects on a graph page 1 Select the group 2 On the Page toolbar click Ungroup If you have grouped a group you may need to ungroup the objects as many times as they have been grouped Aligning Page Objects You can align labels and objects with each other as well as with graphs and axes To align page objects 1 Select the labels graphs or other object s you want to align by holding down the Shift key while selecting individual objects You must select more than one object to use the Align command Grouping and Ungrouping Objects 135 2 On the Page toolbar click Align The Align dialog box appears Figure 4 35 Align Dialog Box Bight Each Other ber Page Margins 3 Under Horizontal and Vertical choose the appropriate options to align the selected objects vertically horizontally or both Graphical feedback for your selections appears in the lower right corner of the dialog box 4 To align selected objects relative to each other select Each Other You must have multiple objects selected if
443. s in the bottom right corner For example if you select the heart symbol the bottom right corner shows Keystroke Alt 0169 To insert the heart symbol into your graph press the Alt key and then the numbers 0 1 6 and 9 while keeping the Alt key depressed Release the Alt key and the heart will appear For better appearance make sure the font selected in SigmaPlot matches the font selected in the Character Map dialog box If using the key pad make certain that the Num Lock is set on 476 Pasting Special Characters Troubleshooting Inserting SigmaPlot Graphs into WordPerfect Copy and Paste or Paste Special Insert the Graph as a Picture There are two basic ways to get a SigmaPlot graph into a WordPerfect document One is to copy and paste the graph and the other is to insert the graph as a picture In SigmaPlot select the object you would like copied into your WordPerfect document Choose the Edit menu Copy command to place the object on the Clipboard Now open your WordPerfect document and place the cursor where you want the Clipboard contents copied Choose the Edit menu Paste command You can also choose the Edit menu Paste Special command to paste a picture of a graph For more information about inserting page objects see Cutting Copying and Pasting Graphs and other Page Objects on page 4 111 To insert your SigmaPlot for Windows graph as a picture first convert your SigmaPlot file into a graphical format th
444. s menu Options Numbers Display command Numeric Display Description Example E Notation When Displays worksheet data as scientific notation 12 00 Needed only when the length of the value exceeds the width of the cell The default column width is twelve E Notation Always displays data as scientific notation 12 00e Always The number of decimal places is set in the 0 Decimal Places edit box 68 Displaying Worksheet Data Le Worksheet Basics Fixed Decimal Displays data with a fixed number of decimal 12 00 places Set the number of decimal places in the Decimal Places edit box The number of decimal places allowed is limited by the column width the maximum number of decimal places cannot exceed the column width The default setting for decimal places is two General Displays data exactly as you enter it in the 12 worksheet To set the numeric display for your worksheet 1 View the worksheet 2 On the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears Selecting Numbers Display Format Worksheet Fage General Macro Graph Defaults Settings For Date and Time Statistics Appearance Display As E Notation When Needed i E Notation When Needed Decimal Places JE Notation Always Cancel Apply Help 3 Click the Worksheet tab 4 Inthe Settings For list click Numeric 5 To set the numeric display select a Numeric format setting from the Dis play As drop down list 6 To use en
445. s the color of the grid You can change the grid from its default color of Cyan to another color available from the drop down list Snap to Select to snap all drawn resized or moved objects to the nearest grid point When drawing or resizing the current dragged corner or edge is snapped When moving an object the upper left corner is snapped Working with Page Objects Using SigmaPlot menu commands dialog boxes and wizards you can create and modify graphs and other page objects The Graph Wizard guides you in selecting the type and style of graph and in adding plots and axes The Graph Properties dialog box customizes the plots axes grids planes titles and legends of your graph Use it for more advanced modifications to your graph The Object Properties dialog box modifies many graph attributes including drawn objects Working with Page Objects 97 Graph Page Basics The Text Properties dialog box modifies font and paragraph text attributes for all text on a page Use the Edit Text dialog box to enter and modify most text Selecting Page When you select text drawn objects or individual elements on the graph page Objects and then double click you open the dialog box specific to that element To select a graph element make sure you are in selection mode by clicking the Page toolbar Select Object l button or choose the Tools menu Select Object command or press Ctrl B A check mark next to this command
446. s with error bars using two adjacent columns as the error bar source to independently control the error bar values SigmaPlot computes the asymmetrical error bars by using the column value as the absolute value The column to the right of the plotted data is the source for the bottom or left error bar the column following is the source for the top or right error bar Figure 6 18 12 as 2D Plots with Asymmetrical m Error Bars 32 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat To create a plot with asymmetric error bars 1 Drag the pointer over your worksheet data to select the data 2 On the 2D Graph Type Toolbar click Scatter Plot and then click either Sim ple Scatter Vertical Asymmetrical Error Bars or Simple Scatter Horizontal Asymmetrical Error Bars Figure 6 19 a Selecting Horizontal Asymmetric Error Bars from the 2D Graph Toolbar oe ug a o o oF eos o F s o P a oF o F P e Lg e o 1 Et p E ES me PTT Eg Ee Creating 2D Plots with Asymmetric Error Bars 249 Working with 2D Graphs The Graph Wizard appears 3 From the Data Format list select a data format and click Next 4 Specify which worksheet columns correspond to the data for your plot Since you selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in Selected Columns list 5 Click Finish to create the graph To learn about modifying error bar information Changing Error Bar Appearance on
447. sainusicessnstes resin setconthtehasssrbaniusetacthvanuosiivenaaamnien 226 Piotingand SOIVING EGUGATIONS sissteriaadestasavecda ras A iaesoiardatenatariiacsoniass 220 Working with 2D Graphs ccccecceee esses eseeeeseeeeeseeensanensaneneaaes 237 2D POLITY DOS sooten onin aer a eaaa 238 Arranging Data tora 2D PIO ai isatasccaruhindhetrunnratinmca tan mea aa 240 Creating ZW PIOUS surenin a a a 243 Creating Multiple 2G UVC Sis as ctedsincsasacenasatsnaduans rnahi oane aia aaan a a Ni 244 Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars cccccccsccccssscecsceecsseeeesssesessseeseseeeenes 245 Creating 2D Plots with Asymmetric Error Bars cccccccccccssscessseesesseeeesseesereeeenes 249 Creating Error Bar Plots Using Category Data o n 252 MOdiVINO EON a PS iaoiai AEE 203 Grouped Bar GhariS vara A 261 Creating BOX IOUS iarciet e a a Ta 265 Computing Percentile Methods tenciis tes caiencrsnaceliassuantisheashacanas aietecawearnanmenaiverecians 268 CREATING AIGA PIOUS wirtaitendressseuciessnecctiweaauanesiescaniion EE S e 269 BUDOIEF OTS rantac ee drcipesuie a tan tanec a aainecumcuanuee 219 Creating Multiple 2D AXCS sic inicisinsetsiiaviniiotranidianaWaunsdeasdentnlainidentadssiidsidalsiivtesnuitwocrislees 283 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs ccccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeneas 287 OID HIRI OES sexseteea cua aceetaeen ieteet cacoh A tenner cea 28 Arranging Data for Contour Plots and 3D Grapns uo ee cceeeceseeees
448. se the height E Graph Page 1 Data 1 You cannot change the widths of automatic legends these are determined automatically by the width of the text You can edit individual labels and add multiple lines You can also ungroup a legend and format it manually see Ungrouping a Legend on page 153 You can individually control legend symbol size using the Symbols dialog box To resize legend symbols 1 Double click the legend 2 On the Formatting toolbar click the Symbol button The Symbol dialog box appears Symbol 20 Graph 1 Placement C EE ABC Before Text C Style E Rectangle only Size Width Height cocs 3 Under Symbol select the symbol to use for the label Help 150 Working with Automatic Legends This list displays all symbols lines and fills used by the selected graph source 4 Under Size move the Width and Height sliders to increase symbol size or enter a symbol size value 2 The Width value determines the space between symbols while the Height value determines the actual symbol size This means the larger the height the larger the symbol size the larger the width the larger the space between the symbol and text For line and scatter plots the width can never be less than the height 5 Click OK to close the dialog box and save the changes Editing You can edit a legend as a single object To edit an individual legend entry see Automatic Editing Ind
449. setter color printer or slidemaker you should contact them and make sure they support the kind of fonts you want to use If you must use non TrueType fonts you can disable TrueType fonts using the Fonts control in the Windows Control Panel Using PostScript Fonts When is PostScript Required About Adobe Type Manager You can only use PostScript fonts when printing to PostScript or PostScript emulating printers If you installed a PostScript printer driver the PostScript fonts appear as printer fonts in the different font lists PostScript fonts are only available if you installed a Windows PostScript printer driver when you installed Windows or by using the Windows Setup program or if you are using Adobe Type Manager You do not have to actually have a PostScript printer to install a PostScript printer driver You will need to install the driver if you plan to use an outside service to print graphs on their PostScript compatible device Many high resolution typesetters and slidemakers still only support PostScript fonts and not TrueType fonts If you plan to take or send a printer file to a service bureau to output on a typesetter color printer or slidemaker you should contact them and make sure they support the kind of fonts you want to use PostScript fonts are not accurately rendered on your screen unless you have Adobe Type Manager installed Windows will substitute similar fonts and display the widths correctly on the screen
450. shairs automatically default to white 10 To change the thickness of the symbol edge move the Thickness slider or type a new value 11 Click OK Automatically When incrementing symbols automatically symbol types are assigned to curves Incrementing or points if the plot has only one curve in the same order as the column pairs Symbols 206 Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options listed in the Graph Wizard SigmaPlot increments symbols according to the selected scheme Figure 5 32 Example of Symbol 16 70 Schemes on Scatter Plots 4 E i j 12 4 50 4 vy V Both graphs use the Doubles yY v symbol scheme and the Black 10 aje Y A and White color scheme The Mi D amp eo first graph has only one b a me curve the second has four 8 v 20 A 4 O 7 v Y Tenn e de ILDA Symbol types and colors appear on the curves of the plot in the same order as the symbol types and colors in the right click popup menus of the incrementing option To learn about using custom increment schemes see Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments on page 220 To use automatically incrementing symbol types 1 Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 5 33 Grach P Changing the Starting a a kaa Symbol for an Plots Axes Graph Incrementing Sequence Plat Right click the symbol type Plot 2 _ Rename Graph Wizard to select the first symb
451. sheet 1 Select the worksheet you want to export by opening and viewing it or select ing it in the notebook window 2 On the File menu click Export The Export File dialog box appears 3 Use the Files of type drop down list to select a file format and then enter the file name directory and drive for the exported file 4 Click Export to create the file When you export a SigmaPlot worksheet as a text file tabs or commas are used to separate data columns and data is saved at full precision If you want to save a text file with data as it appears in the worksheet rather than at full precision copy the selected data to the Clipboard paste it into a text editor and save it as a text file 62 Exporting Worksheet Data Exporting to Systat Worksheet Basics When exporting SigmaPlot data to Systat make sure that there are no text cells or indefinates in data columns you export or they will be converted by Systat into text instead of numbers Descriptive Statistics for Worksheets Figure 3 9 Column Statistics Worksheet Available Statistics SigmaPlot automatically calculates a number of basic statistical values for all the data in your worksheet columns For information on printing column statistics see Printing Worksheets on page 49 To view the statistics for the currently selected worksheet gt Onthe View menu click Statistics A check mark appears next to the Statistics command The runnin
452. shortcut menu click New and then click Report A report window opens and a new report is added to the selected section Creating Reports 429 Using the Report Editor setting Report Options To set report options on the View menu click Report Options to open the Options dialog box gt These settings apply to the current report but not to other open reports To have these settings apply to subsequently opened or created reports make your changes then close the page Newly opened or created reports will use these settings Setting Ruler Units Click the Units tab on the Options dialog box to select the ruler units and enable or disable automatic word selection To open the report Options dialog box 1 Select the report window 2 On the View menu click Report Options The Options dialog box appears 3 Click the Options tab 4 To set the Measurement units to Inches or Centimeters select the appropriate option Ruler Display The View tab on the Options dialog box controls the ruler display To view the ruler 1 Select the report window 2 On the View menu click Report Options The Options dialog box appears 3 Click the View tab 4 Under Show select or clear Ruler options setting Report Page size and Margins Use the report Page Setup dialog box to set report margins paper orientation paper size and paper source bz These settings apply to the current report but not to other open reports To
453. sigmaPlot 8 0 User s Guide For more information about SPSS Science software products please visit our WWW site at bttp www spss com or contact SPSS Science Marketing Department SPSS Inc 233 South Wacker Drive 11 Floor Chicago IL 60606 6307 Tel 312 651 3000 Fax 312 651 3668 SPSS and SigmaPlot are registered trademarks and the other product names are the trademarks of SPSS Inc for its proprietary computer software No material describing such software may be produced or distributed without the written permission of the owners of the trademark and license rights in the software and the copyrights in the published materials The SOFTWARE and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision c 1 i of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at 52 227 7013 Contractor manufacturer is SPSS Inc 233 South Wacker Drive 1th Floor Chicago IL 60606 6307 General notice Other product names mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation ImageStream Graphics amp Presentation Filters copyright 1991 1997 by INSO Corporation All Rights Reserved ImageStream Graphics Filters is a registered trademark and ImageStream is a trademark of INSO Corporation SigmaPlot 8 0
454. sing the Graph Properties dialog box Axis Range l l 1 Double click the angular axis Changing Ternary Axis Range Scale and Direction 341 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 8 31 l Graph Properties Dialog Box Graph Properties Axes Tab Scaling Settings nA E Graph Aiz so O Rename Scale type Percentage 0 100 Direction B Counter clockwise Settings for range Start Pee ee errr a Cancel Apply T Help 2 Click the Axes tab 3 Select Scaling from the Settings For list 4 Use the slider controls for X Range Y Range and Z Range to change indi vidual axis ranges gt Note that when you change the Minimum for any axis the maximums for the other axes adjust automatically Changing the Maximum for any axis does not require changing the ranges for other axes a Click OK 2 Increasing an axis range minimum reduces the size of the ternary graph because it is always reduces the other axis range maximums Reducing the maximum of a ternary axis range changes the graph shape Ternary Scale Type All ternary axes on a single graph use either the default Percentage 0 100 scale or the Unitary 0 0 1 0 scale Data used by each scale should be within the required ranges for each scale 342 Changing Ternary Axis Range Scale and Direction Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots Graph creation det
455. sion Analysis Second Edition John Wiley amp Sons Inc New York 1981 Given a set of n data points x y from two columns in the worksheet SigmaPlot computes the p order polynomial regression A p 2 Io by bixo baxi bxd where bo b1 bp are the p 1 estimated parameters and Vo is the Y value predicted for any Xo The confidence interval for this calculated regression is defined by the two confidence limits Jott n p 1 s X XX 1X Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines 411 Statistics where Xo is the p 1 1 vector defined by Xo 1 Xo ice ee xf X is the n p 1 design matrix 2 P 1 Ne K ans 2 P y 1 Xor KI aai XA 2 1 Nie i sees xe s 1s obtained from the variance about the regression y pee 2 and the t value for n p 1 degrees of freedom and the standard normal percentile equivalent z z 1 96 or 2 576 for 95 and 99 confidence intervals respectively is computed from a six term rational polynomial approximation taken from Sahai H and Thompson W Comparisons of Approximation to the Percentile of t y2 and F Distributions Journal of Statistical Computation and Simulation 1974 Vol 3 pp 81 93 Prediction The prediction interval is calculated using the following equation Interval Calculation att n p 1 s 1 X X X Ix Adding Reference You can add horizontal or vertical lines at specific locations using the Graph Lines
456. specific degree of probability SigmaPlot can calculate 95 and 99 confidence intervals Contour Plot Contour plots are a rendering of three dimensional data in two dimensions The z or vertical dimension is represented by drawing lines that follow the XY coordinates of specific z intervals Topographic maps are an example of contour plots CONFIG SYS A DOS file that installs device drivers and sets system parameters when you turn on or restart your computer Coordinate System A system that defines the method of defining data point placement on a graph SigmaPlot supports 2D and 3D Cartesian graphs polar plots ternary plots and pie charts gt Cartesian graphs use two or three rectangular axes to describe data point location gt A polar plot describes data using angle and radius within a circular region gt Ternary graphs plot data along three axis ranges that have a sum of 100 gt A pie chart uses polar coordinates to assign slice sizes to data point values A graph s coordinate system is fixed when you create the graph and cannot be changed See also Plot Copy Place selected worksheet data or graphic objects in the Windows Clipboard without removing the data or objects The Clipboard contents can be placed elsewhere on the worksheet or page by pressing Ctrl V or selecting the Edit menu Paste command or Edit menu Paste Special command Correlation Coefficient R R or the measure of closeness of a regression to the dat
457. specified location Date and Time Available Formats Cancel Help FRE SPSUPZUUL 2 14 PM Sfsof2000 2 14 02 PM If Update Automatically The list of available date and time formats depends on your Regional Settings You can view or modify the Regional Settings directly from your Windows control panel 436 nserting the Current Date and Time into a Report 14 Scatter Plot with Error Bars sample Graphs Many of the following sample graphs can be found in the SAMPLES JNB notebook in the SigmaPlot program folder This is a scatter graph of symbols with error bars and a line plot draw through the symbols If you don t have your fitted line data you can use SigmaPlot s Regression Wizard to create the data for curves Scatter Plot with Error Bars and Fitted Curves amp Ty PE A 3 p O gt A L 2 4 X Data vs Y Scatter 1 14 O X Data vs Y Scatter 2 F X Data vs Y Line 1 o X Data vs Y Line 2 0 T T T T T 1 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 X Data 437 LL ee Sample Graphs Grouped Bar Chart This bar chart plots two data columns along with two error bar data columns and with Error Bars uses a Y axis break Grouped Bar Chart with Error Bars 300 MM Data 1 Data 2 275 250 100 Y Data
458. sseeeeessseeeeeessneeesessneeseneas 435 Inserting the Current Date and Time into a Report cee ecceececeseeeccsseeeesseeeeeees 436 Sample Graphs wciieeedce sidecases a vanis detent a EE A 437 PUNUDO TIDS coronoides anae e EA 445 Using True TV MC FONS conas a a a tianndbont 445 USING POSIOCHDEFONIS sricinmianenrina a a iN 446 OPTIMIZING Prner OUUU eeaeee aa a 447 Printing to High Resolution Typesetters and Slide Makers ccce 447 PANON LO FIE apacusiyconaacaae rs aa a EE 448 Color Symbol Line and Fill Schemes and Codes sceeeeeeeeee 451 SUING IMG Soi tesgnd ual A tienes Susie cts Gat cease nl EEEE EEE AEE E T 451 Graphic Gell CodeS Sot cderasdads deavasinnssoenivastse aa dein tihavn nat aa aa 454 ENECO a siscstnccaanieedscatans e N A ENTER 456 PrN FELON GOAO S ierre a E agseseanasturventi 456 The SP WIN File raettenc ceca nis eeitnst a aa tes 459 MEOUIIGSNOOUING rcce seed neces anaiiee eceeeenaaeecenanne 471 Troubleshooting Installation Problems cece cccccssccsesssseeecsseeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeesenees 471 SIGMA POU IONS siruri a a a a A 474 RESONVING PRINTING PRODICINS xcsas caticscazs miitin reina ai i a AEEA AAE 475 Improving Printing Speed in SigmaPlot oe ce ceeeeceseeeeeseeeeseeeessseeeesneeerneess 475 PaStING a DEClal Characters 22c csnricsauzetaeut ana outa eiasuaventeveseeaheieiaecant 476 Inserting SigmaPlot Graphs into WordPerfect sneren 477 GIOSSANY ojos EEEE E E T 479 vil Contents
459. st 7 To change the color of the lines in the selected plot select a color from the Color drop down list or choose to increment line color using the one of the incrementing schemes Select None to create transparent lines Use Custom to create or choose a custom color For more information on using custom colors see Using Custom Colors on page 158 8 To control the layering of plot lines use the Layering drop down list to place lines behind or in front of plot symbols 2 Hollow symbols None will always show plot lines 9 Click OK 214 Changing Line Type and Other Line Options Automatically Incrementing Lines Figure 5 42 incremented Line Types for Line Plots with Multiple Curves Each of these graphs uses the Incrementing option but are assigned different starting line types Figure 5 43 Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Right click Menu Line types and colors appear on the curves of the plot in the same order as the line types and colors in the right click popup menus of the incrementing option There are two line type incrementing schemes Incrementing and Monochrome There are seven different incrementing color schemes to choose from for line colors 80 7 80 60 20 5 T T T T 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10 For examples of these schemes see Schemes on page 451 To learn about using custom line schemes see Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and
460. t If you want to use an Excel workbook as an actual Excel workbook within SigmaPlot you must open the workbook instead of importing it Importing places the Excel data into a SigmaPlot worksheet and does not open the workbook as an actual Excel workbook For more information on using Excel workbooks in SigmaPlot see Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot on page 88 When importing a spreadsheet or dBase file the Import Spreadsheet dialog box appears Import Spreadsheet Book1 xls Portion to Read Overarite at Aow 1 Column 1 Select either the entire spreadsheet or a specified range of cells Specify cells using the standard 1 2 3 notation e g A1 C50 for a range from cell al to cell c50 For dBase files cell letters correspond to fields When you have finished specifying the range to import click Import The selected data is imported Note that the dialog box indicates whether or not the worksheet is in overwrite or insert mode and where the imported data will begin 60 mporting Files from Other Applications ee Importing Text Files Figure 3 7 Import Text Dialog Box Worksheet Basics To import spreadsheet data from non compatible programs save the spreadsheet as either a Lotus or text file then import that file Only the top sheet of an Excel workbook can be imported If you attempt to import another worksheet you will receive a warning message If you want to move data from other sheets use Copy and
461. t 170 Single curves creating 240 Size column statistics 64 symbols 150 values from column for symbols 210 Sizing aspect ratio 479 Columns and Rows 66 columns and rows 74 graphs 131 133 labels 486 objects 131 133 resizing labels legends automatically with graphs 97 setting aspect ratio preference 97 using mouse 132 using Object Properties dialog 133 Slices pie chart defined 484 022 edges 127 exploding 320 322 rotating 320 322 Smoothing unordered XYZ data 425 428 Smoothing data mesh plots 11 Snap to 137 Solving equations 233 236 equations for x within range 234 functions 233 236 Solving equations 228 236 Sorting data 77 defined 492 Source templates for new pages 108 Spacing bars 223 225 bars from different plots 223 225 263 box plots 267 Speed increasing drawing speed 201 Spline curve defined 492 SPSS creating graphs in 188 European office 32 SPSS files importing 59 SPW32 INI file editing 459 467 Stacked bar charts automatic reference lines 412 defined 492 Standard deviation column statistics 64 defined 492 Standard error column statistics 64 defined 493 Statistics calculation of 402 Options 18 reference lines 414 setting Options 65 showing hiding 65 using Excel worksheets 91 worksheet 12 Student s statistic see t test Styles defined 485 graph 167 177 485 styles using the Graph Style Gallery 182 184 Submitting graphs to journals 356 359 Subscript 143
462. t Equation Four Parameter Logistic Curve Equation Options Library Solve Equation E min max min 1 x E CSO Hillslope Results Options Evaluate f at Solve equation for x within range Solutions 0 007 3645798115426 Mininun Maximum 0 000000 5 000000 Solve Results Box Tips and Tricks gt The Results box keeps a tally of all evaluation and solving results relative to the given expression If you alter this expression on the Equation tab or select a new plot expression the Results box appears with no text Modifying the expression also clears the other boxes on the Solve tab gt Click Copy to place the entire contents of the Results box onto the Clipboard gt You can annotate the results in the Results box All annotations are preserved when your perform further computations using the same expression gt In addition to displaying the results of evaluating functions and solving equations the Results box also displays estimates for any singularities found in the course of solving an equation Singularities are values of the expression variable in the given range where the expression is undefined When you perform a computation a label precedes the values in the Results box to indicate the type of output displayed Sometimes the solutions to an equation O f x are not obvious and the basic methods for solving it are unavailable If this is the case then the simpl
463. t Graph and then click Select Graph 1 Michaelis Menten the graph Add Plot 2 Lineweaver Burk Delete Plot 3 E adie Hotstee Add Axis 4 Scatchard Plot Equation asics Graph Properties Using Special To automatically open the Graph Properties dialog box double click the graph Shortcuts For more information on using the Graph Properties dialog box see Modifying Naming Plots 192 Naming Plots Graphs on page 189 Your can also right click a selected graph or plot display to view other available commands on the Shortcut menu The default plot names are numeric for example Plot 1 Plot 2 etc To assign a new name to a plot 1 On the Standard toolbar click the Graph Properties button Creating and Modifying Graphs The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 5 20 i Graph Properties Using the Graph Properties dialog box to rename a Plots Axes Graph graph Click Rename to Plat open the Rename dialog Piot a Rename Graph Wizard box ee reine ide Data sampling Click the Graph Entire range Wizard button above C Onl Paine to change these Y settings ta to Plot type vertical Dok Plot Symbols Data Format 8Y Pairs Data source 1 Year Y 1 Column 12 PA Ignore Area Fills Missing values Out of range values Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Plots tab 3 From the Plot drop down list select the plot
464. t a bitmap object the Object command displays Bitmap Image Object You can copy or cut SigmaPlot graphs to the Windows Clipboard then paste the graph directly into another document like a word processing or desktop publishing page without having to do any file exporting or importing You can also drag and drop graphs directly from SigmaPlot into any other Windows program that supports OLE See Dragging and Dropping Graphs on page 122 for more information To paste a graph to another application 1 Select the graph to cut or copy 2 Press Ctrl X or Ctrl C The graph is cut or copied 3 Open or switch to the other application and click where you want the graph to appear 4 Paste the graph typically using the Edit menu Paste command If the graph isn t an OLE object try the Paste Special command and select SigmaPlot Graph or SigmaPlot Graph Object To create a link between SigmaPlot and the other application click the Paste Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects 115 Graph Page Basics Link button To insure you are pasting an OLE object use the Paste Special command If a Paste Special command doesn t exist the application proba bly doesn t support OLE Figure 4 19 Using the Paste Special Dialog Box to Paste a Sree Graph from SigmaPlot ance to another program Paste Special ie Paste Picture Metafile Paste Link T Display As leon Result Inserts the contents of t
465. t a different custom color Using Custom Colors 159 Figure 4 57 The Color Dialog Box 160 Using Custom Colors see Re defining Custom Colors on page 161 From the Basic Colors list select a color or click Define Custom Colors to define your own color The dialog box expands to show a color palette Color Basic colors a ei Color Field Hue i aba Red E7 Sak li 420 Green 70 Define Custom Colors gt ColorlS olid Lum f 29 Blue 207 Cancel Add to Custom Colors Click the large color field or drag your mouse across it to indicate the approximate color you want to use If you know the numeric RGB red green blue values of the desired color you can select each of the Red Green and Blue edit boxes and type the correct values The selected color box appears Move the slider next to the vertical color bar along the right of the dialog box to fine tune the range of the Hue Saturation and Luminosity of the selected color or type new values in the edit boxes The current custom color appears in the ColorlSolid box as a gradational color and a solid To change the color assigned to a Custom Color box select the box in the list then specify the new color from the large color field To select the gradational color click Add to Custom Colors The color appears in the first available box of the Custom Colors list To select the solid version of the color double click the solid in the Col
466. t be arranged in the worksheet as X data Y data Z data xX Y Zi X Y Zo X3 Y Z3 xX Y gt Z4 X Y gt Zs 290 Arranging Data for Contour Plots and 3D Graphs Figure 7 5 Data Arranged in Long Form Mesh Format Working with 3D and Contour Graphs X3 Y2 Z6 X Y3 Ly Xy Y3 Zg X3 Y3 Zo X Y4 Z10 Xy Y4 Z1 X3 Y4 Z12 This arrangement places the X YZ data point coordinate values in the required order The XYZ columns must be the same length E a Y Z 4 5 en 1 00 16 00 2 200 00 8200 3 200 00 4 o 4 WOO 200 2 5 200 200 15 00 E 300 2 00 OO OO aof 8 200 30o 3 300 300 10 1o 00 X and Y Columns vs Many Z Columns You can also place the X and Y data in single columns then place the corresponding Z data in many continuous columns This method may work best if you have XYZ data displayed in a table or if you have irregularly incremented X or Y values To use this option you should have as many Z columns as you have Y rows and the Z columns should be the same length as the X column Arranging Data for Contour Plots and 3D Graphs 291 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs The data in the first Z column is assigned to the first Y value the data in the second Z column to the second Y value etc The data in each row of the X column is assigned as the X value for the data in the same row in the Z columns Figure 7 6 XYZ Data Arranged as One X Column f One Y Column
467. t of Axis Range Data Points You can choose to either plot or ignore bad points Bad points are either missing values or data that lie outside the axis ranges Figure 5 29 i Example of Graphs Plotting Bad Data Points ai aA The graph on the left ad m plots both a missing data point and out of range i a data point The graph on the right ignores both missing and out of range points i i To ignore missing and out of range points 1 Double click the graph The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 5 30 a d Graph Properties Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Data Settings Plots Axes Graph Plot Plt 2 Rename Graph Wizard settings for Data sampling Click the Graph Enti Wizard button above C a to change these Y settings S umbels Data Format Many Y Data source a 4 Data n 1 Line 1 Y2 Y Line z Area Fills Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Plots tab 3 Select Data from the Settings for list 4 Select the desired plot from the Plot drop down list 5 To plot data without missing values under Ignore select Missing values Plotting Missing and Out of Axis Range Data Points 203 To plot missing values clear the option 6 To plot data without out of range values under Ignore select Out of Range Values To plot out of range values clear the option 7 Click OK Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Opt
468. t the number of z intervals Contours i To turn off interpolated fills 1 Double click the graph The Graph Properties dialog box appears Figure 7 35 Graph Properti x Graph Properties Plots Tab cali elas Ei Contour Settings Flots AMES Grids and Planes Title and Legend Plot Piot Rename Graph Wizard Settings For Contours Minor Line Style Type none Color LC Black Thickness 0 007in OF Cancel 2 Click the Plots tab Fill Color m Spectrum 7 RE 3 From the Settings For list select Contours 4 From the Contours drop down list select Minor 5 Under Fills from the Color drop down list select None 6 Click OK Changing Contour Use the Graph Properties Range settings to select the scale type and set the Vertical Z Data vertical range used by the contour lines Range and scale To set the scale and range used by contour lines 1 Double click the plot Modifying Contour Plots 311 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs Figure 7 36 Graph Properties Plots Tab Scale Settings 8 we The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Plot Plot 1 Rename Graph Wizard Settings for Scale type Apply to Linear 2 AMajor Range Start Calculation igri Data Range Pad 5 End Calculation Nearest tick 351605 635 DataRange Line interval
469. ta organized Wi o a2 33 47700 7 5000 7 2000 At least one R 35700 gewo geim camm 1700 1700 5 An D000 12 4000 10 4000 UTS TOS000 A a 1 TiS 2 0 T BA 13 000 TU BU SS D g 5 RP de Bede a E R i i zii al i Ser enim al Help Cancel Back Merck Fimis 6 Click Next 7 Click Finish Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify the plot or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick different data columns for your plot For more information on making general modifications to your plot see Creating and Modifying Graphs on page 163 Modifying Polar Plots Modifying polar plots involves gt Picking new data for the plot see Picking Different Data for the Current Plot on page 194 gt Changing line and symbol type size and color see Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options on page 204 and Changing Line Type and Other Line Options on page 213 gt Modifying back plane color and grid lines see Modifying Grids and Planes on page 396 gt Modifying angular and radial axes see Modifying Polar Axes on page 326 To modify a polar plot select the graph and open the Graph Properties dialog box Polar Plots 325 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots Modifying Polar Axes Polar plots have a radial axis and an angular axis The angular axis describes a circle and can use radians degrees or other units as the scale There are both outer and inner angular axe
470. ta stored in Excel worksheets Descriptive statistics are available for all your worksheet columns The Statistics Worksheet lists basic statistics for all worksheet columns Display linear regression lines with confidence and prediction intervals chart error bars for graphs of column means and run paired and unpaired tests between worksheet columns Use the Histogram feature to compute and plot distributions for datasets up to 64 000 points in size The regression Wizard steps through curve fitting plotting and generating a report Modify and compute data using SigmaPlot s comprehensive transform language Change the font size and style of any text and change the color line type thickness and fill pattern of graphs and drawn objects with drawing tools The SigmaPlot Report Editor displays regression results and features complete text editing functionality Installing SigmaPlot 2 System Requirements 12 nstalling SigmaPlot SigmaPlot is installed on your computer from CD The installation program automatically starts up when the CD is placed in the CD ROM drive The dialog boxes that guide you through the installation process are simple and self explanatory In order to accomplish your installation you will need to have your product registration number available SigmaPlot 8 0 runs under the following systems gt Windows 95 gt Windows 98 ee Introduction gt Windows 2000 gt Windows NT 4 0 Ex
471. te the 5th and 95th percentiles and that there may not be any points beyond the 10th and 90th percentiles To modify whisker cap width under Whisker Caps move the Width slider or type a new value in the Width box Click OK Computing Percentile Methods Figure 6 42 Selecting a Percentile Method You can select either Cleveland or Standard When graphing error bars and creating box plots you can select the method of computing percentiles To change the percentile method l On the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears o 5 fl a og o o F o o F a o La a o F a o F s aa Bs o ae a H oh pore Ey a ee e eae a Eg 2 Click the System tab 268 Computing Percentile Methods OT ee Working with 2D Graphs 3 From the Percentile Method drop down list select either gt Cleveland gt Standard Both the Cleveland method and the Standard method use linear interpolation to determine the percentile value but each uses a different method of round ing when determining the smallest data index used for the interpolation The two methods give the same result when computing the 50th percentile median If the data in increasing order is x1 x2 xN and the percentile is p then the two methods compute the data percentile value v using the following formu las Cleveland Let k be the nearest integer to N p 100 and let f N p 100 5 k St
472. th great sophistication Although HPGL files contain all color and line width information not all applications will import this information correctly If possible avoid using thick lines in HPGL files increasing line thickness increases the size of the HPGL file dramatically Labels also add to file size If you are directing HPGL output to a file for later dumping to a plotter make sure that you have selected Hardware Handshaking in the Settings dialog box Some programs such as Ventura Publisher are designed to handle and interpret large and complex HPGL files Printing to Files 449 Notes 1 6 Color Symbol Line and Fill Schemes and Codes Schemes Color Schemes The colors used along with the equivalent graphic cell code is provided for each color scheme Color Graphic Cell Code Black amp White rgb 0 0 0 rgb 255 255 255 Gray Scale rgb 0 0 0 rgb 192 192 192 rgb 64 64 64 rgb 224 224 224 rgb 32 32 32 rgb 128 128 128 Earth Tones rgb 128 0 0 rgb 192 192 0 rgb 96 0 0 rgb 255 128 0 rgb 128 64 0 rgb 128 128 0 Schemes 447 Color Symbol Line and Fill Schemes and Codes Ocean rgb 0 0 128 reb 0 128 255 rgb 0 0 96 reb 0 128 128 rgb 0 64 128 reb 0 224 224 Forest rgb 0 64 0 rgb 0 255 0 rgb 0 128 0 rgb 192 255 0 rgb 64 192 0 rgb 255 255 0 Muted Rainbow rgb 128 0 0 rgb 255 128 0 rgb 192 192 0 rgb 0 128 0 rgb 0 128 128 rgb 0 64
473. the Thickness slider 9 To set the extent of regression line s all the way across the graph under Options select Extend to Axes 10 Click OK If you want to view and save the coefficients of the regression s select the Results tab of the Linear Regression dialog box The Results panel appears displaying regression equation results 408 Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines ee Statistics The regression equation coefficients correlation coefficient R2 and function results are displayed for each regression curve computed If you computed confidence and prediction intervals these values are also displayed Figure 11 9 z Linear Regression The Results Panel of the Linear Regression Regression Line Confidence Intervals Results Dialog Box Pence yee heen aye reer ee Coefficients b 1 5547619048 Copp bi 0 6424603175 r 0 515956655468 fou may copy these results to Function Values the clipboard it 1 2 19 2222222 1 14 2 207 1B66667 1 28 2 3rr1111111 Cancel Apply Help Click Copy to copy the results and paste them into the worksheet a report or any other Windows application For a description of the calculation of confidence and prediction intervals see Linear Regression Confidence and Prediction Calculation on page 410 Adding Confidence SigmaPlot can draw lines which describe either the 95 or 99 confidence and and Prediction prediction intervals around a regression
474. the data to use as the error bar values gt The Graph Wizard appears Graph Wizard Create Graph How iz your data organized EP he x YT Y2 Ones column 75 and at least one Y column Many Replicates From the Data Format list choose the appropriate data format to specify how your data is formatted The data formats available depend on the graph type and style Click Next Since you selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in the in the Selected Columns list To change the selected data select the wrong entry in the Graph Wizard then choose the correct column from the worksheet You can also clear a column assignment by double clicking it in the Selected Columns list Graph Wizard Create Graph Data for Error 2 Column 4 Selected Columns Select the column to plot by clicking the Set Column 1 column in the Error 1 Column 2 worksheet Set Column 3 Click Finish To learn about modifying error bar information Changing Error Bar Appearance on page 253 To learn about repicking data for an existing plot see Picking Different Data for the Current Plot on page 194 For information on the available data formats for the graph you are making see the description of the graph style in SigmaPlot Graph Style on page 167 262 Grouped Bar Charts Spacing Bars from Different Plots Figure 6 35 Bars graphed with different plo
475. the groups To perform a t test l On the Statistics menu click t test or Paired t test Running Paired and Independent t Tests 401 Statistics The t test Column Picker dialog box appears Figure 11 1 t test Column Picker t test Column i i Data for Group 2 Picker Dialog Box Select the data for the t test P Colurnn 1 SE lt lt Select the ime columns to test Selected Columns by clicking the Group 1 Column 1 columns in the worksheet Einish 2 Select the columns from the Selected Columns list or click the columns in the worksheet to pick the columns you want to compare Selected columns are assigned to the highlighted group in the Selected Col umns list 3 Click Finish SigmaPlot displays results for the t test Figure 11 2 Student t test Unpaired x t test Results Dialog Box Results 3 1600226419 OF O 0075250249 Sass Copy t test successtul Copy to clipboard to save results Degrees of Freedom 13 4 To save the t test results copy and paste the data to the worksheet page or another application For each test these values are displayed gt T the Student s t statistic gt P the probability that you are incorrect in stating that the two means are different gt The Degrees of Freedom a measure of the sample size Calculation of When performing t tests t is defined differently for paired t tests than for unpaired tests Paired Test
476. the legend if locked When you click Reset defaults a Novice prompt appears which you can disable To learn more about Novice Prompting see Setting Program Options on page 18 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Graph Properties dialog box The legend is updated as specified 152 Working with Automatic Legends Permanently Displaying and Hiding Automatic Legends Ungrouping a Legend py Locking Legend Text You can control the display of automatic legends either for all subsequently created graphs To view or hide automatic legends for all subsequently created plots 1 On the Tools menu click Options The Options dialog box appears 2 Click the General tab 3 Select Automatic legends to display the legend or clear it to hide the legend 4 Click OK to close the dialog box and save the changes You can ungroup the legend entries and box by selecting the legend then choosing the Format menu Ungroup command or clicking the Page toolbar Ungroup button Fy see Grouping and Ungrouping Objects on page 135 You can then edit each object like an ordinary graphic object or label You can also use your mouse to move any of the legend items to a new location and the Format menu Align command or arranging toolbar E button to align them see Aligning Page Objects on page 135 Ungrouping a legend removes automatic legend features Locking legends halts all automatic updating of the legend text for the whole legend
477. the observed data is relatively constant over the extent of its defined region Nearest Neighbors Here the bandwidth radius depends on the smoothing location The radius is equal to the maximum distance between the smooth ing location and its nearest neighbors as determined by the Sampling Propor tion value Select Nearest Neighbors for data that is clustered in some areas and sparse in others For example if there are 100 data points enter 1 to choose ten data points nearest the smoothing location 4 Click OK To preview and create the graph 424 Smoothing 2D and 3D Data _ EEE eee ee Transform Basics 1 Click Preview to see a preview of the graph If the preview is not satisfactory adjust the Smoother settings and options and click Preview again Each time you preview the settings are stored for subsequent review by clicking the right and left arrows 2 Click OK to accept the preview The the graph appears with a line graph representing the smoothed data points The original noisy data points also remain The worksheet now con tains the results of all selected computations Click the Stop button at the bottom of the Smooth 2D Data dialog box to stop the process smoothing 3D Data To resample 3D scatter plot data to rectangular grid locations necessary for creating mesh plots and 2D contour plots first smooth the data and then use the Smooth 3D Data dialog box to create the graph To select the data sour
478. the tick mark intervals of the associated Cartesian axes Grid lines are modified using the Grids and Planes panel of the Graph Properties dialog box Grid lines are attached to graph back planes See also Back Plane and Tick Marks Grouped Bar Chart See Bar Chart Help System A system of indexed screens linked by hypertext providing on line information about SigmaPlot commands and operations Press F1 to view the Contents screen of the help system or choose one of the Help menu commands to get additional help information Related topics are linked through highlighted words on the screen selecting these brings up the entry for that topic 485 Glossary Histogram A representation of frequency distribution showing the number of occurrences within specified intervals usually displayed as a bar or step chart The histogram of a worksheet column can be generated and plotted by choosing the Statistics menu Histogram command or by using the histogram transform function Hot Key A quick method of selecting menu commands and dialog box options A letter in the command or option appears highlighted pressing that letter selects the command or option See also Keyboard Shortcut Import Transfer data from a file to the SigmaPlot worksheet for plotting or other operations SigmaPlot recognizes text DIF Lotus 123 Quattro Excel SigmaPlot SPW SP5 and SPG Mocha worksheets and other file formats Choose the File menu Impo
479. them on the Web Internet or your Intranet Saving your graphs as a web page creates HTML code that you can later import into any HTML editor You can then view SigmaPlot graphs on the Web even if SigmaPlot is not installed using the SigmaPlot Web Viewer The SigmaPlot WebViewer is an ActiveX control freely distributed from the SPSS Science Web site If this control is not installed the first time a SigmaPlot graph is viewed on a web page the WebViewer is automatically installed Then you can view the graphs in high resolution on the Intranet or Internet 2 Currently 3D graphs only appear as JPEG files not as Web Graphs Using the SigmaPlot WebViewer you can gt View the graphs in high resolution gt Pan and zoom the graph without losing resolution gt Print in high resolution printer resolution as opposed to typical Web graphics GIFs JPEGs etc that are printed in low resolution gt View the data used to create the graph Publishing Graphs on the World Wide Web 353 Publishing Graphs Exporting Graphs When you export a graph to the Web SigmaPlot automatically into HTML Format creates three files gt A notebook JNB file which contains the SigmaPlot graph and data worksheet gt A JPG of the graph viewable by those who do not have the SigmaPlot WebViewer gt An HTM file which references a JPG of the graph and the JNB file You can export an entire graph page or other pasted objects To ex
480. tion always points down 75 75 50 50 25 25 o 4 o 1 25 25 50 50 75 75 To orient error bar directions relative to zero Modifying Error Bars 255 CEIM Working with 2D Graphs 1 Double click the plot The Graph Properties dialog box appears 2 Click the Plots tab 3 From the Settings For list select Error Bars 4 From the Error Bars Direction drop down list select X or Y From Zero or To Zero 2 A relative to zero direction always points toward or away from zero This option is useful for bar charts that have negative values Figure 6 26 The bar chart on the left uses X error bars with an absolute negative direction The bar chart on the right uses a relative direction towards zero 80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 5 Click OK 256 Modifying Error Bars ee Customizing Error Bar Directions Figure 6 27 Error Bars Using Custom Directions from Worksheet Columns Working with 2D Graphs Control the error bar direction used for each data point by entering error bar directions into a worksheet column FF bias Poe I Dieta F i i jf Bae EEC i ji K l E i py r ha i i E 4 j AA pd E i i Y i 73000 rat ol To use custom error bar directions EE 4 EIE F Fa TEGO F Bme n Fd Fh 1j hii F Fi E i F itd F H m 1 Select the first cell in an empty worksheet col
481. tlier points on the smoothed values To set smoothing options l Figure 12 15 The Smooth Curve Options Dialog Box sA 3 Click Options The Smoothed Curve Options dialog box appears Smoothed Surface Options Y Values Minimum 5 000000 Masimum fi5 000000 Intervals jis Bandwidth Method i Fixed T Plot Raw Data Nearest Neighbors Change the Minimum and Maximum for the X and Y values to new begin ning and ending values for the X and Y ranges 1 Values OK Minimum E Masimum i F O00000 Cancel dui Intervals 175 E Set the bandwidth method to either Fixed or Nearest Neighbors Smoothing 2D and 3D Data 427 Transform Basics Fixed The bandwidth radius is the same at every smoothing location The radius is computed by multiplying the Sampling Proportion value times half of the difference between the set Minimum and Maximum independent vari ables X and Y values Select Fixed if the density of the observed data is relatively constant over the extent of its defined region Nearest Neighbors Here the bandwidth radius depends on the smoothing location The radius is equal to the maximum distance between the smooth ing location and its nearest neighbors as determined by the Sampling Propor tion value Select Nearest Neighbors for data that is clustered in some areas and sparse in others 4 Click OK To preview and then create the graph 1 Click Preview
482. ts 280 X Y many Z Contour plots 291 Mesh plots 291 X Y Z values Contour plots 290 Mesh plots 290 Z Zooming in out defined 495 on graphs 103 104
483. ts 446 reports 51 selected notebook items 51 setting options 49 tips 445 449 to graphic file formats 448 449 TrueType fonts 445 446 worksheet 49 worksheet data 49 50 Printing options setting 50 Probability axis scale 363 defined 490 Probit axis scale 364 defined 490 Producing Index file for publication 357 Prompting novice 18 Properties modifying text 147 Publishing graphs in journals 356 359 journal submission requirements 356 on the World Wide Web 353 Q Quality control lines see reference lines Quartile plots 250 Quick transforms 420 R R value defined 490 Radial axes attributes 332 defined 490 lines 330 333 modifying 330 333 moving 330 333 offset from graph center 331 tick labels 333 turning on off 330 333 Radial labels turning on off 332 Radial values 323 Random data generating 417 Range Z data for contour plots 311 312 Range plots 248 Range axis angular axis 327 329 axis values 312 362 changing 363 defined 480 modifying 362 modifying by dragging 340 Rearranging data 81 Reference lines adding to 2D graphs 268 defined 490 direction 414 displaying 413 displaying in front behind 414 labels 414 line attributes 414 519 Index line thickness 414 line type 414 lower specification 414 statistics 414 turning on off 413 References graph design 34 Regional settings Date and Time format 72 Regression Wizard 12 407 Regressions coefficients 491 defined 4
484. ts for points Margins do not affect printing they are only a guide The Align dialog box uses margins when aligning the page Clear or check the Show Margins option by selecting it If this option is checked margins are displayed on the page To hide page margins clear Show Margins Click OK To learn about changing the unit of measurement used on the graph page see Changing Page Units of Measurement on page 156 To change the size or orientation of the graph page l On the File menu click Page Setup Changing Graph Page Format 155 Figure 4 52 The Page Size Tab of the Page Setup Dialog Box Changing Page Units of Measurement i The Page Setup dialog box appears Page Setup Margins Page Size Graph Layout Paper Size eee width 6500n Height f11 000in F Orientation Portrait Landscape Cancel Apply Help Click the Page Size tab From the Paper Size drop down list choose the appropriate size for the page or select unique page sizes from the Width and Height drop down lists SigmaPlot does not support heights or widths greater than 32 inches To switch between portrait normal and landscape sideways orientation select either the Portrait or Landscape option Click OK to accept your changes and close the dialog box If you change the page size and or orientation the page changes on the screen but your graphs remain in the same relative positio
485. ts into other applications and vice versa One method is using OLE Object Linking and Embedding which is fully supported by the SigmaPlot page OLE provides the ability to move or copy information among supporting applications and to use the applications interchangeably to modify the data Methods Of You can copy cut and paste graphs among applications without using OLE The Placing Objects method of placing objects depends on each application s implementation The following table shows how objects can be placed Type of Object Destination Application OLE object Can be placed if application supports OLE Windows Metafile Can be placed if application doesn t support OLE but supports pictures Enhanced Metafile Can be placed in Windows applications only Bitmap Can be pasted in applications that support bitmaps only for example Microsoft Paint Figure 4 16 A SigmaPlot Graph with Pasted Artwork Relative population density of beetles Percent normal rainfall 1972 1974 1976 1978 1980 1982 Year 112 Using OLE to Paste Link and Embed Objects 2 Commands to Place Objects sigmaPlot and OLE Figure 4 17 Example of an Microsoft Excel Equation Embedded into a SigmaPlot Report Linking or Embedding Objects Graph Page Basics SigmaPlot always pastes an OLE object if it is available The SigmaPlot graph and report pages support OLE Graphs not graph pages pasted into SigmaPlot reports are always pasted
486. ts of the HISTOGRM XFM transform as a bar chart Statistics col 3 histogram col 1 col 2 u User Defined Transtorm un i 39 1800 5 0000 il 2 31 1500 Edit Transform 3 15 5600 P 4 11300 kol 3 histogram col 1 col 2 5 400100 Close E g 0900 7 459100 E 11 2400 g 36 8700 10 14 4100 11 2700 12 45 2100 13 23 2500 14 209200 15 O _ Hep watch Open Save Save Ag dadida 16 Trigonometric Units 4 Degrees Radians Grads a Single Step 4 Click Run The histogram data appears in column 3 5 To graph the data plot column 3 as a bar chart Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines Creating a Graph with a Regression Line You can automatically compute and draw linear and polynomial regressions with confidence and prediction intervals The regression equation can be computed using all the data in a plot or individually for each curve in a multiple curve plot Polynomial curves can be fitted up to the 10th order Regressions for column averaged data are computed using all the data from the columns not just from the mean value Regressions are computed and drawn linearly on nonlinear e g log probability etc axis scales Regression equation coefficients R values and predicted values can be g q viewed and copied to the Clipboard To perform nonlinear regressions and curve fits such as sigmoidal exponential and peak functions use SigmaPlot s Regression Wizard T
487. ts that both overlap and are spaced differently by using different x increments Grouping Column Averaged Bars Working with 2D Graphs If you need to create a bar chart with two or more different axes scales or a chart with overlapping bars use multiple plots SigmaPlot does not automatically space bars from different plots However you can manually space bars by grouping your data column s with column s containing missing or empty data This creates bar groups with null values and leaves room for other bars When picking columns to plot pick the missing columns in a different order for each plot so that the bars do not overlap To overlap bars plot your bar values versus a column of evenly incremented values rather than by row numbers B Graph Page 1 Data 1 Iofs 10 bo T You cannot create a grouped bar chart with error bars using column averaging the bars do not group or space correctly However you can copy the worksheet means and standard deviations from the statistics window then plot this data as a grouped bar chart with error bars To create a bar chart with grouped column averaged bars 1 On the View menu click Statistics Grouped Bar Charts 263 Working with 2D Graphs The statistics window for the worksheet appears Figure 6 36 Column Statistics fe Data 1 Column Statistics Worksheet E 1 2 3 Mean 10 8750 52500 2 3750 ie Dey 8 7116 1 1650 1 4079 DD Std
488. ttern types using the Windows default pattern density are provided Use the none pattern when you want unfilled bars or boxes The fill color of bars and boxes is controlled by the Fill dialog box Background Color options Code Fill Pattern pattern 1 none pattern 2 a solid Color Symbol Line and Fill Schemes and Codes pattern 3 SHIGA rising right SN pattern 5 rising left pattern 6 diagonal cross hatch pattern 7 horizontal lines pattern 8 UTT vertical lines pattern 9 HHAH horizontal cross hatch Fill Pattern Codes 457 Notes Last Opened File Types Regression Wizard The SPW INI File Many system and option settings for SigmaPlot are saved in the SPW INI file which can be found in your Windows directory You can modify some of the settings in SPW INI directly by editing the file with the Windows Wordpad or another text editor however make sure you create a backup file before editing SPW INI Take great care in modifying this file SPW INI is used to handle the files that SigmaPlot shares with other programs and changing these settings can lead to unpredictable results Note that only those entries that are considered useful are discussed below Application Last Open Filter 1 Last Import Filter 1 Last Exporte Filter 8 These setting under the Application heading determine the default open import and export file types Note that these are reset when new file types are selected
489. type and thickness options work identically to the regression line type color and thickness options Click OK For information on viewing confidence and prediction interval results see Viewing and Saving Regression Equation Results on page 408 Linear Regression Regression Calculation SigmaPlot linear regression uses the least squares Confidence and method to construct a fit a set of data points x y i 1 n by a polynomial of Prediction degree p where Calculation y Bot Bix Box Bx In vector matrix notation this problem is formulated as Y Xp e where the n vector containing the y data is Y LD Vo zi E We ae Oe TE 1 xy XF 11 x and the n p 1 design matrix is X 2 2 2 Le ee Ne xP 410 Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines n ee Confidence Interval Calculation Statistics B isa p 1 1 vector of parameters to be estimated B Bo By By is annx 1 vector of residuals The solution for the least squares estimates of the parameters is bX XY where X denotes the transpose of X SigmaPlot uses the Cholesky decomposition to invert the X Y matrix see Dongarra J J Bunch J R Moler C B and Stewart G W Linpack User s Guide SIAM Philadelphia 1979 This produces the regression curve A 2 P y by bX byx6 nee b x For further details on matrix linear regression refer to chapter 2 of Draper Norman and Smith Harry Applied Regres
490. u analyze and graph They are spreadsheet like in appearance but are much more limited in function and are column rather than cell oriented A worksheet opens automatically every time a SigmaPlot notebook is open You can also open a worksheet any time you are using SigmaPlot You can enter worksheet data manually import it or in some cases data is automatically placed in worksheet columns by SigmaPlot Some functions are available for displaying and manipulating worksheet data Zoom Enlarge or shrink the view of the current page Click the toolbar zoom button then click and drag to specify an area of the page to zoom use the drop down list in the toolbar to use pre set zoom levels or choose the View menu Zoom command to change the zoom level You can view a page at 50 100 200 400 full screen or fit the page in the current window 495 Notes Index 161 ASC files opening 44 CVS files opening 44 DBF files opening 44 DIF files opening 44 EPS files creating 448 449 producing files for publication 357 HPGL files creating 448 449 importing 449 INI file editing 459 467 JNB files exporting as non notebook files 46 48 saving 46 JNT files creating 493 defined 11 saving 493 MOC files opening 44 PRN files opening 44 SMB files importing 59 SP5 files opening 44 SPG files opening 44 SPW files opening 44 TIFF files post processing 358 producing files for publication 357 TXT files opening 4
491. uide includes chapters on Notebook Worksheet and Graph Page basics It begins with the QuickStart which gives you the basics of graph creation The latter part of the book is reference material that covers more complex graph creation and details of using SigmaPlot Contacting SPSS Inc If you would like to be on our mailing list contact one of our offices or distributors below We will send you a copy of our newsletter and let you know about SPSS Inc activities in your area SPSS Inc 233 South Wacker Drive Suite 1100 Chicago IL 6066 6307 Tel 312 329 2400 Fax 312 329 3690 http www spss com products Outside the U S SPSS Science Software GmbH Schimmelbuschstrasse 25 40699 Erkrath Germany Tel 49 2104 9540 Fax 49 2104 95410 Or contact the distributor nearest you http www spss com international asc html Using This Manual 33 Introduction References 34 References We have found the following references very useful for graph design and layout M Brent Charland Ph D 1995 SigmaPlot for Scientists Wm C Brown Communications Inc 2460 Kerper Boulevard Dubuque Iowa 52001 Cleveland William S 1985 The Elements of Graphing Data Monterey Calif Wadsworth Inc 408 373 0728 Kosslyn Stephen M 1994 Elements of Graph Design New York W H Freeman and Company Tufte Edward R 1983 The Visual Display of Quantitative Information Cheshire Conn Graphics Press Available from Scien
492. ular Axis Scaling and Position Le Figure 8 13 Polar plots with Starting angle of 315 and arc of 270 start angle of 0 and arc of 180 and start angle of 135 and arc of 22 5 Moving Angular Axis Positions Figure 8 14 Graph Properties Dialog Box Axes Tab Lines Settings Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots 7 To change the start angle for the displayed arc move the Start Angle slider The default is 0 3 o clock Rotation is counterclockwise 8 Click OK You can drag both inner and outer angular axes closer or further from the center of the graph Select the axis and move it using the mouse To set exact locations for angular axes 1 Double click an angular axis The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Axis Apply to Angular Data Rename t Major ticks Settings for Showplace axes Line properties W Outer Color Black 109 8 DUPE GEUEEE Et l Thickness W Inner o 007in us a 99 9 Labels H 4 B J Tick Label Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the Axes tab 3 Select Lines from the Settings For list 4 To change the percentage in the Outer and Inner axes under Show Place Axes move the Outer and Inner slider controls Locations are described as the percentage of the distance the axes lie from the Changing Angular Axis Scaling and
493. umn 2 Enter the codes for the error bar directions The codes for the directions are Direction Absolute Positive Absolute Negative Relative From Zero Relative To Zero Absolute or Relative Both Directions Code Positive or P Negative or N From Zero or F To Zero or T Both PN or FT X Codes you type in the worksheet can be either upper or lower case 3 Double click the plot Modifying Error Bars 257 Working with 2D Graphs Figure 6 28 Setting Error Bars Changing the Mean Computation Method 258 Modifying Error Bars 7 The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Grids and Planes Title and Legend Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph Wizard Settings for Error bars Direction v Area Fills positive bul of ty both Thickness Error Bars oY From zero 0 007in 4 oF to zero Cap width I I Pi F KH Reference oY positive Peai e nae Ur negative E a 5 Mean computation Drop Lines F Cancel Apply Help Click the Plots tab From the Settings For list select Error Bars Under Error bars from the Direction list choose the name of the column which contains the error bar direction codes Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box If you are using a log axis scale you can choose between calculating the column means arithmetically the default or geo
494. umn triplets XYZ plots must have at least one plot but can display many more plots each with a different type and style Graphs can be rotated and shaded added to enhance the height and depth of mesh and bar charts To learn about rotating graphs see Changing Graph Perspective Rotation and Shading on page 299 For information on adding a light source to 3D graphs to produce shading see Changing the View of a 3D Graph on page 299 3D Plots 287 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 3D Scatter and Line Plots Figure 7 1 Examples of a 3D Scatter Plot and a 3D Line Plot Mesh Plots Figure 7 2 Mesh Plot with No Fill Color and with a Gradient of Colors 288 3D Plots 3D scatter and line plots graph data as symbols as lines only with no symbols or as symbols and lines Use the Graph Properties dialog box Plots tab Symbols settings to add symbols to a 3D line plot or the Lines settings to add lines to a scatter plot To learn about modifying or adding symbols and lines see Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options on page 204 and Changing Line Type and Other Line Options on page 213 Ea mi gt i r L Drop lines to any back plane can be added to either of these plot types For more information on adding drop lines see Adding and Modifying Drop Lines on page 226 Mesh plots graph 3D data as a continuous surface with a mesh Use the Graph Properties dialog box to modify mesh lines color transpa
495. umns as XY pairs many X many Y single Y many X or single X many Y Plots a single set of XY pairs connect ing symbols with vertical and hori zontal lines starting with horizontal Format data columns as XY pairs single X or single Y Area Plots Polar Plots he a ak Ky hey TETY EY Multiple Hori zontal Step Plot Simple Area Multiple Area Vertical Area Multiple Vertical Area Complex Area Plot Scatter Lines Creating and Modifying Graphs Plots a multiple sets of XY pairs con necting symbols with vertical and hori zontal lines starting with horizontal Format data columns as XY pairs many X many Y single Y many X or single X many Y Plots single set of XY pairs as a line plot with a downward fills Format data col umns as XY pair single X or single Y Plots multiple sets of XY pairs as line plots with downward fills Format data columns as XY pairs many Y single X many Y many X or single Y many X Plots single set of YX pairs as a line plot with a left direction fill Format data col umns as single X or YX pair Plots multiple sets of YX pairs as line plots with left direction fills Format data col umns as many X or single Y many X Plots multiple line plots with downward fills and intersections Format data col umns as XY pairs X many Y Y many X many X many Y Plots angle and distance data as sym bols Format data c
496. ungrouping 135 numeric tick 315 511 Index radial axes 333 reference lines 414 rotating 145 rotating contour 314 row titles 85 88 size defined 486 sizing 486 suffixes prefixes 314 tick mark 392 494 using column and row title dialog box 85 using for column titles 86 using for row titles 86 Landscape defined 486 page orientation 155 Layering in front behind grid lines 399 reference lines 414 Layout graph design references 34 Layout templates defined 182 Legends adding symbols 146 adding to page 143 146 aligning 153 automatic 11 19 148 153 automatic scaling with graphs 97 creating 143 143 148 defined 487 deleting 125 editing 151 locking 153 restoring to default settings 152 ungrouping 153 see also Automatic legends Light source 3D graphs 303 Line and scatter plot multiple straight line data format 171 simple straight line data format 171 Line and scatter plots adding drop lines 226 227 creating 243 244 data format 166 examples 238 Line plot data formats multiple horizontal step plot 171 multiple spline curves 170 multiple vertical step plot 170 simple horizontal step plot 171 simple spline curve 170 vertical step plot 170 Line plots 512 3D data format 167 adding drop lines 226 227 adding drop lines to 226 227 color 214 creating 243 244 data format 166 examples 238 lines 216 midpoint step 214 multiple straight lines 170 step 214 straight 214 symbols 204 213 Line type
497. unterclockwise If you have not rotated the pie chart the slice number corresponds to the worksheet row number 6 Click OK 2 Choosing No Exploded Slices from the Exploded Slices drop down lists replaces any exploded pie slices To explode multiple slices 1 Select an empty column 2 Type a 1 in the same row as the data point for each row you want to empha size with an exploding slice 3 Double click the pie chart Pie Charts 321 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots Figure 8 6 Graph Properties Dialog Box Plots Tab Pie Slices Settings Figure 8 7 Pie Chart with Many Exploding Slices 322 Pie Charts The Graph Properties dialog box appears Graph Properties Plots Axes Graph Plot Pict 1 Rename Graph wizard Settings for First slice starts Counterclockwise at Exploded slices Explode AE Column 1 Cancel Apply Help Click the Plots tab Select Pie Slices from the Settings For list Select the column containing exploding slice data from the Exploded Slices drop down list Click OK Ex El Graph Page 5 Data 47 oO Oo oO Om amp tw Rh Polar Plots Figure 8 8 Polar Plots Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots Polar plots display data in the coordinate system 7 0 format where 7 is the distance from the origin of the graph and theta 0 is the angle between the positive horizontal axis and the radius vector extend
498. urce format data columns as single Y or XY pair If using columns means the first column entry or the last column entry as symbol values format data columns as single X many Y or many Y If using row means row median the first row entry or the last row entry format data columns as single Y replicate or X Y replicate Horizontal Bar Charts Grouped mi Error Bars Stacked Bars aig Simple Bar Grouped Bar Simple Error Bars yo Creating and Modifying Graphs Plots data as multiple sets of Y values in a series of bars with error bars If using worksheet columns or asymmetric error bar columns as the symbol value source format data columns as many Y or single X many Y If using row means row median the first row entry or the last row entry format data columns as many Y replicates or single X many Y repli cates Error bar values are from the worksheet Plots multiple columns of data as a series of stacks in bars Format data col umns as single X many Y many Y many Y replicates or single X many Y replicates Plots a single column of data as X val ues Format data columns as XY pairs single X Plots multiple columns of data in a series of bars Format data columns as single Y many X many X many X repli cates single Y many X replicates Plots data as X values with error bars If using worksheet columns or asymmetric error bar columns as the symbol value s
499. ut menu click Snap to Graphs and objects snap to the nearest grid Use Crosshairs as an object alignment tool To turn on crosshairs click the Crosshairs button on the upper left hand corner of the graph page window Crosshair lines extend from the pointer tip to the rulers and to the right and bottom of the window and follow the pointer To hide crosshairs click the Crosshairs button again Arranging Graphs Applying Layout Templates to Arrange Graphs Use layout templates to quickly arrange resize and set positions of graphs on a page Layouts like templates use a jnt extension and are stored in notebooks To learn more about templates see Using Graph Pages as Templates on page 105 A sample layout notebook Layout jnt is provided with SigmaPlot and is set as the default layout source notebook Using SigmaPlot s Arrange Graph dialog box and General tab on the Options dialog box you can gt Apply an existing layout template to a graph page gt Add new pages to Layout jnt gt Create your own custom layout template file Change the default template file Use the Arrange Graphs dialog box to apply existing layout templates to a graph page To arrange graphs on a page 1 Select the graph page 2 On the Format menu click Arrange Graphs Arranging Graphs 137 Figure 4 36 Arrange Graph Dialog Box Adding New Pages to Layout jnt 138 Arranging Graphs The Arrange Graphs dialog box appears
500. values are plotted This scale is commonly used for bar charts or other plots used to graph different categories of data 35 e 30 4 e n 3 25 4 8 a w 2 204 e 8 S 8 O O 154 8 ry e s H i 10 8 8 e 54 e T T T T ADENINE GUANINE CYSOSINE THYMINE Any plot generated by plotting a column containing any text versus a column containing data will use a category axis automatically For more information on plotting data versus categories see Using a Category Scale on page 366 You can select a category scale for numeric data and each unique value will be treated as its own category gt Figure 10 5 A Graph Showing the Date Time Scale Minor ticks are set to show every Sunday in the month Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids If a column contains more than one instance of the same category the category appears only once and all corresponding data is plotted within that category Date Time Date and time formatted data are automatically plotted using a Date Time axis scale This scale is specifically designed to handle true calendar date and time units labeling and spacing 300 40 Col 9 vs Col 10 O Col 11 vs Col 12 v Col 13 vs Col 14 250 vy Col 15 vs Col 16 HDL Level 150 100 A 2 45051e 6 2 45052e 6 2 45053e 6 2 45054e 6 2 45055e 6 2 45056e 6 2 45057e 6 2000 gt For directions on plotting date and time dat
501. ve an outlier is to cut the data and move it to another part of the worksheet This is useful if you still want to plot the data but ignore the outlier Then you can plot the moved outlier data a second plot to continue displaying the outlying data To plot outlier data as a separate plot 1 Identify the worksheet cell s corresponding to the outlier s For more information see Removing Outliers and Other Data on page 81 2 Select highlight the cells and press Ctrl X to cut them Removing Outliers and Other Data 83 Worksheet Basics 3 Move to another location in the worksheet and paste the data Figure 3 26 Moving Outlier Data to a fgg Data 1 l Ea Different Part of the F 1 2 Worksheet 1 0000 4 5000 2 0000 7 0000 4 0000 5 0000 6 0000 7 0000 8 0000 9 000 Copy Delete Transpose Paste Insert Cells Delete Cells sO 00 j Oy UT Be oo Ba Ile 10 10 0000 aqooof 4 Plot the outlier data by adding it as a second plot to your graph Change the symbol color or other attributes to distinguish the data Figure 3 27 Highlighted Outlier Y Data 84 Removing Outliers and Other Data Worksheet Basics Entering and Promoting Column and Row Titles Using the Column and Row Titles Dialog Box Column and row titles label and identify columns and rows of data Column titles appear in the Graph and Regression Wizards when you pick columns identify columns for
502. ve the pointer above or below the column 2 Click or drag to highlight the desired column s To select entire rows 1 Move the pointer to the left of the rows 2 Click or drag to select the desired row s To select all the data in the worksheet gt Click the worksheet icon in the upper left corner of the window To select the entire worksheet gt Double click the worksheet icon 76 Selecting a Block of Data Sorting Data Figure 3 19 The Sort Selection Dialog Box Worksheet Basics Sort selected blocks of data in ascending or descending order according to the order in a key column Because the sort command sorts data in place if you want the original data to remain intact copy the data to a new location and sort the copied data To sort selected data l Use the mouse or keyboard to select the data you want to sort Only the selected columns and rows are sorted unselected values within a column are ignored On the Transforms menu click Sort Selection The Sort Selection dialog box appears E E 2 00 2 00 4 00 400 400 5 00 400 400 6 00 6 00 6 00 7 00 5 00 5 00 7 00 F 00 RDD 7 00 6 00 6 00 400 g Sort Selection Notebook Data 1 OO 4 OT Oo Po Selected rows 1 7 of columns 7 9 7 Order z L Ascending Descending Cancel E Select the key column by choosing the appropriate column title or column number from the Key Column drop down list or
503. vely When the SigmaPlot window is closed the size and position on close is saved to this setting File types listed in all of the SigmaPlot file dialog boxes e g Open Export Import etc are listed under the following headings The name as it appears in order in the list is followed by the extension of the file type You can change the order that these files appear in your file dialog boxes by changing the order they appear in these lists If an import filter is required the DLL used as the filter is specified before the file extension s do not change the import filter assigned to the file type Do not modify the Export Page heading it is required to support export of SigmaPlot 1 0 and 2 0 files The Export Page Info heading is used to support graphic file export Open Filters SigmaPlot Notebook JNB Template Notebook JUNT Regression Library JFL SrQgmar Loc Oy 2 0 JS LIXP FE JD LIXEr 5PwW Sigmar lot Curve Ert FIr Yr aT SigmaPlot Macintosh 4 JS ISPGF JD ISPGF OT ee The SPW INI File SLOMastat LeaQV JIS LIXPR JD ldIxP Fr gt SEPW SigmaF lot DOS JS ISPGF PDeLSPGE sPoP oPG Ssigmastat DOS JS ISPGF WgD lt ISPGF SP5 MS Excel JS WKW_F JD WKW_F XLS Lotus L 2 S lImpoOpenx Tmoopenx WKS WKI WKS pA WK DBase ImpOpenx ImpOpenx DB2 DB3 DBF Quattro Pro ImpOpenxX ImpOpenxXx WQ1 WKQ Paradox ImpOpenxX ImpOpenxX DB Symphony ImpOpenxX ImpOpenxX WK1
504. x ImpOpenx WKS WAL WK3 NKA DBase ImpOpenx ImpOpenx DB2 DB3 DBF Quattro Pro ImpOpenx ImpOpenx WQ1 WKQ Paradox ImpOpenxX ImpOpenxX DB Symphony ImpOpenxX ImpOpenx WK1 WR1 WRK WKS 462 ee The SPW INI File Ssystat Impsystat Iimpsystat sys Plain T ext JS 1LASCr JD LTASCr TXT PRN 4 DAL ASG Comma Delimited JS IASCF JD IASCF CSV SigmaScan SigmaSsScan Pro Worksheets JS IJXFF JD IJXFF SPW Mocha SigmaScan Image Worksheets JS IJXFF JD IJXFF MOC DIF JS WKW_F JD WKW_F DIF Axon Binary JS AXF_F JD AXF_F ABF DAT Axon Text JS AXF_F JD AXF_F ATF Export Notebook 5igmaFP loc 3 0 NOCeEbDOOK 7 JNB Sigmastat 2 0 Notebook SNB Export Worksheet SigmaPlot 3 0 Notebook JNB Srogmastat 7Aaw0 NOCeEDOOK 7 lt SNB StgmaPr loc 2 0 dS HIXEF dDeHIXFF SPwW Sew SigmaPlot 1 0 JS ERIXEF JD RIXER SPW Sew SigmaPlot Macintosh 5 Worksheet JS EUXFEF JD EJUXFF SPW SPW Excel 4 JS WKW_F JD WKW_F XLS4 XLS Excel S JS WKW F JD WKW_F xXLS3 xXLS Lotus 1 2 3 vl 0 ExpOpenx ExpOpenx WKS wks DBase II ExpOpenxX ExpOpenxX DB2 dbf DBase III ExpOpenxX ExpOpenxX DB3 dbf Quattro Pro vl 0O ExpOpenxX ExpOpenx WO1 wql 463 a The SPW INI File Paradox v3 0 ExpOpenxX ExpOpenxX DB db Symphony vl 0 ExpOpenxX ExpOpenxX WRK wrk systat Expsystat ExpSystat SYS sys Comma Delimite
505. xes Tick Marks and Grids The grid lines available for Cartesian plots are X Y and Z for 3D plots The Figure 10 37 Selecting the Grid Lines arap neues Plots Axes Graph Title Mesh Plot Rename I Show title Settings for Grid lines Line properties Style Solid Thickness Color E Gray Bz plane Z major Y minor E a T eim s Cancel Apply Help grid lines for polar plots are for the Angular and Radial axes Ternary plots have X Y and Z direction grid lines m e 7 To change grid line style under Line properties from the Style drop down list select a style 8 To change grid line thickness under Gridlines move the Thickness slider type a thickness value in the Thickness box 9 To change grid line color under Grid Lines from the Color drop down list select a color Choose any of the listed colors or choose Cus tom to use or create a custom color Choose None to create transparent grid lines To learn about using custom colors see Using Custom Colors on page 158 10 To move the grid behind or in front of the plot from the Layering drop down list select to move either the plot or grid to the front This feature is 398 Displaying Grid Lines and Backplanes ee Figure 10 38 A Bar Chart with a White Backplane and White Grid Lines Placed in Front of the Plot Hiding and Viewing Grid Lines Modifying Axes Tick Marks and Grids esp
506. xport then export the remainder of the worksheet When you export a SigmaPlot worksheet as a text file tabs or commas separate the data columns and data is saved at full precision If you want to save a text file with data as it appears in the worksheet rather than at full precision copy the selected data to the Clipboard paste it into a text editor and save it as a text file To export a SigmaPlot worksheet 1 Select the worksheet you want to export by opening and viewing it or select ing it in the notebook window 2 On the File menu click Export The Export File dialog box appears 3 From the Files of type drop down list select a file format 4 Enter the file name directory and drive for the exported file 5 Click Export to create the file You can export SigmaPlot graphs and graph pages to other files formats To export a graph or graph page 1 Select and view the graph page If you want to export specific graph s select the graphs you want to export to a file 2 On the File menu click Export The Export File dialog box appears Exporting Notebooks and Notebook Items 41 GELAM E Notebook Basics 3 Enter the file name directory and drive for the export file destination 4 Click Export 5 If you chose one of the graphic file formats a secondary dialog box appears asking you to enter some graphic format information Figure 2 6 Export Tagged Info File CMYK Compressed C My Documents Sample SPW
507. xt reads left to right top to bottom or bottom to top The orientation is entered as the number of degrees the label is to be rotated from the left to right Also called rotation Origin Axes For 3D Cartesian graphs the axes intersecting at the X Y and Z coordinates closest to zero The origin axes are used as a point of reference when rotating the view of a 3D graph and appear as red lines in the 3D View panel of the Graph Properties dialog box See also Rotation 3D Graph Overwrite A data or text entry mode in which newly typed characters replace characters already on the screen See Insert Page graph A SigmaPlot item where graphs labels and graphic objects are drawn The page displays the current graph s and other objects as they appear when printed 488 OT ee Glossary You can use Tools menu drawing commands and the Edit menu and Format menu commands to directly edit move resize delete and paste graphs and objects on the page Paste Place the contents of the Clipboard at the selected location On the worksheet the upper left corner of the Clipboard data block appears at the highlighted cell On the Page the Clipboard contents are offset from the original object s position Press the Ctrl V Shift Ins click the Paste toolbar button or choose the Edit menu Paste command to paste data or graphics Paste Special Place the contents of the Clipboard as an object of specified file type as an embedded object or
508. y axes select either Major Ticks or Minor Ticks from the Apply To drop down list then use the Add To Major or Minor Tick Labels options to type a pre fix or suffix to the major or minor tick labels 7 To rotate major or minor tick labels parallel to their axis select either Major Ticks or Minor Ticks from the Apply To drop down list then under Rotate with Axis select Tick Labels ee Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots 8 Click Apply 9 Use the Axis list to modify tick labels on a different axis or use the Apply To drop down list to switch to modifying major or minor tick labels 10 Click OK 2 Tick labels and tick marks are controlled by their axis of origin but may be drawn on axes other than their own Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick Labels 351 Working with Pie Polar and Ternary Plots 352 Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick Labels Publishing Graphs You can use SigmaPlot to publish graphs on the World Wide Web and to create publication quality graphs for submission to journals and other printed forms This chapter covers gt Publishing graphs on the World Wide Web see below gt Submitting graphs to journals see page 356 gt Publication tips and tricks see page 359 Publishing Graphs on the World Wide Web About the SigmaPlot WebViewer Using SigmaPlot s latest web publishing technology you can save your graphs in high resolution and then later publish
509. y used functions Quick Transform Equation Cancel Irig Units Help You can either manually type the equation into the Quick Transform dialog box or use the Function palette Click the col or cell button in the Function palette The Equation group box left drop down list displays either col or cell Click the cell or column in the worksheet to replace the question mark in the Equation group box left drop down list Under Equation place the cursor in the right drop down list Click a function button on the Functions palette Performing Quick Transforms 419 Transform Basics 2 Close the Functions Palette by clicking the Functions Palette button To 6 7 Figure 12 4 Trig Units Dialog Box 8 9 open the Functions Palette click it again The function appears under Equation in the right drop down list of the Quick Transform dialog box Click the specific column cell or row in the worksheet to replace the ques tion mark in the function argument with worksheet coordinates Click Trig Units The Trig Units dialog box appears Trig Units Trigonometric Units i Degrees C Radians C Grads Cancel Select the appropriate trig units if calculating trig functions Click OK 10 Click Run Smoothing 2D and 3D Data SigmaPlot smoothers are algorithms for smoothing sharp variations in dependent variable values within 2D and 3D data sets You can also use smoothe
510. ymbols in a plot are the same size To use symbols of varying sym bol Sizes sizes enter symbol size values in a worksheet column then set symbol size using the Graph Properties dialog box For more information on using symbol attributes 210 Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options from worksheet columns see Using Custom Symbol Fill Line and Color Increments on page 220 Figure 5 38 Using Symbol Sizes from a Worksheet Column for Plot Symbols Y Data 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 X Data Symbol sizes are assigned to symbols and curves or points if the plot has only one curve in the same order as the column pairs that form the curves are listed in Graph Wizard To use worksheet values for symbol size 1 Select the first cell of an empty column in the worksheet containing data for the current plot 2 Type the size values to use in the order you want to use them Since the sym bol sizes correspond to symbol diameters or widths make sure that the sym bol sizes you enter are of a reasonable size that is small fractions of inches or only a few millimeters or points If desired you can also include the measurement unit for the value For Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options 211 example for inches type zm for millimeters type 7m or for points type pt Figure 5 39 Example of Worksheet with Symbol Sizes Entered in Column 3 300 0 20 400 0 200 20 B00 sooj oaj o oo 200 sooj BP S00 00
511. you are in select mode double click the text If you want only to change the attributes the formatting of selected text use the Formatting toolbar The Text Properties dialog box sets properties for all selected labels and applies changes to all characters within selected labels 146 Working with Text on the Page If you have complex font and character changes within a label take care not to overwrite these formats with Text Properties dialog box settings Global Text Changes The Text Properties is useful for formatting multiple labels as well as all text on a graph Select the graph and choose Text Properties then select the attributes you want applied to all graph labels and titles Default Text Properties The Text Properties dialog box is used to set the default character and paragraph properties for new labels Open the Text Properties dialog box with nothing selected and set the options you want applied to new text labels To format text using the Text Properties dialog box l 2 Figure 4 44 Text Properties Dialog Box Font Tab The Size option is blank indicating that there are multiple text objects of different sizes 3 4 Select the text object you want to modify If you want to modify several text objects hold down the Shift key while clicking the objects or drag a select window around all objects On the Format menu click Text Properties The Text Properties dialog box appears Text
512. you selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in the Selected Col umns list Figure 7 30 Graph Wizard Select Columns Panel Graph Wizard Create Graph Data for Column J Selected Columns Select the column to plot by clicking the column in the worksheet If you made a mistake picking data click the wrong entry in the Selected Columns list then select the correct column from the worksheet You can also clear a column assignment by double clicking it in the Selected Columns list 5 Click Finish To create a filled contour plot 1 Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data 2 On the 3D Graph Toolbar click Contour Plot and then Filled Contour Creating Contour Plots 307 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs 3 The Graph Wizard appears Figure 7 31 Graph Wizard Data Graph Wizard Create Graph Ea Format Panel Data Format How is your data organized T 12 x yandz Mary Z columns at avy Many Z least one triplet Hep Cancel Back Finish 4 From the Data Format list select the appropriate data format and click Next The Graph Wizard prompts you to specify which worksheet columns corre spond to the data for your plot Since you selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard your choices automatically appear in the Selected Col umns list Figure 7 32 Graph Properties Select C
513. your data organized ih dri 372 75000 94000 72000 One column and GEMI 38000 EEM at least one r 11 7000 88000 52000 column 124000 53000 10 4000 m 1050 idaho Aa 11 500 85000 120000 BAN 52000 130000 B20 117000 99000 ACR Funan T a Help Cancel lt Back Finish 9 From the Data for drop down list select the worksheet columns that corre spond to the axis or error bar of your plot D 0 m a h You can also drag a range of data on the worksheet using the mouse 2 When creating graphs using Microsoft Excel you can only enter ranges manually You can also select a range of data by entering the range manually into the Data for box After entering the range press Enter The range appears in the Graph Wizard Creating Graphs 179 Creating and Modifying Graphs Figure 5 7 Selecting Columns to Plot Manually Entering Data Ranges into the Graph Wizard 180 Creating Graphs If you make a mistake while selecting data double click the mistaken col umn in the Selected Columns list to clear the selection Create Graph Select Data Data for L adasa select the column Selected Columns 1 RBG 2 0 to plot by clicking the column in the worksheet To learn more about entering data ranges see Manually Entering Data Ranges into the Graph Wizard on page 180 To learn how to create graphs using Microsoft Excel see Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using MicroSoft Excel on page 189 10 Click Fin
514. ypes 363 365 Axis titles editing 375 hiding 376 377 moving 377 rotating 376 viewing 376 377 Axis range contour plots 311 312 Axis scale switching to category 366 switching to custom 369 Axon files importing 62 Back planes color 397 defined 480 grid lines 399 Background colors modifying 219 Backup files Options 19 Bad points defined 480 Bar charts automatic reference lines 412 bar widths 224 creating 243 244 defined 480 edges 127 error bars 258 examples 239 fills 127 219 grouped bars with error bars 263 histograms 403 407 horizontal data format 166 needle 403 needle plot 224 spacing bars 223 225 263 stacked 492 step 403 vertical data format 166 Bar charts 3D creating 293 294 295 296 examples 289 Bar widths variable 224 Bars 500 edges 127 fills 127 219 spacing 223 225 263 stacked 492 widths 224 Base using as tick labels 315 390 Base and exponent defined 480 Bi directional asymmetric error bars creating 2D plots with 251 Bidirectional error bars data format 169 Blocks defined 481 Blocks data deleting 80 81 inserting 78 80 sorting 77 Body Log Axis Scale 363 Box plots 10th 90th percentiles 267 box fills color 267 box widths 267 creating 243 244 data format 166 defined 481 edges 127 examples 239 fills 127 219 mean lines 267 modifying 268 outliers 267 symbols 204 213 267 whisker cap widths 267 Boxes drawing 125 edges 127 fills 127 219 Breaking link

SigmaPlot® 8.0 User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

SigmaPlot&reg; 8.0 User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

SigmaPlot® 8.0 User's Guide